All around the load hook

All around the load hook 

ACCESSORIES DIRECT FROM THE 

HOIST AND CRANE MANUFACTURER 

Catalogue 

7

Subsidiaries 

Austria 

Steyregg 

Tel +43 732 6411110 

Fax +43 732 64111133 

office@stahlcranes.at 

China 

Shanghai 

Tel +86 21 62572211 

Fax +86 21 62541907 

service_cn@stahlcranes.cn 

France 

Paris 

Tel +33 1 39985060 

Fax +33 1 34111818 

info@stahlcranes.fr 

Great Britain 

Birmingham 

Tel +44 121 7676400 

Fax +44 121 7676485 

info@stahlcranes.co.uk 

Sales partners 

India 

Chennai 

Tel +91 44 43523955 

Fax +91 44 43523957 

indiasales@stahlcranes.in 

Italy 

S. Colombano 

Tel +39 0185 358391 

Fax +39 0185 358219 

info@stahlcranes.it 

Portugal 

Lisbon 

Tel +351 21 4447160 

Fax +351 21 4447169 

ferrometal@ferrometal.pt 

Singapore 

Singapore 

Tel +65 6271 2220 

Fax +65 6377 1555 

sales@stahlcranes.sg 

You will find the adresses of over 100 sales partners on the 

internet at www.stahlcranes.com under ›Contact‹. 

Spain 

Madrid 

Tel +34 91 4840865 

Fax +34 91 4905143 

info@stahlcranes.es 

Switzerland 

Däniken 

Tel +41 62 8251380 

Fax +41 62 8251381 

info@stahlcranes.ch 

United Arab Emirates 

Dubai 

Tel +971 4 8053700 

Fax +971 4 8053701 

info@stahlcranes.ae 

USA 

Charleston, SC 

Tel +1 843 7671951 

Fax +1 843 7674366 

sales@stahlcranes.us

STAHL CraneSystems Lifting technology | Drive technology | Control technology 

STAHL CraneSystems _ 

innovative and pioneering

STAHL CraneSystems 

Enthusiasm for innovation and continual growth 

have been features of STAHL CraneSystems in 

past years. As one of the world’s leading 

manufacturers of hoisting and crane technology 

and the leading manufacturer of explosion 

protected material flow technology, we continue 

to offer our customers technically pioneering, 

revolutionary solutions. The development and 

manufacture of individual off-standard solu- 

tions, the successful customer care and the 

decades-long availability of original parts are 

always our fundamental principle. 12 subsidia- 

ries and over 100 partners all around the world 

mean that STAHL CraneSystems is represented 

on all important markets. 

> Consulting 

> Project planning 

> Production 

> Quality assurance 

> Erection 

> Accessories 

> Information 

> Seminars

History_ Crane technology_ Chain hoists_ Wire rope hoists & winches_ Wheel block_ Crane kits_ Accessories_ Condition monitoring_ Explosion protection_ Seminars

1 

The history 

The long history of STAHL CraneSystems begins in August 1876. Rafael Stahl founds the 

mechanical workshop ›Stahl and Weineck‹. The first products relate to the textile 

industry. The company grows and in the mid-eighties of the century before last, circular 

spring needle knitting machines are exported abroad. At the end of the 19th century 

the founder’s sons introduce new, innovative ideas. The first lift is built and the promising 

era of material handling begins. The first electric lifting block is being manufac- 

tured in 1903 already. From 1921 onwards, the company is engaged in the explosion- 

protection of electrical apparatus and material handling equipment, and systemati- 

3 4 

5

2 

cally and successfully intensifies this development. Right up to the present day, 

STAHL CraneSystems has always been a pioneer and one of the world’s leading suppliers 

of explosion-protected electric hoist and crane technology. From 1945 onwards, the compa- 

ny’s expansion continues at breakneck speed. STAHL CraneSystems develops into one of 

the leading manufacturers of wire rope and chain hoists and overhead material flow tech- 

nology. Again and again, brilliant technical achievements succeed in all fields. From 1975 

on, the sales organisation is expanded on a national and in particular international level. Today, 

STAHL CraneSystems is represented on all continents by 12 subsidiaries and over 100 partners. 

6 7 8 

1 The founder Rafael Stahl, 1845 -1899 

2 Circular spring needle knitting machine, 1893 3 First electric 

lifting block, 1903 4 The Elektus: The first portable miniature 

electric hoist in the world, 1950 5 First explosion-protected 

electric hoist, 1953 6 AS wire rope hoist, 1978 

7 SH wire rope hoist, 1998 8 STD Vario dual chain hoist, 2008 

History_ Crane technology_ Chain hoists_ Wire rope hoists & winches_ Wheel block_ Crane kits_ Accessories_ Condition monitoring_ Explosion protection_ Seminars

1 

2 

3 

4

STAHL CraneSystems supplies all crane components for overhead material 

flow technology from a single source. Everything is possible, from simple work- 

place solutions to interconnecting systems with complex automation. The safe 

working load ranges from 125 kg to 160,000 kg. Is the ambience hot, cold, damp, 

hazardous, or simply standard? No problem, STAHL CraneSystems has the right 

solution for all areas. Modern manufacturing techniques and sophisticated 

certified processes guarantee the consistently high quality of crane components 

from STAHL CraneSystems. 

> Single girder overhead travelling cranes 

> Double girder overhead travelling cranes 

> Single girder suspension cranes 

> Special cranes 

Crane technology 

History_ Crane technology_ Chain hoists_ Wire rope hoists & winches_ Wheel block_ Crane kits_ Accessories_ Condition monitoring_ Explosion protection_ Seminars 

STAHL CraneSystems Info-Service _ Please ask 

for our brochure ›Crane technology‹ for more 

information on our cranes. 

1 Maximum hook height _ A single girder overhead travelling crane in a plastics moulding plant transports casting tools for retooling the 

machines. Maximum hook paths are possible even in low buildings with the special chain hoist with ›extra short headroom trolley‹ 

2 Three bridge cranes of 40,000 kg S.W.L. each in operation. Two hoists with motor-driven rotating hooks work on each crane 

3 In particular in buildings with a low noise level, the particularly quiet technology of cranes from STAHL CraneSystems is a welcome 

advantage 4 The three cranes with 51 m span have room to move in the large shop measuring 52 m x 85 m. If required, all six load hooks 

can be operated in synch from a single radio remote control

1 

2 

3 

4 

5

Chain hoists 

The ST chain hoist programme from STAHL CraneSystems 

ranks among the most distinctive and comprehensive on offer. 

In use in thousands of applications for many decades, modern- 

ised and optimised over and over again, the STAHL chain hoist is 

a classic. Powerful, reliable and undemanding as regards main- 

tenance and power consumption. The ST series is available in 

13 S.W.L. ranges, from 125 kg to 6,300 kg. It can be used as a 

stationary hoist with suspension hook or eye, with rigid moun- 

ting, or with a push or electric trolley. In addition to the standard 

designs, off-standard versions and individual solutions for 

customers are available. The STAHL ST chain hoist programme 

is also available in explosion-protected design for Zone 1, Zone 

21 and Zone 22. 

> Chain hoist 

> Extra short headroom trolley 

> Dual chain hoist 

> Off-standard solutions 


STAHL CraneSystems Info-Service _ Please 

ask for our brochure ›Chain hoists‹ for more 

information on our chain hoists. 

1 The ›short headroom trolley‹ with its headroom reduced by 33 % provides greater flexibility 2 The ›extra short headroom trolley‹ 

permits maximum hook paths with its headroom of a mere 210 mm (5,000 kg) or 185 mm (3,200 kg) 3 The ST05 chain hoist with S.W.L. of 

up to 630 kg 4 The single-fall design of the ST05 chain hoist permits fast hoisting speeds for S.W.L.s up to 2,500 kg 5 Perfect teamwork 

of dual chain hoists with crane technology from STAHL CraneSystems

1 

3 

4 

6 

2 

5

The adaptable wire rope hoists from STAHL CraneSystems are designed as 

an uncompromisingly modular system and calculated for an S.W.L. range from 

500 kg to 160,000 kg. The versatile SH series is available for the S.W.L. range 

from 500 kg to 25,000 kg. The upper S.W.L. range up to 100,000 kg is covered by 

the tried-and-tested AS 7. The SHW 8 winch programme extends the area of 

application into the heavy load range up to 160,000 kg. A compact, sturdy 

construction is concealed behind the attractive design of STAHL Crane- 

Systems’ wire rope hoists. They are extremely reliable, extremely powerful 

and have above-average service life. The particularly smooth, precise starting 

and braking characteristics are common to all. All wire rope hoists and winches 

from STAHL CraneSystems are also available in explosion-protected design 

for Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 21 and Zone 22. 

> SH wire rope hoist 

> AS 7 wire rope hoist 

> SHW 8 winch 

Wire rope hoists 

&winches 


STAHL CraneSystems Info-Service _ Please ask for our 

brochures ›Wire rope hoists‹ and ›Winches‹ for more 

information on our wire rope hoists and winches 

1 The AS 7 wire rope hoist supplements the SH series of wire rope hoists in the upper S.W.L. range up to 100,000 kg 2 KE monorail 

trolleys with SH series wire rope hoists are available for S.W.L.s up to 25,000 kg 3 SH 6 wire rope hoist with UE monorail trolley, true 

vertical lift, lifting height of 25 m 4 TDC – twin drive concept, wire rope hoists on the twin drive concept are equipped as standard with 

two motor-gear units 5 AS 7 wire rope hoist with a double girder overhead travelling crane, SH wire rope hoists in combination with 

single girder overhead travelling cranes 6 The winch SHW 8 is used for loads from 32,000 kg

1 2 

3 

4 

7 

5 

6 

8

Wheel block 

The modern, optimised SR wheel block system with its six frame sizes can be 

used universally. It is suitable both for manufacturing cranes and crabs and for 

off-standard applications. The wheels, guided by flanges on both sides, guaran- 

tee quiet, runway-preserving travel, and can in addition be equipped with guide 

rollers. The reliable drive options are pole-changing hollow shaft drives, SFD 

frequency inverters or slimline pancake gears. Five standard configurations are 

available for mounting them on the customers’ structures. 

> Universal 

> Flexible 

> Reliable 

> Your choice 

> Maintenance-friendly 

> Field-proven 

> Compact 



for our brochure ›SR wheel blocks‹ for more 

information on our wheel blocks 

1 Affixed connection Type A _ A connecting flange is used to weld the wheel block end to a steel structure, the connection can be 

dismantled 2 Screwed connection Type S 3 Welded connection Type W _ the wheel block end is welded directly to the supporting 

structure without any intermediate flange 4 Head connection Type H _ the wheel block is bolted on at the top 5 Inserted connection 

Type I _ the wheel block is plugged into a hollow profile and secured with bolts 6 The guide rollers are positive locking and securely 

mounted, and can be used even on relatively flat rails 7 As an option, the wheel blocks can be equipped with slimline pancake gears 

8 The wheel blocks form the basis of the AS 7 wire rope hoist crab

1 

3 

2 

4

Lifting technology 

> Drive technology 

> Control technology 

1 Crane endcarriages 2 Innovative, compact SFD 1 frequency inverter 

3 KSG crane control 4 Portable joystick transmitter 

Crane kits 


With crane kits from STAHL CraneSystems, you can profit 

from the outstanding quality of our lifting technology, drive 

technology and control technology. We supply the various 

high-tech crane components and the fundamental data for 

erecting the crane. As regards lifting technology, we have the 

world’s most comprehensive, complete range of products. 

Choose from ST chain hoists in 13 S.W.L. ranges between 125 kg 

and 6,300 kg, from 26 SH wire rope hoist variants in 5 frame 

sizes up to 100,000 S.W.L. or SHW winches up to 160,000 kg. 

Our accurate, high-performance drive technology too offers a 

convincing variety of components: endcarriages for suspension 

cranes and for overhead travelling cranes, and the modular 

SR wheel block system for universal use offer the appropriate 

solution for every travel function. Reliable control technology 

with a wide selection of innovative, technically mature crane 

electrics round off STAHL CraneSystems’ crane kit programme.

1 

3 

5 

7 

2 

4 

6 

8


> Hoists 

> Explosion protection 

Accessories 


> Load suspension equipment 

> Slings 

> Sling accessories 

> Weighing and measuring 

> Material conveying and handling equipment 

> Hydraulics 

> Fork-lift truck attachments 

As global experts with many years of experience on hoists and crane systems, we know the 

needs and requirements all around overhead material handling. STAHLplus, the direct marketing 

organisation all around the load hook from STAHL CraneSystems, offers a detailed range of high- 

quality yet cost-effective products. Profit from our experience, know-how and the advantage of 

being able to purchase everything you need for your material handling from a single supplier. 

Internet 

www.stahlplus.com 

stahlplus@stahlcranes.com 

1 ST chain hoist with electric trolley, see page 43 2 360 ° manual chain hoist, see page 51 3 TRU round stock grab, see page 100 

4 SRS round slings, see page 175 5 Workshop crane, see page 200 6 Calibrated digital load cell up to 10 t, see page 196 

7 Rotating sling-attachment collar, screw-on or weld-on, see page 188 8 MB work platform for fork-lift truck, see page 208

1 

3 

2 

4

Condition monitoring 

1 SMC Multicontroller 2 SMC Multicontroller 3 Large-figure load display up to 150 mm 

4 micron6 radio transmitter with feedback 

> SLE motor management 

> SMC Multicontroller 

> SBC brake controller 

> SSC cumulative load controller 

> ALC automatic load display 

> Radio transmitter with feedback from crane 


Condition monitoring systems are in use wher- 

ever production processes need to be monitored 

and controlled. A wide range of crane compo- 

nent data are recorded and monitored with 

these high-quality electronic systems. This 

minimises the possibility of complications and 

avoids subsequent damage. Analysing the 

recorded data enables individually adapted, 

optimised maintenance intervals to be deter- 

mined and the necessity of important repairs to 

be ascertained. Condition monitoring systems 

from STAHL CraneSystems prevent unexpected 

downtimes, improve process and operational 

reliability and thus increase cost-effectiveness.

1 

2 

3 4

Crane systems 

> Wire rope hoists 

> Chain hoists 

> Manual chain hoists 

Explosion protection 


STAHL CraneSystems is pioneering, dynamic and uncompro- 

mising when the safety of persons and machines in areas 

subject to gas and explosion hazards is at stake. All around 

the world, STAHL CraneSystems is regarded as a specialist 

for explosion protection. STAHL CraneSystems occupies a 

prominent position in this field with our many decades of expe- 

rience and know-how, our own fundamental research and 

development, with approvals from the Federal Physico-Technical 

Institute (PTB) and other test institutes in many countries. All 

components of a crane or hoist without exception come from our 

own production, from motor and brake to controls and control 

pendant. This ensures maximum and high-quality explosion 

protection. The stringent ATEX regulations on mechanical ex- 

plosion protection are met. STAHL CraneSystems was the first 

manufacturer of overhead material flow technology to implement 

the ATEX 100a directive 94/9 in the full range of production and 

is today the world’s leading manufacturer of explosion-protected 

hoist and crane technology. 

1 Single girder suspension crane with 1,600 kg S.W.L. 2 SH ex wire rope hoists are available for gas explosion protection Zone 1 and 

Zone 2, and dust explosion protection Zone 21 and Zone 22 3 The ST chain hoist in explosion-protected design is available in two frame 

sizes up to a safe working load of 5,000 kg 4 Single girder overhead travelling crane with 5,000 kg safe working load and radio remote 

control in the hazardous area of a chemical plant

Seminars 

> Product seminars 

> Technical seminars 

> Individual customer seminars 


Invest in the qualification of your staff. In STAHL CraneSystems you have a 

competent partner at your side. For the knowledge you gain from us comes 

directly from a manufacturer of lifting, drive and control technology. We convey 

practical and theoretical knowledge to support you in your everyday work. 

The programme of seminars comprising single-subject, basic and advanced 

courses covers all the main product groups. We would also be pleased to 

offer courses orientated on your individual specifications and requirements. 

The following product and technical seminars are on offer at present: chain 

hoists, wire rope hoists, combined wire rope and chain hoists, load suspension 

equipment, material handling equipment, crane operators, and safety instruction 

for chain and fork-lift truck operators. Each seminar concludes with a certificate. 

Organisation and registration 

Petra Rückgauer 

petra.rueckgauer@stahlcranes.com 


for our brochure ›Seminar programme‹ for more 

information on our seminars 

Tel. +49 7940 128-2354 

Fax +49 7940 128-2300

Flexible, robust and high-powered _ The widest variety of hoists in the world, that’s what 

STAHL CraneSystems offers you. Adaptable wire rope hoists and winches are designed for 

lifting capacities from 125 kg up to 160,000 kg, robust chain hoists cover the lifting capacity range 

from 125 kg to 6,300kg. The attractive design of the wire rope and chain hoists from STAHL 

CraneSystems masks a compact, low-maintenance construction. All hoists are highly reliable, 

extremely powerful and indestructible. Would you like to have all the details? We would be 

pleased to give you information on the whole range and on our innovative system solutions. 

STAHL CraneSystems GmbH, 74653 Künzelsau, +49 7940 128-0 or marketing@stahlcranes.com 

Lifting technology | Drive technology | Control technology

Crane systems, jib cranes, gantry and mobile cranes, 

small crane technology, radio remote controls, runway endstops, 

suspension, control and handling equipment, wheel blocks 

Chain hoists, wire rope hoists, winch, lever hoists, push trolleys, 

reel-type trolleys, adjustable beam clamps, cable winches, lubricants, 

rope sheaves, balancers, cable reeling drums, cable pullers 

Ex electric chain hoists, Ex wire rope hoists, Ex crane technology, 

Ex crane components, Ex manual chain hoists, Ex pneumatic chain hoists, 

Ex crane load cells, Ex manual cranes, Ex manual winches, Ex pneumatic 

winches, Ex balancers, Ex mini-manipulator, Ex small crane systems 

Grabs, clamps, barrel tongs, suction lifters, 

vacuum lifters, permanent lifting magnets, spreader beams, 

C-hooks, loading forks, coil turning hooks 

Chain slings, chain sling components, endless chain slings, 

chain sling accessories, rope slings, round and web slings, 

wear protectors, chain slings for forestry application, chain slings 

for hot dip galvanising plants, suspension systems, sling rack 

Weld-on hooks, swivel transport slings, eye bolts, 

lifting eye nuts, transport ring, carbine hooks, shackles, 

anti-twist guard, clevis hook, sling attachment points 

Load cells, calibrated load cells, load indicators, digital load cells 

Trolleys, scissor-type lifting tables, flat lifting tables, 

pallet lifting trucks, scissor-type pallet lifting trucks, 

machinery lifters, shifting skates, workshop cranes 

Hydraulic cylinders, hydraulic pumps, 

toe jacks, hydraulic lifters, spreaders, pullers 

Dump and stacking dump containers, working platforms, hinged 

bottom skips, telescopic crane jibs, Big Bag transport equipment, 

gas cylinder cabinets, collection troughs, drum transport equipment 

Glossary, Alphabetical index, 

Fax Order Form 


Hoists 


Load suspension 

equipment 

Slings 

Sling accessories 

Weighing 

and measuring 

Material conveying 

equipment 

Hydraulics 

Fork-lift truck 

attachments 

Information 

3 

35 

79 

97 

141 

185 

193 

199 

205 

207 

211


New development: lever hoist for the 

low load range _ light and convenient 

Each lever hoist is 

factory tested with 

overload and supplied 

with a test certificate 

with serial number, 

and operating instructions 

with integrated 

EC declaration of 

conformity. 

Safe working load from 250 kg – 500 kg 

> fast _ the freewheeling facility permits the 

chain to be pulled through or the load attached 

quickly 

> safe _ forged suspension and load hooks open 

without breaking if the hoist is overloaded 

> user-friendly _ short and ergonomically 

shaped lever with rubber handle makes the 

hoist easy to use 

> long-lived _ all components of the load 

pressure brake are made of high-quality 

material and are corrosion-protected 

> tested _ standardised surface-protected 

(galvanised) high-tensile round steel chains 

meet current national and international 

regulations 

> compact _ extremely low deadweight and 

exceedingly compact construction 

enable it to be 

operated in restricted spaces 

STAHLplus Info 

See page 64 

for more details 

> protected _ enclosed design 

protects internal components 

from dust 

Special price on request

Cranes from STAHL CraneSystems are 

the ideal solution for standard 

applications. They are easy to install 

and simple to use, and make 

working on machines in production 

bays and warehouses easier. 


3

4 


Overhead travelling and suspension cranes 

What a good thing it is when the "classics under the roof" come from 

STAHL CraneSystems. Then the tried-and-tested functions required 

are achieved with an intelligent design and the most up-to-date 

technology. For example, minimum approach dimensions and 

comfortably large hook paths. 

Technical features (standard range) 

• Single girder suspension cranes up to 10,000 kg 

• Single girder overhead travelling cranes up to 16,000 kg 

• Double girder overhead travelling cranes up to 160,000 kg 

• Also for use in hazardous areas: 

We are the experts in explosion protection! 

Single girder overhead travelling crane with wire rope hoist. 

Overhead travelling crane with 2 wire rope hoists for single and tandem operation, with integrated load measuring system and 

large format display for monitoring loading of lorries. 

A range of cranes to suit all requirements 

• Our engineers provide on-site consultation 

• Easy-to-assemble components ensure minimum assembly and 

maintenance time and thus low costs 

• Optimised component modules and certified quality assurance in 

accordance with DIN ISO 9001/EN 29001 guarantee consistent high 

quality and short delivery times 

• And after delivery: Our qualified maintenance team will carry out the 

legally stipulated inspections on your behalf. 

• Secured spare parts availability even after many years 

Certification _ As a certified company it is your responsibility to engage companies 

for the accident prevention regulation test and maintenance of your material handling 

systems who are themselves certified and whose staff are qualified persons as 

defined by the Decree on Safety in Operation. 

STAHL CraneSystems 

is the experienced and creative 

partner for implementing individual 

material flow concepts right 

up to automatic cranes, special 

cranes and complex system solutions. 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Innovative crane technology 

Cable harness reduced by 80% thanks to radio signal transmission. 

As of now, STAHL CraneSystems GmbH is offering single girder 

overhead travelling cranes up to a safe working load of 16,000 kg with 

an innovative control concept achieving a new level of safety and 

operator-friendliness. 

The technology has been developed in collaboration with system 

partners who play leading roles in their particular fields. 

Technical features 

• Single girder overhead travelling cranes up to 16,000 kg with radio 

control as standard 

• Wireless signal transmission replaces cable-bound control pendants 

• A choice of three radio transmitters: 

- quadrix compact transmitter, a mere 330 g in weight 

- micron 6 pushbutton transmitter 

- spectrum 1 joystick transmitter 

(detailed information on page 25) 

• Main power supply with four-pole conductor line 

• Low-maintenance: no cables susceptible to wear 

• No cable loops mean space gains 

• Plug-and-socket connections for all electrics as standard 

The new crane technology in operation with an SH 30 wire rope hoist and an S.W.L. of 5,000 kg. 

Suspended cables and mechanical fixtures for the hoist power supply are dispensed 

with completely. 

5

6 


Single girder suspension cranes 

The optimum up to 10,000 kg S.W.L. and spans up to 20 m 

The single girder suspension crane from STAHL CraneSystems needs 

very little space. It runs on the lower flange of the crane runway which 

is mounted directly on the ceiling and achieves the greatest utilisation 

of space possible. In particular in the case of restricted production 

areas, this permits optimum utilisation of the width of the room. 

Suspension cranes in neighbouring bays can be connected; the crane 

interlock functions completely free of jolts and knocks. The hoist can 

be moved onto the neighbouring crane together with its load and can 

reach any destination in the interlocked system. 


• Compact _ minimum approach dimensions and efficient utilisation 

of the available ceiling height 

• Long-lived _ robust rolled steel sectional girders or welded box 

girders for the crane bridge, optionally in EH-A or EH-B version 

(sketch) 

• Convenient _ quiet travel, smooth starting and braking 

• Wide-ranging _ Crane interlocks free of jolts or knocks for overhead 

material transport across bays 

• Choice _ of flexible flat cable or contact-free conductor line as 

power supply to the hoist 

• Lifting _ optionally with chain hoist up to 6,300 kg or wire rope hoist 

up to 10,000 kg S.W.L. 

EH-A EH-B 

Assembly of electrical components _ In particular in buildings with a low noise level, 

the particularly quiet technology of the cranes is a welcome advantage. 

Fitters’ shop _ The single girder suspension 

crane with 3,200 kg S.W.L. is in continuous 

operation here. 

Railway construction _ The 12 suspension cranes ensure that the overhead transportation 

in the production processes runs smoothly. 

STAHLplus Info _ Please ask for dimensions, prices 

and detailed literature on wire rope and chain hoists. 

You will find more off-standard crane solutions on 

page 9. 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Single girder overhead travelling cranes 

Adaptable up to 16,000 kg S.W.L. and spans up to 30 m 

The single girder overhead travelling crane from STAHL CraneSystems 

is flexible and astonishingly adaptable. It runs on the top flange of the 

crane runway. Its use enables rational, economical material flow solutions 

to be achieved even in low or small buildings. The existing space 

can be utilised to the full by using various installation variants. The 

crane bridge girder can be individually adapted either "flush at top" 

(EL-A), "flush at bottom" (EL-B) or "raised up" (EL-C). A clearance of 

approx. 100 mm to the ceiling is specified for single girder overhead 

travelling cranes. Particularly in low-ceilinged rooms, this permits 

minimum headrooms and optimum adaptation to the building profile. 

The height of lift can be increased even further by using a cantilever 

crab from STAHL CraneSystems. 


• Perfect _ extremely adaptable thanks to various installation versions 

• Resilient _ drives calculated for the rugged conditions of crane duty 

• Computer-optimised _ sturdy rolled steel sectional girders or welded 

box girders for the crane bridge 

• Convenient _ low noise generation, smooth starting and braking 

characteristics 

• Choice _ of flexible flat cable or guarded conductor line as power 

supply to the hoist 

• Accurate _ laser measurement of wheel axles for smooth running 

characteristics and low wear 

Plastics moulding _ A single girder overhead travelling crane transports the moulding 

tools for retooling the machines. The off-standard chain hoist with "extra short 

headroom trolley" permits maximum hook paths even in low rooms. 

EL-A 

EL-B 

EL-C 

Three "hermaphrodite cranes" were designed 

partly from suspension and partly 

from overhead travelling components. 

The cranes were designed as overhead 

travelling cranes, but due to the wide 

span of 51 m were equipped with an 

extra suspended trolley in the centre. 

The three-point suspension permitted a 

crucial reduction of the weight and 

headroom of the crane bridges. The 

three off-standard cranes can be operated 

synchronously from a single radio 

control if required. Combined in synchronous 

operation, they can transport up to 

45,000 kg. 

The offset crane girder design enabled the maximum effective hook path to be 

achieved in spite of the very low ceiling. 

7

8 


Double girder overhead travelling cranes 

Double strength up to 160,000 kg S.W.L. and spans up to 30 m 

STAHL CraneSystems is the specialist for high-performance cranes in 

the upper S.W.L. range. This naturally includes the double girder 

overhead travelling crane with an S.W.L. of up to 160,000 kg and a span 

of up to 30 m. Large, unwieldy loads can be handled extremely safely 

and accurately. This is particularly true when several hoists equipped 

with a precise electronic synchro control are used in tandem operation. 

The double girder overhead travelling crane can be integrated 

into planned or existing buildings utilising special installation variants. 

The top hook position brings particular advantages on a double girder 

overhead travelling crane. The load hook is lifted between the crane 

girders. Additional requirements such as maintenance platforms on 

crab or crane, cabins or higher crane travel speeds can be achieved 

quickly and easily. 


• Computer optimised _ robust rolled sectional steel girders or 

torsion-resistant welded box girders for the crane bridge 

• Convenient _ quiet running characteristics, smooth starting and 

braking 

• Choice _ flexible flat cable or contact-free conductor line for the 

power supply to the hoist 

• Accurate _ laser measurement of wheel axles for smooth running 

characteristics and low wear 

• Lifting _ optionally with wire rope hoist or winch 

STAHLplus Info _ Everything from one supplier? Just 

ask us! We provide on-site advice, plan projects and 

provide you with tailor-made solutions to suit your 

specific needs. 

Paper manufacture _ Three wire rope hoists are mounted on the double girder 

overhead travelling crane with 30,000 kg S.W.L. The outer hoists ensure that the reels 

are handled without swinging, the centre hoist with a single hook is used for turning 

the paper reels if required. 

Motor industry _ Crane technology 

around the clock. The toolmaking shop 

has been fully equipped with double 

girder overhead travelling cranes from 

STAHL CraneSystems. The cranes are 

easily accessible from integrated 

maintenance catwalks. 

Example: double girder overhead travelling crane in paper manufacture 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

STAHL CraneSystems - your partner for off-standard solutions 

Off-standard cranes 

Practical experience 

STAHL CraneSystems enjoys every customer-specific challenge. Only 

when your individual solution needs to be planned, from a single hoist 

to custom-built cranes to computer-controlled automation, do we 

really have to extend ourselves. Then all our flexibility and dynamism 

are brought to bear. The highly motivated, experienced engineers and 

technicians at STAHL CraneSystems combine their comprehensive 

know-how with your specifications and ideas. Economical standard 

components from the whole range of products are used as well as 

economically optimised off-standard components and automation 

components. With your input, in a constructive process a solution is 

achieved that is practical, individual and precisely adapted to your 

application. 

Competent 

Numerous examples both in Germany and abroad prove the competence 

of STAHL CraneSystems in the field of custom-built solutions. 

These projects are described in detail in separate reference leaflets. 

Just ask for them at www.stahlcranes.com. 


• High-performance _ experience and know-how from more than 

70 years of crane manufacture and centralised production 

• Innovative _ continuing development of the hoists and crane 

components 

• Individual _ customer-specific system solutions 

• Partnership _ joint planning in consultation with our customers 

• Safe _ top quality ensured by certified processes 

• Rigorous _ statics and engineering to the latest DIN and EN 

standards 

Handling paper reels _ With a total of five axes of motion, paper reels up to 18,000 kg 

are reloaded quickly and safely. 

Waste reloading station _ Multi-hook operation, automatic load positioning and loads 

up to 38,000 kg: STAHL CraneSystems supplied the whole system including the freestanding 

crane runway. 

Aircraft engine maintenance _ State of the art crane systems from STAHL CraneSystems with safe working loads between 500 and 12,500 kg transport the valuable aircraft 

engines and their individual components to any point desired. All the cranes are equipped with frequency-controlled drives in order to be able to move the delicate engines 

extremely slowly and with minimum load swing. Wire rope hoists of the SHF 30 to SHF 60 series are used, some of the hoists were designed with true vertical lift. The 

cranes with two trolleys and separate joysticks for the individual hoists are particularly useful when rotating the engines. 

9

10 

Crane components 


Modular 

The perfect complement to STAHL CraneSystems hoists are crane 

components from our own production. Forward-looking, high quality 

components complement each other in the system and offer safety and 

economical use. With the aid of the modular components, the crane 

system is individually adapted to customer-specific wishes 


• Optimised crane endcarriages_ KEL for single girder overhead 

travelling cranes: 5 wheel diameters and 5 wheelbases 

KZL for double girder overhead travelling cranes: 5 wheel diameters 

and 6 wheelbases 

KEH single girder suspension cranes: 4 wheel diameters and 

3 wheelbases 

• Versatile SF crane travel drives _ Supplied as standard with twostep 

speeds 20/5 or 40/10 m/min, other speeds available on request. 

Stepless speed control as an option 

• Flexible operation _ Cable-connected STH manual control pendant 

micro and quadrix pushbutton transmitters 

spectrum joystick transmitter 

• Power supply along crane bridge _ conductor line 

(in conjunction with radio technology) 

festoon cables (in conjunction with control pendants) 

• Crane control _ Panel box with plug connections 

(in conjunction with radio technology) 

Panel box with terminal connections 

4 

6 

1 Main power supply _ When a conductor 

line is used, no moving cables 

need be installed on the crane 

2 STH manual control pendant _ The 

cost-effective solution, with load 

display on request 

3 Radio remote controls _ Three 

ergonomic radio transmitters are 

avail-able: the micron and quadrix 

pushbutton transmitters and the 

spectrum joystick transmitter 

4 KEL endcarriage _ For single girder 

overhead travelling cranes up to 

16,000 S.W.L. Safe transmission of 

forces from the crane bridge thanks 

to high-strength friction grip bolts 

1 

2 3 

5 

5 KZL endcarriage _ For double girder overhead travelling cranes. Safe transmission 

of forces from the crane bridge thanks to high-strength friction grip bolts 

6 Crane control _ In combination with radio technology, the control is clearly 

arranged in a panel box on the crane bridge with plug connections as standard. 

7 SF crane travel drives _ Low maintenance and with 2 speeds as standard. 

Integrated centrifugal masses ensure smooth starting and braking 

7 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Crane equipment 

Performance-enhancing 

In addition to the crane components, a great deal of additional 

mechanical, electrical and electronic equipment is available from 

STAHL CraneSystems. This increases the performance of the crane 

system still further and makes working with it particularly convenient. 

More important however, is the fact that state-of-the-art equipment 

improves process reliability and safety at work. The wide spectrum of 

crane equipment permits practical, safe solutions with extremely high 

cost-effectiveness. 

The 10 most frequently ordered features 

• Cross and long travel limit switches 

• Radio remote control with pushbutton or joystick transmitter 

• Load monitoring and lifetime calculation with SMC for wire rope 

hoists 

• Stepless speed control 

• Off-standard corrosion protection systems 

• Maintenance platforms along crane bridge 

• Anti-collision devices with light barriers 

• Equipment for outdoor use 

• Large-format LCD load display 

• Spreader beams and sling equipment 

1 SFD1 frequency inverter _ For 

stepless speed control, mounted 

directly on cross and long travel 

drives 

2 Reflection light barriers _ Cranes 

reliably "keep their distance" 

3 LCD display _ Optional signal 

feedback to crane operator 

4 SSC load summation _ Adds up the 

loads suspended on a maximum of 

four hooks and disconnects hoisting 

motion when the permissible limit 

load is exceeded 

5 SMC Multicontroller _ When precise operating data and maximum safety are 

required 

6 Large-format four-figure load display _ Installed here on two hoists. The integrated 

load summation monitors the total load on both hooks 

7 Crane catwalk _ with grating, railing on both sides and electrically monitored 

access doors at both ends 

3 

6 7 

1 

2 

4 

5 

11

12 


SR wheel block system 

The components of the SR modular wheel block system derive from 

STAHL CraneSystems’ field-proven series programme. A number of 

different mounting methods guarantee universal and extremely flexible 

use. 


• Universal _ can be used for wheel loads from 5,000 to 30,000 kg in six 

frame sizes 

• Flexible _ five standard configurations for connection to customer’s 

supporting structure 

• Reliable_ SF drives for every requirement, as low-maintenance 

direct drives 

• Choice_ on request, drives with innovative SFD frequency inverter 

mounted directly on motor 

• Maintenance-friendly _ wheel can simply be rolled out to the front 

• Field-proven _ series components with maximum performance 

• Compact _ on request with space-saving pancake gear a 

• Safe _ as an option, available in explosion-protected design in 

compliance with ATEX 

h2 

h1 

d4 

Model Wheel 

load 

Wheel 

Ø 

Head connection H 

The wheel block is 

bolted on at the top. 

Welded connection W 

The wheel block end is 

welded directly to the 

supporting structure 

without any intermediate 

flange. 

L2 L1 

Dimensions Rail 

width 

Inserted connection I 

The wheel block is 

plugged into a hollow 

profile and secured 

with bolts. 

Screwed connection S 

A connecting flange is 

used to bolt the wheel 

block end to a steel 

structure. 

L1 L2 L3 h1 h2 Ø d1 b1 k 

[kg] [mm] [mm] 

SR 125 5000 125 273 100 135 165 100 100 50, 60 40, 50 35 710 52 10 0 

SR 160 7000 160 345 125 172 190 100 125 52, 62, 40, 50, 36 710 52 10 0 

72 60 

SR 200 10000 200 408 125 189 235 100 125 54, 64, 40, 50, 37 710 52 10 0 

74 60 

SR 250 16000 250 437 160 208 295 100 160 54, 64, 40, 50, 38 710 54 10 0 

74, 84 60, 70 

SR 315 22000 315 500 160 230 350 100 160 64, 74, 50, 60, 39 710 52 10 0 

SR 400 30000 400 658 200 322 440 155 200 

84, 94 

75, 85, 

95, 105 

* Prices for versions with drive right / left on request. 

70, 80 

60, 70, 

80, 100 

Item 

No. 

- 

L3 

k 

b1 

Price * 

version 

without 

drive 

Affixed connection A 

A connecting flange is 

used to weld the wheel 

block end to a steel 

structure, the connection 

can be dismantled. 

With pancake gear 

As an option, the wheel 

block can be supplied 

with space-saving 

pancake gear. 

With guide rollers 

The guide rollers are 

mounted securely with 

positive-locking and can 

be used even with relatively 

flat rails. 

to SR 200 > 30 mm, 

up to SR 250 > 40 mm. 

The wheel blocks are suitable for universal use. Here they 

form the basis for the crab of an AS70 wire rope hoist. 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Jib cranes 

Jib cranes offer many functional and economic advantages to 

facilitate efficient and safe lifting and moving of loads at the 

workplace. 

Jib cranes from STAHL CraneSystems offer even more: 

Their modular design ensures quick and easy operation. Together with 

hoists from STAHL CraneSystems, they provide a tailor-made solution 

for every workplace 

Pillar jib cranes 

This catalogue presents only a selection from the wide range, for safe 

working load ratings from 125 to 1,000 kg. 

If you cannot find the pillar jib crane you require, please enquire 

(enquiry form for jib cranes on page 19). Other jib cranes with square 

footplate and articulated jib can be supplied on request. We will send 

you a quotation free of charge without delay. 

PS pillar jib crane 

STAHLplus Info _ 

Also available in explosionprotected 

design. 

Model Safe Jib Head- Flange Founda- Shear Weight Item 

PS working length room width tion connector 

No. 


Plate 

size 

P (GK) A B F � G Ø VP [kg] 

[kg] [mm] 

1,25-3,0 125 3000 3290 55 900 680 259 810 517 0 

1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 3290 55 1000 680 272 810 518 0 

1,25-5,0 5000 3290 64 1100 680 298 810 519 0 

2,5-3,0 250 3000 3290 55 1050 680 260 810 521 0 

2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 3290 82 1200 850 308 810 522 0 

2,5-5,0 5000 3290 82 1300 850 420 810 523 0 

5-3,0 500 3000 3290 82 1300 850 334 810 525 0 

5-4,0 (55) 4000 3290 82 1450 1050 400 810 526 0 

5-5,0 5000 3290 100 1550 1050 534 810 527 0 

10-3,0 1,000 3000 3290 100 1600 1200 404 810 529 0 

10-4,0 (90) 4000 3760 120 1800 1450 567 810 530 0 

10-5,0 5000 3760 120 1950 1450 699 810 531 0 

Detailed dimensions on request. 


Pillar jib crane: 

• Steel structure designed in compliance with 

DIN 15018: 

-Hoisting class H2 

-Stress group B2 

• Slewing range: 270° 

• Slewing by hand 

• Complete with cross travel endstops 

• Complete basic electrical equipment 

• Complete documentation including crane 

test logbook 

• Anchor bolts and template available against 

surcharge 

• Shear connector system available as an 

option against surcharge 

Electric chain hoist: 

• Quality chain hoist type ST 

• Main and creep hoisting speed 

• Standard height of lift = 3 m 

• Push trolley (electric trolley on request) 

• Contactor control 

• IP 55 protection 

• Control pendant incl. approx. 1.8 m control 

cable 

• Chain box 

• Technical data for hoist on page 43 

13

14 


Model Safe work- 

Dimensions Weight Item 

AS ing load 

No. 

P (GK) A UK B F � G Ø VP 

[kg] [mm] [kg] 

1,25-3,0 125 3000 2500 2790 91 900 680 259 810 533 0 

1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 2500 2790 91 1050 680 280 810 534 0 

1,25-5,0 5000 2500 2790 91 1100 680 342 810 535 0 

2,5-3,0 250 3000 2500 2790 91 1050 680 259 810 537 0 

2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 2500 2845 120 1250 850 403 810 538 0 

2,5-5,0 5000 2500 2845 120 1350 850 437 810 539 0 

5-3,0 500 3000 2500 2845 120 1300 850 370 810 541 0 

5-4,0 (55) 4000 2500 2845 120 1450 1050 403 810 542 0 

5-5,0 5000 2500 2945 150 1650 1200 597 810 543 0 

10-3,0 1,000 3000 2500 2845 120 1600 1200 433 810 545 0 

10-4,0 (90) 4000 2500 2945 150 1800 1450 623 810 546 0 

10-5,0 5000 2500 3005 170 1950 1450 759 810 547 0 


Model Safe work- 


PR ing load 

No. 

P (GK) A B F � G Ø VP 


1,25-3,0 125 3000 2710 82 950 680 253 810 805 0 

1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 2710 82 1050 680 270 810 806 0 

1,25-5,0 5000 2750 100 1150 680 325 810 807 0 

2,5-3,0 250 3000 2730 91 1100 680 263 810 808 0 

2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 2730 91 1250 1050 444 810 809 0 

2,5-5,0 5000 2790 120 1400 1050 533 810 810 0 

5-2,0 500 2000 2730 91 1200 680 243 810 811 0 

5-3,0 (80) 3000 2750 100 1400 1050 436 810 812 0 

5-4,0 4000 2790 120 1550 1050 499 810 813 0 

10-2,0 1,000 2000 2790 120 1450 1050 432 810 814 0 

10-3,0 (150) 3000 2850 150 1700 1200 506 810 815 0 


AS pillar jib cranes 




DIN 15018: 





• Complete with cross travel stops 



test logbook 


surcharge 











cable 

• Chain box 

• See page 43 for technical data for hoist 

PR pillar jib crane 




DIN 15018: 





• Complete with cross travel stops 



test logbook 


surcharge 




• Type ST quality chain hoist 

• Main and precision hoisting speed 






cable 

• Chain box 


01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Wall-mounted jib cranes 

This catalogue presents only a selection from the wide range, for safe 

working load ratings from 125 to 1,000 kg. 

If you cannot find the wall-mounted jib crane you require, please 

enquire (enquiry form for jib cranes on page 19). We will send you a 

quotation free of charge immediately. 

Inside running jib cranes (the trolley is protected, running in a hollow 

profile) are also available and suitable for low S.W.L.s. Price on 

request. 

PW wall-mounted jib crane 


Please ask for dimensions, prices and 

detailed literature on our chain hoists. 

Bracket 

sub-assembly 

Model Safe Jib Bracket Head- Flange Weight Item 

PW working length subroom width 

No. 


assembly 

P (GK) A B F [kg] 

[kg] [mm] 

1,25-3,0 125 3000 A 940 55 70 810 501 0 

1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 940 55 93 810 502 0 

1,25-5,0 5000 940 64 110 810 503 0 

2,5-3,0 250 3000 A 940 55 70 810 505 0 

2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 940 64 95 810 506 0 

2,5-5,0 5000 940 82 140 810 507 0 

5-3,0 500 3000 A 940 82 90 810 509 0 

5-4,0 (55) 4000 940 82 120 810 510 0 

5-5,0 5000 940 100 205 810 511 0 

10-3,0 1,000 3000 A 940 100 123 810 513 0 

10-4,0 (90) 4000 940 100 170 810 514 0 

10-5,0 5000 B 1430 120 320 810 515 0 



Also available in explosionprotected 

design. 


Wall-mounted jib crane: 


DIN 15018: 






• Including standard bearing brackets 



test logbook 

• Wall bracket and bracket for supporting 

pillar available against surcharge 









cable 

• Chain box 

• See page 43 for techjnical data of hoist 

15

16 


Bracket 

sub-assembly 

Model Safe Jib Bracket Head- Flange Weight Item 

AW working length subroom width 

No. 


assembly 

P (GK) A B F [kg] 

[kg] [mm] 

1,25-3,0 125 3000 A 940 91 115 810 549 0 

1,25-4,0 (40) 4000 940 91 140 810 550 0 

1,25-5,0 5000 940 91 160 810 551 0 

2,5-3,0 250 3000 A 940 91 115 810 553 0 

2,5-4,0 (40) 4000 940 91 140 810 554 0 

2,5-5,0 5000 940 120 240 810 555 0 

5-3,0 500 3000 A 940 120 170 810 557 0 

5-4,0 (55) 4000 940 120 205 810 558 0 

5-5,0 5000 B 1430 150 355 810 559 0 

10-3,0 1,000 3000 B 1430 150 265 810 561 0 

10-4,0 (90) 4000 1430 150 310 810 562 0 

10-5,0 5000 1430 150 355 810 563 0 


WK1 mobile pillar jib crane 

No foundation or anchorage required, this jib crane can be used 

wherever it may be needed. 

Advantages 

• Ready for use right away wherever it is needed 

(simple extension lead) 

• Can be transported by bridge crane, fork-lift truck or trolley 

• Ideal for use in rented buildings (no damage to floor) 

• Extremely stable 


• Slewing range: with rigid jib 270°, with articulated jib 310° 

• Designed in compliance with DIN 15018, 15019, 4132 

• Classification: hoisting class H2, stress group B2 

(B3 with vH 12 m/min) 

• Paint: crane RAL 7043 (traffic grey), jib RAL 3003 (ruby red) with 

warning stripes 


• Complete documentation including crane test logbook 

• User-friendly with easy-running trolley and jib 

• Belt brake prevents jib after-running under load 

• Many options adapted to users’ requirements 

• Robust, maintenance-free and extremely safe design 

STAHLplus Info _ You will find matching hoists on 

page 43 ff. Other mobile crane designs for low 

S.W.L.s (lighter and lower base requirement) 

available on request. 

AW wall-mounted jib cranes 


Wall-mounted jib crane: 


DIN 15018: 






• Including standard bearing brackets 



test logbook 

• Wall bracket and bracket for supporting 

pillar available against surcharge 


• Type ST quality chain hoist 

• Main and precision hoisting speed 






cable 

• Chain box 


Safe work- Model L GH Fill Crane Item 

ing load 

weight weight* No. 

[kg] WK 1 ... [mm] [kg] [kg] 

100 100-4,715 4715 3635 2850 685 810 824 0 

160 160-4,065 4065 

677 810 825 0 

200 200-3,665 3665 

660 810 826 0 

250 250-3,215 3215 

650 810 827 0 

320 320-2,600 2600 

640 810 828 0 

400 400-2,215 2215 

625 810 829 0 

500 500-1,750 1750 

615 810 830 0 

Fill weight 2,850 kg for foundation pillar 810 831 0 

Trolley for WK 1 ... 810 832 0 

Prices without hoist and erection. For this crane disposable transport package is required 

for which we will charge you EUR 105.00. 

Off-standard heights and articulated jib on request. 

* without hoist, without fill weight. 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

WK3 mobile pillar jib crane 

No foundation or anchorage required, this jib crane with integrated 

counterweight can be used wherever it may be needed. 

Advantages 

• Ready for use right away wherever it is needed 

(simple extension lead) 

• Can be transported by bridge crane, fork-lift truck or trolley 

• Ideal for use in rented buildings (no damage to floor) 

• Extremely stable 



• Designed in compliance with DIN 15018, 15019, 4132 

• Classification: hoisting class H2, stress group B2 

(B3 with vH 12 m/min) 

• Paint: crane RAL 7043 (traffic grey), jib RAL 3003 (ruby red) with 

warning stripes 


• Complete documentation including crane test logbook 

• User-friendly with extremely easy-running trolley and jib 

• Belt brake prevents jib after-running under load 

• Many options adapted to users’ requirements 

• Trolley with steel wheels with Vulcolan coating 

• Robust, maintenance-free and extremely safe design 

Rotary cranes for sewage farms available on request. 

STAHLplus Info _ You will find suitable hoists on 

page 43 ff. 


Jib cranes and WK 1 mobile jib cranes with 

articulated jib (mobile design also available) 

on request. 

Safe working load Model L GH Crane Item 

with counterweight 

weight* No. 

[kg] WK 3 ... [mm] [kg] 

200 200-5,500 4500 3600 1200 810 833 0 

320 320-4,000 4000 

1185 810 834 0 

400 400-3,600 3600 

1160 810 835 0 

500 500-3,100 3100 

1150 810 836 0 

600 600-2,750 2750 

1140 810 837 0 

800 800-2,200 2200 

1125 810 838 0 

1,000 1000-1,750 1750 

1120 810 839 0 

Fill weight 2,850 kg for foundation pillar 810 831 0 

Trolley for WK 3 ... 810 840 0 

Prices for mobile crane incl. counterweight, without hoist and erection. 

For this crane disposable transport package is required for which we will charge you 

EUR 105.00. 

Prices for mobile crane without counterweight on request. In this case the safe working 

load is halved. 

Off-standard heights on request. 

* without hoist, without fill weight. 

17

18 



Off-standard jib cranes 

In this catalogue, we show you a selection of our wide range of 

jib cranes. Apart from these, we can offer you jib cranes with wire rope 

hoists for higher safe working loads and jib cranes for particular 

applications and requirements. 

Fig. 1 

Fig. 5 

Fig. 2 

Fig. 3 Fig. 4 

Fig. 1: 

Pillar jib crane for loading and unloading repair ships, 

S.W.L. of 5,000 kg with a free jib length of 16.5 m. 

Equipped with an inside-mounted slewing gear and a 

wire rope hoist from STAHL CraneSystems it defies 

wind and weather outdoors. Convenient operation both 

from the land and from the ship by radio remote control. 

Fig. 2: 

Boat crane with counterweight, S.W.L. 70,000 kg, 

jib length 7.0 m 

Fig. 3: 

Maintenance crane as articulated crane in off-standard 

design 

Fig. 4: 

Boat crane on Brombach Lake 

Fig. 5: 

Boat crane at Rammelmayr’s yacht wharf 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Fax enquiry for jib cranes 

Were you not able to find the jib crane you require in this standard range? 

No problem - we can still help you! 

Please photocopy this page and fill in the required data and dimensions, then fax it to us. 

We’ll be pleased to advise you and send you a quotation immediate 

Wall mounted jib cranes 

Please tick 

basic type 

desired 

Pillar jib cranes 

� I require a consultation 

� I require a quotation 

e 

b 

180° 

c0779v06 

a 

g 

......kg 

d 

a 

......kg 

~270° 

hH 

0 

c0780v05 

hH 

C 

0 

C 

e 

b 

180° 

c0779v07 

g 

a 

......kg 

d 

Simply copy - fill in - fax 

Jib crane 

Hoist 

................................... [kg] Safe workingn load 

� Chain hoist with push trolley 

hH............................[mm] Hook position 

� Chain hoist with electric trolley 

a .............................. [mm] Jib length/distance from joint for articulated jib 

b .............................. [mm] Headroom 

Operating conditions 

c .............................. [mm] Bottom edge of crane girder 

� Indoor use 

d .............................. [mm] Length 

..................................... °C Ambient temperature 

� round / � square ... 

� Wall bracket 

Floor plate 

................................V, Hz Supply voltage, frequency 

� Bracket on supporting pillar 

Other 

................................. [mm] Wall thickness/pillar dims./I beam type 

.............................................................................................................................. 

� Anchor plate 

.............................................................................................................................. 

................................. [mm] Floor thickness/concrete quality (e.g. B25) 

.............................................................................................................................. 

Company/name/customer No................................................................................................................................................................... 

Street/P.O. Box ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 

Post code/town........................................................................................................................................................................................... 

Contact person............................................................................................................................................................................................ 

Department/job title ................................................................................................................................................................................... 

Telephone ..................................................................................... Fax........................................................................................................ 

a 

......kg 

~270° 

hH 

0 

c0780v06 

C 

hH 

0 

C 

19

20 

KTlight 

simple, light, fast 


Thanks to its low deadweight and high degree of accuracy in manufacturing 

processes, the new aluminium light crane system KTlight 

from STAHL CraneSystems guarantees optimum free running in comparison 

with classic steel suspension crane profiles. 

KTlight thus ranks among the most successful ideas in lifting and conveying 

technology. 

The deadweight is up to 50% lower compared with conventional light 

crane systems. The crane system can thus also be used in buildings 

with ceilings or upper structures which cannot support heavy loads. 

The base element is a closed, dust-insensitive runway profile that is 

available in three different sizes. This permits individual solutions up to 

2,500 kg S.W.L. to be implemented. 

The individual elements are both practical and cost-effective and can 

be combined and used exactly as required. The modular system is 

designed to permit simple pin and bolt assembly on site. 

Powerful chain hoists from STAHL CraneSystems or complex handling 

equipment from ACS complement your KTlight small crane system perfectly, 

safely and economically. 

EB suspended monorail 

• Free-running _ precise manufacturing processes guarantee low 

rolling resistance over the whole length of the runway 

• Quiet _ shock-free travel characteristics and perfectly smoothrunning 

thanks to high-quality travel unit solutions 

• Modern _ visually attractive and intelligent profile geometry with 

all-purpose system slots 

• Innovative _ minimum deadweight combined with max. flexural rigidity 

• Modular _ choice of various power supply systems 

• Durable _ non-corrosive thanks to anodised surface 

• Compact _ raised designs for space-saving solutions 

Customer-specific solutions in the motor and 

aviation industry with the aluminium light 

crane system 

STAHLplus Info _ We will 

find a solution for your individual 

specifications too. 

Please enquire! 

New 

STAHL CraneSystems offers you 

the complete range for overhead 

material handling in the lower to 

medium S.W.L. range up to 

2,500 kg. 

Prices of the crane systems on 

request. 

AL06 profile AL10 profile AL14 profile 

Safe working 

load [kg] 

63 80 125 250 320 500 630 1,000 1,250 1,600 2,000 

Profile type Max. suspension spacing [mm] 

AL06 6250 5750 4850 3600 3200 - - - - - - 

AL10 10000 9550 8500 6650 6000 4950 4450 3550 3200 2850 2550 

AL14 10000 10000 10000 8450 7700 6450 5850 4700 4250 3800 3400 

Cockpit assembly in the motor industry Safe handling of aircraft engine shells by 

means of suction lifter 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

EH single girder suspension crane 

• High capacity _ designed for loads of up to 

2,000 kg 

• Ergonomic _ easy to move by hand 

• Safe _ negligible load swing as the trolley's 

centre of gravity automatically finds the 

correct hoisting position 

• Practical _ suspension spacings of up to 

10 m with a max. load of 125 kg permit it to 

be mounted on existing building trusses and 

save on auxiliary structures 

STAHLplus Info _ You will 

find suitable hoists on page 

43 ff. 

Raised single and double girder 

suspension crane 

designs available on request. 

ZH double girder suspension crane 

• High capacity _ designed for loads up to 

2,500 kg, spans over 10 m are possible 

• Ideal _ utilisation of the full height of lift as 

the hoist is suspended between the bridge 

girders 

• Safe _ negligible load swing as the trolley's 

centre of gravity automatically finds the 

correct hoisting position 

Examples of off-standard solutions 

S.W.L. [kg] 63 80 125 250 320 500 630 1,000 1,250 1,600 2,000 

Profile type Max. suspended clearance [mm] 

AL06 6250 5750 4850 3600 3200 - - - - - - 

AL10 10000 9550 8500 6650 6000 4950 4450 3550 3200 2850 2550 

AL14 10000 10000 10000 8450 7700 6450 5850 4700 4250 3800 3400 

S.W.L. [kg] 63 80 125 250 320 500 630 1,000 1,250 1,600 2,000 

Profile type Max. suspended clearance [mm] 

AL06 6550 6050 5100 3800 3350 - - - - - - 

AL10 10000 10000 8950 7000 6300 5200 4650 3750 3350 3000 2700 

AL14 10000 10000 10000 8850 8100 6750 6150 4950 4450 4000 3550 

Short headroom double girder suspension crane Double girder suspension crane with triple runway 

21

22 

KT 2000 


versatile, automation-friendly, cost-effective 

STAHL CraneSystems’ KT 2000 is a small crane 

system that will hold its own indefinitely 

whatever your requirements and your growth. 

This system lifts and transports loads up to 

2,000 kg particularly easily and economically. 

Whether overhead monorails for linear 

transport or suspension cranes for wideranging 

overhead transportation are needed, 

this modular system makes anything possible, 

right up to complex automated material flow 

solutions. 

• Versatile _ up-to-the-minute technology, 

top quality in a modular system for 

application-oriented flexibility with S.W.L.s 

up to 2,000 kg 

• Automation-friendly _ all material flow 

applications can without exception be 

automated and extended 

• Cost-effective _ fast project planning, 

speedy delivery, assembly and commissioning, 

extremely maintenance-friendly, 

modular, flexible, and always extendable 



43 ff. 

Safe working Track length Max. suspended 


clearance * 


125 as required 8750 

250 8750 

500 6950 

1,000 4300 

1,250 3850 

1,600 1600 

2,000 750 

* Multiple section girders 

Tractor assembly line 

Direction of motion 

KT 2000 

ha649en 

→ 

Circular monorail runway with a total length of 93 m 

in a radiator assembly line. 

The loads of 250 kg are lifted synchronously at two 

points in trolleys with STD 10 electric chain hoists. Example: 

Monorail runway for 250 kg S.W.L., runway length 14000 mm, suspended on I girder, with 

electric chain hoist, hoisting speed 2/8 m/min, height of lift 3 m and push trolley. Festoon power 

supply. 

Price on request 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

KT-EH suspension cranes 

Single and double girder suspension cranes 

with or without electric drives are particularly 

suitable for moving loads above floor level 

over wide areas. The available room height 

can be utilised to the full thanks to the particularly 

low headroom of our system. 

Safe Crane Crane runway 

working 


Max. crane 

girder length 

Length Max. suspended 

clearance* 


125 11000 as required 8750 

250 10000 8200 

500 6550 6150 

1,000 4200 4150 

* Multiple section girder 

Example: 

Single girder suspension crane for 500 kg S.W.L., push design, crane 

girder length 6000 mm, crane runway 12000 mm long, suspended on 

I girder, with electric chain hoist, hoisting speed 1/4 m/min, height of lift 

3 m and push trolley. Festoon power supply. 


STAHLplus Info _ Raised 

single and double girder 

suspension cranes are 


KT-ZH double girder suspension crane 

The double girder construction permits the 

hoist to be raised up between the crane girders. 

Thus the available room height can be 

utilised even more efficiently than with single 

girder suspension cranes. 

Safe Crane Crane runway 

working 


Max. crane 

girder length 

Length Max. suspended 

clearance* 


500 11000 as required 5950 

1,000 8800 4100 

1,250 7500 3500 

1,600 6200 1000 

2,000 5300 750 

* Multiple section girder 

Single girder suspension crane loading a panel saw in a joinery shop. 

Double girder suspension crane with electric drive for lifting, cross and long travel, in a toolmaker’s shop. 

Example: 

Double girder suspension crane for 1,250 kg S.W.L. with electric drive, 

crane girder length 7000 mm, crane runway 15000 mm long, suspended 

on I girder, with electric chain hoist, hoisting speed 1/4 m/min, height of 

lift 3 m and electric trolley. Cross and long travel both 2-speed at a ratio 

of 1:4. Festoon power supply. 


23

24 


Fax enquiry for light crane systems 


Normally, a monorail conveyor or a 

suspension crane cannot simply be ordered 

from the catalogue with an order number. 

There are some points that have to be taken 

into consideration when selecting the parts, 

as experts in this field we will be pleased to do 

this on your behalf. 

Please fax us some data so that we can gain a 

rough idea of what you expect from your 

system. 

Our specialist in your area will advise you 

without obligation and help you find the 

optimum solution on site. You will incur neither 

advance costs nor any obligation! 

We will then send you a non-binding quotation 

fully meeting your expectations as regards 

technical features and price! 

* Dimension centre to centre runway rails (span) 

Please quote me the following KT 2000 system without obligation: 

Type of system: 

� Monorail runway � Single girder suspension crane � Double girder suspension crane 

Technical data: 

Safe working load ............................................ kg; Runway length ............................................... mm 

Crane span* ...................................................... mm; Crane girder length........................................ mm 

Dimension from ground to underside suspension structure ......................................................... mm 

Suspension structure on: 

� Profile girder � Concrete ceiling � Concrete truss � Wooden truss/joist 

Dimensions b:.......................................... b1:........................................h: ............................................. mm 

Concrete truss: � A, � B, � C, spacing between trusses/girders: ............................. mm 

Hoist: 

Electric chain hoist with � 1 or � 2 hoisting speeds: .............................................................m/min 

Height of lift .................................m 

Travelling speeds: 

Trolley: ........................................... � manual; � electrically powered, v = ..........................m/min 

Crane: ............................................ � manual; � electrically powered, v = ..........................m/min 

Power supply: 

Trolley: ........................................... � festoon cable with cable trolleys; � conductor line 

Crane: ............................................ � festoon cable with cable trolleys; � conductor line 

Voltage: 

Operating voltage........................V, ....................... Hz, Control voltage .................................. VAC 

Notes / sketch: enclosed 

Name/customer No. 

................................................................................................................................ 

Company 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Street/P.O. Box 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Post code/town 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Contact person 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Department/job title 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Telephone Fax 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Radio remote controls for cranes 

Increasingly the control pendants commonly used for floor-controlled cranes are being replaced by radio remote controls. The advantages of a 

radio remote control are not merely its increased ease of operation, but also in improved performance and increased safety of the crane system. 

Please note: these radio remote control systems are only possible in conjunction with a contactor control for the hoist or crane. 

There is a choice of three ergonomic radio transmitters: 

• "quadrix" compact transmitter with belt clip for 

single hand operation 

• "micron 6" pushbutton transmitter with graphic display 

• "technos" joystick transmitter for maximum convenience 

even in harsh conditions 

"FSE 736 radiobus" 

receiver 

The receiver for hoist 

applications and other 

stationary or mobile 

applications in industry. 

• Commands: 36 digital 

or 28 digital + 

8 analog 

• Output: relay 4 A / 

250 VAC 

• HF quality: -115 dBm / 

BER = 10 -2 

• Receiving aerial: 

external 

• Power supply: 42-115, 100-240 VAC 

• Dimensions: approx. 270x160x115 mm 

(LxWxD) 

• Operating temperature: -25°C to +70°C 

• Plastic or aluminium case, 

type of protection IP 65 

• Weight approx. 3500 g 

• Various serial and analog interfaces, 

CAN-Bus and Profibus-DP 

Matching transmitters: 

micron 6, technos 

"micron 6" pushbutton 

transmitter 

• Up to 22 commands (digital) 

+ emergency stop 

• Transmission frequency: 

400-475; 868-928 MHz 

• Internal rechargeable 

NiMH battery, 3.6 V / 

2100 mAh 

• Operating time approx. 

12 h/100% DC 

• Case in ABS plastic, 

impact resistant, standard 

shade orange, IP 65 protection 



(LxWxD) 


"FSE 516" receiver 

Ideally suitable for small 

hoists. 

• Commands: 16 digital + 

1 analog + infrared 

relay 

• Output: relay 4 A / 

250 VAC 

• H quality: -115 dBm / 

BER = 10 -2 

• Receiving aerial: internal 

• Power supply: 42-240 VAC 


(LxWxD) with plastic case 


• Plastic or aluminium case, 


• Weight approx. 1300 g or 3500 kg 

• CAN-Bus interface 


micron 6, quadrix, technos 

"quadrix" compact 

transmitter 

The ideal radio control 

transmitter for chain hoists, 

suspended monorails and 

crane systems, suitable for 

multi-receiver concept (MRC). 

• Up to 8 commands (digital) 

+ emergency stop 

• Transmission frequency: 

400-475; 868-928 MHz 

• Rechargeable NiMH 

battery, 3,6 V / 650 mAh 

• Operating time ap. 16 h/100% DC 

• Plastic case, type of protection IP 65 

• Weight approx. 330 g (incl. battery) 


(LxWxD) 


STAHLplus Info _ You will find information on 

STAHL CraneSystems’ new radio crane on page 5, or ask 

for detailed literature. Other radio systems on a radio crane 

(e.g. multi-receiver concept) and 

feedback systems are available. 

The radio remote control systems are adapted to your wishes and 

requirements. Let us know your application, we will work out a detailed 

quotation. 

The components shown below will give you a rough idea of the possibilities. 

"FSE 508" receiver 

Standard receiver, 

ideal for chain hoists, 

monorails or as part of a 

multi-receiver concept. 

• Commands: 8 (digital) 

• Output: relay 4 A / 250 VAC 

• HF quality: -95 dBm / BER = 10 -2 

• Receiving aerial: internal 

• Plastic case of 6PA 45/1 GF30 

(fibreglass reinforced), standard shade: 

orange, IP 65 protection 

• Power supply: 42-240 VAC 



(LxWxD) 



quadrix, technos (for MRC only) 

"technos" 

joystick 

transmitter 

The allround 

talent for 

highly 

demanding industrial use. Ergonomically 

designed for convenience and always ready 

at hand in hip or shoulder holster. 

• Commands: up to 32 (digital) or up to 24 

(digital) + 8 (proportional) + emergency stop 

• Transmission frequency: 400-475; 868-928 MHz 

• Rechargeable NiMH battery FuB 05 AA, 

6 V / 600 mAh 

• Operating time approx. 12 h/100% DC 

• Plastic case, type of protection IP 65 

• Weight approx. 1500 g (incl. battery) 

• Dimensions: approx. 236x140x165 mm (LxWxD) 


25

26 


STH 1 and STH 6 control pendants for contactor control 

The STH 1 is a robust control pendant for hoists and cranes. The STH 6 is a particularly compact 

control pendant if only one direction of motion needs to be controlled. The switch elements are 

two-step. Single-step control pendants and other switching functions on request. 

Model 

Item No. Price 

STH 1 

STH 6 

With test switch for 

op. hoist limit switch 

With horn switch 

No. of wires 

required 

[kg] 

x STH 1202-021 8 

17 390 71 21 9 

x 

x 

x 

x 

STH 1206-021 

STH 1215-021 

9 

9 

0.8 

17 390 70 21 9 

17 390 69 21 9 

x x x STH 1216-021 10 17 390 68 21 9 

x STH 1302-022 11 17 390 55 21 9 

x 

x 

x 

x 

STH 1306-022 

STH 1315-022 

12 

12 

1.1 

17 390 54 21 9 

17 390 53 21 9 

x x x STH 1316-022 13 17 390 52 21 9 

without 

control 

cable 

x STH 6102-009 5 0.4 17 390 84 21 9 STH 12..- STH 13..- STH 6... 

Technical data 

Rated operating data ~AC-15: A600 

Ue = 600 V, ie = 1.2 A 

Ue = 240 V, ie = 3 A 

10 A 

Conventional thermal current I the 

=DC-13: Q600 

Ue = 600 V, ie = 0.1 A 

Ue = 250 V, ie = 0.27 A 

Rated insulation voltage Ui 600 V; pollution degree 3 in acc. with IEC 947-1 

Contact operation: Emergency stop button: positive opening 

other: "n.c." or "n.o." without spring action 

Connection: min. 1x 0.5 mm²; max. 1x 2.5 mm² or 2x 1.5 mm² 

Short-circuit protection: fuse max. 10 A 

Ø of connection cable STH1: 8...26 mm; STH6: 7...15 mm 

Type of protection in acc. with IEC 529 IP 65 

Approvals UL, CSA 

Case Polypropylene RAL 3000 

Operating temperature Operation: -25°...+70° C; storage: -40°...+70° C 

Applied standards IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1, IEC 337-1, VDE 0660-200, NF C 63-146 

STH 2 control pendant for direct control 

Robust control pendant for direct control without contactors of hoist 

and travel motions of chain hoists up to a motor output of 1.6 kW. The 

switch elements are two-step. Single-step control pendants and other 

switching functions on request. 

Model 

No. of wires 

required 

Item No. Price 

x STH 2109-08 8 

[kg] 

0.5 17 390 48 21 9 

x STH 2209-00 12 1.6 17 390 46 21 9 

without 

control 

cable 

Technical data 

Rated operating data 

Category of use in acc. with IEC 947-3, annexe A AC 3, AC 4; 1.6 kW - 240 V; 1.6 kW - 400 V 

Conventional thermal current I the 

12 A 

Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 V; pollution degree 3 in acc. with IEC 947-1 

Contact operation: with spring action 

Connection: 1x 2.5 mm² oder 2x 1.5 mm² 

Short-circuit protection: fuse max. 10 A 

Ø of connection cable 10...22 mm 

Type of protection in acc. with IEC 529 IP 65 

Case Fibreglass-reinforced polyester, RAL 3000 

Operating temperature Operation: -25°...+70° C 

Storage: -40°...+70° C 

Applied standards IEC 947-3, EN 60947-3, VDE 0660-107, NF C 63-130 

Control cable 

Surcharge per metre control cable, wired, incl. strain relief and STAHL plug on request. 

Switch elements 

= 

= 

Switch elements 

= 

STH 21... STH 22... 

= 

STH 1... STH 6... 

Symbols for switch elements 

= 

= 

= 

Emergency stop 

2 speeds 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Off-standard versions: other heights and widths, height adjustment with/without rack-and-pinion 

jacks, other wheels, support spindle on request. 

KPK gantry cranes 

KPK gantry cranes are suitable for use indoors and outdoors in combination 

with a manual or electric hoist. They are easy to move on flat, firm 

ground. The clear width LB can be variably adjusted by means of the clamp 

connection between supports and girder. The crane is easy to dismantle. 


• Steered wheels equipped with 4-fold direction locks 

• Wheel brakes fitted on 2 wheels 

• Up to 1,000 kg safe working load: wheel Ø 200 mm with Vulkolan coating 

• Above 1,000 kg safe working load: wheel Ø 250 mm with polyamide wheels 

• Can also be moved under load on flat, firm surfaces 

• Painted orange, RAL 2000 

• Scope of supply: crane with crane test book with pre-acceptance 

and in-process inspection, operating instructions, without hoist 

• Accessories: hoist, electric/manual, power supply on request 

Safe work- Model L GH LH LB R Flange Weight Item 


width 

No. 


500 KPK 0,5-2,5 3535 2662 2500 3000 1500 73 205 810 326 0 

KPK 0,5-3,0 3535 3162 3000 3000 1500 73 225 810 327 0 

KPK 0,5-3,5 4535 3682 3500 4000 2000 82 250 810 328 0 

1,000 KPK 1,0-2,5 3535 2702 2500 3000 1500 91 285 810 329 0 

KPK 1,0-3,0 3535 3202 3000 3000 1500 91 310 810 330 0 

KPK 1,0-3,5 4535 3722 3500 4000 2000 100 350 810 331 0 

2,000 KPK 2,0-3,0 3650 3242 3000 3000 1500 110 365 810 332 0 

KPK 2,0-3,5 3650 3742 3500 3000 2000 110 410 810 335 0 

KPK 2,0-4,0 4650 4262 4000 4000 2000 120 450 810 336 0 

3,200 KPK 3,2-3,0 3650 3292 3000 3000 1500 135 440 810 337 0 

KPK 3,2-3,5 3650 3792 3500 3000 2000 135 550 810 338 0 

KPK 3,2-4,0 4650 4322 4000 4000 2000 150 600 810 339 0 

V gantry cranes 


find suitable hoists on 

page 50 ff. 

V gantry cranes are suitable for use indoors and outdoors together 

with a manual or electric hoist. The pin connection ensures that the 

cranes are quick and easy to assemble. They are easy to move on flat, 

firm ground. 


• Steered wheels equipped with 4-fold direction locks 

• Wheel brakes fitted on 2 wheels 

• With steel wheels as standard, 

rubber wheels, ratchet drive against surcharge 

• Can traverse under load 

• Painted orange, RAL 2000 

• Scope of supply: crane with crane test book with pre-acceptance 

and in-process inspection, operating instructions, without hoist 

Safe work- Model L GH LH R S Beam Weight 


PE 


1,000 V-103 3000 4000 3785 2100 2090 200 500 

V-104 4000 3785 3090 200 530 

V-105 5000 3785 4090 200 580 

V-106 6000 3765 5090 220 650 

2,000 V-204 4000 5000 4740 2600 3090 240 630 

V-205 5000 4710 4090 270 700 

V-206 6000 4710 5090 270 780 

V-207 7000 4680 6090 300 900 

3,200 V-304 4000 5000 4680 2600 3100 300 750 

V-305 5000 4680 4100 300 850 

V-306 6000 4650 5080 330 950 

V-307 7000 4620 6080 360 1100 

5,000 V-505 5000 5000 4615 2600 4100 360 1000 

V-506 6000 4575 5090 400 1100 

V-507 7000 4525 6090 450 1180 

V-508 8000 4525 7090 450 1300 

Please note: A crane acceptance test is necessary from 1,000 kg S.W.L. 

27

28 


Accessory: movable trestles 

Enables the unloaded gantry crane to be 

moved after erection. 

The "forks" on the feet allow the trestles to 

remain in place during erection and dismantling. 

When under load, the spring-loaded casters 

are pushed in. The trestles then rest directly 

on the feet. 

The feet can be individually height-adjusted. 

1 set movable trestles = 4 "forks" 

Aluminium gantry cranes 

They are available in many different versions. 

Please enquire separately for suitable accessories 

and other designs! 


• The crane to take along with you 

• Easy to transport 

• Height adjustable 

• Only plug connections, no bolt connections 

• Quick to erect 

• Low deadweight 

• For lifting in inaccessible places 

The scope of supply comprises: 2 trestles, 1 aluminium profile girder, 

1 lockable push trolley, without hoist (see page 50 ff). 

Version Safe work- L a c Weight Item 


No. 


With hinged 

trestles 

1,000 4000 1360-2360 

1750-3000 

2325-4025 

1,500 4000 1360-2360 

1750-3000 

2325-4025 

1295 

1743 

2238 

1295 

1743 

2238 

95 

105 

166 

102 

126 

172 

With heavy-duty polyurethane 

foam tyres 

For moving the unloaded crane 

indoors and outdoors. 

For gantry 

crane 

All stationary 

cranes 

810 859 0 

810 354 0 

810 352 0 

810 860 0 

810 361 0 

810 358 0 



No. 


With hinged 1,000 4000 1735-2735 1295 177 810 571 0 

trestles 

6000 1735-2735 1295 225 810 572 0 

and 

double girder 

1,000 4000 

6000 

2124-3374 

2124-3374 

1743 

1743 

187 

235 

810 861 0 

810 862 0 

1,000 4000 2709-4409 2238 237 810 573 0 

6000 2709-4409 2238 285 810 574 0 

2,000 4000 2227-3477 1752 225 810 863 0 

6000 2227-3477 1752 273 810 864 0 

3,000 4000 

6000 

STAHLplus Info _ Subject to technical and 

dimensional modifications to the gantry cranes 

(pages 27-29). 

2645-3795 

2645-3795 

2222 

2222 

267 

351 

810 865 0 

810 866 0 

With heavy-duty polyurethane 

tread 

For moving the unloaded crane 

indoors. 

For gantry 

crane 

All stationary 

cranes 

Item 

No. 

810 575 0 

Item 

No. 

810 576 0 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Accessory: Cables/power supply 

The aluminium gantry crane is supplied ready 

for connection and use. 

• Three-phase AC current 400 V/16 A, 50 Hz 

• Plug connection for electric chain hoist, 


• All electrical components are suitable for 

indoor and outdoor use under normal 

operating conditions 

Price on request. 

Off-standard aluminium cranes and accessories 

Here is a small cross-section of what we can offer. Please enquire! 

Off-standard aluminium gantry crane for use in maintenance work in pumping stations, e.g. 

sewage farms. 



No. 


Can be moved 

under load 

with hinged 

trestles 

1,000 4000 1720-2120 

2160-3010 

2490-3790 

1,500 4000 1720-2120 

2160-3010 

2490-3790 

1504 

2012 

2328 

1504 

2012 

2328 

166 

192 



50 ff. 

Off-standard aluminium gantry crane, can be moved under load, with four independently 

extendable and retractable feet. Particuarlly suitable for restricted spaces. 

214 

172 

198 

220 

810 847 0 

810 848 0 

810 849 0 

810 850 0 

810 851 0 

810 852 0 



No. 


Can be moved 1,000 4000 2100-2500 1504 237 810 565 0 

under load 

6000 2100-2500 1504 285 810 566 0 

with double 

girder and 

hinged trestles 

1,000 

1,000 

4000 

6000 

4000 

2540-3390 

2540-3390 

2875-4175 

2012 

2012 

2328 

263 

311 

285 

810 567 0 

810 568 0 

810 569 0 

6000 2875-4175 2328 333 810 570 0 

1,500 4000 

6000 

8000 

1,500 4000 

6000 

8000 

1,500 4000 

6000 

8000 

2100-2500 

2100-2500 

2100-2500 

2540-3390 

2540-3390 

2540-3390 

2875-4175 

2875-4175 

2875-4175 

Double girder 

Power supply with 

energy chain 

1504 

1504 

1504 

2012 

2012 

2012 

2328 

2328 

2328 

237 

285 

321 

263 

311 

347 

285 

333 

369 

810 868 0 

810 853 0 

810 856 0 

810 869 0 

810 854 0 

810 857 0 

810 870 0 

810 855 0 

810 858 0 

Single girder 

Power supply with 

PUR helical conductor 

29

30 


Aluminium derrick 

with manual winch 

Aluminium derrick 

Serves to lift loads in particular in places 

which are inaccessible for conventional 

equipment. 

The aluminium derrick can be folded up 

(2000 mm long). 

• Enormous adjusting range thanks to 

telescopic supports 

• Stability guaranteed 

• Non-slip rubber-metal discs on the 

bottom of the adjustable supports 

Safe working load Weight Item 

[kg] [kg] 

Standard 

No. 

1,000 54 810 369 0 

With manual winch 

1,000 74 810 867 0 

Aluminium derrick type D 

The aluminium derrick type D is collapsible and can easily be transported when folded up. 

It is equipped with a rotating suspension ring for attaching a hoist. The supports consist of 

aluminium sections. 

Standard design: collapsible, with pointed tips, without hoist. 

Other designs on request. 

Accessories: On request, the derrick can be equipped with rubber discs and/or chain guards 

instead of pointed tips. (Price on request). 

Safe working 


Model L 

min./max. 

H *2 

min./max. 

Spread 

min./max. 

*2 


250 

500 

500 

1,000 

D-250 

D-500 

D-500/EN795*1 

D-1000 

1180/1880 

1500/2500 

1500/2500 

1780/3000 

940/1580 

1150/2050 

1150/2050 

1380/2540 

950/1500 

1200/1950 

1200/1950 

1650/2350 

Weight Item 

No. 

*1 Approval for transport of persons up to 150 kg in acc. with EN 795. Equipped with rubber discs and chain guards. 

*2 At max. spread (25°). 

Aluminium derrick type DW 

The aluminium derrick type DW is equipped 

with a manual winch with load pressure brake 

which holds the load securely in any position. 

The supports consist of aluminium sections. 

Standard design: collapsible, with pointed 

tips, with manual rope winch and load hook. 


Accessories: On request the derrick can be 

equipped with rubber discs and/or chain 

guards instead of pointed tips. 

(Price on request). 

Safe working 


Model L 

min./max. 

H *2 

min./max. 

Spread 

min./max. 

*2 

Overall 

lifting 

height 

10 

17 

17 

27 

[kg] [mm] [m] [kg] 

200 DW-200 

500 DW-500 

1,000 DW-1000 

*2 At max. spread (25°). 

1180/1880 

2100/2500 

2400/3000 

940/1580 

1700/2100 

1900/2400 

950/1500 

1500/2000 

1900/2500 

STAHLplus Info _ You will find 

suitable hoists on page 50 ff. 

Derrick type P/PL for passenger 

transport available on request. 

5 

5 

7 

810 422 0 

810 423 0 

810 424 0 

810 425 0 

Foot designs 

for D und DW 

Standard with pointed tip 

with rubber disc and chain 

guard 

with pointed tip and chain 

guard 

Weight Item 

No. 

20 

35 

45 

810 426 0 

810 427 0 

810 428 0 

01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

WAMPFLER festoon power supply 

The festoon system is supplied complete. 

It is suspended from the beam by means of 

support arms and girder clips. 

Item 

1 C-rail 

2 End stop 

3 Cable trolley 

4 Collector trolley 

5 630 mm support arm 

+2 girder clips 

6 Rail coupler 


• C-rail section, Sendzimir-galvanised 

• Cable loop: 0.8 m 

• 1 PVC flat cable 4x2.5 mm² 

• Max. permissible travelling speed 100 m/min 

• Max. suspended clearance 1600 mm 

• Cable length = 1.1 x rail length + 3 m installation allowance 

• 630 mm support arm with girder clips (standard) 

VAHLE plastic conductor line power supply 

The 4-pole "KBSL 4/40" plastic enclosed 

conductor line is supplied complete with 

mounting and connection accessories, 

support arms, conductor trolley and towing 

arm. 


• Rated current 40 A, 100% DC 

• Max. voltage 600 V, 50 Hz 

• Number of poles: 4 (3-phase + PE) 

• Max. travelling speed 100 m/min 

• Max. suspended clearance 2000 mm 

• 600 mm support arm with girder clips (standard) 

• Weight: 2 kg/m 

• Standards: DIN EN 60204 - 32 

Item 

1 End cap 

2 40 A enclosed conductor line 

3 Rail holder 

4 40 A conductor trolley 

incl. 1 towing arm 

5 Rail coupler 

7 Track support bracket 

8 Towing arm 

9 End clamp 

10 Cable 

11 Terminal box 

12 Rising mains (by others) 

13 Main isolator 

Basic package 

Items 2, 4, 8, 9, 11, 13 

Length-dependent components (price per metre) 

Items 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 10 

6 600 mm support arm 

+2 girder clips 

7 End feed 

8 Rising mains (by others) 

9 Main isolator 

Basic package 

Items 1, 4, 7, 9 

Length-dependent components (price per metre) 

Items 2, 3, 5, 6 

Item 

No. 

810 070 0 

810 070 9 

Item 

No. 

810 384 0 

810 384 9 

31

32 


T80 radio remote control for chain hoists 

The economical small control for optimised 

operating cycles ensuring a high standard of 

safety. 

T80 radio remote controls offer an economical 

and convenient solution, not just in 

combination with hoists, conveyor belts, crabs 

and pumps. 

In this catalogue we also offer you a 

mounting kit for fitting the control to 

STAHL CraneSystems chain hoists. 

General system data 

Frequency 433-434 MHz (69 channels) 

Range max. 50 / 200 m 

Operating temperature approx. -20° C ... +70° C 

Aerial 

Transmitter TX1 

integrated 

Protection IP 54 

Dimensions 160 x 70 x 35 mm (LxWxH) 

Weight 270 g 

Power supply battery, approx. 30h / 100% DC 

Receiver RX1 

Protection IP 55 

Dimensions 145 x 140 x 55 mm (LxWxH) 

Weight 650 g 

Power supply 24/48/115/230 VAC 

STAHL CraneSystems electric chain hoist complete with radio remote control 


• High standard of safety thanks to microprocessor 

technology and 4 bit addressing with 

over 16 million possibilities. Unintentional 

activation is thus reliably prevented 

• Active EMERGENCY STOP system in 

compliance with EN 945-1 CAT. 3 with 

2 EMERGENCY STOP relays 

• Transmitter disable time programmable 0-12 min. 

• Transmitter for 2 receivers available on 

request. Receivers can be controlled independently 

of one another or simultaneously 

(tandem operation) 

• Can be used with contactor control only 

• Display for battery charge 

N.B.: The battery integrated into the portable 

transmitter must be recharged as necessary. 

No separate replacement battery is available. 

Model Item 

No. 

Radio system 

(Transmitter + Receiver) 

12/24 V: T80S-06A-10B-002 

48 V: T80S-06C-10B-002 

230 V T80S-06B-10B-002 

Mounting set 

Transmitter T80TX-MX-10B 

10 buttons (6 function relays, 

2 safety relayss) 

Receiver T80RX-MQ-06B * 

Case with 10-pole standard 

plug, alternating/locking 

function 2x1 

810 579 0 

810 580 0 

810 581 0 

810 403 0 

810 577 0 

810 578 0 

* Please state control voltage when ordering receiver! 

Electric chain hoists from STAHL CraneSystems are the innovative classics in material handling. In combination with a radio remote control they 

facilitate your day-to-day work many times over. The operator can move around freely and choose the optimum position as regards visibility and 

safety margin. We are thus presenting to you in this catalogue a small selection from our comprehensive chain hoist range - equipped with 

T80 radio remote control. 

STAHLplus Info _ We will be pleased to send you detailed information 

and technical data such as e.g. dimensions. Make use of our information 

service! 

Further hoists are to be found on page 43 ff. 

Pre-disconnection is obligatory with travel speeds of 16 m/min 

(BGV D6). 

Safe working load kg 250 500 1,000 1,600 2,500 3,200 5,000 

Hoisting speed m/min 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 2/8 1/4 0.75/3.2 

Number of chain falls 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 

Model ST0502-8/2 ST1005-8/2 ST2010-8/2 ST3016-8/2 ST5025-8/2 ST3016-8/2 ST5025-6/1 

Output kW 0.4/0.1 0.8/0.2 1.5/0.37 2.3/0.57 3.8/0.9 2.3/0.57 3.0/0.76 

Duty cycle % DC 35/15 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 

Switching operations/hour 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 

Travelling speed m/min 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 

Control Contactor control with remote control 

Supply voltage, 3~ 380-415 V, 50 Hz 

Weights - electric trolley 

Item Nos. / prices 

kg 34 59 88 107 166 130 201 

Chain hoist with electric trolley 

and radio remote control, 

incl. travel limit switches, 

without installation 

Subject to technical modifications 


01_08EN.FM

01_08EN.FM 

Information plates for cranes 

Buffers with brackets 

The buffers with brackets are welded onto the lower flange of the runway. 

Depending on the trolley, the buffer can be bolted onto the short or the long side of the bracket. 

PA runway endstops 

The runway endstops are clamped onto the runway. Drilling and welding is not necessary for 

assembly. 

Not suitable for trolleys with guide rollers. 

Model b 

max. 

l Safe working 

load of hoist 

max. 

E max. 

[mm] [mm] [kg] [Nm] [kg] [mm] 

PA 50/200 200 350 3200 200 700 100 01 740 24 27 0 

PA 50/300 

PA 50/500 

300 

500 

450 

650 

to 

125 

01 740 25 27 0 

01 740 26 27 0 

*1 Max. weight of hoist and trolley including counterweight 

*2 E = 0.1415 x mka x v² x a [Nm], mka [t], v [m/min] 

a = with travel limit switch: 0.72; a = without travel limit switch: 1.0 

v max.: 20 m/min 

Uni buffer stop 

*2 

Trolley 

(crab) 

*1 

Wheel 

Ø 

Item No. 

31 240 00 23 0 

Item No. 

The Uni buffer stop is clamped onto the runway. No drilling or welding is required for mounting. 

Not suitable for trolleys with guide rollers. 

For runway girders with parallel flanges only! 

Safe 

working 

load of hoist 

Max. permissible 

hoist weight 

Max. permissible 

approach speed 

[kg] [kg] [m/min] 

125-2,000 180 28 

2,500 225 25 

3,200 225 22 

4,000 325 20 

5,000 600 16 

6,300 600 14 

8,000 1500 12 

10,000 1500 10 

Hand signals for guidance (DE) 

All hand signals important for crane operation for communication 

between loader and crane operator. 

PVC design, 600 x 400 mm 

Crane hazard (DE) 

Sturdy aluminium design, 200 x 300 mm 

Two buffers are required for suspended monorails. 

Flange widths possible: 8 - 25 mm. 

Size Flange 

width 

[mm] 

Item No. 

1 91 - 150 577 164 0 

2 160 - 190 577 165 0 

3 200 - 220 577 166 0 

4 300 577 167 0 

Crane main switch (DE) 

In compliance with the regulations, designates the main 

switch of the crane or electric hoist enabling current to 

be disconnected for repairs or inspections. 

Sturdy aluminium design, 170 x 70 mm 

Crane operating regulations (DE/EN) 

Notice from Employers’ Liability Insurance Association as per 

§§29-43 of accident prevention regulations "Cranes" (BGV D 6). 

Cellophane-covered cardboard, A4 with eyelet for hanging up 

Item No. 

810 397 0 

810 398 0 

810 399 0 

DE: 810 400 0 

EN: 810 564 0 

33

34 


Other supply ranges STAHL CraneSystems 

Suspension complete with clamping cheeks 

Handling devices 

Customised handling devices are often the 

first choice for particular applications. Let us 

know your application, we will advise you and 

optimise your material flow. 

1 Safe handling of aircraft engine shells with suction 

grab 

2 Rail-guided manipulator with grab 

3 Articulated arm manipulator with grab 

4 Rail-bound telescopic rigid lifting axle, radio controlled 

5 Lifting pillar with articulated arm 

2 

Extreme ambient conditions (foundry) 

STAHL MOVEit 

Safe, ergonomic load handling device for single 

hand use with electric chain hoists 


• Compatible _ for connecting to ST chain hoists 

• Economical _ can be plugged in fast and 

easily, no wiring necessary 

• Safe _ the power flux chain-load hook is not 

interrupted. The load chain is led through 

the MOVEit to the load hook. 

Surcharge when purchasing an ST electric 

chain hoist on request. 

1 

Maintenance-free suspensions for nearly all light crane systems 

This innovative suspension is used in rugged ambient conditions 

(foundries) and in the motor industry. 

The advantages are: low deadweight, cost-effective from reduction in 

maintenance costs, safe and maintenance-free. 

Further suspension variants available on request. 

Size Used for Item No. 

I complete with clamping cheeks 02 751 06 28 0 

without clamping cheeks 02 751 07 28 0 

II complete with clamping cheeks 02 751 04 28 0 

without clamping cheeks 02 751 05 28 0 

3 4 

Crane bottom hook block with electrically 

rotating load hook 

2-sheave crane 

bottom hook 

block similar to 

H227-4 with electromechanicallly 

driven load hook, 

ready wired, with 

terminal box 

(without electric 

control). 



01_08EN.FM

STAHLplus hoists are concentrated 

power. Whether electrically or manually 

operated – they always allow for 

easy lifting, moving and lowering of 

loads just as required. The wide S.W.L. 

range extending up to 50,000 kg and 

the flexible trolleys secure your material 

flow on all common beam profiles. 

Hoists 

35

36 

Hoists 

The SH wire rope hoist 

Flexible 

The SH range from STAHL CraneSystems is a world-wide optimum in crane and hoist technology, 

compact, powerful and particularly maintenance-friendly. 

Users, crane manufacturers and system manufacturers appreciate the modular system, built up 

on the basis of tried-and-tested, low-maintenance series components. 

This varied range permits use in individual solutions thanks to the practically unlimited combinations 

of the modules. 

The SH range from STAHL CraneSystems is available for the S.W.L. range from 500 kg to 

25,000kg. 

They can be used in stationary version or complete with trolley or crab on standard cranes, 

off-standard cranes or in system manufacturing. 

Naturally the SH wire rope hoist programme is also available in explosion-protected design for 

use in Zone 1, 2, 21 and 22. 

You will find wire rope hoists 

in explosion-protected design 

on page 84 of this catalogue. 

• Universal 

five frame sizes with 26 S.W.L. variants 

• Flexible 

stationary design and trolleys in flexible 

configurations, for cranes and system 

manufacturers 

• Compact 

the 'U' shape results in a short overall length 

• Cost-effective 

practically maintenance-free, low wear, 

long life 

• Demanding 

high-quality safety components as standard 

for increased safety at work 

• Safe 

available in explosion-protected design in 

compliance with ATEX as an option 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Perfect technology in detail 

Stationary - single-grooved drum 

Use as lifting and towing equipment, 

either stationary or mounted 

on trolleys. 

The rope drum is single-grooved. 

Stationary - double-grooved drum 

The double-grooved version is 

available if true vertical lift is 

required. 

OE double rail crab 

The extremely compact construction 

permits low approach and 

headroom dimensions. 

Various track gauges can be 

supplied for all S.W.L. ranges. 

KE monorail trolley 

For monorail runways and single 

girder cranes. 

The trolley headroom is extremely 

low, thus long hook paths are 

possible in low-ceilinged rooms. 

UE monorail trolley 

For monorail runways and single 

girder cranes. 

The trolley width is extremely low, 

thus small clearance dimensions 

are possible. 

DKE articulated 

trolleys 

These trolleys are 

used on runways with 

narrow radii of bend. 

37

38 

Hoists 

The AS wire rope hoist 

Tried and tested 

The AS 7 range from STAHL CraneSystems supplements the SH range in the upper S.W.L. range 

from 25,000 kg to 100,000 kg. 

This wire rope hoist is used as a stationary lifting or towing device or with crabs on bridge 

cranes or in systems. 

The narrow and compact construction is of particular advantage here, the overall width 

permits it to be used when space is restricted. 

On the AS 7 wire rope hoist, motor, gear and rope drum are lined up behind one another on 

a common axis. 

This central gear concept permits highperformance and high loads. 

The AS 7 wire rope hoist programme is available as an option in explosion-protected design in 

acc. with ATEX for use in Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 21 and Zone 22. 




• Up-to-date 

innovative drive technology in the form of 

cylindrical motor with monodisc magnetic 

brake 

• Flexible 

outstandingly suited for integration into 

material handling systems 

• Advantageous 

its construction with motor and drum on one 

axis permits it to be used in restricted 

spaces 

• Maintenance-friendly 

all important elements are easily accessible, 

lifetime lubrication of all gear steps in an oil 

bath 

• Safe 



02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

The SHW 8 winch 

Powerful 

The main components of the SHW 8 rope winch from STAHL CraneSystems derive from the 

reliable SH programme. 

The systematically modular construction of this series permits almost unlimited combinations of 

the sub-assemblies to provide individual solutions, and ensures rational production at a high 

level of quality. 

The SHW 8 winch is designed for safe working loads up to 160,000 kg. 

Its extremely compact overall height derives from the special design of the rope drive. 

The winch is extremely versatile thanks to its flexible drive technology, its easy-to-use plug 

connections and extensive special equipment. 

As with all STAHL CraneSystems hoists, the SHW 8 winch is also available as an option in 

explosion-protected design. 




• Flexible 

field-proven sub-assemblies from the SH 

programme, bolt-on components and plug 

connections for simple transport and 

commissioning 

• Powerful 

drives with different speeds, stepless speed 

control and smooth starting characteristics 

• Versatile 

extensive special equipment such as 

additional holding brake, space heater, 

maintenance platform, large-format load 

display, travel limit switches 


largely maintenance-free, electrical 

components easy to replace thanks to plug 

connections 

• Safe 



39

40 

Hoists 

SH / AS 7 and SHW 8 winch programme 

Model Safe working 

load up to [kg] 

⊗ Standard 

● Option 

SH 3 3,200 

Standard reeving Reeving for 

true vertical lift 

Stationary Double rail 

crab 

Monorail trolley 

OE KE UE DKE 

⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ 

SH 4 

SH 5 

6,300 

12,500 1/1, 2/1, 4/1 

2/2, 4/2 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

SHR 6 16,000 ⊗ ⊗ ⊗ ● ● 

SH 6 

AS 7 

25,000 

100,000 2/1, 4/1, 6/1, 8/1 

2/2, 4/2, 8/2 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

⊗ 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

SHW 8 160,000 - 4/2-1, 8/2-1, 12/2-1 ⊗ ⊗ 

TDC Twin Dive Concept _ doubly safe and reliable 

New hoist for transporting molten metals 

Cost-effective 

• Use of standard components 

• Identical construction for operating and 

safety brake 

• Up to 60% higher safe working load when 

not transporting molten metals 

Safe 

• Brake does not need to be "run free" when 

starting the lowering process 

• The twin drive concept prevents the load 

dropping even if the gear should break 

• Two brakes with manual release for 

emergency lowering - the load does not 

need to be "recovered" 

Reliable 

• Smooth emergency braking 

• Friction linings are not constantly pressed 

together, there is no danger of them sticking 

• Long-lived thanks to robust, fully enclosed 

system 

For transporting molten metals or similarly dangerous goods such as acids or lyes, hoists must meet the standard DIN EN 14492-2. The hoists 

must be so designed that the load cannot drop even if a component in the power flux should fail. 

The new special hoist on twin drive concept (TDC) is STAHL CraneSystems’ solution for this difficult requirement. It offers maximum safety 

when transporting molten metals from 5,000 to 40,000 kg. 

Wire rope hoists on twin drive concept are equipped as standard with two motor-gear units. The two motors are always controlled 

synchronously. 

The brakes mounted on both motors are designed so that in an emergency each one is capable of braking or holding the load by itself. 

Both brakes are activated in conjunction and function as operating and holding brakes. 

All drives are monitored by STAHL CraneSystems condition monitoring systems. 

Safety-relevant electronics are in category of safety 3. 

New 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Off-standard solutions with wire rope hoists 

Power station _ SH 6 wire rope hoist with UE monorail trolley, true vertical lift, 

height of lift 75 m. 

DKE articulated trolleys are used on runways with narrow radii of bend. They 

are equipped with guide rollers and travel around sharp bends with minimum 

wear. 

Tool manufacture _ Here AS 7 wire rope hoists are used for true vertical lifting 

and lowering. High safe working loads and heights of lift are required. 

Locomotive manufacture _ The three off-standard cranes with 6 SH 5 wire rope 

hoists have room to move in the large 52 x 85 m shop and if required can be 

controlled in conjunction from a single radio remote control. 

Motor production _ The AS 7 wire rope hoists are equipped with maintenance 

platforms to permit maintenance work to be carried out safely. The ramshorn 

hooks can be rotated electrically for precise handling of the loads. 

41

42 

Hoists 

Chain hoists in series 

The ST standard programme 

Tried and tested umpteen 

thousands of times! 

• Maximum safety 

provided by patented suspension directly on 

the chain guide 

• Optimum utilisation of space 

with short headroom dimensions 

• Precise and flexible 

from 2 speeds as standard (not ST0501-8) 

• Long life 

in acc. with FEM, "power reserves" included 

• Low maintenance costs 

from long-life brake and low-wear slipping 

clutch 


thanks to innovative chain drive 

• Fast availability 

You order - we deliver immediately 

STAHLplus Info _ Spare parts 

for hoists directly from the 

manufacturer. 

Safety advice _ Chain hoists 

that can be moved by means 

of push or reel-type trolleys 

are subject to the accident 

prevention regulation BGV D6. 

ST chain hoists in explosionprotected 

design are to be 

found on page 85 of this 

catalogue. 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Chain hoist with hook suspension 

A7 

ha598v 

A2 

A3 

Chain hoist with push and electric trolley 

125 - 500 kg (push trolley only) 

A7 

A4 

125 - 500 kg (electric trolley only) 

ha596v 

1,000 - 5,000 kg (push and electric trolley) 

B6 

only with 

electric 

trolley 

B7 B2 

266 

ha597env 

B5 

B3 

A2 ha599v A4 

A7 

B7 

123 

274 

A2 

B5 

A9 

A8 

A9 

50-193 

151 272 

only with 

electric 

trolley 

B3 

A9 

B4 

B2 

A4 

A9 

A1 

3500 

B1 

3500 

C1 

3500 

B1 

3500 

Advantages by the dozen 

Ready to use chain hoists from stock 

We have compiled the most commonly purchased chain hoists from the the world’s most 

distinctive and comprehensive range, the ST. The advantages for you: a speedy general view of 

our standard range, a speedy decision for a quality hoist from STAHL CraneSystems, speedy 

delivery combined with the lowest price. 

• Maximum safety ensured by 

patented suspension directly on 

the chain guide 

• Low-maintenance, extremely 

simple checking and replacement 

of chain sprocket thanks to 

overmounted shaft 

• Height of lift 3 m 

• Powerful, robust hoist motor with 

steady performance and long 

service life 

• Newly developed ergonomic 

STH control pendant 

• The ingenious safety slipping 

clutch protects against overload 

and limits the hoisting path 

• Hard-wearing, surface-hardened 

and galvanised load chain 

• Simple electrical connection by 

means of plug connectors for 

control pendant and travel motor 

• Each chain hoist is tested with at 

least 25% overload 

1 Brake 

2 Motor 

3 Suspension 

4 Slipping clutch 

5 Gear 

6 Chain guide 

7 Chain anchorage 

9 Control 

10 Bottom hook 

block 

11 Chain box 

Safe working load kg 125 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 3,200 5,000 

Hoisting speed m/min 8 2/8 2/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 0.75/3.2 

Chain falls 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 

Type ST0501-8 ST0501-8/2 ST0502-8/2 ST0502-8/2 ST1005-8/2 ST2010-8/2 ST3016-8/2 ST5025-6/1 

Output kW 0.2 0.2/0.05 0.4/0.1 0.4/0.1 0.8/0.2 1.5/0.37 2.3/0.57 3.0/0.76 

Duty cycle % DC 40 35/15 35/15 35/15 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 

Switching operations/h c/h 240 240/480 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 

Travelling speed m/min 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 

Control Contactor 

Supply voltage, 3~ 380-415 V, 50 Hz 

Dimensions [mm] 

Chain hoist with hook A1 367 367 367 428 432 547 575 697 

suspension 

A2 238 238 238 238 402 496 496 522 

A3 385 385 385 385 514 590 677 664 

A4 281 281 281 281 352 398 393 466 

A7 145 145 145 145 135 181 181 206 

A8 153 153 153 153 133 158 158 154 

A9 20 20 20 26 24 29 33 41 

Chain hoist with trolley B1/C1 413/230 413/230 413/230 474/285 437/- 545/- 586/- 707/- 

B2 164 164 164 164 242 302 310 480 

B3 425 425 425 425 519 589 689 672 

B4 - - - - 300 330 338 480 

B5 62 62 62 62 96 102 113 149 

B6 - - - - 338 345 341* 403* 

B7 42...180 42...180 42...180 42...180 58...300 66...300 66...300 82...300 

Weights [kg] 

with hook suspension kg 18 18 18 18 41 75 82 138 

with push trolley kg 24 24 24 26 53 101 112 - 

with electric trolley 

Prices 

kg 34 34 34 36 62 110 130 201 

Chain hoist 

with hook suspension 

Prices on request 

Chain hoist 

with push trolley 


Chain hoist 



* The travel motor is mounted on the opposite side 

Subject to technical and dimensional modifications. 

43

44 

Hoists 


Off-standard chain hoist versions 

Chain hoists for particular tasks and requirements 

We are the specialists with the greatest experience in this field. 

Tell us what your problem is - we will be pleased to advise you and 

together we can work out the optimum solution. 

The new STD Vario dual chain hoist offers greater flexibility as the distance between 

the hooks can be adjusted electrically. Thanks to the precisely adjustable 

spacing, the load is always safely attached. 

adjustable spacing 

between hooks 

Thanks to the electrically adjustable spacing between the hooks, goods of 

varying lengths can be lifted and transported without difficulty and without 

using any additional speader beam. 

Further advantages: safe attachment of load, no loss of headroom, simple 

power supply, absolute synchronicity, load hooks cannot be displaced 

inadvertently during lifting and travelling. 

Safe working load from 2 x 500 kg to 2 x 3200 kg. 

Double girder suspension crane with two electric chain hoists for transporting long loads 

up to 5,000 kg with radio remote control (the illustration shows a version for 2x 250 kg). 

Full utilisation of height of lift. The crane hook can be raised up to the lower 

flange of the girder. Design with a dual chain hoist (two chain falls are driven 

simultaneously by one chain sprocket). 

Standard 

headroom 

Short 

headroom 

Extra short 

headroom 

The STK extra short headroom trolley, the hoist that doesn’t waste a single 

millimetre of space . 

Further advantages: extremely space-saving construction, patented chain drive 

for smooth, vibration-free lifting of load, no tilting of hook cross-bar thanks to 

2 separate load chains. 

Headrooms min 136 mm (500 kg), 

max. 210 mm (5000 kg) 

Chain hoists with extremely high heights of lift in the service of the environment: 

always ready for use as maintenance hoists! Heights of lift up to 170 m available. 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 


Hoists for the entertainment industry in 

compliance with BGV - C1 

ST chain hoist with multiple falls 

Extra short headrooms Cantilever crab 

STAHLplus Info _ Electric belt hoists and 

compact, light maintenance chain hoists 

for 230 V / 50 Hz available on request. 

Twin chain hoist for great heights of lift 

Big Bag design Coupled chain hoists for 4-point load take-up 

45

46 

Lubricants 

Hoists 

The special lubricants for wire ropes and chains considerably extend the service life of the suspension elements 

and also increase safety. 

Advantages provided by special lubricants 

• Resistant to corrosive acids, lyes, salt water 

and steam 

• Dissolve and prevent formation of corrosion 

and rust 

• High penetration capacity ensures internal 

lubrication of wire ropes 

• Excellent cleaning and lubricating capacity 

• Reduce friction and thus wear 

• Prevent electro-corrosion 

Packaging Item 

No. 

STAHL special chain spray 400 ml spray can 270 044 9 

Special lubricant for wire ropes and chains 400 ml spray can 

5 l canister 

10 l canister 

25 l canister 

Profile specifications 

INP profile 

INP Dimensions Weight 

80 

100 

120 

140 

160 

180 

200 

220 

240 

260 

280 

300 

320 

340 

360 

380 

400 

450 

500 

550 

H B S T [kg/m] 

80 

100 

120 

140 

160 

180 

200 

220 

240 

260 

280 

300 

320 

340 

360 

380 

400 

450 

500 

550 

42 

50 

58 

66 

74 

82 

90 

98 

106 

113 

119 

125 

131 

137 

143 

149 

155 

170 

185 

200 

3.9 

4.5 

5.1 

5.7 

6.3 

6.9 

7.5 

8.1 

8.7 

9.4 

10.1 

10.8 

11.5 

12.2 

13.0 

13.7 

14.4 

16.2 

18.0 

19.0 

5.9 

6.8 

7.7 

8.6 

9.5 

10.4 

11.3 

12.2 

13.1 

14.1 

15.2 

16.2 

17.3 

18.3 

19.5 

20.5 

21.5 

24.3 

27.0 

30.0 

6.0 

8.3 

11.2 

14.4 

17.9 

21.9 

26.3 

31.1 

36.2 

41.9 

48.0 

54.2 

61.1 

68.1 

76.2 

84.0 

92.6 

115.0 

141.0 

167.0 

IPE profile 

IPE Dimensions Weight 

80 

100 

120 

140 

160 

180 

200 

220 

240 

270 

300 

330 

360 

400 

450 

500 

550 

600 

STAHLplus Info _ It is only possible to show a small selection of beam 

profiles here. If you have a profile which is not listed and you wish to 

purchase one of our trolleys, please ask us. 


80 

100 

120 

140 

160 

180 

200 

220 

240 

270 

300 

330 

360 

400 

450 

500 

550 

600 

46 

55 

64 

73 

82 

91 

100 

110 

120 

135 

150 

160 

170 

180 

190 

200 

210 

220 

3.8 

4.1 

4.4 

4.7 

5.0 

5.3 

5.6 

5.9 

6.2 

6.6 

7.1 

7.5 

8.0 

8.6 

9.4 

10.2 

11.1 

12.0 

5.2 

5.7 

6.3 

6.9 

7.4 

8.0 

8.5 

9.2 

9.8 

10.2 

10.7 

11.5 

12.7 

13.5 

14.6 

16.0 

17.2 

19.0 

6.0 

8.1 

10.4 

12.9 

15.8 

18.8 

22.4 

26.2 

30.7 

36.1 

42.2 

49.1 

57.1 

66.3 

77.6 

90.7 

106.0 

122.0 

812 861 0 

812 862 0 

812 863 0 

812 864 0 

HEB profile 

HEB Dimensions Weight 

100 

120 

140 

160 

180 

200 

220 

240 

260 

280 

300 

320 

340 

360 

400 

450 

500 

550 

600 

650 


100 

120 

140 

160 

180 

200 

220 

240 

260 

280 

300 

320 

340 

360 

400 

450 

500 

550 

600 

650 

100 

120 

140 

160 

180 

200 

220 

240 

260 

280 

300 

300 

300 

300 

300 

300 

300 

300 

300 

300 

6.0 

6.5 

7.0 

8.0 

8.5 

9.0 

9.5 

10.0 

10.0 

10.5 

11.0 

11.5 

12.0 

12.5 

13.5 

14.0 

14.5 

15.0 

15.5 

16.0 

10.0 

11.0 

12.0 

13.0 

14.0 

15.0 

16.0 

17.0 

17.5 

18.0 

19.0 

20.5 

21.5 

22.5 

24.0 

26.0 

28.0 

29.0 

30.0 

31.0 

20.4 

26.7 

33.7 

42.6 

51.2 

61.3 

71.5 

83.2 

93.0 

103.0 

117.0 

127.0 

134.0 

142.0 

155.0 

171.0 

187.0 

199.0 

212.0 

225.0 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Instructions for use 

These instructions for use provide only general information on the use 

of hoists and do not take the place of the operating instructions 

provided individual equipment! 

Lifting processes using hoists may only be performed by a skilled user 

(instructed in both theory and practice). If used correctly, our hoists 

offer maximum safety, avoid injuries and damage, and have a long 

service life. 

Modifications to state of delivery 

Form and design of the hoists must not be modified, e.g. by mounting 

parts supplied by others, bending, welding, grinding, removing parts, 

drilling, removing safety devices such as interlocks, locking pins, 

safety latches, etc. 

Restrictions of use 

Loading 

Hoists from STAHL CraneSystems are intended for lifting and transporting 

loads. Some hoists (e.g. general purpose appliances) can also be 

used for towing and lashing loads if this is specified in the operating 

instructions. 

The safe working loads specified are 

calculated for a hoist subjected to straight 

traction and must not be exceeded. The 

suspension element of the hoist (e.g. hoist 

chain or wire rope) must not be led over edges 

or used to attach the load! 

Temperature 

Hoists from STAHL CraneSystems can be used as a rule in temperatures 

from -20° to +50°C. These temperatures are guidelines and may 

be deviated from for particular hoists. You will find the information 

applicable for a specific hoist in the relevant operating instructions. 

Hoists can also be supplied for higher temperature ranges on request. 

Caution: At ambient temperatures below 0°C, watch out for the brake 

icing up. (Test lift before use - see also point "Tests before starting 

work" in the instructions for use). 

Impact loading 

The safe working loads stated apply for loading the hoist without any 

impact. 

Light impacts such as arise from lifting and lowering or moving the load 

are permissible. Greater impacts, e.g. if the load drops onto the chain 

or wire rope, are not permissible! 

Chemicals 

Hoists and suspension elements must not be used in the region of 

chemicals or in ambiences exposed to chemical vapours without 

considering the application - please consult us beforehand! Hoists 

exposed to chemicals or vapours must be decommissioned and sent to 

us for assessment. 

Transporting persons 

Transporting persons with hoists is forbidden on principle! Only 

equipment especially approved for this purpose may be used for 

transporting persons. (Caution: note reduction of safe working load!) 

Use in dangerous conditions 

Lifting or moving loads must be avoided as long 

as persons are within the danger zone of the 

load. Standing on or under a suspended load is 

forbidden. 

Electrical hazards 

The suspension elements of hoists (e.g. load chain) must not be 

energised - e.g. used as an earth lead when welding! Please see the 

individual operating instructions for other electrical hazards such as 

e.g. on powered hoists! Electrical connection may only be performed 

by authorised persons or companies. 

47

48 

Hoists 


• Only undamaged hoists with legible S.W.L. and rating plates may be 

used. 

• Each time before starting work, the equipment including suspension 

elements, equipment, supporting structure and suspension must be 

inspected for obvious defects and faults. The brake and the correct 

suspension of the hoist and the load must also be checked. To do so, 

lift, tow or tension a load over a short distance, then lower or release 

(test lift). 

• Check that the load chain is sufficiently 

lubricated and free from damage or wear. A 

faulty load chain must be replaced before the 

hoist is used. Check load hook for cracks or 

damage. It must have a correctly functioning 

safety latch. Check the links of the load chain 

for damage. In the case of 2-fall hoists, the bottom 

hook block may turn over and twist the 

load chain. Check that the load chain is not 

twisted before using. 

• Obviously damaged hoists or hoists known to 

have been overloaded or subjected to other 

damaging influences must be suspended from use and may only be 

used again after they have been tested and repaired if necessary. 

• When selecting a hoist for a particular task, please check that hoist, 

suspension, load suspension equipment and suspension points as 

regards their lifting capacity, type, length and method of attachment 

are able to take up the load safely and without any unintentional 

movement (e.g. slipping). 

• Load chains must not be subjected to load if they are twisted or 

knotted. 

• The hoist’s suspension and load hooks must 

always be loaded at the base of the hook, 

never at the tip. They must have sufficient 

space and be able to move freely. 

• When suspending the hoist, the operator must ensure that it can be 

operated without him being endangered by the hoist itself, the 

suspension elements or the load. 

• The suspension and load hooks of the hoist 

must be form a perpendicular line above the 

centre of gravity (S) of the load to prevent the 

load swinging during the lifting procedure! 

• The operator must not start moving the load until he has ensured 

that it is correctly attached and that no-one is in the danger zone. 

• Before lifting, ensure that the load can be moved freely. 

• Do not leave loads suspended or tensioned for a long period or 

unsupervised. 

• Chain stoppers, slipping clutches etc. must not be used as 

operational limit switches. 

• Do not allow hoists to drop from a great height. The hoist must 

always be set down on the ground correctly. 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

An excerpt from our extended 

range of products 

This excerpt shows you a selection of other 

hoists. Are you interested? If so, please ask! 

VLHP/G trolley for extremely narrow radius 

of bend 

Extremely low headroom 

Push trolley or reel-type trolley 

S.W.L. 250 - 6,000 kg 

Optional: 

Buffers, off-standard girder shapes 

Towerlift spur gear pulley block 

Off-standard chain guide 

Enclosed housing 

S.W.L. 1,000 - 2,000 kg 

Optional: 

Other heights of lift 

VLRP/G spur gear pulley block in flat 

construction with trolley for extremely 

narrow radius of bend 


S.W.L. 250 - 6,000 kg 

Optional: 

Buffers, chain box, overload device 

Towerlift ES spur gear pulley block 

Off-standard chain guide 

With chain box 

S.W.L. 1,000 kg 

Optional: 

Other heights of lift 

VLRP/G spur gear pulley block in flat 

construction with trolley for extremely 

narrow radius of bend 


S.W.L. 250 - 6,000 kg 

Optional: 

Buffers, chain box, overload device 

Yalelift LHP/G spur gear pulley block with 

integrated trolley (short headroom) 


S.W.L. 500 - 10,000 kg 

Optional: 

Buffers, chain box 

49

50 

500 - 3,000 kg 

20,000 kg 

Chain falls 

Hoists 

Effort 

required on 

hand chain 

360° manual chain hoist 

hand chain guide can rotate by 360° 

The fully rotating hand chain guide permits the 

manual chain hoist to be operated from any 

direction. 

This permits working to the side, outside the 

danger zone. Horizontal towing and tensioning 

or operating from above open up new areas of 

use. 

• Surcharge for overload device up to 

20,000kg: Item No.: 822 908 0, price on request. 

500 - 3,000 kg 

single-fall 

10,000 kg 

3-fall 

Weight 


• Powder-coated sheet steel design or 

corrosion-resistant (CR design) 

• Extremely enclosed housing protects 

against dirt. The inside components are 

protected even in rugged outdoor use 

• The patented brake system functions quietly 

and holds the load safely in any position 

• Suspension and load hooks rotating, with 

safety latch 

• Galvanised load and hand chains (standard) 

5,000 kg 

2-fall 

20,000 kg 

6-fall 

Safe 

Dimensions Hook dimension 

Standard Sur- CR design Surworkchargechargeing 


A * D E F G H I K L M B C N Item 3 m per m Item 3 m per m 

No. height of height of No. height of height of 

[kg] [daN] [mm] [kg] 

lift lift 

lift lift 

500 1 21 300 133 148 139 139 206 24 61 79 110 17 24 14 9 822 000 0 

822 171 0 

1,000 1 30 335 156 175 157 164 242 24 70 87 125 22 29 19 13 822 001 0 

822 172 0 

2,000 1 32 395 182 203 183 192 283 31 83 100 156 30 35 22 20 822 002 0 

822 173 0 

3,000 1 38 520 220 250 204 225 335 34 95 109 178 38 40 30 29 822 003 0 

822 174 0 

5,000 2 34 654 220 250 204 242 352 21 95 109 285 45 47 37 38 822 004 0 

822 175 0 

10,000 3 44 825 220 383 204 326 436 136 95 109 401 68 68 50 71 822 170 0 

822 176 0 

20,000 6 2x44 1010 303 555 250 391 501 - 396 125 461 85 74 56 196 822 244 0 

on request 

* minimum hook dimension 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Safe 

working 


Chain falls 

VSplus manual chain hoists 

VSplus manual chain hoists are made of highquality 

steel. 

They are extremely robust while featuring a 

low deadweight and compact dimensions. The 

headroom is particularly low. 

GL design available on request. 

Optional 

• Hoists from 1,000 kg safe working load can 

be equipped with an overload device in the 

form of a slipping clutch activated at 25% 

(±15%) overload. Retrofitting is possible 

without any problems. 

• Chain box available for hoists up to 5,000 kg. 

Off-standard sizes on request. 

500 - 3,000 kg 

single-fall 

Dimensions Hook dimension Lift * 

A F G H J L B C D 

Effort requi 

red on chain 

at rated load 


• Safety brake (load pressure brake) reliably 

holds the load in any position 

• Safety load hook with latch 

• High-tensile galvanised load chain 

• Roller and ball bearings in all rotating parts 

ensuring smooth running 

• All mechanical parts protected against dust 

and dirt 

• Hardened and tempered chain sprocket 

with 4 precisely formed chain pockets 

• Chain hoist painted yellow, powder-coated 

• Load chain for 3.0 m height of lift and 

hand-chain slack length 2.5 m, other lengths 

always possible 

• Operating temperature: -10° to +50°C 

• Spare parts available 

Weight 

with 3 m 

height of 

lift 

[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg] 

C 

F 

C A 

Item 

No. 

Price Surcharge 

3 m height 

of lift 

per m height of lift 

(incl hand chain) 

500 1 320 125 - - 111 64 17 29 11 35 26 9 812 975 0 

1,000 1 370 147 - - 125 68 15 30 15 23 36 11.2 812 976 0 

2,000 1 450 183 - - 142 74 33 33 23 18 54 18 812 977 0 

2,000 2 530 147 - - 125 68 31 34 24 12 37 15.3 812 978 0 

3,000 1 530 215 - - 163 84 38 38 27 12 52 28 812 979 0 

3,000 2 620 183 - - 142 74 41 37 24 9 41 24.7 812 980 0 

5,000 2 620 215 - - 163 84 48 43 33 6 44 38.7 812 981 0 

* When reeling 1 m hand chain See page 54 for other options. Subject to technical modifications 

ha010v 

B 

J 

L 

D 

2,000 - 5,000 kg 

2-fall 

ha011v 

C 

F 

C 

A 

B 

J 

L 

D 

51

52 

Hoists 

Aluminium manual chain hoist 


• High corrosion resistance 

• Threaded load pressure brake 

• Galvanised round link chain to DIN 5684-8 


Stainless steel 

manual chain 

hoists available 

on request. 

Safe Chain falls Load chain Effort required Lift *1 Dimensions Weight Item Price Surcharge 

working load 

[kg] [mm] 

on handchain 

approx. [daN] [mm] 

A B B1 H *1 

[mm] 

M M3 *2 

[kg] 

No. 3 m height per m 

of lift height of lift 

250 

1 5 x 15 14 1579 150 137 51 325 27 13 11 822 005 0 

500 

1 5 x 15 30 1579 150 137 51 325 27 13 11 822 006 0 

1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 36 968 174 146 59 370 29 16 13 822 007 0 

1,500 1 7.1 x 21 42 732 203 147 61 440 34 20 18 822 008 0 

2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 40 476 204 146 59 510 36 22 22 822 009 0 

3,000 2 7.1 x 21 46 370 240 147 61 590 42.5 35 30 822 010 0 

5,000 3 7.1 x 21 46 224 342 147 61 620 46.5 43 39 822 011 0 

*1 When reeling 30 m hand chain 

*2 minimum hook dimension 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Safe working 

laod 

Chain 

falls 

Load chain Effort required 

on 

chain at 

rated load 

9/98 manual chain hoists 

The manual chain hoists have a sturdy sheet 

steel housing. They are extremely robust while 

featuring a low deadweight and compact 

dimensions. 


• Supplied as standard with slipping clutch 

overload device 

• Industrial quality 

• Increased safety ensured by two ratchets 

• Housing powder-coated up to 10,000 kg 

4-fall, galvanised from 10,000 kg 2-fall 

• Low effort required on hand chain 

• Suspension and load hooks with safety latch 

• Galvanised RUD quality load chain in acc. 

with EN 818-7-T 

• Galvanised load chain in acc. with DIN 766 

• German certificate of origin 

Lift * Dimensions Hook dimension With 

with 3 m 

height of 

A A1 B B1 C H M M1 M2 M3 lift 

[kg] [mm] ap. [daN] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg] 

500 

1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

3,000 

5,000 

10,000 

10,000 

15,000 

20,000 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

4 

2 

3 

4 

5 x 15 

6.3 x 19.1 

8 x 24 

6.3 x 19.1 

8 x 24 

10 x 30 

10 x 30 

13 x 36 

13 x 36 

13 x 36 

25,000 5 13 x 36 

30,000 2 x 3 13 x 36 

40,000 2 x 4 13 x 36 

50,000 2 x 5 13 x 36 

* When reeling 30 m hand chain 

21 

35 

39 

35 

39 

42 

45 

31 

33 

35 

37 

2x33 

2x35 

2x37 

These manual chain hoists are also available in 

explosion-protected design. 

You will find the explosion-protected design on 

page 89 of this catalogue. 

1165 

870 

640 

435 

320 

170 

85 

74 

50 

37 

30 

50 

37 

30 

141 

168 

212 

163 

202 

236 

415 

346 

425 

463 

510 

810 

926 

1063 

87 

102 

129 

88 

108 

128 

130 

218 

255 

293 

326 

405 

463 

531 

108 

131 

146 

131 

146 

168 

168 

282 

282 

282 

282 

282 

282 

282 

48 

57 

68 

57 

68 

81 

81 

141 

141 

141 

141 

141 

141 

141 

216 

256 

321 

286 

354 

412 

479 

568 

758 

787 

798 

727 

790 

875 

288 

345 

423 

491 

593 

702 

755 

824 

1115 

1165 

1233 

1160 

1280 

1470 

22 

26 

30 

34 

38 

41 

58 

49 

55 

69 

76 

84 

97 

110 

35 

40 

44 

50 

54 

64 

87 

71 

90 

100 

112 

125 

140 

160 

Optional 

• Stainless steel load and hand chain 

• Ball-bearing load hook 

• With chain box 

20 

25 

29 

33 

39 

46 

65 

67 

85 

95 

106 

118 

132 

150 

15 

18 

22 

23 

28 

32 

46 

53 

67 

75 

85 

95 

106 

118 

8.9 

12.2 

19.6 

13.6 

27 

42 

105 

100 

135 

170 

198 

270 

340 

396 

Item 

No. 

822 177 0 

822 178 0 

822 179 0 

822 180 0 

822 181 0 

822 182 0 

822 183 0 

822 184 0 

822 185 0 

822 186 0 

822 187 0 

822 188 0 

822 189 0 

822 190 0 


3 m height 

of lift 

per m 

height of lift 

53

54 

Hoists 

Chain 

falls 

YL ITP manual chain hoists with integrated push trolleys 

Safe working load 500 - 5,000 kg 

The manual chain hoist forms a compact unit together with the push trolley providing the 

advantage of extremely low headroom (hook dimension A). 

The hoist is moved horizontally by pushing on the load. 

10,000 kg safe working load on request. 

YL ITG manual chain hoists with integrated reel-type trolleys 

Safe working load 500 - 10,000 kg 

The manual chain hoist forms a compact unit together with the reel-type trolley providing the 

advantage of extremely low headroom (hook dimension A). The hoist is moved horizontally by 

pulling on a hand chain. Other technical features correspond to the YL ITP model. 

Corrosion resistant design 

For areas of application with increased requirements on the surface (foodstuff industry, 

chemical industry, agriculture and sewage farms), the manual chain hoists with integrated 

trolleys can also be supplied in corrosion resistant design. Suitable protective surface coatings 

prevent or delay the development of corrosion. Thus the coating increases the service life of the 

treated component. The hoists are supplied as standard with stainless steel hand chains and 

galvanised load chains. 

Explosion-protected design 

These manual hoists can also be supplied in "explosion-protected design" for use in hazardous 

locations such as paint shops, foundries, on-/offshore applications, refineries, oil depots, galvanising 

plants, etc. Please enquire. 

Selecting special materials is effective against mechanically produced 

sparks such as occur during grinding and hammering processes, e.g. 

• stainless steel load and hand chains 

• fully corrosion resistant equipment 

• bronze-coated suspension and load hooks 

• solid bronze wheels 

• buffers 

• chain box 

See page 55 for hoist data and dimensions 

See pages 50-51 and 55 for surcharges for options on manual chain hoists 

Safe 

Surcharges 

working 


[kg] 

Slipping clutch (VS only) 

Item 

No. 

Chain box 

For Item 

height No. 

VS 

For 

height 

Item 

No. 

YL IT 

of lift 

of lift 

500 - 

1 12 m 812 988 0 

1 12 m 822 900 0 

1,000 812 986 0 

1 12 m 812 989 0 

1 12 m 822 901 0 

2,000 812 986 0 

1 12 m 812 990 0 

1 6 m 822 902 0 

2,000 812 986 0 

2 6 m 812 991 0 

1 12 m 822 903 0 

3,000 812 986 0 

1 10 m 812 992 0 

1 6 m 822 904 0 

3,000 812 986 0 

2 6 m 812 993 0 

1 12 m 822 905 0 

5,000 812 986 0 

2 10 m 812 995 0 

2 6 m 822 906 0 

8,000 - 

- - - 

- - - 

10,000 - 

- - - 

4 3 m 822 907 0 

15,000 - 

- - - 

- - - 

20,000 - 

- - - 

- - - 

Chain 

falls 

Solid bronze wheels 

Options for VSplus and YL ITP/G manual chain 

hoists 

VS and YL IT manual chain hoists can be 

equipped with chain boxes and slipping 

clutches (VSplus only). The table on the left 

summarises the options available. 

STAHLplus Info _ To help you 

select a suitable trolley for 

your runway beam, you will 

find the specifications of all 

common profiles on page 46. 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Manual chain hoists with integrated trolley 


with reel-type trolley 

500 - 3,000 kg 

5,000 kg 

C 

Safe 

working 

loadt 

L 

L1 B 

L 

L1 

C 

Chain falls 

B A 

Minimum radius 

of bend 

B A 

Dimensions 

* See Page 54 for further options. Subject to technical modifications. 

F 

F 

YL ITG YL ITP 

D 

ha014v 

I 

YL ITG YL ITP 

B 

D 

ha016v 

I 

Effort required on hand 

chain at rated load 

Weight 

with 3 m 

lift 

A B C I F L L1 

[kg] [mm] [daN] [kg] 

500 1 900 245 50-180 24 71.5 92 270 130 21 20 812 919 0 

500 1 900 245 180-300 24 71.5 92 270 130 21 21 812 920 0 

1,000 1 900 272 50-180 29 71.5 92 310 130 30 27 812 921 0 

1,000 1 900 272 180-300 29 71.5 92 310 130 30 29 812 922 0 

2,000 1 1150 323 58-180 35 95.5 91 360 150 32 44 812 923 0 

2,000 1 1150 323 180-300 35 95.5 91 360 150 32 46 812 924 0 

3,000 1 1400 382 74-180 40 131 107 445 180 38 77 812 925 0 

3,000 1 1400 382 180-300 40 131 107 445 180 38 79 812 926 0 

5,000 2 1800 550 98-180 47 142.5 149.5 525 209 34 125 812 927 0 

5,000 2 1800 550 180-300 47 142.5 149.5 525 209 34 129 812 928 0 

500 1 900 245 50-180 24 76.5 92 270 130 21 24 812 939 0 

500 1 900 245 180-300 24 76.5 92 270 130 21 25 812 940 0 

1,000 1 900 272 50-180 29 76.5 92 310 130 30 32 812 941 0 

1,000 1 900 272 180-300 29 76.5 92 310 130 30 33 812 942 0 

2,000 1 1150 323 58-180 35 98 91 360 150 32 49 812 943 0 

2,000 1 1150 323 180-300 35 98 91 360 150 32 50 812 944 0 

3,000 1 1400 382 74-180 40 132.5 107 445 180 38 82 812 945 0 

3,000 1 1400 382 180-300 40 132.5 107 445 180 38 84 812 946 0 

5,000 2 1800 550 98-180 47 148.5 149.5 525 209 34 130 812 947 0 

5,000 2 1800 550 180-300 47 148.5 149.5 525 209 34 134 812 948 0 

10,000 4 1800 760 125-310 52 170 113 430 200 44 175.0 812 950 0 

B 

D 

B 

D 

ha017v 

ha015v 

I 

I 


• Safety brake (load pressure brake) reliably holds the load in any 

position 

• Safety load hook with latch 

• High-tensile galvanised load chain 

• All mechanical parts protected against dust and dirt 

• Gear mechanism with high degree of efficiency ensuring little effort 

is required to hoist loads 

• Chain hoist painted yellow, powder-coated, and trolley black 

(YL ITP/G) or in corrosion resistant design (YL ITP/G CR) 

• Load chain for 3.0 m height of lift and hand chain slack length 2.5 m, 

other lengths always available 

• Operating temperature: -10° to +50°C 

Safe working load F1 H1 L P1 T1 Surcharge * 

[kg] [mm] Item No. 

500 

99 24 363 179 

1,000 99 24 413 179 

2,000 99 23.5 463 179 

3,000 103 32 518 179 

5,000 102 30.5 628 179 

* Surcharge per additional m hand chain length 

Item 

No. 

Standard Surcharge CR design* Surcharge 

3 m height 

of lift 

STAHLplus Info _ Other temperature 

ranges from -50° to +70°C and 

dust protected design available on 

request. 

With parking brake with hand chain for 3 m height of lift (option against surcharge) 

per m 

height of 

lift (incl. 

hand 

chain) 

134 

134 

134 

134 

134 

Item 

No. 

822 191 0 

822 192 0 

822 193 0 

822 194 0 

822 195 0 

822 196 0 

822 245 0 

822 246 0 

on 

request 

822 197 0 

822 198 0 

822 199 0 

822 200 0 

822 201 0 

822 202 0 

822 203 0 

822 204 0 

822 205 0 

822 206 0 

on 

request 

812 255 0 

812 255 0 

812 255 0 

812 255 0 

812 255 0 

3 m height 

of lift 

per m 

height of 

lift (incl. 

hand 

chain) 

55

56 

Hoists 

Chain falls 

Aluminium manual chain hoists with 

trolleys 

Compact construction 

These light aluminium manual chain hoists 

are available both with push trolley and with 

reel-type trolley. 


• Short headroom (hook dimension) 

• Very low running resistance 

• Fast, easy assembly 


• Asbestos-free brake linings 


Accessories available on request: 

• Parking brake 

• Buffers 

• Design for curved tracks (only in combination 

with reel-type trolley) 

Safe Load Flange Lift Effort on Weight 

With push trolley With reel-type trolley 

working 


chain width 

B 

*1 hand 

chain for 

lifting 

*2 Running 

resistance 

Item 

No. 

Price Surcharge Effort on Travel path 

3 m height per m hand chain *1 

of lift height of for travel- 

lift ling 

Item 

No. 


3 m height per m 

of lift height of 

lift 

[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg] [daN] [daN] [m] 

500 1 5 x 15 50 - 146 1579 30 22.5 15.5 822 021 0 

6.5 7.8 822 033 0 

147 - 302 

822 022 0 

822 034 0 

1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 50 - 135 968 36 28.0 24.0 822 023 0 

10.0 10.0 822 035 0 

136 - 220 

822 024 0 

822 036 0 

1,500 1 7.1 x 21.0 66 - 185 732 40 45.0 27.0 822 025 0 

11.5 9.8 822 037 0 

186 - 310 

822 026 0 

822 038 0 

2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 66 - 185 476 40 49.0 36.0 822 027 0 

15.0 9.8 822 039 0 

186 - 310 

822 028 0 

822 040 0 

3,000 2 7.1 x 21.0 74 - 196 370 43 76.0 39.0 822 029 0 

11.0 6.3 822 041 0 

197 - 310 

822 030 0 

822 042 0 

5,000 3 7.1 x 21.0 74 - 192 224 46 93.0 63.0 822 031 0 

17.0 6.3 822 043 0 

193 - 302 

822 032 0 

822 044 0 

*1 when reeling 30 m hand chain 

*2 for 3 m runway height 

Safe 

working 


Flange 

wdith 

B 

[kg] [mm] 

500 50 - 146 

147 - 302 

1,000 50 - 135 

136 - 220 

1,500 66 - 185 

186 - 310 

2,000 66 - 185 

186 - 310 

3,000 74 - 196 

197 - 310 

5,000 74 - 192 

193 - 302 

Dimensions 

A A1 B1 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C2 C4 H L M M3 

[mm] 

234 148 122 

200 

99 24 20 137 51 25 60 296 90 27 12 

287 173 122 

163 

140 31 20 146 59 25 83 350 140 29 16 

350 200 168 

225 

146 40 23 147 61 32 108 424 172 34 20 

350 208 168 

225 

146 40 23 147 59 32 108 438 172 36 22 

428 235 182 

243 

149 46 30 147 61 35 150 476 195 41 35 

492 330 190 

258 

283 53 30 147 61 36 148 595 223 41 43 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Chain falls 

M 

A 

L 

A1 

D1 

H 

M2 

D2 

B1 

B3 B B2 

Safe Load chain Flange Lift Effort on Weight 


working 


width 

B 

*1 hand chain 

for lifting 

*2 Running 

resistance 

Item 

No. 

Price Surcharge Effort on 

3 m height per m hand chain 

of lift height of lift for travelling 

Item 

No. 




[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg] [daN] [daN] 

500 1 5 x 15 50 - 146 1165 21 20.1 15.5 822 207 0 

6.5 822 219 0 

147 - 302 

822 208 0 

822 220 0 

1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 50 - 135 870 32 26.7 24.0 822 209 0 

10 822 221 0 

136 - 220 

822 210 0 

822 222 0 

1,500 1 8 x 24 66 - 185 640 39 50.6 30.0 822 211 0 

11 822 223 0 

186 - 310 

822 212 0 

822 224 0 

2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 66 - 185 435 35 44.6 36.0 822 213 0 

15 822 225 0 

186 - 310 

822 214 0 

822 226 0 

3,000 2 8 x 24 74 - 196 320 39 76 39.0 822 215 0 

11 822 227 0 

197 - 310 

822 216 0 

822 228 0 

5,000 2 10 x 30 74 - 192 170 42 97 63.0 822 217 0 

17 822 229 0 

193 - 302 

822 218 0 

822 230 0 

10,000 4 10 x 30 119 - 215 85 45 182.5 - - 21 822 231 0 

216 - 312 

822 232 0 

10,000 2 119 - 215 

- - - 822 233 0 

216 x 312 

822 234 0 

15,000 3 148 - 310 - - - 822 235 0 

20,000 4 158 - 310 - - - 822 236 0 

25,000 5 170 x 310 - - - 822 237 0 



Safe 

working 


Flange 

wdith 

B 

[kg] [mm] 

500 50 - 146 

147 - 302 

1,000 50 - 135 

136 - 220 

1,500 66 - 185 

186 - 310 

2,000 66 - 185 

186 - 310 

3,000 74 - 196 

197 - 310 

5,000 74 - 192 

193 - 302 

10,000 119 - 215 

216 - 312 

24/98 manual chain hoists with trolley 

Compact construction 

These manual chain hoists are available both 

with push trolleys and with reel-type trolleys 


• With 9/98 manual chain hoist, see page 53. 

• Equipped as standard with slipping clutch 

overload protection 

• Wheels with maintenance-free ballbearings 

• Galvanised load and hand chain, load chain 

in acc. with DIN 5684-8 


Also available on request: 


• Limiting buffers 

• Rack-and-pinion drive 

• Design for curved runways (only in 

combination with reel-type trolley) 

• Fully galvanised trolley 

Dimensions 

A A1 B1 B2 B3 B6 C ØD1 ØD2 H L M M2 M3 

[mm] 

234 141 122 

200 

24 99 108 25 50 135 244 93 22 20 15 

287 168 122 

163 

31 140 131 21 65 135 289 142 26 25 18 

350 212 166 

228 

40 146 146 31 85 135 359 172 30 29 22 

350 163 166 

228 

40 146 131 31 85 135 446 172 34 33 23 

428 202 182 

243 

46 149 146 31 120 135 495 209 38 39 23 

492 236 190 

258 

53 283 168 32 120 195 592 223 41 46 32 

650 415 242 

291 

62 248 168 42 150 270 615 253 58 65 46 

M3 

B6 

C 

These manual chain hoists 

are also available in explosion-protected 

design. 

You will find the explosionprotected 

design on page 91 

of this catalogue. 

ha020v 

57

58 

Hoists 

Chain falls 

28/98 manual chain hoists with trolleys 

Short headroom design 

These manual chain hoists are extremely 

compact and have a short hook dimension. 

They are available both with push trolley and 

with reel-type trolley. 


• Short headroom (hook dimension) 

• Equipped as standard with slipping clutch 

overload protection 

• Two load axles - trolley with excellent 

running characteristics 

• Very low running resistance thanks to 

machined wheels with roller bearings 

• Galvanised hand chain in acc. with DIN 766 



with trolleys are also available 

in explosion-protected 

design. Please enquire! 

Safe Load Flange Lift Effort on Weight 


working 


chain width 

B 

*1 hand 

chain for 

lifting 

*2 Running 

resistance 

approx. 

Item 

No. 

Price Surcharge Effort on Travel path 

3 m height per m hand chain *1 

of lift height of lift for travelling 

Item 

No. 




[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg] [daN] [daN] [m] 

500 1 5 x 15 82 - 185 1165 22 35 10 822 045 0 

4 9.8 822 057 0 

186 - 310 

822 046 0 

822 058 0 

1,000 1 6.3 x 19.1 76 - 196 870 35 42 16 822 047 0 

5 9.8 822 059 0 

197 - 310 

822 048 0 

822 060 0 

1,500 1 8 x 24.0 125 - 192 640 39 76 24 822 049 0 

5 6.5 822 061 0 

193 - 302 

822 050 0 

822 062 0 

2,000 2 6.3 x 19.1 76 - 196 435 36 78 32 822 051 0 

10 9.8 822 063 0 

197 - 310 

822 052 0 

822 064 0 

3,000 2 8 x 24.0 125 - 192 320 40 104 48 822 053 0 

10 6.5 822 065 0 

193 - 302 

822 054 0 

822 066 0 

5,000 3 8 x 24.0 140 - 215 215 41 165 50 822 055 0 

9 4.5 822 067 0 

216 - 312 

822 056 0 

822 068 0 

10,000 - - 822 069 0 

822 070 0 

15,000 - - 822 071 0 

20,000 - - 822 072 0 

25,000 - - 822 073 0 



Safe Flange 

Dimensions 

working wdith 

load B A A1 A2 A5 B1 B2 B4 C1 C2 C3 ØD1 H M 

[kg] [mm] 

[mm] 

500 74 - 185 481 189 172 118 129 144 108 372 107 30 85 222 22 

186 - 310 

135 

1,000 74 - 196 600 215 209 140 145 149 131 489 150 30 120 264 26 

197 - 310 

145 

1,500 106 - 192 697 250 223 154 137 156 146 560 150 (175) 37 120 327 32.5 

193 - 302 

162 

*1 

2,000 74 - 196 600 183 209 172 145 149 131 489 150 30 120 325 32.5 

197 - 310 

145 

3,000 106 - 192 697 223 223 182 153 156 146 560 150 (175) 37 120 384 37 

193 - 302 

162 

*1 

5,000 119 - 215 818 267 253 227 183 248 146 567 185 42 150 507 41 

10,000 

216 - 312 

183 

15,000 

20,000 

25,000 

on request 

*1 Dimensions in brackets up to top of hand chain sheave 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

1,000 - 6,300 kg 

10,000 - 30,000 kg 

Chain falls 



29/98 manual chain hoists with reel-type 

trolleys 

Extremely short headroom construction 

These manual chain hoists with reel-type 

trolley have an extremely short headroom 

(hook dimension) 


• Extremely short headroom (hook dimension) 

• Overload protection by means of slipping 

clutch 

• Excellent running characteristics 



with reel-type trolleys are 

also available in explosionprotected 

design. Please 

enquire! 


• Chain box 


• End buffers 

• Non-sparking version 

• Trolley fully galvanised 


1,000 - 6,300 kg 10,000 - 30,000 kg 

Safe Load Flange Lift Effort on Effort on Travel 


working chain width *1 hand hand chain path 

*2 No. 


chain for 

lifting 

for 

travelling 

*1 A A1 B1 B2 B6 C C1 H L1 L2 M 

[kg] [mm] 

B 

[mm] [mm] [daN] [daN] [m] [mm] [kg] 

1,000 2 5 x 15 74 - 150 582 23 9 7,8 565 233 132 272 456 214 127 140 160 190 30 75 822 074 0 

151 - 220 

456 

822 075 0 

221 - 310 

548 

822 076 0 

2,000 2 6,3 x 19,1 82 - 156 435 36 13 9,8 670 265 157 335 486 293 167 163 170 235 36 145 822 077 0 

157 - 210 

486 

822 078 0 

211 - 306 

582 

822 079 0 

3,200 2 8 x 24 106 - 223 320 42 10 6,3 805 325 178 265 516 326 199 193 200 265 42 225 822 080 0 

224 - 310 

603 

822 081 0 

5,000 4 8 x 24 119 - 215 160 35 12 6,5 930 410 187 268 472 323 204 239 270 310 45 370 822 082 0 

216 - 312 

568 

822 083 0 

6,300 4 8 x 24 119 - 215 160 43 15 6,5 930 410 187 268 472 323 204 239 270 310 45 370 822 084 0 

216 - 312 

568 

822 085 0 

10,000 2 16 x 45 155 - 310 35 19 28 4 1150 500 381 400 425 300 270 300 300 45 1020 822 086 0 

16,000 4 16 x 45 185 - 310 17,5 19 28 4 1465 665 381 400 335 410 392 400 400 55 1625 822 087 0 

20,000 4 16 x 45 185 - 310 17,5 19 28 4 1465 665 381 400 335 410 420 400 400 55 1660 822 088 0 

25,000 4 16 x 45 185 - 310 17,5 19 28 4 1465 665 381 400 335 410 472 400 400 69 1680 822 089 0 

30,000 6 16 x 45 185 - 310 17,5 19 28 4 560 822 090 0 

Price 

3 m height 

of lift 

Surcharge 

per m 

height of 

lift 

59

60 

Safe 

working 


Hoists 

Flange 

width 

radius 

of bend 

Surcharge for parking brake with hand chain for 3 m runway height 

up to 5,000 kg: Item No. 812 204 0, price on request (cannot be retrofitted) 

Surcharge per aditional metre hand chain slack on request 

HTP push trolleys 

Dimensions Weight Standard CR version 

Min. 

B A D D1 D2 H1 L L1 O P1 P2 T 


500 50-220 900 77 16 25 30 30.5 260 130 60 168 146 146 8.0 

160-300 

92 

45.5 

187 10.6 

1,000 50-220 900 82.5 17 30 35 30.5 260 130 60 168 150 150 9.0 

160-300 

97.5 

45.5 

187 12.0 

2,000 66-220 1150 98.5 22 40 47 30.5 310 150 80 168 155 155 16.0 

160-300 

113.5 

45.5 

189.5 19.3 

3,000 74-220 1400 114 26 48 58 30 390 180 112 168 160 160 32.0 

160-300 

129 

45 

191.5 35.8 

5,000 90-220 1800 132.5 33 60 70 30 450 209 125 168 167.5 167.5 48.0 

180-300 

147.5 

45 

191.5 52.2 

Loads can easily be moved horizontally with these push trolleys. 

Manual chain hoists and lever hoists can easily be mounted. 

They run on the lower flange of an I-beam and can easily be adjusted 

to the corresponding flange width. 

The push trolleys have ball-bearing wheels making it easy to push the 

load. 

Painted black, powder-coated or corrosion resistant (CR version). 

As an option, a brake can be supplied for fixing the trolley in its parking 

position (up to max. 5,000 kg). 

For use in hazardous areas, "explosion-protected design" on request. 

Safety advice _ Chain hoists that can be moved by 

means of push or reel-type trolleys are subject to the 

accident prevention regulation BGV D6 Cranes and 

must therefore be tested annually. 

With parking brake 

Item 

No. 

812 116 0 

812 117 0 

812 118 0 

812 119 0 

812 122 0 

812 123 0 

812 124 0 

812 125 0 

812 126 0 

812 127 0 

Item 

No. 

812 141 0 

812 142 0 

812 143 0 

812 144 0 

812 145 0 

812 146 0 

812 147 0 

812 148 0 

812 149 0 

812 550 0 

Subject to technical modifications 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

500 - 5,000 kg 

Safe 

working 


Flange 

width 

B 

Dimensions 

HTG reel-type trolleys 

8,000 - 10,000 kg 15,000 - 20,000 kg 

Loads can positioned precisely with these reel-type trolleys. Manual or 

electric chain hoists and lever hoists can easily be mounted. 

They run on the lower flange of an I-beam and can easily be adjusted 

to the corresponding flange width. 

The reel-type trolleys have ball-bearing wheels making it easy to push 

the load. Painted black, powder-coated or corrosion resistant 

(CR version). 

Hand chain slack for 3 m runway height. 

A brake for fixing the trolley in its parking position can be supplied as 

an option (up to max. 10,000 kg). 

For use in hazardous areas, "explosion-protected version" on request. 

* minimum radius of bend Subject to technical modifications 

Surcharge for parking brake with hand chain for 3 m runway height 

up to 5,000 kg: Item No. 812 204 0, price on request (cannot be retrofitted) 

from 8,000 - 10,000 kg: Item No. 822 238 0, price on request (cannot be retrofitted) 

Surcharge per additional metre hand chain slack on request 

With parking brake 500 - 5,000 kg 

Weight 

Standard Surcharge 

(hand chain 

slack 2.70 m) 

To help you select a suitable 

trolley for your runway 

beam, you will find the 

specifications of all common 

profiles on page 46. 

per m 

hand chain 

slack 

A C D D1 D2 F H1 I L L1 L2 O P P1 P2 R* T Item 

Item 

[kg] [mm] [kg] No. 

No. 

500 50-220 77 - 16 25 30 46 30.5 71.5 260 130 - 60 110 168 146 900 146 8 812 087 0 

812 217 0 

160-300 92 

45.5 

187 10.6 812 088 0 

812 218 0 

1,000 50-220 82.5 - 17 30 35 46 30.5 71.5 260 130 - 60 110 168 150 900 150 9 812 089 0 

812 219 0 

160-300 97.5 

45.5 

187 12 812 096 0 

812 224 0 

2,000 66-220 98.5 - 22 40 47 46 30.5 95.5 310 150 - 80 110 168 155 1150 155 16 812 097 0 

812 225 0 

160-300 113.5 

45.5 

189.5 19.3 812 098 0 

812 232 0 

3,000 74-220 114 - 26 48 58 46 30 131 390 180 - 112 110 168 160 1400 160 32 812 099 0 

812 233 0 

160-300 129 

45 

191.5 35.8 812 102 0 

812 234 0 

5,000 90-220 132.5 - 33 60 70 45.5 30 142.5 450 209 - 125 110 168 167.5 1800 167.5 48 812 103 0 

812 235 0 

180-300 147.5 

45 

191.5 52.2 812 104 0 

812 236 0 

8,000 125-310 276 52 30 80 114 113 45 170 430 200 - 150 163 - - 1800 270 104 812 105 0 812 237 0 

10,000 125-310 276 52 30 80 114 113 45 170 430 200 - 150 163 - - 1800 270 104 812 106 0 812 238 0 

15,000 125-310 270 70 35 110 155 113 45 170 870 200 115 150 163 - - 5000 270 230 812 107 0 812 239 0 

20,000 125-310 270 70 35 110 155 113 45 170 870 200 115 150 163 - - 5000 270 230 812 108 0 812 240 0 

CR version Surcharge 

(hand chain 

slack 2.70 m) 

per m 

hand chain 

slack 

61

62 

Hoists 

Trolleys 

Galvanised 

Loads can be transported horizontally with 

these trolleys. 

They run on the lower flange of an I-beam and 

can easily be adjusted to the corresponding 

flange width. 

Manual chain hoists and cable pullers can 

easily be mounted. 

Optional 

• Buffers 

• Off-standard surface treatment 

• Static load test with manufacturer’s 

certificate in acc. with EN 50049 

D 

E 

O 


• Push trolley or reel-type trolley versions 

• Safe working load 500 - 25,000 kg 

• Suspension suitable for all types of hoist 

• Stable non-distorting 3 bolt design 

• Maintenance-free lifetime lubricated ball 

bearings with 2 RS seals 

• Heavy duty design, long-lived even in the 

most severe conditions 

• Trolleys from 8,000 kg with zinc primer and 

alcyd paint 

• Hand chain slack 2.5 m, other lengths 


• Stainless steel hand chain available on 

request 

Safe Max. hoist Flange 

Dimensions Effort Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley 

working 


[kg] 

weight 

[kg] 

width 

[mm] 

A B L H W R 

[mm] 

D E N O 

required at 


[kg] [kg] 

Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 

hand 

chain 

slack 2.5 m 

Surcharge 

*1 

500 100 55 - 102 45 60 150 125 160 75 52 15 - - - 3 823 000 0 

- 

105 - 152 

210 

823 001 0 

1,000 120 55 - 102 60 75 190 150 170 99 60 20 90 100 10 5-6 823 002 0 

823 028 0 

105 - 152 

220 

823 003 0 

823 029 0 

156 - 203 

270 

823 004 0 

823 030 0 

207 - 254 

325 

823 005 0 

823 031 0 

2,000 250 74 - 127 80 100 255 195 215 123 75 27 90 100 16 11-12 823 006 0 

823 032 0 

127 - 180 

265 

823 007 0 

823 033 0 

190 - 243 

330 

823 008 0 

823 034 0 

254 - 305 

390 

823 009 0 

823 035 0 

3,200 150 90 - 143 100 120 300 235 250 144 90 35 95 100 25 18-19 823 010 0 

823 036 0 

149 - 203 

310 

823 011 0 

823 037 0 

203 - 254 

360 

823 012 0 

823 038 0 

251 - 305 

410 

823 013 0 

823 039 0 

5,000 300 106 - 156 125 150 375 295 275 174 117 40 130 135 20 31-32 823 014 0 

823 040 0 

160 - 210 

330 

823 015 0 

823 041 0 

210 - 260 

380 

823 016 0 

823 042 0 

255 - 305 

425 

823 017 0 

823 043 0 

6,300 200 106 - 156 125 150 375 300 275 174 117 40 130 135 25 33-34 823 018 0 

823 044 0 

160 - 210 

330 

823 019 0 

823 045 0 

210 - 260 

380 

823 020 0 

823 046 0 

255 - 305 

425 

823 021 0 

823 047 0 

8,000 550 fix (119) * 160 190 450 365 bw+150 220 145 45 135 270 16 85-90 823 022 0 823 048 0 

10,000 600 fix (131) * 160 190 450 370 bw+150 220 145 45 135 270 19 90-95 823 023 0 823 049 0 

12,500 150 fix (143) * 160 190 450 375 bw+150 220 145 45 135 270 23 95-100 823 024 0 823 050 0 

16,000 700 fix (155) * 200 240 560 445 bw+185 272 165 42 155 300 20 135-145 823 025 0 823 051 0 

20,000 800 fix (170) * 200 240 560 455 bw+185 272 165 42 155 300 25 140-150 823 026 0 823 052 0 

25,000 900 fix (185) * 200 240 560 460 bw+195 272 165 42 160 380 25 150-160 823 027 0 823 053 0 

* Minimum flange width *1 Surcharge per further m hand chain slack on request 

N 

W 

A 

B 

ha018v 

L 

R 

H 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Trolleys 

Stainless steel 

Loads can be transported horizontally with 

these trolleys. 

They run on the lower flange of an I-beam and 

can easily be adjusted to the corresponding 

flange width. 

Manual chain hoists and lever hoists can 

easily be mounted. 


• Push trolley or reel-type trolley versions 


• Trolleys made completely of stainless steel 

(material AISI 316) 



Safe Max. hoist Flange 

Dimensions Effort Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley 

working 


weight width 

A B L H W R D E N O 

required at 


Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 

hand chain Surcharge 

slack 2.5 m * 

[kg] [kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] [kg] 

500 100 55 - 102 45 60 150 125 160 75 52 15 - - - 3 823 054 0 

- 

105 - 152 

210 

823 055 0 

1,000 120 55 - 102 60 75 190 150 170 99 60 20 90 100 10 5-6 823 056 0 

823 067 0 

105 - 152 

220 

823 057 0 

823 068 0 

156 - 203 

270 

823 058 0 

823 069 0 

207 - 254 

325 

823 059 0 

823 070 0 

2,000 250 74 - 127 80 100 255 195 215 123 75 27 90 100 16 11-12 823 060 0 

823 071 0 

127 - 180 

265 

823 061 0 

823 072 0 

190 - 243 

330 

823 062 0 

823 073 0 

3,200 150 90 - 143 100 120 300 235 250 144 90 35 95 100 20 18-19 823 063 0 

823 074 0 

149 - 203 

310 

823 064 0 

823 075 0 

203 - 254 

360 

823 065 0 

823 076 0 

251 - 305 

410 

823 066 0 

823 077 0 

* Surcharge per further m hand chain slack on request 

Articulated trolleys 

The articulated trolley suspension permits 

extremely small radii of bend to be travelled. 


• Push trolley or reel-type trolley design 




• Stainless steel hand chain available on 

request 

Optional 

• Buffers 

• Off-standard surface treatment 



Optional 

• Buffers 



Safe working Max. 

Flange Wheel Ø With push trolley With reel-type trolley 

load hoist weight width 

Weight Item 

Weight Item hand chain Surcharge * 

[kg] [kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] No. 

[kg] No. slack 2.5 m 

500 100 

60 / 75 16 823 078 0 17 823 082 0 

1,000 120 60 / 75 16 823 079 0 17 823 083 0 

2,000 250 80 / 100 30 823 080 0 31 823 084 0 

3,200 

5,000 

150 

300 

fix 

100 / 120 

125 / 150 

46 

77 

823 081 0 

823 090 0 

47 

78 

823 085 0 

823 086 0 

6,000 500 125 / 150 83 823 091 0 84 823 087 0 

8,000 550 160 / 190 154 - 157 823 088 0 

10,000 600 160 / 190 165 - 167 823 089 0 

* Surcharge per further m hand chain slack on request 

D 

E 

O 

N 

W 

A 

B 

ha018v 

L 

R 

H 

63

64 

Safe working 


Hoists 

750 - 6,000 kg 

UNO lever hoists 

Lever hoists are fully adaptable and can be 

used effectively for lifting, pulling and clamping 

applications. They are ideal for moving 

and positioning heavy machinery, installing 

overhead cables and securing loads. Thanks 

to their compact size they can be used effectively 

even in the most confined spaces. 

250 kg 

250 - 500 kg 

Dimensions Hook dimension Leverage 

at 


Weight 

with 

1.5 m lift 

A E F J L B C D 

[kg] [mm] [mm] [daN] [kg] 

250 240 160 72 98 77 20 21 14 25 2.2 

500 282 160 104 116 80 17 24 12 25 2.8 

750 350 290 110 150 90 24 25 17 14 7 

1,500 420 410 120 175 100 28 30 21 22 11 

3,000 520 410 190 200 115 42 38 31 34 21 

6,000 700 410 200 210 120 55 45 36 35 30 


• Frame structure, gear and brake housing 

deep-drawn sheet steel 

• Freewheeling facility for fast handling 

• Safety brake with asbestos-free brake 

linings 

• Load chain in class 8 (T) in acc. with EN 818 

• Painted yellow, powder-coated 

500 kg 

750 - 6,000 kg 

Item 

No. 

812 071 0 

822 239 0 

812 072 0 

812 073 0 

812 074 0 

812 075 0 


1.5 m 


per m 


02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

D 85 

Aluminium lever hoists 

The enclosed housing, hand lever and 

handwheel are made of high-tensile aluminium 

alloy. The precise needle bearings ensure that 

little effort is required to lift loads. 

This lever hoist is indispensable wherever low 

weight is important, e.g. in service vehicles. 

The standard freewheeling facility permits the 

load chain to be pulled through in both directions 

for fast attachment of the load. 

Safe 

working 


Dimensions Hook dimension 

Leverage 


Weight 

with 

1.5 m lift 

A E F J L B C D 


750 315 300 106 154 105 20 22 14 16 6.4 

1,000 325 300 109 154 105 23 23 16 22 6.6 

1,500 380 300 138 177 103 27 26 20 18 10 

3,000 455 400 168 212 118 36 33 24 28 18 

Safety Advice _ 

When using the lever hoists on pages 64-66, please observe 

minimum load (approx. 3% of rated load)! 

D 95 

D 85 annealed cast iron lever hoists 

Sturdy design: enclosed housing, cover, 

handwheel and bottom block made of 

high-quality annealed cast iron. 

Ideal for moving heavy machinery and 

securing heavy loads. Facilitates laying pipes 

in shafts and trenches. 

Design with slipping clutch and freewheeling 

facility on request. 

Version with roller chain (type C 85) available 

on request. 

Model Safe 

working 


Dimensions 

(See UNO for sketch) 

Leverage 


F 

C 

Weight 

with 

1.5 m 

lift 

A C E F J L 


D 85 750 322 27 443 112 142 103 38 8.2 

1,500 389 30 443 189 171 99 31 16.3 

3,000 403 34 570 197 179 103 40 19.6 

6,000 532 46 570 197 218 142 42 32.9 

10,000 805 54 570 305 218 142 37 60 

D 95 1,500 314 23 315 156 141 91.5 27 9.9 

3,000 376 25 443 189 177 105 49 16.5 

B 

A 

Item 

No. 

812 266 0 

812 267 0 

812 268 0 

812 269 0 

Item 

No. 

812 905 0 

812 906 0 

812 907 0 

812 908 0 

812 909 0 

812 915 0 

812 916 0 

ha035v 

J 

L 

D 

Aluminium Surcharge 

1.5 m 

height of 

lift 

E 

D 95 annealed cast iron lever hoists 

per m 

height of 

lift 

The basic technical characteristics 

correspond to model D 85. Their lower deadweight 

and the extremely small dimension 

between upper and lower hooks are a 

convincing argument for their use. 

The automatic load pressure brake prevents 

the brake being released unintentionally even 

if the load should swing. Ideal for securing 

loads. 

The chain freewheeling facility is a standard 

feature. 

Design with slipping clutch on request. 


1.5 m 

height of 

lift 

per m 


65

66 

Hoists 

53/03 lever hoists - superior quality 

The best lever hoist ever! 

Lever hoists are fully adaptable and can be used effectively for lifting, pulling and clamping 

applications. They are ideal for moving and positioning heavy machinery, installing overhead 

cables and securing loads. Thanks to their compact size they can be used effectively even in the 

most confined spaces. 

The housing is made of aluminium for 250 kg and 500 kg, S.W.L. , of sheet steel for 800 to 9,000 kg 

S.W.L. 


• Long life, low maintenance requirement thanks to precise matching of the individual 

components 

• Extremely short lever lengths and low deadweight make for particularly simply handling 

• Non-slip hand wheel 

• Rubber handle screw-locked 

• Reinforced hook safety latch 

• Automatically functioning enclosed load pressure brake 

• Freewheeling facility for pulling the unloaded chains through fast 

• Easy release of brake, particularly when used for securing loads 

• Housing for 250 - 500 kg: made of aluminium, light and corrosion-resistant; 

800 - 9,000 kg: made of robust sheet steel 

• Galvanised load chain in acc. with EN 818-7 

• 3-year warranty 

Safe 

working 


Housing 

No. of falls 

Standard 


Leverage at 


New 

Chain Dimensions Weight 

(standard 

height of 

lift) 

A B C D E F G H 

[kg] [m] [daN] [mm] [mm] [kg] 

250 Alu- 1 1.0 20 3.2 x 9.0 74 88 32 150 62 11 21 205 1.6 

500 minium 1 

24 4.2 x 12.2 93 100 35.5 180 68 12 24.5 246 2.6 

800 Steel 1 1.5 29 5.6 x 15.8 119 144 36 245 97 14 24 280 5.7 

1,600 

1 

36 7.1 x 20.1 126 159 43 265 100 19 32 335 8.0 

2,500 

1 

34 9.0 x 24.8 150 173 47 265 102 21 37 375 11.2 

3,200 

1 

37 10.0 x 28.1 159 190 50 415 112 24.5 39 395 15.0 

6,300 

2 

38 10.0 x 28.1 217 190 60 415 112 34 50 540 26.0 

9,000 

3 

39 10.0 x 28.1 304 190 85 415 112 42 73 680 40.0 


• Visual and acoustic overload display on 

lever 

• Apparatus protected by slipping clutch 

STAHLplus Info _ All lever 

hoists are suitable for lashing 

loads in acc. with EN 12195. 

Item 

No. 

822 012 0 

822 013 0 

822 014 0 

822 016 0 

822 017 0 

822 018 0 

822 019 0 

822 020 0 


Standard 

lifting 

height 

per m 


02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 


The STKX beam clamps 

must only be used as an 

attachment point on an existing 

steel structure or a 

crane girder. 

Only clamps as shown on 

pages 102 ff. may be used 

as lifting clamps for transporting 

girders. 

STKX adjustable beam clamp 

With the STKX beam clamp, suspension points 

can quickly be provided on I-beams for hoists, 

sheaves and loads. The central spindle 

mechanism makes it simple to mount it firmly 

and securely on a beam. The spindle can be 

locked in position. 


• Secure and fast attachment to steel beams 

• Extremely low overall height thanks to 

built-in suspension bar 

• Positive locking connections relieve the 

load on beam flanges 

• Adjustable gripper range facilitates variable 

applications 

• Operating temperature range -10° to +50°C 

• Also available with suspension shackle on 

request 

Safe 

work- 


SRKX rolling clamp 

1,000 to 3,000 kg 

Easy-to-fit assembly aid for attaching and 

moving loads along beams. 

Can quickly be adapted to the beam width by 

turning the central spindle. 

Locking lever ensures secure positioning. 

Spindle and shackles galvanised to prevent 

corrosion. 

Safe 

working 


Model A 

min. 

max. 

B C D E F G 

min. 

Model A B C D E H I L O Weight Item 

No. 


1,000 SRKX1 82-109 60-150 258 26 22 20 53 160 46 2.5 812 274 0 

2,000 SRKX2 60-155 75-200 344 42 20 30 71.5 260 60 9.9 812 275 0 

136-191 200-300 444 42 20 30 71.5 260 60 10.3 812 276 0 

3,000 SRKX3 128-171 75-200 375 50 22 30.5 95.5 310 80 17.5 812 277 0 

150-212 200-320 495 50 22 30.5 95.5 310 80 19.5 812 278 0 

max. 


YRC reinforced beam clamp 


YRC 

H Weight Item 

No. 


1,000 STKX1 75-230 186-350 84 4 215 115-150 146-198 20 3.8 812 133 0 

2,000 STKX2 75-230 186-350 94 6 215 115-150 147-200 20 4.6 812 134 0 

3,000 STKX3 80-320 232-455 122 8 255 180-225 220-285 22 9.2 812 135 0 

5,000 STKX5 90-310 242-445 129 10 255 180-225 222-285 28 11 812 136 0 

10,000 STKX10 90-320 268-480 146 14 275 175-220 215-280 38 17.2 812 137 0 

67

68 

Hoists 

AF automatic brake cable winches, galvanised 

The AF automatic brake cable winches for hoisting and towing are supplied 

as standard with a gear cover. 


• High quality spur gear 

• Automatic brake 

• Cable strength 1770 N/mm², type of cable in compliance with EN 12385-4 

• Mechanism group in compliance with DIN 15020: 1Em 

• Surface treatment: galvanised yellow (except for 4AF Mini, powder-coated, black) 

• Effort on hand crank for the hoisting forces given: 20 daN 

• N.B. Type 30 AFD does not have GS approval 

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 

Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 

Automatic brake cable winches 

- galvanised 

Model 4 AFMD 4 AFD 6 AFD 8 AFD 12 AFD 20 AFD 30 AFD 

Towing force on 30% incline, rolling load [kg] 350 500 750 850 1500 2500 3664 

Hoisting force lowest cable position [kg] 190 340 500 650 900 1180 1994 

Hoisting force highest cable position [kg] 80 190 240 270 490 650 1419 

Fig. 1 2 3 4 5 - 6 

Drum Ø [mm] 27 

40 

45 

54 

63 

76 

80 

Min. load for braking function [kg] 10 

10 

10 

10 

10 

10 

50 

Hand crank length [mm] 155 155 200 250 250 290 290 

Ratio 

1:2.57 1:2.57 1:3.5 1:4.85 1:9.71 1:9.71 1:21.85 

Dimensions with handcrank (LxWxH) [mm] 195x211x96 197x250x96 240x265x128 290x265x167 295x294x170 330x294x170 345x365x180 

Max. drum capacity DIN 15020 (Ø [mm] x L [m]) 3 x 8 4 x 12 5 x 13 6 x 19 7 x 13 8 x 10 9 x 13 

Min. breaking force of rope [kg] 583 1028 1606 2110 2880 3760 4406 

Net weight approx. [kg] 2.2 

2.7 

3.7 

5.5 

7.4 

7.8 13.7 

Item No. 812 883 0 812 884 0 812 885 0 812 886 0 812 887 0 822 240 0 822 241 0 


Accessories required 

Cable with load hook Ø [mm] 3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

-Length [m] 8 

12 

14 

19 

13 

10 

13 

Item No. 812 893 0 812 894 0 812 895 0 812 896 0 812 897 0 822 242 0 822 243 0 


Technical data and description are not binding. Subject to technical modifications. 

Fig. 3 


Transporting persons with these 

cable winches is not permitted! 


Please do not forget the wire 

rope when ordering! 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

AFI stainless steel (INOX) automatic brake cable winches 

The particularly corrosion-resistant AFI automatic brake cable winches for hoisting 

and towing are made of stainless steel. They are supplied as standard with a gear cover. 


• High quality spur gear 

• Automatic brake 

• Cable strength 1770 N/mm², type of cable in compliance with EN 12385-4 

• Mechanism group in compliance with DIN 15020: 1Em 

• Corrosion-proof, made of stainless steel 

• Effort on hand crank for the hoisting forces given: 20 daN 

Theatre winch, driven by battery-powered screwdriver Winch with belt 

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 

Automatic brake cable winches 

- stainless steel 

Model 4 AFMID 4 AFID 6 AFID 8 AFID 12 AFID 

Towing force on 30% incline, rolling load [kg] 450 500 750 870 1500 

Hoisting force lowest cable position [kg] 190 340 500 650 900 

Hoisting force highest cable position [kg] 80 180 240 270 490 

Fig. 1 - 2 - 3 

Drum Ø [mm] 

27 

36 

45 

54 

63 

Min. load for braking function [kg] 

10 

10 

10 

10 

10 

Hand crank length [mm] 

165 

165 

200 

255 

255 

Ratio 

1:2.57 

1:2.57 

1:3.5 

1:4.85 

1:9.71 

Dimensions with handcrank (LxWxH) [mm] 202x245x96 195x211x96 232x265x130 290x270x167 295x294x170 

Max. drum capacity DIN 15020 (Ø [mm] x L [m]) 

3 x 8 

4 x 12 

5 x 14 

6 x 19 

7 x 13 

Min. breaking force of rope [kg] 

583 

1028 

1606 

2110 

2880 

Net weight [kg] 

2.2 

2.8 

4.4 

5.2 

7.6 

Item No. 812 888 0 812 889 0 812 890 0 812 891 0 812 892 0 


Accessories required 

Stainless steel cable with load hook Ø [mm] 

3 

4 

5 

6 

8 

-Length [m] 

8 

12 

14 

19 

13 

Item No. 812 579 0 812 580 0 812 581 0 812 582 0 812 583 0 


Technical data and description are not binding. Subject to technical modifications. 


Compact hoisting winches, ratchet 

winches and automatic brake belt 

winches and rope winches with freewheel 

drum available on request. 

We also supply off-standard designs 

for particular requirements. 


Worm gear winch with load pressure brake 

69

70 

Hoists 

43/86E electric cable winch 

The electric cable winch is a highly professional multipurpose winch. It is particularly 

appreciated in the building trade. 

It is available optionally for single phase A.C. current or three-phase current. 

Pneumatic versions available on request. 

The winch meets all relevant safety standards and corresponds to European regulations, 

in particular machinery directives 89-392, 91-368. 


• Compact, robust construction 

• Maintenance-free ball bearings 

• Mechanism group in acc. with DIN 15020: 

1 Bm 

• 230 V A.C. current or 230/400 V three-phase 

current, 50 Hz 

• IP 54 protection, isolation class B 

• Overload protection from 1,000 daN tensile 

force on cable upwards 


Accessories Item 

No. 

Cable 

-Ø 4 mm 

-Ø 6 mm 

-Ø 8 mm 

-Ø 11 mm 

Load hook pressed onto cable 

-500 kg 

-1,000 kg 

-2,000 kg 

822 109 0 

822 110 0 

822 111 0 

822 112 0 

822 140 0 

822 141 0 

822 143 0 

Safe working No. of Cable Effective cable length Cable Weight 

Single phase A.C. current 230 V, 50 Hz 3-phase current 230/400 V, 50 Hz 

load cable Ø 

speed without 

(1st cable layer) layers 1st cable Last cable 

cable Output Cable winch Cable winch Output Cable winch 

layer layer 

complete*1 w/o cable and access. w/o cable and access. 

[kg] [mm] [m] [m/min] [kg] [kW] Item No. Item No. [kW] Item No. 

125 4 4 6.4 (5) *2 32 (30) *2 11.0 25 0.37 822 091 0 822 103 0 0.37 822 097 0 

250 4 4 7.1 (5.6) *2 35 (34) *2 7.0 35 0.37 822 092 0 822 104 0 0.37 822 098 0 

500 4 6 5.7 (4.8) *2 30 (29) *2 4.0 38 0.37 822 093 0 822 105 0 0.37 822 099 0 

990 3 8 8.4 (6.8) *2 30 (29) *2 6.0 53 1.3 822 094 0 822 106 0 1.3 822 100 0 

1,000 3 8 8.4 (6.8) *2 30 (29) *2 6.0 53 1.3 822 095 0 822 107 0 1.3 822 101 0 

2,000 3 11 8.0 (6.3) *2 30 (29) *2 6.0 150 1.3 822 096 0 822 108 0 2.6 822 102 0 

*1 with 30 m cable, hook, control pendant and 3.0 m power supply cable 

*2 with grooved drum 


When ordering, please state 

length of cable and load hook 

required. 

Safe working 


(1st cable layer) 

A1 A2 

*3 

A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 

Dimensions 

A8 B 

*4 

[kg] [mm] 

125 205 165 171 35 43 135 27 13 405 

(195) 

(230) 

250 260 165 

(195) 

500 260 165 

(195) 

990 345 216 

1,000 

(240) 

2,000 440 216 

(240) 

*3 Dimensions in ( ) for version for single-phase A.C. current 

*4 Dimensions in ( ) refer to side cheek on bearing side 

B1 

*4 

C C1 C2 D D1 D2 

375 

(200) 

215 140 4 60 130 9 

222 34 78 150 32 15 405 375 250 140 6 60 150 11 

222 34 82 145 33 15 405 375 250 140 6 76 150 11 

289 45 97 200 48 17 575 535 270 155 10 108 180 13 

358 61 171 200 69 20 600 550 385 171 15 146 245 17 

Off-standard versions 

We can only show you 

a small selection of 

winches in this catalogue. 

Over and above this, we 

can supply the right 

winch for nearly every 

requirement. 

Tell us what you need - 

we will advise you and 

quote you a suitable 

winch! 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

238/99 worm drive manual winch 

The worm drive manual winches are extremely versatile for use in workshops, production 

areas and on building sites. 

They are extremely robust and long-lasting. 


• Robust design 

• Great cable lengths possible 

• Crank removable, length individually adjustable 

• Design in accordance with DIN 15020 

• Cable simply attached with cable clamp 

• Two speeds from 2,000 kg by means of spur gear 


Available on request: 

• Hot-dip galvanised version 

• Separator for two rope lead-offs 

You will find explosion-protected manual 

winches on page 96 of this catalogue. 

Accessories 

for 238/99 and 260/76 

Cable 

-Ø 4 mm 

-Ø 6 mm 

-Ø 8 mm 

-Ø 9 mm 

-Ø 10 mm 

-Ø 11 mm 

-Ø 12 mm 

-Ø 13 mm 

-Ø 18 mm 


-500 kg 

-1,000 kg 

-1,600 kg 

-2,000 kg 

-3,200 kg 

-5,000 kg 

Safe 

No. of Cable Dimensions Effort Lift per 

Manual winch 

working load cable 

required crankshaft (without cable and hook) 

(1st cable 

layer) 

(top cable 

layer) 

layers max. 

length 

Ø at 


rotation Weight Item 

No. 

A A4 B B1 C 

[kg] [m] [mm] [mm] [daN] [mm] [kg] 

250 87 13 100 4 293 350 410 121 170 5 

44 13 822 113 0 

500 220 9 68 6 313 350 440 138 190 9 

42 16 822 114 0 

1,000 534 7 63 8 348 350 490 164 260 14 

25 26 822 115 0 

1,500 875 5 40 10 378 350 490 164 263 20 

24 28 822 116 0 

2,000 1,133 6 55 11 410 380 740 208 419 12 11/21 60 822 117 0 

3,000 1,733 6 64 13 436 380 825 260 550 17 8/16 78 822 118 0 

5,000 3,435 4 35 18 436 380 865 298 613 34 9/18 115 822 119 0 

Item 

No. 

822 130 0 

822 131 0 

822 132 0 

822 133 0 

822 134 0 

822 135 0 

822 136 0 

822 137 0 

822 138 0 

822 140 0 

822 141 0 

822 142 0 

822 143 0 

822 144 0 

822 145 0 

71

72 

Hoists 

260/76 spur drive manual winches 

The spur drive manual winches are extremely versatile for use in workshops, production areas 

and on building sites. They are 

extremely robust and long-lasting. 


• Robust, practically enclosed sheet steel housing 

• Mechanism group to DIN 15020: 1Dm 

• Foldaway crank from 2,000 kg 

• Automatically functioning load pressure brake 

• Improved cable life thanks to large drum diameter 


You will find explosion-protected manual 

winches on page 96 of this catalogue. 

Accessories 

for 238/99 and 260/76 

Cable 

-Ø 4 mm 

-Ø 6 mm 

-Ø 8 mm 

-Ø 9 mm 

-Ø 10 mm 

-Ø 11 mm 

-Ø 12 mm 

-Ø 13 mm 

-Ø 18 mm 


-500 kg 

-1,000 kg 

-1,600 kg 

-2,000 kg 

-3,200 kg 

-5,000 kg 

Rope lead-off 

I for 300 - 500 kg 

II for 1,000 - 2,000 kg 

Safe working load Wire rope Dimensions Efort Lift per 

Manual winch 

required crankshaft (without rope and hook) 

(1st layer) (top layer) Max. 

length 

Ø at 


rotation Weight Item 

No. 

A B B1 C C4 

[kg] [m] [mm] [daN] [mm] [kg] 

300 200 11.8 6 200 270 100 300 265 19 

74 10 822 120 0 

500 335 10.8 6 200 270 100 300 265 21 

30 10 822 121 0 

1,000 770 12.0 8 290 295 125 290 265 18 

18 15 822 122 0 

2,000 1,690 9.0 12 230 540 240 340 265 32 

16 23 822 123 0 

Item 

No. 

822 130 0 

822 131 0 

822 132 0 

822 133 0 

822 134 0 

822 135 0 

822 136 0 

822 137 0 

822 138 0 

822 140 0 

822 141 0 

822 142 0 

822 143 0 

822 144 0 

822 145 0 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Sheaves, wire rope blocks and steel jacks 

An excerpt from our extended accessories programme. Please enquire! 

Wire rope blocks 

With revolving hook conforming to DIN 15401 with safety latch, or 

swivel eye conforming to DIN 82006. 

The wire rope blocks are available in two versions: 

GG/R: with grey cast iron sheave and slide bearing 

(100-125 mm in polyamide PA6-6) 

ST/K: with steel sheave and ball bearing 

No. 31 No. 36 No. 41 No. 46 

No. 161 sheave with support, with rectangular footplate 

With steel housing, painted. 

Rope sheaves made of grey cast iron with drilled hub bore. 

Sheaves with supports with transverse plates are also available 

on request. 

Please enquire. 

External sheave Ø [mm] 80 100 130 

Safe working load [kg] 125 130 150 

Ø at base of groove [mm] 

Width of groove [mm] 

Depth of groove [mm] 

Width of rim [mm] 

Width of base plate [mm] 

Length of base plate [mm] 

Thickness of base plate [mm] 

Ø of bolt holes [mm] 

Distance between holes [mm] 

Overall height [mm] 

Weight approx. [kg] 

67 

9 

6.5 

13 

40 

130 

6 

10 

96 

94 

0.57 

83 

11 

8.5 

16 

40 

142 

6 

10 

108 

115 

0.73 

108 

13 

11 

19 

45 

190 

6 

10 

156 

149 

1.40 

Item No. 812 491 0 812 492 0 812 493 0 

Price 

73

74 

Hoists 

No. 180 sheave with support 

With housing of folded sheet steel, painted. 

Rope sheaves made of steel with maintenance-free ball bearings, 

groove turned. 

No. 829 wire rope guide sheave 

For wall-mounted and portable windlasses. Steel housing, painted. 

Rope sheaves made of grey cast iron, hub boring drilled, 

groove turned. 

DIN steel jacks 


Wire rope guide sheaves are also available 

with swivel eyes or roller bearings. 


Steel jacks conforming to DIN 7355, with lifting steel housing. 

They are available in 2 versions: 

SIKU: Version with safety crank and folding handle 

RAKU: Version with ratchet safety crank and folding handle 

N.B.: 

Other versions, e.g. with large footplate, on request. 

Safe 

working 


Headroom 

Height 

of lift 

Height 

of 

claw in 

lowest 

position 

Weight 


1,500 

3,000 

5,000 

10,000 

15,000 

725 

725 

725 

800 

800 

350 

350 

300 

300 

340 

STAHLplus Info _ All steel jacks available as 

stainless steel version (all components in 

stainless steel) for food industry and chemical 

industrie. 


70 

75 

70 

90 

95 

12 

20 

24 

42 

58 

Item 

No. 

812 805 0 

812 806 0 

812 807 0 

812 808 0 

812 809 0 

SIKU RAKU 

Item 

No. 

812 810 0 

812 811 0 

812 812 0 

812 813 0 

812 814 0 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Cable pullers 

This portable equipment for pulling, lifting, 

lowering, clamping and securing loads over 

long distances was developed especially for 

applications in industry, in particular civil 

engineering, power line construction, 

shipbuilding, oil refineries, etc. 

It is simple and safe to use. 

The supply comprises the cable puller with 

handlever and an original wire rope with 

coloured strand. 

for rugged operating conditions 

S.W.L. b h l m s t 

[kg] [mm] 

800 21 20 110 20 17 78 

1,600 23 21 120 23 18 86 

3,200 32 29 163 32 22 116 

Version Safe 


* 

Profi 800 

1,600 

3,200 

B 

ha019v 

A C1 

Lever pull at 


Rope 

advance 

per double 

stroke 

Lever 

length 

Wire rope 

diameter 

* With overload protection = shear pin in forwards lever, shears off at 25% overload. 

Spare shear pins in operating lever or carrying handle 

** Prices for spare parts (incl hook) on request. 

Dimensions Standard 

rope 

length 

** 

A B C C1 

Weight 

without 

wire rope 

[kg] [daN] [mm] [m] [kg] 

24 

30 

50 

C 

60 

60 

40 

800 kg 

1600 kg 

3200 kg 

800 

790/1190 

790/1190 

8.4 

11.5 

16.0 

430 

545 

680 

240 

270 

330 

- 

97 

110 

60 

72 

91 


• Housing made of high-tensile aluminium 

alloy 

• Compact construction with low deadweight 

• Overload protection by means of shear pin 

in forward lever. Spare pins are to be found 

in the operating lever or carrying handle and 

can be replaced under full load, i.e. without 

removing the load from the rope 

• Simple rope guide mechanism 

• Special wire rope with steel core and 

6 strands - one coloured - pressed into a 

safety hook at one end and tapered at the 

other for easy threading. 

• Low-wear, parallel mounted clamping 

system avoids wear on the rope by 

distributing the surface pressure evenly 

• Long stroke path = high working speed 

• Easy to clean 

Off-standard design 

Motor-driven multi-purpose puller for 

transport of material and persons. 

Portable, ideal if place of application changes 

frequently. Please enquire! 

20 

20 

10 

7 

14 

21 

Item 

No. 

812 206 0 

812 207 0 

812 208 0 

Price 

with standard 

rope length 

STAHLplus Info _ Professional line cable 

pullers are approved by the Employers’ 

Liability Insurance Association for 

transporting passengers. 

75

76 

Hoists 

Spring balancers, S.W.L. from 0.4 to 3 kg 


• Cast aluminium housing 

• Cable: steel wire 

• Low-friction cable drive 

• Adjustable stop for upward stroke 

• Additional safety suspension mounting 

• Insulated link for snap hooks 

• Without locking facility 

Safe Unwound Weight Item 

working cable 

No. 

load length 

[kg] [m] [kg] 

0.4-1.0 1.6 0.6 812 300 0 

1.0-2.0 

0.6 812 301 0 

2.0-3.0 

0.7 812 302 0 

Spring balancers, S.W.L. from 2 to 8 kg 










working cable 

No. 


[kg] [m] [kg] 

2.0-4.0 2.0 2.0 812 303 0 

4.0-6.0 

2.3 812 304 0 

6.0-8.0 

2.5 812 305 0 

Spring balancers, S.W.L. from 2 to 14 kg 










working cable 

No. 


[kg] [m] [kg] 

2.0-4.0 2.5 2.9 812 815 0 

4.0-6.0 

3.2 812 816 0 

6.0-8.0 

3.5 812 817 0 

8.0-10.0 

3.7 812 306 0 

10.0-14.0 

4.0 812 307 0 

02_08EN.FM

02_08EN.FM 

Spring balancers, S.W.L. from 0.4 to 6.8 kg 


• Housing: steel 

• Drum: steel 

• Cable: steel, galvanised 

• With locking facility 


working load cable length 

No. 

[kg] [m] [kg] 

0.4-2.3 2.4 2.0 812 818 0 

2.0-4.5 

3.6 812 819 0 

3.5-6.8 

4.1 812 820 0 

Balancers, S.W.L. from 4.5 to 17 kg 


• Housing, cover and drum: plastic 

• Cable: steel wire; cable length adjustable 

• Suspension: revolving and adjustable hook; snap 

hook 

• Cable intake: elastic and adjustable with automatic 

locking facility 

• Load setting: infinitely variable 

• Drop safeguard facility in the event of spring break 

• Integrated locking facility for locking the cable drum 

• See page 95 for explosion-protected balancers 



No. 

[kg] [m] [kg] 

4.5-7.0 2.0 3.3 812 821 0 

6.0-10.0 

3.4 812 822 0 

9.0-14.0 

3.6 812 823 0 

13.0-17.0 

3.8 812 824 0 

Balancers, S.W.L. from 10 to 25 kg 


• Housing made of aluminium, extremely sturdy 


• Cable drive: low-friction 

• Tapered drum body mounted in ball bearings 

• Fine balance in lifting range with infinitely variable 

load setting 

• Suspension: revolving safety hook with safety latch 




No. 

[kg] [m] [kg] 

10.0-14.0 2.0 5.5 832 000 0 

14.0-18.0 

6.6 832 001 0 

18.0-22.0 

8.0 832 002 0 

22.0-25.0 

8.5 832 003 0 

77

78 

Hoists 



• Housing made of aluminium, extremely sturdy 


• Cable drive: roller-type mouthpiece 


• Further information see 75 to 105 kg 



No. 

[kg] [m] [kg] 

10.0-15.0 2.0 10.3 812 825 0 

15.0-20.0 

10.6 812 826 0 

20.0-25.0 

11.2 812 827 0 

25.0-30.0 

11.5 812 828 0 

30.0-35.0 

11.8 812 829 0 

35.0-45.0 

12.4 812 830 0 

45.0-55.0 

12.5 812 831 0 

55.0-65.0 

13.6 812 832 0 

65.0-75.0 

14.5 812 833 0 





• Cable drive: roller-type mouthpiece 


• Fine balance in lifting range with infinitely variable 

load setting 

• Suspension mounting: safety swivel hook with latch 


• Insulated design (against ground current) 

• Locking facility (for securing the load at the required 

height) 



No. 

[kg] [m] [kg] 

75.0-90.0 2.0 17.3 812 834 0 

90.0-105.0 

18.0 812 835 0 

Spring-action cable reeling drums 

No. of cores 

Cable 

crosssection 

Wound 

length 

Voltage at 

collector 

Weight 

[mm²] [m] [kg] 

1 x 2.5 

1 x 6 

1 x 16 

2 x 1 

2 x 1.5 

2 x 2.5 

3 x 1 

3 x 1.5 

3 x 2.5 

4 x 1 

4 x 1.5 

4 x 2.5 

5 x 1 

5 x 1.5 

7 x 1 

7 x 1.5 

8 x 1 

8 x 1.5 

15.0 

14.0 

8.5 

14.0 

11.0 

8.5 

12.5 

10.0 

7.0 

10.5 

8.0 

5.5 

7.5 

5.5 

6.0 

3.0 

5.5 

3.0 

1x 10 A, 42 V 

1x 20 A, 42 V 

1x 40 A, 42 V 

2x 10 A, 42 V 

2x 10 A, 42 V 

2x 10 A, 42 V 

2x 10 A + PE 

2x 10 A + PE 

2x 10 A + PE 

3x 10 A + PE 

3x 10 A + PE 

3x 10 A + PE 

4x 10 A + PE 

4x 10 A + PE 

7x 10 A 

7x 10 A 

8x 10 A 

8x 10 A 

Item 

No. 

4.0 812 286 0 

812 287 0 

812 288 0 

812 289 0 

812 290 0 

812 291 0 

812 292 0 

812 402 0 

812 293 0 

4.5 812 294 0 

812 295 0 

812 296 0 

812 297 0 

812 406 0 

5.0 812 298 0 

812 299 0 

812 308 0 

812 309 0 


• Plastic housing 

• For mounting on wall or ceiling 


• Voltage max. 500 V 

• Line: H05VV-F, complying with 

CEI 20-35 standards 

• 1.5 m line length outside drum 

• Operating temperature range 

-5° C to +40° C 

• Manufactured in compliance with 

IEC 1242 and 1316 standards 

• Current at collector: 10 A 

• Built-in overheating protection 

• Double earthing contacts 

02_08EN.FM

STAHL CraneSystems is distinguished 

by long years of experience and 

competence on the field of explosion 

protection. STAHLplus offers a selection 

of products and systems from 

the wide range of equipment available. 


79

80 


European explosion protection 

ATEX 

Explosive atmospheres 

Directive 94/9/EC 

Harmonisation of statutory regulations of member states for equipment 

and protective systems intended for use in areas subject to explosion 

hazards. 

Marking of equipment 

for gas II 2 G Ex de IIB T4 Electrical explosion protection 

ll 2 G ck T4 Mechanical explosion protection 

for dust II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP66 T120° Electrical explosion protection 

1 Equipment group 

I = mining 

II = all other areas 

ll 2 D ck T120° Mechanical explosion protection 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

2 Equipment category 

1 = can be used in Zone 0 or in Zone 20 

2 = can be used in Zone 1 or in Zone 21 

3 = can be usedr in Zone 2 or in Zone 22 

M1 = mining (comparable to Zone 0 and 1) 

M2 = mining (comparable to Zone 2) 

3 Atmosphere 

G = Gas 

D = Dust 

4 Explosion-protected device 

5 Type of protection 

5.1 Electrical explosion protection in areas subject to gas explosions 

e = increased safety 

d = flameproof enclosure 

px = pressurised apparatus for use in Zone 1 und 2, 

indoors, non-explosive atmosphere 

py = pressurised apparatus for use in Zone 1, indoors Zone 2 

pz = pressurised apparatus for use in Zone 2 

ia = intrinsic safety (required for Zone 0) 

ib = intrinsic safety (adequate for Zone 1 and 2) 

ma = encapsulation (required for Zone 0) 

mb = encapsulation (adequatefor Zone 1 and 2) 

nA = non-sparking equipment (Zone 2) 

nC = sparking equipment with protected contacts (Zone 2) 

nL = restricted energy equipment (Zone 2) 

5.2 Electrical explosion protection in areas with combustible dusts 

tD A21 = protection by housing (in compliance with procedure A for Zone 1) 

tD B21 = protection by housing (in compliance with procedur B for Zone 21) 

pD = pressurised enclosure 

iaD = intrinsic safety (required for Zone 20) 

ibD = intrinsic safety (required for Zone 21 and 22) 

maD = encapsulation (required for Zone 20) 

mbD = encapsulation (adequate for Zone 21 und 22) 

5.2 Mechanical explosion protection 

c = constructional safety 

d = flameproof enclosure 

p = pressurised enclosure 

k = liquid encapsulation 

fr = restricted breathing enclosure (Zone 2 only) 

Directive 99/92/EC 

Minimum regulations for improving the health and safety of employees 

who might be endangered by explosive atmospheres. 

6 Explosion group 

(given only for equipment for gas Ex area) 

I = methane (mining) 

IIA = propane 

IIB = ethylene 

IIC = (most hazardous group, e.g. hydrogen) 

7 Temperature classes 

(Maximum permissible temperature of a surface which may be exposed to 

gas) 

T1 = 450°C 

T2 = 300°C 

T3 = 200°C 

T4 = 135°C 

T5 = 100°C 

T6 = 85°C 

8 IP code 

1st figure: protection against contact 

5 = dust protected 

6 = dustproof 

2nd figure: protection against water 

0 = no protection 

1 = vertical drips 

2 = water drips onto equipment at 15° inclination 

3 = spray water 

4 = splash water 

5 = water jet 

6 = temporary immersion 

7 = permanent immersion 

9 Maximum surface temperature 

(given only for equipment for dust Ex area). 

Maximum permissible temperature of a surface which may be exposed to 

dust. 

Assessment by user: 

a) Limit temperature 1 = 2/3 of minimum ignition temperature of 

dust present 

b) Limit temperature 2 = minimum glow temperature of dust present 

minus 75k (applicable for layers up to 5 mm). 

The lower limit temperature must be above the specified max. surface 

temperature of the equipment. 

03_08EN.FM

03_08EN.FM 

Explosion-protected material handling equipment from the EXperts 

STAHL CraneSystems is a leading and competent partner for solutions in gas and dust explosion protection world-wide. 

This is underlined by numerous approvals for Zone 1- from the Federal Physico-Technical Institute in Braunschweig and 

from other test institutes, e.g. in Belgium, Canada, Poland, Switzerland, Czech Republic and Hungary. 

STAHL CraneSystems can always offer an economical solution whatever the explosion protection requirements may be. 

The table below summarises zone classifications and equipment allocation (equipment category in accordance with 

94/9/EC). 

The full range 

Gases, mists, vapours Explosive atmosphere is 

present: 

Zone 0 → Category II 1 G constantly or for long periods 

Zone 1 → Category II 2 G 

Zone 21 → Category II 2 D 

Zone 2 → Category II 3 G 

Zone 22 → Category II 3 D 

cannot be shown here. 

This catalogue contains only a small selection from the extensive 

range of explosion-protected hoists and material handling 

components. 

Further information - fast and comprehensive 

We would be pleased to send you further information in print - just ask 

at www.stahlcranes.com. 

We would also be pleased to visit you for a personal discussion - 

naturally free of charge and without obligation! 

Product informations Broschures 

Explosionprotected 

wire 

rope hoists 

Explosionprotected 

chain hoists 

Explosion-protected 

crane 

components 

KT 2000ex small 

crane technology 

(as download only) 

ATEX Ex programme from STAHL CraneSystems 

occasionally SHex, ASex wire rope hoist, STex chain hoists, 

crane components 

rarely and for short periods SHex, ASex wire rope hoist, STex chain hoists, 

crane components 

SH ex wire rope 

hoist programme 

ST ex chain hoist 

programme 

Cutaway photos or posters 

SH ex wire rope hoist programme, Zone 1 and Zone 2 

Ex-poster 

81

82 


Explosion-protected cranes 

When it is a question of the safety of man and machine in hazardous 

areas, STAHL CraneSystems is pioneering, forceful and systematic. 

With our experience and our know-how from many decades, our own 

fundamental research and our own R&D, with approvals from the 

Federal Physico-Technical Institute (PTB) and other test institutes in 

many countries, STAHL CraneSystems occupies a special position in 

this field. 

All components of a crane or hoist are strictly from our own 

production, from motor and brake to control and switchgear. 

This ensures optimum, high-quality explosion protection. 

The new rigorous ATEX regulations on mechanical explosion 

protection are of course met. 

STAHL CraneSytems was the first manufacturer of overhead material 

flow technology to implement the ATEX directive 94/9/EC in its 

production programme. 

ATEX 

Single girder suspension crane (1600 kg S.W.L.) used for transporting components 

during maintenance work outdoors. The construction of the explosionprotected 

chain hoist enables the whole crane bridge to be utilised to the full. 

Single girder overhead travelling crane (5000 kg S.W.L.) operated by radio 

remote control in a hazardous area in a chemical plant. Transport of hoppers 

over several levels. 

• Experienced 

the world's leading specialist for explosion protection engineering 

• Strict 

everything from one supplier and from our own production 

• Pioneering 

design in compliance with ATEX in certified quality 

• High quality 

extremely safe and accurate 

• Comprehensive 

technology for use in Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 21 and Zone 22 

References 

- Linde AG, Höllriegelskreuth 

- Wacker-Chemie GmbH, Burghausen 

- BASF AG, Ludwigshafen 

- Bayer AG, Leverkusen 

- Hoechst AG, Frankfurt 

- Degussa AG, Hanau und Frankfurt 

- Clariant, Burgkirchen 

- InfraServ, Burgkirchen 

- Qatar Gas, Qatar 

03_08EN.FM

03_08EN.FM 

Explosion-protected crane components 

The explosion-protected crane components, as specified in EC directive 94/9/EC, are designed optionally for use in potentially explosive 

atmospheres in combination with gas or in combination with dust. 

Make use of their sturdy design, compact construction, maintenance friendliness and reliability in conjunction with the economic advantages of 

series production for your crane manufacturing. 

For further information, please ask for our Product Information brochure on explosion-protected crane components. 

Explosion-protected endcarriages for suspension cranes Zone 1, 21 Explosion-protected endcarriages for o.h.t. cranes Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 

On the basis of KEHex endcarriages for suspension cranes, modern 

suspension cranes up to an S.W.L. of 10,000 kg and a span of 20 m can 

be manufactured. 

The explosion-protected suspension crane endcarriages KEHex comply 

with the equipment group and category of the EC directive 94/9/EC 

(ATEX): 

For gas: ll 2G or 

For dust: ll 2D 

STAHL CraneSystems travel drives are adapted to the requirements of 

material handling. 

The explosion-protected travel drives comply with the equipment 

group and category of the EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX): 

For gas: ll 2G, ll 3G or 

For dust: ll 2D, ll 3D 

On the basis of K.Lex (n) endcarriages for overhead travelling cranes, 

modern single girder and double girder overhead travelling cranes up 

to an S.W.L. of 50,000 kg and a span of 30 m can be manufactured. 

The explosion-protected overhead travelling crane endcarriages K.Lex (n) 

comply with the equipment group and category of the EC directive 

94/9/EC (ATEX): 

For gas: ll 2G, ll 3G or 

For dust: ll 2D, ll 3D 

Explosion-protected travel drives Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 Explosion-protected crane electrics Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 

In the section on explosion-protected crane electrics, STAHL Crane- 

Systems offers controls, power supply systems with accessories and 

control pendants as are required for crane manufacturing. 

These components are taken from STAHL CraneSystems’ wide range of 

standard cranes. 

83

84 


Explosion-protected small crane technology 

STAHL CraneSystems has developed the wordl’s first and only small crane system in 

compliance with ATEX for Zone 1, 2, 21 and 22. 

The basis is provided by the innovative KT2000 small crane system. This high-quality modular 

system is specially designed for the S.W.L. range up to 2000 kg. The basic element of the KT2000 

system is the maintenance-friendly, easy to inspect rail. The low-maintenance travel unit with 

exterior wheels runs easily and smoothly. 

Extensive modifications were carried out on the field-proven KT2000 small crane system to to 

meet the requirements for explosion protection. 

Basic structure of a single girder suspension crane with electric chain hoist in explosion-protected design 

The generation of explosion-protected wire rope hoists 

SHex n electric wire rope hoist with "short headroom" trolley for Zone 2 

Light crane system with electric chain hoist in the 

hazardous area in front of a paintshop in which 

tractor components are coated with a special paint. 

In addition to the off-standard colour for the small 

crane system, the demands for an explosionprotected 

design for Zone 2 are met here. 

Two great ranges: 

• SHex/ASex wire rope hoists for Zone 1 and 

21, safe working load up to 100,000 kg 

in type of protection Ex de IIB T4, 

on request IIC T4 

and Ex tD A21 IP66 T120° 

• SHex n/ASex wire rope hoists for Zone 2 

and 22, safe working load up to 100,000 kg, 

in type of protection Ex denA IIB (llC) T3, 

on request T4 

and Ex tD A22 IP66 T120° 

These wire rope hoists are available in various 

versions, e.g. stationary hoists, hoists with 

monorail trolleys, or in combination with 

double-rail crabs. 

Special equipment to suit your requirements: 

For example: 

• bronze wheels, 

• bronze-coated load hooks, 

• rust-resistant wire ropes and much more. 

03_08EN.FM

03_08EN.FM 

ST_ Ex chain hoist programme 

with ATEX certification 

STex/Zone 1 explosion-protected chain hoists 

are the hoists presumably used most 

frequently in hazardous conditions. 

STAHL CraneSystems’ comprehensive 

explosion protection knowhow and the 

assured quality are complemented by the 

safety factor of many years of experience. 

Now STAHL CraneSystems, market leader in 

explosion-protected hoisting and crane 

technology, has the first and only complete 

Ex chain hoist programme complying with 

ATEX. The basis is the new ST chain hoist 

programme, ranking among the most 

distinctive and comprehensive on offer 

internationally. All components come from a 

single supplier, from our own production. 

In the following you will find an excerpt from 

the wide range of explosion-protected chain 

hoists for Zone 1. 

Chain hoists for use in Zone 21/22 and on 

request as belt hoists. 

STAHLplus Info-Service _ For more information 

and dimensions, please ask for our 

Product Information on explosion-protected 

chain hoists. 

STAHLplus Info _ Every electric chain hoist is 

tested with at least 25% overload. 

Safe working load kg 250 500 1,000 1,600 2,000 2,500 3,200 5,000 

Hoisting speed m/min 8/2 4/1 6/1 5/0.8 5/0.8 4/0.7 2/0.3 2/0.3 

No. of chain falls 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 

Output kW 0.4/0.08 0.4/0.08 1.2/0.17 2.0/0.24 2.0/0.24 2.0/0.24 2.0/0.24 2.0/0.24 

Duty cycle %DC 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20 

Switching operations/hour c/h 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 240/240 

Travelling speed m/min 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 5/20 

Control Contactor control 

Supply voltage, 3~ 400 V, 50 Hz 

Stationary chain hoist 

Chain hoist 


Chain hoist 


Chain hoists for use in Zone 21 / 22 on request. 


• Low headroom 

permits hook height to 

be utilised to the full 

• Standard height of 

lift 3 m 

• 2 hoisting speeds as 

standard 

• 2 travel speeds as 

standard on powered 

trolleys 

• Powerful, robust hoist 

motor with constant 

performance and long 

operating times 

• Newly developed 

er-gonomic 2-step 

SHW 5ex control 

pendant 

• Patented safety 

slipping clutch 

protects against 

overload and limits 

the hoisting path 

• Single-fall chains 

(up to 2,500 kg) and 

high-performance 

motors permit great 

heights of lift 

• Asbestos-free 

long-life brake 

• Long-lasting, surface-hardened and 

galvanised load chain 

• Designed in accordance with EC directive 

94/9/EC (ATEX) for equipment group II, 

category 2G 

• Explosion protection in accordance with 

EN: Ex de IIB T4 (standard), Ex de IIC T4 as 

alternative 

• Protection class to EN 60529: IP 54 

• Permissible ambient temperature: 

-20°C to +40°C 

• Supply voltages: 380, 400, 415, 500 V, 50 Hz; 

60 Hz on request 

• Control voltage: 42 V (standard), 230 V as 

alternative 

An excerpt from our standard explosion-protected range - STex/Zone1 chain hoists 

STex electric chain hoist with electric trolley for Zone 1 

ATEX 

85

86 

Safe 

working 



Mini pneumatic chain hoist 

Mini pneumatic chain hoists in the "Economy" version can be used in 

hazardous areas thanks to the drive medium of compressed air. 

The low deadweight and compact dimensions make them extremely 

easy to use. The are very easy to transport. 


• Extremely low headroom 

• Standard height of lift 3 m 

• Infinitely variable hoisting speeds 

• Suitable for oil-free operation, no additional oiler necessary 

• Sensitive pressbutton control with EMERGENCY STOP, control hose 

2 m (standard), up to 6 m on request 

• Extremely compact with minimum weight 

• Insensitive to dust, humidity and temperatures from -20°C to 

approx. +50°C 

• Classification of mechanism group acc. to FEM: 1Bm 

• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX): 

II 3 GD IIA T4 (X) 

• Compressed air supply 6 bar 

• New low-wear braking system 

• Also suitable for towing horizontally 

• Available with push trolley as an option 

No. of 

chain falls 

Output 

STAHLplus Info _ Every pneumatic hoist is 

tested with at least 25% overload. 

Hoisting 

speed 

with 

rated no 

load load 

Lowering Air consumption 

speed with rated load 

The hoisting speeds apply with 2 m control hose. The speeds are reduced with longer hose lengths. Max. height of lift 8 m. 

Air supply 

Hose size 

inside Ø 

Mini pneumatic chain hoist with hook suspension 


No. 

with rated HoistLow- A B C D E F H J M 

load ingering [kg] [kW] [m/min] [m³/min] [mm] [mm] [kg] 

125 1 0.4 15 40 30 0.5 0.7 G3/8 9 328 232 367 92 213 109 177 148 19 9.5 820 078 0 

250 1 0.4 8 20 16 0.5 0.7 G3/8 9 328 232 367 92 213 109 177 148 19 10.5 820 079 0 

500 1 1.0 10 20 18 1.2 1.6 G1/2 13 458 316 505 122 292 148 234 194 28 21 820 080 0 

980 1 1.0 5 10 10 1.2 1.6 G1/2 13 458 316 505 122 292 148 234 194 28 23 820 081 0 

Also available with push trolley 

as an option. Please enquire. 

ATEX 

Price 

for 

3 m height 

of lift 

Surcharge 

per m 

height of 

lift 

03_08EN.FM

03_08EN.FM 

Mini manipulator 

With the aid of the mini manipulator, loads can be guided, lifted, 

lowered and shifted manually with one hand. The hoisting and lowering 

speeds can be regulated precisely with the pushbutton control. 

The low weight makes the mini manipulator very easy to operate. 

Mini manipulators are available with S.W.L.s of 125 or 250 kg. 


• Very low headroom 

• Max. 3 m height of lift 

• Steplessly adjustable hoisting speeds 

• Suitable for oil-free operation 

• Precision pushbutton control with EMERGENCY STOP 

• Extremely compact with very low weight 

• Not susceptible to dust, damp and temperatures from 

-20°C to approx. +50°C 

• Classification according to FEM: 1Bm 

• Classification according to EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX): 

II 3 GD IIA T4 (X) 

• 6 bar compressed air connection 

• Novel low-wear braking system 

• One-handed operation for lifting, lowering and guiding loads 

Model Safe 

working 


No. of 

chain 

falls 

Output Hoisting 

speed 

with 

rated 

New 

Lowering 

speed 

Safe work- 

Dimensions 

ing load D E F G H K M R S T U 

[kg] [mm] 

125 92 213 104 177 83 29 19 160 250 190 195 

250 92 213 104 177 83 29 19 160 250 190 195 

Air consumption 

with rated load 

ATEX 

Also available with push 

trolley as an option. 


Compressed 

air 

connection 

Hose size Chain 

dimen- 

sions 

STAHLplus Info _ Every 

pneumatic hoist is tested with at 

least 25% overload. 

Chain 

weight 

Weight 

with 3 m 

height of 

lift 

no load with rated Lifting Lowering inside Ø 



[kg] [kW] [m/min] [m³/min] [mm] [kg/m] [kg] 

mini 125 125 1 0.4 15 40 30 0.5 0.7 G3/8 9 4x12 0.35 9.5 820 296 0 

mini 250 250 1 0.4 8 20 16 0.5 0.7 G3/8 9 4x12 0.35 10.5 820 297 0 

Item 

No. 

Price 

for 

3 m height 

of lift 

87

88 


Profi pneumatic chain hoist 

Profi pneumatic chain hoists are designed for use in industry. They can 

be used in hazardous areas thanks to the drive medium of compressed 

air. 

Stationary chain hoists with safe working loads up to 100 t and various 

trolley versions are available on request. 


• Extremely low headroom, extremely robust construction 


• Infinitely variable hoisting speeds 

• Sensitive pressbutton control with EMERGENCY STOP, control hose 2 m 

• Suitable for oil-free operation 

• Extremely compact with minimum weight 

• Overload protection standard from 1,000 kg S.W.L. (EU version) 

• Insensitive to dust, humidity and temperatures from 

-20°C to approx. +70°C 

• Classification of mechanism in acc. with FEM: up to 2,000 kg 1 Am, 

from 3,200 kg 1 Bm 


II 2 GD IIA T4 (X) / II 3 GD IIB T4 (X) 

• Compressed air supply 6 bar 

• Version up to IIC T6 possible. Please enquire. 

Travel speed for S.W.L.: 250 - 6,300 kg: 9/14 m/min 

Travel speed for S.W.L.: 10,000 - 16,000 kg: 5/12 m/min 

Lower flange width b max for S.W.L.: 250 - 2,000 kg: 300 mm 

Lower flange width b max for S.W.L.: 3,200 - 16,000 kg: 310 mm 

Model Safe 

working 


No. of 

chain falls 

Output 

Hoisting 

speed 

with 

rated no 

Lowering 

speed 

Air consumption 

with rated load 

Compressed 

air connection 

Profi pneumatic chain hoist with powered trolley 

Hose size Chain 

dimen- 

sions 

Chain 

weight 

Weight 

with 3 m 

height of 

lift 

with Lifting Lowering inside Ø outside Ø 

load load rated load 

[kg] [kW] [m/min] [m³/min] [mm] [kg/m] [kg] 

025TI LM2T 250 1 1.0 20 42 38 1.2 1.5 G1/2 13 19 7x21 1.0 53 820 082 0 

05TI LM2T 500 1 1.0 11 19 17 1.2 1.5 G1/2 13 19 7x21 1.0 53 820 083 0 

1TI LM2T 1,000 1 1.0 5.5 11 11 1.2 1.5 G1/2 13 19 7x21 1.0 54 820 084 0 

2TI LM2T 2,000 2 1.0 2.7 5.5 5.5 1.2 1.5 G1/2 13 19 7x21 1.0 60 820 085 0 

3TI LM3,2T 3,200 1 3.5 5 10 10.8 4 5.5 G3/4 19 31 13x36 3.8 119 820 086 0 

6 TI LM6,3T 6,300 2 3.5 2.5 5 5.4 4 5.5 G3/4 19 31 13x36 3.8 234 820 087 0 

10TI LM10-16T 10,000 2 3.5 1.6 3.2 3.4 4 5.5 G3/4 19 31 16x45 5.8 286 820 088 0 

16TI LM10-16T 16,000 3 3.5 1 2 2.1 4 5.5 G3/4 19 31 16x45 5.8 370 820 089 0 

Item 

No. 

ATEX 

Safe 

Dimensions 

working 


A B 

max 

C 

(b) 

d D E F G H J 

*1 *2 

K L M N 

[kg] [mm] 

250 250 130 b+36 70 185 137 39 145 152 - 563 95 28 42 116 

500 

- 

1,000 

- 

2,000 250 130 b+36 70 185 137 46 145 152 - 611 95 28 42 116 

3,200 292 113 b+60 84 191 187 46 233 250 635 798 107 30 42 136 

6,300 500 141 b+70 165 205 154 79 233 250 763 919 215 40 51 236 

10,000 490 146 b+70 165 318 197 109 308 267 944 1131 215 42 66 236 

16,000 146 

318 199 382 310 997 1216 55 82 

*1 

*2 

Hoist installed 

Hoist hooked on 

Price 

for 

3 m height 

of lift 

Surcharge 

per m 

height of 

lift 

03_08EN.FM

03_08EN.FM 

9/98 explosion-protected manual chain hoists with 

hook suspension 

For use in Zone 1 hazardous areas. 


• Equipped as standard with slipping clutch overload protection 

• Compact sheet steel housing 

• Industrial quality 

• Increased safety thanks to two ratchets 

• Housing powder-coated up to 10,000 kg, 4-fall, galvanised from 

10,000 kg, 2-fall 

• Galvanised RUD quality load chain in acc. with EN 818-7-T 



II 2G IIB c T4 or T3, also available for II 2D c 135° or 200°C 



• Stainless steel chains 


N.B.: 9/98 manual chain hoist in standard version on page 53. 

ATEX 

Safe work- 

Dimensions 

ing load A A1 B B1 C H M M1 M2 M3 

[kg] [mm] 

500 141 87 108 48 216 288 22 35 20 15 

1,000 168 102 131 57 256 345 26 40 25 18 

1,500 212 129 146 68 321 423 30 44 29 22 

2,000 163 88 131 57 286 491 34 50 33 23 

3,000 202 108 146 68 354 593 38 54 39 28 

5,000 236 128 168 81 412 702 41 64 46 32 

10,000 415 130 168 81 479 755 58 87 65 46 

346 218 282 141 568 824 49 71 67 53 

15,000 425 255 282 141 758 1115 55 90 85 67 

20,000 463 293 

787 1165 69 100 95 75 

25,000 510 326 

798 1233 76 112 106 85 

30,000 810 405 282 141 727 1160 84 125 118 95 

40,000 926 463 

790 1280 97 140 132 106 

50,000 1063 531 

875 1470 110 160 150 118 

Safe working Chain falls Load chain Hand chain Lifter after Effort on hand 

Weight Item 


reeling 30 m 

hand chain 

chain at rated 

load approx. 

at 3 m 

runway height 

per additional m 


No. 


500 1 5.0x15.0 5x23.8 1165 21 8.9 1.5 820 090 0 

1,000 1 6.3x19.1 870 35 12.2 1.8 820 091 0 

1,500 1 8.0x24.0 640 39 19.6 2.3 820 092 0 

2,000 2 6.3x19.1 435 35 13.6 2.7 820 093 0 

3,000 2 8.0x24.0 320 39 27 3.7 820 094 0 

5,000 2 10.0x30.0 170 42 42 5.5 820 095 0 

10,000 4 

10.0x30.0 5x23.8 

85 

45 

105 

9.7 820 096 0 

2 

13.0x36.0 5x18.5 

74 

31 

100 

8.6 820 097 0 

15,000 3 13.0x36.0 5x18.5 50 33 135 12.4 820 098 0 

20,000 4 37 35 170 16.2 820 099 0 

25,000 5 30 37 198 20.0 820 100 0 

30,000 2 x 3 50 2x33 270 24.8 820 101 0 

40,000 2 x 4 37 2x35 340 32.4 820 102 0 

50,000 2 x 5 30 2x37 396 40.0 820 103 0 

Price 

for 

3 m height 

of lift 

Surcharge 

per m 

height of 

lift 

89

90 


Explosion-protected manual chain hoists with 

hook suspension 

For use in Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous areas. Three versions are 

available: 

- Basic: Explosion protection class II 3G llB c T3 (Zone 2) 

- Medium: Explosion protection class II2G IIB c T3 (Zone 1) 

- High: Explosion protection class II 2G IIC c T3 (T4*) (Zone 1) 

* (T4 available on request depending on application) 



• Low effort on hand chain 

• Automatic load brake 

• Industrial quality of gear and chain drive 

• Fast-running parts in bronze or bronze-coated 

• Load and suspension hook bronze-coated (Medium, High) 

• Galvanised load chain (Basic, Medium, High), NIROSTA chain 

available as an option 

• Galvanised hand chain (Basic, Medium) or NIROSTA (High) 

• High safety factor 


• Overload protection 

• Special surface coating 

Stahlplus Info _ See page 92 for manual chain 

hoists with trolleys. Other versions on request. 

ATEX 

Safe working load 

for version 

Dimensions 

Basic 

Medium 

High A B D E F F1 G 

[kg] [mm] 

500 500 82 56 90 48 30 24 260 

1,000 1,000 83 63 100 59 36 29 300 

1,600 1,250 90 75 115 69 39 31 345 

2,000 1,250 98 85 132 82 42 34 380 

3,200 2,000 106 92 160 94 48 39 435 

5,000 3,750 90 75 188 94 56 47 575 

10,000 6,000 106 92 283 122 75 68 790 

16,000 10,000 106 92 340 205 90 81 1020 

20,000 12,000 153 153 390 390 90 81 1040 

500 - 3,200 kg 5,000 - 10,000 kg 20,000 kg 

Safe working load Chain Load Effort on Weight Basic 

Medium 

High 

for version falls chain hand 

II 3G IIB c T3 

II2G IIB c T3 

II 2G IIC c T3 

Basic High chain at at 3 m Item Price Surcharge Item Price Surcharge Item Price Surcharge 

Medium 


approx. 

runway 

height 

No. for 3 m per m 

height of lift height of lift 






500 500 1 5.0 21.0 8.0 820 135 0 820 144 0 820 153 0 

1,000 1,000 1 6.3 24.0 10.5 820 136 0 820 145 0 820 154 0 

1,600 1,250 1 7.1 29.5 15.0 820 137 0 820 146 0 820 155 0 

2,000 1,250 1 7.9 33.5 21.0 820 138 0 820 147 0 820 156 0 

3,200 2,000 1 10 38.0 30.5 820 139 0 820 148 0 820 157 0 

5,000 3,750 3 7.1 36.0 35.0 820 140 0 820 149 0 820 158 0 

10,000 6,000 3 10.0 43.0 76.0 820 141 0 820 150 0 820 159 0 

16,000 10,000 5 10.0 47.0 155.0 820 142 0 820 151 0 820 160 0 

20,000 12,000 6 10.0 2x45.0 250.0 820 143 0 820 152 0 820 161 0 

03_08EN.FM

03_08EN.FM 

Explosion-protected manual chain hoists with push or 

reel-type trolley 

For use in Zonen 1 hazardous area. 


• Small hook dimension 

• With 9/98 manual chain hoist (see page 89) 

• Overload protection by means of slipping clutch as standard 

• Trolley with two load suspension bolts, excellent running 

characteristics 

• Machined wheels with maintenance-free roller bearings 

• Galvanised load and hand chains, load chain in acc. with DIN 5684-8 


II 2G IIB c T4 or T3, also available for II 2D c 135°C or 200°C 



• Stainless steel chains 


N.B.: 24/98 manual chain hoist with trolley in standard version on page 57. 

Safe 

working 


M 

Chain 

falls 

A 

L 

A1 

Load 

chain 

H 

Girder 

flange 

width 

B 

ØD2 

B1 

B3 B B2 

Ha646 

B6 

C ØD2 

Effort on hand Lift after 

chain at rated load reeling 

approx. 30 m hand 

Lifting Travel chain 

Safe 

working 


Dimensions 

A A1 B1 B2 B3 B6 C D1 D2 H L M 

1N 2N 

[kg] [mm] 

Weight With push trolley With reel-type trolley 

at 3 m per Item Price Surcharge Item Price 

runway additional No. for per m No. for 

height m lift 

3 m height height of 

3 m height 

[kg] [mm] [daN] [mm] [kg] 

of lift lift 

of lift 

500 1 5x15 1N: 50-146 21 6.5 1165 20.1 2.5 820 104 0 

820 116 0 

2N: 147-302 

820 105 0 

820 117 0 

1,000 1 6.3x19.1 1N: 50-135 32 10 870 26.7 2.8 820 106 0 

820 118 0 

2N: 136-220 

820 107 0 

820 119 0 

1,500 1 8x24 1N: 66-185 39 11 640 50.6 3.3 820 108 0 

820 120 0 

2N: 186-310 

820 109 0 

820 121 0 

2,000 2 6.3x19.1 1N: 66-185 35 15 435 44.6 3.7 820 110 0 

820 122 0 

2N: 186-310 

820 111 0 

820 123 0 

3,000 2 8x24 1N: 74-196 39 11 320 76.0 4.7 820 112 0 

820 124 0 

2N: 197-310 

820 113 0 

820 125 0 

5,000 2 10x30 1N: 74-192 42 17 170 97.0 6.5 820 114 0 

820 126 0 

2N: 193-310 

820 115 0 

820 127 0 

10,000 4 10x30 1N: 119-215 45 21 85 182.5 10.7 - 

820 128 0 

2N: 216-312 

- 

820 129 0 

10,000 2 13x36 1N: 119-215 

- 

820 130 0 

2N: 216-312 

- 

820 131 0 

15,000 3 13x36 1N: 148-310 Dimensions and weights on request 

- 820 132 0 

20,000 4 13x36 1N: 158-310 - 820 133 0 

25,000 5 13x36 1N: 170-310 - 820 134 0 

500 

1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

3,000 

5,000 

10,000 

10,000 

15,000 

20,000 

25,000 

234 

287 

350 

350 

428 

492 

650 

141 

168 

212 

163 

202 

236 

415 

122 

122 

166 

166 

182 

190 

242 

200 

163 

228 

228 

243 

258 

291 

24 

31 

40 

40 

46 

53 

62 

99 

140 

146 

146 

149 

283 

248 

108 

131 

146 

131 

146 

168 

168 

25 

21 

31 

31 

31 

32 

42 

50 

65 

85 

85 

120 

120 

150 

Dimensions on request 

ATEX 

135 

135 

135 

135 

135 

195 

270 

244 

289 

359 

446 

495 

592 

615 

93 

142 

172 

172 

209 

223 

253 

22 

26 

30 

34 

38 

41 

58 

Surcharge 

per m 

height of 

lift 

91

92 


Explosion-protected manual chain hoists with push or 


For use in Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous areas. Three versions are available: 

- Basic: Explosion protection class II 3G llB c T3 (Zone 2) 

- Medium: Explosion protection class II2G IIB c T3 (Zone 1) 

- High: Explosion protection class II 2G IIC c T3 (T4*) (Zone 1) 

* (T4 available on request depending on application) 



• Low effort on hand chain 

• Automatic load brake 

• Industrial quality of gear and chain drive 

• Fast-running parts in bronze or bronze-coated 

• Bronze wheels with maintenance-free roller bearings 

• Load and suspension hook bronze-coated 

• Galavanised load chain (Basic, Medium, High), NIROSTA chain 

available as an option 

• Galvanised hand chain (Basic, Medium) or NIROSTA (High) 

Safe working load Girder W Push trolley Reel-type trolley 

in version 

flange 

width 

Basic 


Medium 

II2G IIB c T3 

High 


Basic 


Medium 

II2G IIB c T3 

High 


Basic High Item for Item for Item for Item for Item for Item for 

Medium 

No. 3 m height No. 3 m height No. 3 m height No. 3 m height No. 3 m height No. 3 m height 

[kg] [mm] 

of lift 

of lift 

of lift 

of lift 

of lift 

of lift 

500 500 1 55-102 160 820 162 0 

820 185 0 

820 208 0 

- 

- - 

- - 

- 

105-152 210 820 163 0 

820 186 0 

820 209 0 

- 

- - 

- - 

- 

1,000 1,000 1 55-102 170 820 164 0 

820 187 0 

820 210 0 

820 231 0 

820 252 0 

820 273 0 

105-152 220 820 165 0 

820 188 0 

820 211 0 

820 232 0 

820 253 0 

820 274 0 

156-203 270 820 166 0 

820 189 0 

820 212 0 

820 233 0 

820 254 0 

820 275 0 

207-254 325 820 167 0 

820 190 0 

820 213 0 

820 234 0 

820 255 0 

820 276 0 

1,600 1,250 1 74-127 215 820 168 0 

820 191 0 

820 214 0 

820 235 0 

820 256 0 

820 277 0 

127-180 265 820 169 0 

820 192 0 

820 215 0 

820 236 0 

820 257 0 

820 278 0 

190-243 330 820 170 0 

820 193 0 

820 216 0 

820 237 0 

820 258 0 

820 279 0 

254-305 390 820 171 0 

820 194 0 

820 217 0 

820 238 0 

820 259 0 

820 280 0 

2,000 1,250 1 74-127 215 820 172 0 

820 195 0 

820 218 0 

820 239 0 

820 260 0 

820 281 0 

127-180 265 820 173 0 

820 196 0 

820 219 0 

820 240 0 

820 261 0 

820 282 0 

190-243 330 820 174 0 

820 197 0 

820 220 0 

820 241 0 

820 262 0 

820 283 0 

254-305 390 820 175 0 

820 198 0 

820 221 0 

820 242 0 

820 263 0 

820 284 0 

3,200 2,000 1 90-143 250 820 176 0 

820 199 0 

820 222 0 

820 243 0 

820 264 0 

820 285 0 

149-203 310 820 177 0 

820 200 0 

820 223 0 

820 244 0 

820 265 0 

820 286 0 

203-254 360 820 178 0 

820 201 0 

820 224 0 

820 245 0 

820 266 0 

820 287 0 

251-305 410 820 179 0 

820 202 0 

820 225 0 

820 246 0 

820 267 0 

820 288 0 

5,000 3,750 3 106-156 275 820 180 0 

820 203 0 

820 226 0 

820 247 0 

820 268 0 

820 289 0 

160-210 330 820 181 0 

820 204 0 

820 227 0 

820 248 0 

820 269 0 

820 290 0 

210-260 380 820 182 0 

820 205 0 

820 228 0 

820 249 0 

820 270 0 

820 291 0 

255-305 425 820 183 0 

820 206 0 

820 229 0 

820 250 0 

820 271 0 

820 292 0 

10,000 6,000 3 min. 131 bw 820 184 0 820 207 0 820 230 0 820 251 0 820 272 0 820 293 0 

(fix) + 

150 

Surcharge per m lift of manual chain hoist or reel-type trolley on request. 

Chain falls 

ATEX 


• Overload protection 

• Buffers 

• Special surface coating 

Safe working 

load in version 

Dimensions 

Basic 

Medium 

High A B E F F1 G N R L O n 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

500 500 45 60 15 30 24 315 - 75 150 - 2.5 

1,000 1,000 60 75 20 36 29 360 90 99 190 100 2.5 

1,600 1,250 80 100 27 39 31 420 90 123 255 100 2.5 

2,000 1,250 80 100 27 39 31 455 90 123 255 100 2.5 

3,200 2,000 100 120 35 48 39 525 95 144 300 100 2.5 

5,000 3,750 125 150 40 56 47 690 130 174 375 135 2.5 

10,000 6,000 160 190 45 75 68 935 135 220 450 270 2.5 

03_08EN.FM

03_08EN.FM 

28/98 HR/HH explosion-protected manual chain hoists with 

trolley 

Manual chain hoists with trolley are described in the chapter on 

"Hoists" on page 58. These can also be supplied in off-standard design 

using special materials for use in hazardous areas. 

The S.W.L. range and dimensions are as shown on page 58. 

Prices on request. 


• Compact construction 

• Short hook dimensions 

• Overload protection by means of slipping clutch as standard 

• Galvanised load chain in acc. with DIN 5684-8 



II 2G IIB T4 and II 2D 135°C 

29/98 HH explosion-protected manual chain hoists with 


Extremely short headroom 

These manual chain hoists with reel-type trolley which can also be 

employed in hazardous areas when special materials are used 

correspond to those shown on page 59 as regards S.W.L. range and 

dimensions. 



• Extremely short headroom (hook dimension) 

• Overload protection by means of slipping clutch 

• Excellent running characteristics 



up to 6,300 kg: II 2G IIB T4 and II 2D 135°C 

from 10,000 kg: II 2G IIB T3 and II 2D 200°C 

Accessories available on request: 

• Chain box 


• Buffers 

• Fully galvanised trolley 

• Ball bearing load hook 

Stahlplus Info _ You will find all common 

profile specifications on page 46 to enable 

you to select the correct trolley for your 

runway beam. 

ATEX 

ATEX 

93

94 


Explosion-protected cranes 

for use in hazardous areas, Zone 1 and 21. 

Also available witout main girder 

Single girder manual overhead travelling 

cranes 

with reel-type drive, safe working load from 

1,000 up to10,000 kg. 

• Spans up to 14000 mm 

• Designed in acc. with DIN 15018 H1/B2 

• Low effort on hand chain thanks to indirect 

drive 

• Hand chains for 6 m runway height 

• Primer and top-coat RAL 2000 yelloworange 

• Classification in acc. with 94/9/EG (ATEX): 

II 2G IIB c T4 or T3, also available for 

II 2D c 135° or 200°C 

Also available without main girder in various 

versions: 

Version A with screw-on adapters 

• 1 set of endcarriages 

• 1 set of screw-on adapters 

• No welding necessary 

Version B with screw-on adapters for main 

girder to be set on top 


• 1 set of screw-on adapters 

Version C with weld-on adapter plates 


• 1 set of weld-on adapters 

Other versions available on request. 

Stahlplus Info _ You will find 

suitable hoists with trolley on 

page 91 ff. 

ATEX 

A 

B 

C 

ATEX 

Single girder suspension cranes 

with reel-type drive, safe working load from 

1,000 up to10,000 kg. 

• Spans up to 14000 mm 

• Designed in acc. with DIN 15018 H1/B2 

• Low effort on hand chain thanks to indirect 

drive 

• Hand chains for 6 m runway height 

• Primer and top-coat RAL 2000 yelloworange 

• Classification in acc. with 94/9/EG (ATEX): 

II 2G IIB c T4 or T3, also available for 

II 2D c 135° or 200°C 

Also available as articulated crane with push 

drive (the attachment of the trolley to the 

bridge girder is articulated) for a safe working 

load up to 1,500 kg and a span up to 7000 mm. 

ATEX 

03_08EN.FM

03_08EN.FM 

LD explosion-protected digital load cells 

Digital load cells for use in hazardous areas in acc. with ATEX. 


• Precision mechanical-electronic system (DMS) in integrated 

construction, extremely low wear as there are no moving 

mechanical parts during load measurment 

• 7-segment LED display, thanks to integrated measuring procedure 

result appears "fast" even if the load is still vibrating strongly 

• Plus-minus display for weighing from full load to "zero", tare function 

for direct display of net weight 

• Accuracy of display capacity: +/-0.03% 

• Digit height: 40 mm 

• Reading distance: 40 m 

• Power supply from maintenance-free 12 V accumulators, display 

flashes when recharging necessary 

• Duration of use of maintenance-free accumulator: 120 hours 


II 2G Ex de IIC T6 

Explosion-protected balancer 

ATEX 

for use in Zone 2 hazardous areas in acc. with ATEX. 

ATEX Safe 


• Unwound cable length: 8 m 

• Sheet-steel frame, powder-coated 

• Conical plastic drum 

• Nylon rope 

• Precise, low-friction rope guide 

• 16 locking positions per rotation 

• Recoil brake 

• Infinitely variable spring force by means of 

handwheel 

• Special flat spring (lower spring tension 

when rope is unwound) 

• Classification in acc. with EC directive 

94/9/EC (ATEX): II 3G 

Unwound 

working load cable 

[kg] [m] [kg] 

5.0-11.0 

8.5-15.0 

Scale range Model Display Weight Item 

graduation 

No. 

[kg] [kg] [kg] 

0 - 250 LD 0,25 EEx 0.1 47 820 073 0 

0 - 500 LD 0,5 EEx 0.2 47 820 074 0 

0 - 1,000 LD 1 EEx 0.5 47 820 075 0 

0 - 2,000 LD 2 EEx 1 

47 820 076 0 

0 - 5,000 LD 5 EEx 2 

55 820 077 0 

Weight Item 

No. 

8 12.0 820 294 0 

820 295 0 

Stahlplus Info _ Other 

scale ranges on request. 

Stahlplus Info _ Load 

suspension equipment in 

explosion-protected design 

up to 1,000 kg S.W.L. 


Weight: approx. 12 kg 

95

96 


Explosion-protected manual winches 

Two frame sizes for safe working loads up to 125 kg. 


• Approvals for lifting and lowering loads 

• Mechanism group 1Bm 

• Permissible ambient temperatures 

WH 050: -10°C to +50°C, WH 1: -20°C to +40°C 

• Mounting position and rope lead-off can be determined as required 

by turning the winch 

• Minimum load 1 kg 

• Classification in acc. with EC directive 94/9/EC (ATEX): II 2G IIB T4 

Safe working Model Rope Ø Max. cable Effort on 


length crankhandle 

[kg] [mm] [m] [kg] 

63 

WH 05 

3 

28 

8...10 

125 


WH 1 

4 

27 

12...14 

Explosion-protected pneumatic winches 

Various frame sizes in the power range of 1.0 kW to 6.0 kW for safe 

working loads up to 3,000 kg. Mechanism group 1 Bm in acc. with FEM. 


• Extremely compact construction 

• High rope capacity 

• Air pressure required: 6 bar 

• Various controls for different requirements 

Max. safe Profi Rope Ø Max. cable 

working load model 

length 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

750 Lifter 500-1 6 58.3 

800 Puller 800-1 6 58.3 

640 Lifter 500-2,2 7 86.1 

1,050 Lifter 800-2,2 9 55.2 

1,500 Lifter 1200-2,2/6 10 72.8-143.2 

2,500 Lifter 2000-2,6/6 12 102.3-241.8 

1,800 Puller 1800-2,2/6 10 72.8-143.2 

3,000 Puller 3000-2,6/6 12 102.3-241.8 


Explosion-protected pneumatic chain hoists 

for handling Big Bags, safe working load up to 2,000 kg. 

Mechanism group 1 Bm in acc. with FEM. 



in acc. with ATEX 

II 3GD IIA T4(X) 

II 3GD IIA T4(X) 

II 2GD IIA T4(X) / 

II 3GD IIB T4(X) and 

II 2GD IIB T4(X) 

• Design with one or two load hooks as required 

• Few components to ensure low-maintenance and low-wear operation 

• Spacing between hooks can be adapted later 


• Air pressure required: 6 bar 

Max. safe Profi Chain Chain 


working load model falls dimension in acc. with ATEX 

[kg] BBH ... 

[mm] 

1,100 1000 1 7x21 II 2GD IIA T4(X) / II 3GD IIB T4(X) 

2,200 2000 2 

II 2GD IIB T4(X) / II 3GD IIC T4(X) 

Please state runway profile when ordering. 


ATEX 

ATEX 

WH 05 WH 1 

ATEX 

03_08EN.FM

The right suspension for every load. 

The wide selection of STAHLplus 

load suspension equipment is fast 

and flexible in handling and 

offers a safe solution. 

Load suspension 

equipment 

97

98 

Load suspension equipment 

General instructions for use for lifting clamps 


of some lifting clamps and do not take the place of the operating 

instructions provided by the manufacturer for individual pieces of 

equipment! 

Please read also our general instructions for the use of load 

suspension equipment and slings on pages 120-121 and 142-144. 

Lifting processes using load suspension equipment may only be 

performed by a skilled loader (instructed in theory and practice). 

Load suspension equipment which has been known to have been 

overloaded or otherwise exposed to damaging influences must no 

longer be used until it have been inspected and repaired if necessary. 


The form and construction of load suspension equipment must not be 

modified by e.g. bending, welding, grinding, removing parts, drilling 

holes, removing safety devices such as interlocks, bolts, locking pins, 

etc. without the manufacturer’s permission, as the manufacturer’s 

declaration of conformity and any liability or warranty would lose their 

validity . 


Temperature 

Clamps without any protective coating can be used with their full 

safe working load at -40° to +100°C as a rule (dependent upon 

manufacturer). Clamps with a protective coating can due to this usually 

only be used for lower temperature ranges - e.g. type TPB, TSB from 

-20° to +40°C. 

Impact loading, load swinging 

The safe working loads stated apply for loading the load suspension 

equipment without any impact. 

The full safe working load can be utilised in the case of slight impacts 

such as arise from lifting and lowering or moving the load on the crane. 

High impacts (e.g. knocking the load during transportation) or swinging 

loads are not permissible! 

Goods to be lifted 

Load suspension equipment is designed by the manufacturer for 

particular applications and goods any may not be used for other 

purposes without consulting him. For example the thickness of the 

aterial (gripping range of the clamp), surface structure, surface 

hardness* of the material and the temperature of the material must be 

taken into consideration. You will find information on this in the 

relevant manufacturer’s operating instructions. To ensure safe use, the 

operating instructions must always be made available to the users. It is 

forbidden to transport persons with load suspension equipment! 

* Please note that the surface and core hardness of particular steel sheets may vary 

considerably: e.g. cold work steel. 

Only undamaged clamps with legible rating plates and plates giving 

S.W.L. and gripping range may be used. They must be visually 

inspected before the first and each following use for obvious defects! 

Inspection before starting work 

Ensure that the surfaces of the steel plate where the clamp is attached 

are as far as possible dry and free of grease, paint, dirt, scale and 

coatings so that the contact of the jaws and the goods to be lifted are 

not hindered, or protective coatings can generate the necessary 

friction. 

• Inspect the fixed and clamping jaws or their coatings for wear and 

defects. Both jaws must have a clear profile and the teeth must not 

be too worn (observe manufacturer’s specifications in the operating 

instructions, approximate guide max. 30% wear). Protective coatings 

must not be soiled, damaged, uneven or too worn. 

• The whole load suspension device must be checked for damage, 

corrosion, cracks or deformation. 

• The clamp must be able to be opened and closed easily. 

• Check the spring. It must present a clearly perceptible spring 

pressure in the "closed" position when pressing against the 

suspension eye. 

Use for intended purpose 

• The supporting ring must have sufficient space in the load hook and 

move freely. The clamp must have a safety device to prevent it being 

accidently removed from the hook. A short sling between crane hook 

and clamp makes loading easier and safer! 

• The working load limit (W.L.L.) given on the equipment is the 

maximum load and must not be exceeded. 

• Lifting or transporting loads must be avoided as long as there are 

persons in the danger zone of the load. In the case of clamps which 

are not positive locking, but friction locking without any other locking 

device, the load must on no account be moved over persons. 

• Standing under a suspended load is forbidden on principle. 

Positive locking 

Friction force 

Friction locking 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Use for intended purpose (continued) 

Caution: A safe positive locking connection requires sufficient strength 

of the goods to be lifted and it must be ensured that the load or parts of 

it cannot slip and fall! 

• The load suspension device must be 

positioned above the centre of gravity of the 

load so that the load does not swing when 

lifted. 

• If long plates or sections are to be 

transported, using two clamps is 

recommended to prevent swinging. 

They can either be used in conjunction 

with a spreader beam, or for example a 

two-leg sling with clamps with a swivel 

eye (e.g. type TBS) within the 

permissible angle of inclination (note 

S.W.L. reduction). 

Note safe working 

load diagram 

• Clamps without swivel eyes must not be 

loaded from the side! (As a rule, applying the 

clamp to the plate in the direction of pull of the 

sling is not permissible as the jaws would 

clamp too close to the edge of the plate - the 

clamp is then not seated correctly on the 

plate!) 

• The plate to be transported must be 

inserted right up to the base of the 

jaw, the housing must be in contact 

with the edge of the plate on both 

sides. 

• Only one plate at a time can be 

transported with clamps for transporting 

plates vertically. The clamping effect 

must be exerted both on the front and 

rear sides of the plate! 

Example: 

S.W.L. in % for type TBS with 

swivel eye with diagonal pull. 

It is forbidden to transport 

more than one plate vertically. 

• This depends on the model in the case of clamps for transporting 

plates horizontally. 

For example in the case of steel plates, with the corresponding 

clamp and lifting clamp models, several plates can be lifted 

simultaneously if the stacks do not sag. 

• Do not leave loads suspended or under tension unattended or for 

long periods of time. 

• When loading, it must be ensured that the load suspension 

equipment can be operated without the loader being endangered by 

the equipment, suspension elements or the load. 

• The operator must not initiate the movement of the load until he has 

satisfied himself that the load has been attached correctly and 

no one is in the danger zone. 

• Please note the reduced S.W.L. for clamps depending on the swivel 

range of the support ring or direction of use of the clamp. 

(Caution: not all available clamps are suitable for a swivel range of 

180° - read operating instructions carefully!) 

• The load suspension equipment must be decommissioned 

immediately if it should malfunction. 

Maintenance, inspection and repair of lifting clamps 

Load suspension equipment must be maintained in a safe condition 

by means of regular servicing (in acc. with regulations and the 

manufacturer’s information) (§ 16 AMVO). 

Periodic tests in acc with § 8(13) AMVO on load suspension equipment 

must be performed by a qualified inspector at least once a year, at 

shorter intervals if the conditions of use are severe. Records must be 

made and kept of the inspection and maintenance work. In the main 

the tests are visual and functional tests whereby the state of 

components with regard to damage, wear, corrosion or other 

alterations are assessed and the completeness and efficacy of safety 

equipment must be determined. The inspections must be initiated by 

the user. 

Repairs and overhauls may only be performed by the manufacturer or 

authorised persons using original spare parts. 

There are many applications which could not be dealt with here. 

Please contact us, we would be pleased to advise you! 

99

100 


TKA crate grab 

When lifting, the crate grab presses the two 

clamping jaws under the rigid edge of the 

container. When it has been set down, the 

safety latch locks automatically and holds the 

grab open. 

The crate grab is available as an internal or 

external operating grab. 

N.B.: When ordering please state type of crate 

or provide a sample. 

Safe 

working 


Model Grab 

width 

Weight 


250 TKA0,25/i 300-600 10 

250 TKA0,25/a 10 

TKA0,25/i = interal operating 

TKA0,25/a = external operating 

TRU round stock grab 

Item 

No. 

806 000 0 

806 003 0 

The round stock grab grips round and tubular 

material up to 600 mm in diameter easily and 

safely. 

The jaws can be equipped with a protective 

coating (price on request). 

inside grab 

Safe Grab 


working load range 

Z 

A B 

min. max. 

C D E F 

No. 


100 50-150 270 292 458 97 43 8 17 3.9 806 004 0 

500 35-200 503 417 723 150 56 15 17 13.6 806 010 0 

1,000 35-200 509 437 745 178 82 15 30 16.4 806 014 0 

1,500 80-300 720 520 937 204 84 20 25 29 806 015 0 

3,000 80-300 740 582 960 220 125 20 30 50.7 806 016 0 

4,000 200-600 1420 930 1815 318 205 20 35 204 806 017 0 

TR pipe grab 

For safe transport of tubular and round 

materials up to a diameter of 1050 mm. 

Shackle for grabs for 

safe working load 

2,000 kg and up 

outside grab 

Safety Advice _ The protective coating can only prevent the 

load slipping if the surface of the material is dry and not 

polluted with oil or grease. 

Shackle for grabs for 

safe working load 

2,000 kg and up 

The TR pipe grab is a lightweight grab also 

suitable for lifting and transporting rolls of 

paper, fabric, sheet metal, tubes and barrels 

laid on their sides. 

The jaws can be equipped with a protective 

Safety Advice _ If the centre 

coating of Bremsite or hard rubber (price on 

of gravity is off-centre and the 

request). 

pipe hangs at an angle the 

Other grab ranges available on request. 

surface must be clean, dry 

and free of oil and grease. 

Safe Grab 


working load range A B ØC ØD E F G 

No. 


200 350-550 800 565 350 550 550 35 20 34 806 018 0 

500 500-750 1100 665 500 750 550 35 20 47 806 019 0 

1,000 500-750 1000 665 500 750 550 35 20 55 806 023 0 

2,000 700-1050 1350 815 700 1050 800 45 30 135 806 024 0 

3,000 700-1050 1350 815 700 1050 800 45 30 154 806 029 0 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

ha021v 

Ø 92 

A 

Z 

E 

TBG with narrow jaws (*1) 

94 

124 

F 

E 

Ø 94 

TBG with wide jaws (*2) 

Safe working 


A 

Z 

B2 

E 

B1 

ha022v 

B1 

F 

C 

F 

C 

D 

D 

TBG block grab 

For safe transport of rectangular, high-value 

loads with two parallel vertical surfaces. The 

grab jaws are rubber-coated to protect the 

load. A safety latch can be used to lock the 

grab in the open position. 

N.B.: the material to be lifted must be free of oil 

and grease. 

S.W.L. Model Grab range 


Z A B1 max. B2 C D E F 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] 

200 *1 0,2/150 0 - 150 815 760 - 200 160 30 15 23 809 084 0 

300 *1 0,3/150 0 - 150 815 760 - 200 160 30 15 23 809 086 0 

500 *1 0,5/150 0 - 150 815 760 - 200 160 30 15 23 809 088 0 

1,000 *1 1,0/250 50 - 250 1050 980 - 250 160 29 20 48 809 090 0 

1,500 *1 1,5/250 50 - 250 1050 980 - 250 160 29 20 50 809 093 0 

2,500 *1 2,5/250 50 - 250 1050 980 - 250 160 29 25 58 809 096 0 

200 *2 0,2/500 200 - 500 1040 840 275 160 300 35 20 49 809 085 0 

300 *2 0,3/700 400 - 700 1040 840 275 160 300 35 20 52 809 087 0 

500 *2 0,5/900 600 - 900 1120 840 275 160 300 35 20 55 809 089 0 

1,000 *2 1,0/400 100 - 400 1040 840 275 160 300 35 20 51 809 091 0 

1,0/1100 800 - 1100 1320 840 275 160 300 35 20 72 809 092 0 

1,500 *2 1,5/1300 1000 - 1300 1520 840 275 160 300 35 20 128 809 094 0 

2,000 *2 2,0/500 200 - 500 1100 1120 250 160 350 36 25 126 809 095 0 

3,000 *2 3,0/500 200 - 500 1100 1120 250 160 350 42 30 160 809 097 0 

4,000 *2 4,0/500 200 - 500 1100 1190 250 160 350 48 35 240 809 098 0 

5,000 *2 5,0/500 200 - 500 1100 1190 250 160 350 48 35 270 809 099 0 

TKAd crate grab with tipping device 

The TKAd crate grab with tipping device can not only safely 

transport stacking crates, but also empty them in mid-air. 

When ordering, please state type of crate or provide a sample. 

Model Dimensions Weight Item 

No. 

A B L 


150 

150 

Safe 

working 


TKA 0,15/330d 

TKA 0,15/480d 

200-300 

300 

315-330 

470-480 

465-540 

550-660 

26 

26 

TFA-D barrel grab with tipping device 

(for one-man operation) 

806 036 0 

806 037 0 

For transporting, lifting, setting down and emptying barrels. 

The grab with tipping device is also suitable for turning and 

emptying barrels. 

A barrel must be gripped at its centre of gravity for it to be 

turned without difficulty. 

Grab range Dimensions Weight Item 

No. 

A B C ØD E F G H 


300 400-600 600 1150 1525 90 34 15 200 400 83 806 038 0 


See fork lift truck 

attachments, page 209 

for further barrel grabs. 

101

102 


TFA-R TFA-TR 

TPR profile steel grab 

For transporting beams, profile steel, etc. 

The jaws lock under the profile and ensure a completely secure 

grip. 

Safe Grab 


working load range 

Z 

A 

min. 

B 

max. 

C D E 

No. 


500 0-200 510 390 625 200 15 30 15 806 042 0 

1,500 0-300 710 495 830 200 15 30 24 806 043 0 

3,000 0-300 720 525 920 220 20 43 42 806 044 0 

TFA barrel grab 

For transporting upright barrels to DIN 6643. 

This barrel grab grabs upright barrels at the side and sets them 

down in the same position. The jaws are rubber-coated (PU). 

Safe Grab 


working load range A B C ØD E F G H I 

No. 


300 Ø400-600 600 1040 950 90 34 15 200 400 400 57 806 039 0 

TFA-R and TFA-TR barrel grabs 

For transporting steel drums. The gripping clamps grab under 

the rim of the drum and with their form-fitting connection ensure 

it is held securely. 

Model TFA-TR can be lifted optionally by a hook or by a fork-lift 

truck. 

Safe 


Model Grab 

range 

[kg] [kg] 

350 

350 

TFA-R 

TFA-TR 

420-700 5.7 

9.2 

Weight Item 

No. 

806 040 0 

806 041 0 

TFA-R 

TFA-TR 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

BTG concrete pipe clamp tackle 

For concrete pipes to DIN 4034. 

The pipe tackle is designed for transporting and setting 

down upright concrete pipes/culverts. 

It consists of 3 clamps and a 3-leg chain sling. 

Also available for concrete pipes up to Ø3000 mm on 

request. 

Safe Model Grab 

Dimensions Weight 

working 


range 

Z A B ØC D E F 

per 

clamp 


1,500 BTG 1,5/120 40-120 135 75 18 180 165 100 10 

3,000 BTG 3,0/180 TM-N 50-180 180 100 26 310 245 175 25 

3,000 BTG 3,0/220 TM-N 90-220 180 100 26 310 245 175 26 

TRO pipe hook 

For 60° to 90° top angle between chains. 

Item 

No. 

809 076 0 

809 077 0 

809 078 0 

Pipe hooks are used in pairs to transport pipes safely. The 

shackles are included in the delivery; chain sling not 

included. Rubber coating for hooks on request. 

Pipe hooks for top angles of 90-120° available on request. 

Suitable chain slings can be found on page 145 ff. 


• Sturdy design 

• 4:1 safety factor against breakage 

• Simple and safe handling 

• Wide grab range 

• For the most rugged application conditions 


• Service-friendly 

Safe working Model Dimensions Weight 


A B C D E F ØG H ØI J t per pair 


2,000 TRO 2/90 0-40 35 40 62 62 116 16.3 47.6 12.7 30.2 20 3.1 

4,000 TRO 4/90 0-50 40 48 77 77 142 24.3 72.2 19.0 44.5 30 5.6 

6,000 TRO 6/90 0-60 51 62 90 90 173 24.3 72.2 19.0 44.5 30 10.5 

8,000 TRO 8/90 0-70 55 67 105 105 190 30.3 95.3 25.4 58.7 40 17.8 

10,000 TRO 10/90 0-80 69 80 115 115 221 30.3 95.3 25.4 58.7 40 22.0 

TPZ plate pliers 

For wooden, chipboard and plastic panels. 

Suitable for lifting, setting down and transporting wooden, 

chipboard and plastic panels vertically. 

The pliers are set down on the panel by means of the 

handle. 

The pliers are equipped with a protective coating in the 

gripping area and thus ensure that the panels are gripped 

securely and are not damaged during transport. 

Item 

No. 

809 079 0 

809 080 0 

809 081 0 

809 082 0 

809 083 0 

Safe working Model Grab range 



Z A B C D E F G H 

No. 


400 TPZ 0,4/55 5-55 120 290 525 125 117 60 40 6 6.3 809 071 0 

400 TPZ 0,4/100 55-100 120 335 525 125 117 60 40 6 9.0 809 118 0 

750 TPZ 0,75/60 5-60 155 349 545 145 135 121 75 8x24 12.0 809 119 0 

750 TPZ 0,75/120 60-120 155 406 560 145 135 121 75 8x24 14.0 809 120 0 

103

104 


TBP non-marring grab 

For turning and transporting plates with sensitive 

surfaces. It does not leave any dents or damage. 

Suitable for aluminium, stainless steel, or sheet metal 

with an extremely hard surface. 

The surface of the material to be transported must be free 

of grease and oil to maintain the friction coefficient of the 

rubber-coated jaws (smooth PU). 

Other non-marring grabs up to 3 t S.W.L. and larger grab 

ranges available on request. 

Non-marring grab with chain up to 1.25 t S.W.L. available 

on request. 

Safe working Model Grab range 



Z A B ØC D E F G H I 

No. 


500 TBP 0,5 0-10 127 200 55 52 69 86.5 76 13 20 3.5 809 028 0 

1,500 TBP 1,5 0-20 215 345 85 75 135 131 118 20 24 12 809 029 0 

Minimum load is 10% S.W.L. 

TBS plate clamp 

Safe working load 1,000 to 

3,000 kg. With universal joint 

suspension, swivel eye and safety 

lock. 

TBS plate clamp 

Safe working load 4,500 to 

10,000 kg. With universal joint 

suspension, swivel eye and safety 

lock. 

Other clamps up to 30 t S.W.L. 


Safe working 


Grab range 

Z 


No. 

A B ØC D E F G H I 


1,000 0-20 

2,000 0-32 

3,000 0-32 


Safe working 


Grab range 

Z 

126 

192 

192 

270 

382 

382 

50 

80 

80 

49 

75 

75 

70 

96 

96 

95 

132 

132 

63 

92 

92 

12 

20 

20 

23 

30 

30 

4.6 

14 

14 

809 018 0 

809 019 0 

809 020 0 


No. 

A B ØC D ØE F G H I 


4,500 

6,000 

6,000 

0-50 

0-50 

50-100 

8,000 0-50 

8,000 50-100 

10,000 0-50 

10,000 50-100 


292 

292 

367 

292 

367 

360 

446 

675 

737 

785 

737 

785 

903 

921 

90 

95 

98 

98 

98 

110 

112 

180 

176 

180 

176 

180 

195 

195 

27.8 

27.8 

27.8 

27.8 

27.8 

33.0 

33.0 

95 

95 

115 

95 

115 

125 

168 

143 

143 

143 

143 

143 

162 

162 

135 

137 

135 

136 

136 

170 

170 

185 

188 

188 

210 

210 

223 

223 

33 

38 

42 

39 

42.4 

68 

80 

The surface hardness 

of the material to be 

transported must be 

less than HRC 30! 

The surface hardness 

of the material to be 

transported must be 

less than HRC 30! 

809 021 0 

809 022 0 

809 023 0 

809 024 0 

809 025 0 

809 026 0 

809 027 0 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

TCH plate lifting clamp 

The TCH plate lifting clamp consists of two 

plate clamps in conjunction with a 2-leg chain 

sling. 

It is particularly suitable for transporting 

single thick plates from approx. 5 mm in 

thickness, as well as for plate bundles. 

In its standard design, the lifting tackle is 

suitable for plates up to 1500 mm wide - top 

angle between the chains max. 90°. For wider 

plates on request. 

The top angle between the chain or rope legs 

must not exceed 90°. 

Single clamps available on request. 

TGF plate lifting clamp 

For transporting plate stacks horizontally. 

TheTGF plate lifting clamp consists of two 

plate clamps in conjunction with a 2-leg chain 

sling. 

Single clamps (without shackles) available 

on request. 

TBL Plate clamps 

TBL self-gripping clamps can be used for the vertical transport of individual plates and steel 

sheet, and for lifting and turning up to 180°. 

A spring-loaded safety lever ensures that the plate clamp remains closed when not in use. 

The surface hardness of the material to be transported must be less than HRC 30! 

Plate clamps up to 30 t S.W.L. available on request. 

Safe 

working 


Grab range 

Z 


No. 

A B ØC D E F G H 


500 

1,000 

2,000 

0-16 

0-20 

0-32 

99 

126 

192 

3,000 0-32 192 

4,000 0-32 197 

6,000 0-50 293 


195 

225 

312 

312 

339 

442 

* per pair with angle of inclination 45° 

** per pair with chain 

29 

50 

80 

80 

80 

89 

33 

49 

75 

75 

68 

95 

47 

70 

96 

96 

93 

143 

50 

82 

100 

100 

110 

129 

11 

12 

20 

20 

20 

20 

16 

20 

24 

24 

32 

35 

1.5 

3 

9.3 

9.3 

12 

21 

809 006 0 

809 007 0 

809 008 0 

809 009 0 

809 016 0 

809 017 0 

Safe Grab 


working 

load * 

range 

Z 

A B ØC D E F G H I ØJ 

** No. 


1,000 0-50 135 75 18 15 82 65 100 32 44 13 13 809 030 0 

2,000 5-32 160 90 22 32 83 61 100 49 72 19 17.7 809 031 0 

4,000 5-50 180 100 26 44 114 75 99 62 89 26 31 809 032 0 

6,000 5-75 200 110 32 58 172 97 129 90 127 36 69 809 033 0 

8,000 5-75 260 140 36 56 170 100 128 90 130 37 72 809 034 0 

10,000 5-100 300 160 40 70 216 116 149 113 113 50 93.8 809 035 0 

10,000 50-150 300 160 40 66 218 116 150 113 113 50 108.6 809 036 0 

Safe 

working 

load * 

Grab 

range 

Z 

Dimensions Weight 

** 

A B C D ØE F G ØH 


350 0-150 298 122 160 41 20 80 20 25 21 809 037 0 

0-250 448 140 

809 044 0 

650 0-150 298 122 160 41 20 80 20 25 22 809 038 0 

0-250 448 140 

809 045 0 

1,300 0-150 298 122 160 41 20 80 20 25 23 809 039 0 

0-250 448 140 

809 046 0 

2,300 0-150 321 130 160 50 23 80 25 25 33 809 040 0 

0-250 417 

60 

809 047 0 

3,300 0-150 321 130 160 50 23 80 25 25 39 809 041 0 

0-250 417 

60 

809 048 0 

5,000 0-150 405 185 210 82 30 100 30 40 59 809 042 0 

0-250 495 

809 049 0 

6,650 0-150 405 185 210 82 30 100 30 40 65 809 043 0 

0-250 495 

809 050 0 

* per pair with top angle between chains 90° 

** per pair without chain 

Item 

No. 

105

106 


Shark plate clamp 

For transporting single plates and steel sheets vertically 

and for lifting and turning them up to 180°. The 

strengthened suspension eye and the drop-forged housing 

make the Shark plate clamp particularly torsion-resistant. 

The swivel-action jaw guarantees high gripping force in 

every position. 

Safe working load 1,000 kg to 2,000 kg. 

The surface hardness of the goods to be transported must 

be below HRC 40! 

Safe work- Model Grab range Dimensions Weight Item 


A B ØC D E F G H I J K L 

No. 


1,000 Shark 1,0 0 - 20 120 240 36 42 60 72 58 12 12 137 152 210 3.3 809 100 0 

2,000 Shark 2,0 0 - 32 170 345 65 58 80 88 69 15 19 191 214 302 6.8 809 101 0 


Shark-S plate clamp 

For transporting single plates and steel 

sheets vertically and for lifting and turning 

them up to 180°. With universal joint suspension 

for two-fall use. Torsion resistant thanks 

to drop-forged casing. The swivel-action jaw 

guarantees high gripping force in every 

position. 

Safe working load 1,000 kg to 2,000 kg. 

The surface hardness of the goods to be 

transported must be below HRC 40! 



A B ØC D E F G H I J K L 

No. 


1,000 Shark-S 1,0 0 - 20 120 248 38 42 60 72 58 12 13 137 152 223 3.6 809 102 0 

2,000 Shark-S 2,0 0 - 32 170 349 65 58 80 88 69 19 20 191 214 326 7.8 809 103 0 


TAG multi-purpose grab 

A grab for universal use which saves a great deal of time 

as there is no chain/rope. The grab is easy to open by 

lifting and simultaneously pulling on the lever. The spring 

tension of the clamping jaw holds the goods transported 

safely even is no load is applied. 

The jaws can be equipped with a protective coating 

(on request). 

The surface hardness of the goods to be transported must 

be below HRC 30! 



A B C D E F G H I J K 

No. 


350 TAG 0,35/100 0 - 100 264 259 128 100 100 85 550 75 121 20 78 8.7 809 104 0 

350 TAG 0,35/200 90 - 200 382 434 195 156 200 120 760 75 121 20 90 16.3 809 105 0 

750 TAG 0,75/100 0 - 100 264 259 128 100 100 85 550 75 121 20 83 8.6 809 106 0 

750 TAG 0,75/200 90 - 200 382 434 195 156 200 120 760 75 121 20 90 16.6 809 107 0 

1,250 TAG 1,25/100 0 - 100 320 289 128 100 100 85 570 75 121 20 83 14.9 809 108 0 

1,250 TAG 1,25/200 90 - 200 382 434 195 156 200 120 760 75 121 20 90 24.3 809 109 0 

2,000 TAG 2,0/100 0 - 1000 328 415 135 115 100 105 571 75 121 20 105 20.8 809 110 0 

2,000 TAG 2,0/200 90 - 200 375 515 195 165 200 160 750 75 121 20 105 29.1 809 111 0 

3,000 TAG 3,0/90 5 - 90 297 290 136 106 90 91 570 82 111 32 137 26.5 809 112 0 

5,000 TAG 5,0/90 5 - 90 297 290 136 106 90 91 570 82 111 32 147 30.5 809 113 0 

5,000 TAG 5,0/170 80 - 170 354 423 180 155 170 118 620 82 111 32 147 43.8 809 114 0 

10,000 TAG 10,0/100 0 - 100 405 423 160 130 100 160 720 102 144 40 208 70.0 809 115 0 

10,000 TAG 10,0/200 100 - 200 440 562 200 175 200 183 840 102 144 40 208 105.0 809 116 0 


04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Safe working 


Grab 

range 

TTR beam grab 

The TTR beam grab is particularly useful for transporting 

beams vertically into and out of stores. 

The spring-loaded safety catch locks the grab to the goods 

to be transported even if no load is applied. Simple to operate, 

the grab jaw is opened and closed by a lever which 

locks it in the open position. 

Safe working 


Grab 

range 


No. 

A B C D E F ØG H I K 


750 

1,500 

3,000 

5-16 

5-25 

5-28 

TTG beam grab 

24 

33 

37 

40 

53 

56 

132 

176 

194 

62 

76 

78 

145 

190 

208 

118 

152 

163 

50 

70 

80 

Particularly suitable for transporting beams, sheet steel, 

profiles etc. horizontally. The offset suspension eye 

ensures that the beam flange will be kept practically 

horizontal during transport. 

12 

15 

20 

The spring-loaded safety catch locks the grab to the goods 

to be transported even if no load is applied. 

The lever ensures ease in opening and closing the grab jaw 

and locks it in the open position. 

12 

17 

23 

53 

69 

85 

4 

7 

13 

809 055 0 

809 056 0 

809 057 0 


No. 

ØA B C D E F G H I J K L M 


500 

1,500 

3,000 

4,500 

7,500 

0-20 

0-30 

0-35 

0-40 

0-45 

STAHLplus Info _ If the beams 

are long, we recommend 

using the TTR/TTG beam 

grabs in pairs in combination 

with a spreader beam. 

20 

70 

80 

90 

110 

36 

43 

55 

60 

64 

25 

35 

42 

46 

55 

148 

140 

180 

196 

222 

200 

180 

214 

248 

304 

27 

40 

40 

40 

50 

20 

30 

32 

35 

42 

TFRK barrel rim clamp 

95 

155 

190 

207 

237 

110 

230 

284 

314 

367 

10 

15 

20 

20 

22 

For transporting upright barrels to DIN 6643. 

56 

50 

60 

64 

90 

85 

100 

114 

117 

143 

The clamp grips under the rim of the barrel. A spring-loaded 

cam prevents the clamp being opened unintentionally. 

Can be used singly, in pairs, or as a multi-leg system. 

Safe 

working 



No. 

A B C D E F G ØH 


500 152 150 127 30 21 41 17 40 1.2 809 051 0 

TKB cable drum clamp 

Used in pairs for transporting cable drums. 

The safety lever locks the expanded clamp in the cable drum 

so as to transport it safely. 

Safe working 


per pair 


No. 

A B ØC D ØE 


5,000 277 277 82 85 50 11 809 121 0 

13 

16 

20 

25 

30 

3 

6 

12 

16 

28 

809 058 0 

809 059 0 

809 068 0 

809 069 0 

809 070 0 

107

108 


Parallel grab for gearboxes. 

Swivelling around curved runway. 

Catch points for locking in position. 

Safe working load 50 kg. 

TSH screw clamp 


The screw clamp is suitable for a wide range of applications. 

It is particularly suitable for lifting, turning and pulling steel 

sheets, beams, structural steelwork, etc. 

The surface hardness of the goods to be transported must not be 

above HRC 50. 

Screw clamps up to 6 t S.W.L. available on request. 

Safe work- Grab range 


ing load Z A B ØC D E F X 

No. 


750 0-30 190 52 19 43 113 35 15 3.1 809 117 0 

1,500 0-32 255 65 26 75 130 44 40 7.4 809 073 0 

3,000 0-50 290 74 30 85 170 50 40 11.4 809 074 0 

5,000 0-80 470 130 50 135 225 72 50 27.6 809 075 0 

TDI inside grab 

For transporting rectangular and cylindrical 

hollow goods such as wire reels. Depending 

on the material, the clamping jaws can be 

equipped with steel spikes, hard manganese 

teeth or a protective coating. Please advise 

version required when ordering. 

S.W.L.100 to 5,000 kg. 

For clamping jaws with protective coating, the 

interior wall of the material to be transported 

must free of grease and oil. 



A B C D E F ØG H I 

No. 


100 TDI 0,1/420 220-420 790 455 550 80 90 - 60 15 22 17 809 122 0 

500 TDI 0,5/600 400-600 1200 610 800 100 160 - 92 15 30 51 809 123 0 

1,000 TDI 1,0/600 400-600 1200 600 900 100 160 - 92 15 30 53 809 124 0 

2,000 TDI 2,0/800 550-800 1400 830 1100 120 220 124 83 30 42 150 809 125 0 

3,000 TDI 3,0/800 550-800 1450 920 1000 160 220 151 107 30 42 175 809 126 0 

5,000 TDI 5,0/800 550-800 1450 795 1000 160 65 151 107 35 42 220 809 127 0 

Grab for gearboxes. Automatic adjustment 

of centre of gravity around a 

curved runway. 


Grab (scissor principle) for 

cylinder heads. 

Transport without changing position. 


2-fold pick-up hook with 

polyamide coating for cylinder 

crankcases. 


04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 


Crate grab (swivel action) and lifting appliances for all types of 

KLT crate variants 

Internal operating grab in 3-arm design - various off-standard designs 

Spindle grab Parallel sliding grab for lifting upright reels 

Other off-standard grabs 

Crate tipper grab with self-locking swivel mechanism or turning hand-wheel for 

transporting and emptying sheet steel crates 

Parallel grab Round grab, asymmetrical pick-up Parallel grab for lifting engine blocks or engine components 

109

110 

Vacuum lifters 


Scope of applications 

Vacuum lifters are particularly suitable for transporting: 

• sheet metal, channelled and bulb plate 

• oxidised or rusty sheet metal plates 

• plastic panels 

• panes of glass 

• coated wood panels 

• impermeable and smooth stone slabs 

• and all other air-impermeable materials 

Safety Advice _ The high safety standards 

comply with currently applicable safety 

specifications. 

Advantages for the user 

• Efficient, safe and protective handling of flat materials 

• No mechanical damage to the load caused by clamps, 

grabs or chains 

• Modular system combining a high degree of flexibility with 

minimum deadweight 

• Easy one-man operation 

• Various handling options: 

- horizontal transport 

- vertical transport 

- swivel through 90° 

- turn through 180° 

- 90° swivel and 180° turn 

• Fast attachment to and release from material to be 

transported 

• Optimum matching to the most diverse workpiece 

dimensions 

• High degree of operational safety and reliability even in 

the event of power failure ensured by integrated safety 

backup and non-return valve 

• Complete solutions with hoist and crane systems 

STAHLplus Info _ Matching hoists and 

suspension equipment are to be found 

on pages 4 ff and 42 ff. 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

VACUBOY horizontal 

VACUBOY, the vacuum-operated lifter for horizontal handling 

operations, is particularly suitable for feeding and discharging 

processing machines as well as stacking and de-stacking sheet 

products. 

Simply attach the device, connect the electrical supply and it is ready 

for use. By suitable selection and arrangement of the suction pads, not 

only smooth but also structured and corrugated workpieces can be 

moved safely without damage. 

Easy adjustment of the cross beam as well as the suction pad mounting 

allow the lifters to be effectively adapted to the most diverse 

workpiece dimensions. 

If you cannot find the suction lifter you need, please enquire! Enquiry 

form on page 115. 

Technical features (standard version for all devices) 

• Acoustic warning facility 

• Vacuum gauge in visual range 

• Oil-free vacuum pump with safety accumulator and non-return valve 

• Vacuum control by means of manually operated slide valve or 

solenoid valve available against surcharge 

• Two-hand manipulator handle 

• Cardanic mounting of suction pads 

• Variable position of suction pads 

• Painted safety yellow-green (RAL 6018), partially galvanised 

• Supply voltage 400 V, 50 Hz 

Safe working Model Number of Suction pad 



suction pads Ø L1 L2 B1 B2 B3 H A 

No. 


250 VB 60/4 

4 

160 1800 900 800 350 600 approx. 60 50 806 300 0 

VB 60/6 

6 

160 

600 

60 806 301 0 

VB 60/8 

8 

110 

80 806 302 0 

500 VB 80/4 

4 

220 2400 900 800 500 600 approx. 60 70 806 303 0 

VB 80/6 

6 

220 

600 

85 806 304 0 

VB 80/8 

8 

160 

100 806 305 0 

1,000 VB 100/6 

6 

280 2400 1100 800 600 900 approxc 85 180 806 306 0 

VB 100/8 

8 

220 3000 

a. 800 

230 806 307 0 

2,000 VB 100/M/12 12 

280 3000 1100 1200 600 900 approx. 85 320 806 308 0 

VB 100/M/16 16 

200 

800 

360 806 309 0 

VB 60/6 

VB 80/8 

111

112 


VACUBOY 90° swivel-action 

The swivel-action VACUBOY vacuum lifter is particularly suitable for handling plates that need to be turned through approx. 90°. The workpiece 

can be taken up both horizontally and vertically. 

The vacuum lifter is controlled by ergonomically designed pushbuttons in the manipulator handle, the suspended workpiece can be turned 

without exerting any effort by means of a motor-driven swivel facility. 

If you cannot find the vacuum lifter you need, please enquire! Enquiry form on page 115. 

VB 60/4-90E 

STAHLplus Info _ Matching hoists and suspension 

equipment are to be found on pages 4 ff 

and 42 ff. 

Technical features (standard version for all devices) 

• Acoustic warning facility 

• Vacuum gauge in visual range 

• Oil-free vacuum pump with safety accumulator and non-return valve 

• Vacuum control by means of manually operated slide valve or 

solenoid valve available against surcharge 

• Two-hand manipulator handle 

• Cardanic mounting of suction paids 

• Variable position of suction pads 

• Painted safety yellow-green (RAL 6018), partially galvanised 

• Supply voltage 400 V, 50 Hz 

Safe working Model Number of Suction pad 



suction pads Ø L1 L2 B1 B2 B3 H A 

No. 


250/125 VB 60/4-90E 4 

160 1800 1300 800 350 600 approx. 60 75 806 310 0 

VB 60/8-90E 8 

110 

1050 

85 806 311 0 

500/250 VB 80/4-90E 4 

220 2400 1300 800 500 600 approx. 60 85 806 312 0 

VB 80/8-90E 8 

160 

1050 

105 806 313 0 

1,000/500 VB 100/8-90E 8 220 3000 1500 1200 600 900 ap.1100 85 350 806 314 0 

2,000/1,000 VB 100M/12-90E 12 280 3000 1500 1200 600 900 ap.1100 85 530 806 315 0 

VB 60/8-90E 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Single device 

for inherently stable loads 

Multiple suction pad device 

for large-surfaced, 

more instable loads 


[kg] 

270 

640 

1,100 

300 

750 

1,250 

Examples of off-standard design suction lifters 

Mini VACUBOY 

• Extremely compact and light-weight device with only 20 kg deadweight 

• For horizontal and vertical transport of inherently stable loads up to 300 kg, in particular 

for solid and smooth stone slabs, drums and containers, sheets of glass and other 

air-impermeable materials. 

• One suspension eye for vertical and one for horizontal transport. 

• Supply voltage 400 V, 50 Hz, supply cable 1.0 m 

Safe work- Model Suction Vacuum Vacuum Headroom Weight Item 


pads producer control approx. 

No. 


100/50 VBM 100/1 GRL 220 T4.4 manual 470 20 806 069 0 

150/75 VBM 150/4 GRL 110 

500 30 806 070 0 

200/100 VBM 200/1 GRL 280 

470 20 806 071 0 

Self-acting suction lifters 

Suction lifter (10,000 kg) for long steel plates for loading a flame-cutting machine. 

Transportation of air-impermeable loads with relatively clean and flat surfaces such as metal 

plates (a thin film of rust is no problem), polished blocks of marble or granite, coated chipboard 

panels, plastic panels, etc. 


• Self-acting suction lifters produce the necessary suction force 

dependent upon the weight of the load. 

• With vacuum gauges and optical and acoustic warning signal. 

Model Number of suction pads Length of beam Max. dimensions of load Item 

pad Ø [mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

No. 

U02-E 

Ø350 

- 

1000x2000 806 063 0 

U075-E 

Ø480 

- 

806 064 0 

U125-E 

Ø625 

- 

806 065 0 

U02-2 

2x Ø350 

1500 1500x3000 806 066 0 

U075-2 

2x Ø415 

806 067 0 

U125-2 

2x Ø625 

806 068 0 

Off-standard vacuum lifter for 120 kg blocks of cheese packed in foil permitting air to 

escape. 2-step chain hoist control for lifting-lowering on the hinged, ergonomic guide 

bar. 

113

114 


CLAD BOY suction lifter 

The CLAD BOY suction lifter is designed for transporting roofing and walling panels of various sizes both vertically and horizontally. 

Power is supplied by a rechargeable 24 V battery. 


AERO suction lifter 

Safe 

working 


Weight Item 

No. 

[kg] [kg] 

160 115 806 361 0 

for horizontal transport of air-impermeable panels and steel sheets, can be swivelled by 180°. 

AERO 150/R4 

AERO 350/R8 

• Safe working load at 60% vacuum: 160 kg 

• Frame red (RAL 300) with suspension eyes for crane hook. Length 

approx. 1000 mm, overall height approx. 1000 mm. 

• Take-up unit with 4 suction plates AL 80x400, rigidly suspended and 

movable on the galvanised main beam. 

• "Suction release" by 3/2-way valve with safety device 

• Attached vacuum gauge with red-green range. Electronic warning 

device (specified by BGR 500). 

• Vacuum reservoir (approx. 10 l), non-return valve and adjustable 

underpressure switch for switching vacuum pump on and off 

automatically. 

• Device battery 24 V, 18 Ah, maintenance-free, for horizontal and 

vertical use. Well over 100 work cycles with one battery charge. 

• Switched-mode battery charger, 2.7 A, 24 V. 


• Safe working load at 60% vacuum: 

- AERO 150/4R: 150 kg (4 suction plates) 

- AERO 350/8R: 350 kg (8 suction plates) 

• Main frame (C-shaped) with adjustable crane eye. The main frame is 

also the vacuum reservoir. With non-return valve and underpressure 

switch. 

• Manipulating switch for the functions "suction - release" and control 

switch for "swivel 0-180°". 

• Swivelling by means of gear motor with brake. 

• 4 or 8 suction plates AL 210R, Ø210 mm, with black buna N seal / 

corrugated rubber surface. The suction plates are cardanically 

mounted. 

• Vacuum pump type VAL 6T, 6 m³/h, 400 V, 50 Hz, 0.25 kW 

Safe 

working 


Length of 

main beam 

Length of 

cross- 

beam 

Overall 

height 

Weight Item 

No. 


150 1600 800 ap. 1200 170 806 362 0 

350 2000 800 ap. 1200 ap. 200 806 363 0 

Off-line equipment 

The suction lifters shown below work off-line. This makes them 

extremely mobile. 


04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Fax enquiry for suction lifters 

You can’t solve your transport problem with the suction lifters 

described above? We can still help you. 

1. Workpiece: 


Material: .................................................................................................................................................................. 

Please copy this page and complete with the required data and 

dimensions. 

Fax it to us. We look forward to advising you and sending you a 

quotation by return. 

Dimensions and weights Length Width Thickness 

Maximum [mm] [mm] [mm] 

Minimum [mm] [mm] [mm] 

Max. weight [kg] Max. weight per metre: [kg/m] 

Surface condition: � dry � smooth � dusty � oily 

� wet � rough � sensitive 

Suction ability: � impermeable � air permeable � suction test required (sample) 

Temperatures: Workpiece min./max.: ........./.......... °C Ambient min./max.: ......../........ °C 

2. Handling: 

Method of handling: � Load horizontal � Swivelling load � 90° � 85° � ................° 

� Rotating on one level � Turning load � 180° � 360° 

Application environment: � Enclosed space � Outdoors under roof � Outdoors 

3. Equipment features: 

Vacuum control: � Manual sliding valve � Automatic switching � Radio remote control 

� Magnetic valve incl. pushbuttons on device � Crane motions 

Electrical connections: ............... V ................Hz � 3-phase A.C. � A.C. 

� L1 � L2 � L3 � N � PE 

Supply: � CEE 16 A plug � Cable balancer with coupling 

� Multiple plug � Power supply by customer 

4. Crane installation: 

5. Enclosures / quotation date: 

� None � Existing, safe working load: .......................................kg, 

hook size: ...................................................... 

� Single-point suspension � Two-point suspension, dimension between hooks: .............mm 

� Sketch showing handling procedure � Sketch of workpiece 

� Material sample (approx. 500 x 500) � Other:......................... 

Quotation by: ......................... Desired delivery date:......../............ c/w / year 

� Quotation for test acc. to accident prevention regulations (1 x per year) requested 

Sender/customer no. 

................................................................................................................................ 

Company 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 


................................................................................................................................................................................................. 


................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Name of person ordering 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 


................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Telephone Fax 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

115

116 


General instructions for use for lifting magnets 


of lifting magnets and do not take the place of the operating 


equipment! 


suspension equipment and slings on pages 120-121 and 142-144. 

Lifting processes using load suspension equipment may only be 

performed by a skilled loader (instructed in theory and practice). 

Load suspension equipment which has been known to have been 

overloaded or otherwise exposed to damaging influences must no 

longer be used until it have been inspected and repaired if necessary. 


The form and construction of load suspension equipment must not be 

modified by e.g. bending, welding, grinding, removing parts, drilling 

holes, removing safety devices such as interlocks, bolts, locking pins, 

etc. without the manufacturer’s permission, as the manufacturer’s 

declaration of conformity and any liability or warranty would lose their 

validity . 


Danger zone 

The presence of persons in the danger zone of the load is forbidden for 

the duration of the lifting and transport procedure. 

Impact loading, load swinging 

The safe working loads stated apply for loading the load suspension 

equipment without any impact. 



High impacts (e.g. knocking the load during transportation) or swinging 

loads are not permissible! 

Goods to be lifted 

Load suspension equipment is designed by the manufacturer for 

particular applications and goods any may not be used for other 

purposes without consulting him. Detailed information is to be found in 

the relevant manufacturer’s operating instructions. To ensure safe use, 

the operating instructions must always be made available to the users. 

It is forbidden to transport persons with load suspension equipment! 

Determination of safe working load 

There are various negative influences on the material to be lifted and 

the ambient temperature. Every lifting magnet is accompanied by a 

safe working load table. This table lists the safe working loads 

dependent upon material thickness, surfaces, nature (air gap) and 

material. 

Influences on safe working load 

Material thickness 

Workpieces which are too thin cannot take up all the magnetic force 

lines. Some of the magnetic force lines flow through the air underneath 

the workpiece causing the safe working load to be reduced. 

Air gap 

The quality of the workpiece surface plays a 

major role. The rougher or more uneven the 

surface is, the larger the "air gap" between the 

workpiece and the magnet. Air is a strong 

resistance to magnetic force lines. Also paint, 

rust, scale, grease etc. form an "air gap" and 

thus a resistance in the magnetic circuit. Please note the relevant safe 

working load tables on the magnet or in the operating instructions. 

Ratio of workpiece dimensions to magnet dimensions 

Be sure to observe the maximum and minimum plate dimensions given 

in the lifting table. 

The contact surface of the workpiece should be at least as large as the 

pole surface of the magnet. 

Temperature of load 

The safe working loads apply at 20°C. If the temperature is considerably 

higher, around 100°C or more, the magnetic properties of the 

magnet material are impaired. The maximum permissible temperature 

is thus given in the operating instructions. 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

ELM 

ELM / SK-I permanent lifting magnet 

With the ELM / SK-I lifting magnet, ferrous 

materials can be lifted efficiently regardless of 

their shape. 

The powerful magnet is applied by turning the 

lever through 90°. 


• Neodymium magnet 

• Compact dimensions and low deadweight 

• Low-depth magnetic field making the lifting 

magnet also suitable for lifting thin ferrous 

sheets 

• Particularly suitable for moving round material 

• Operating temperature range from -10°C 

to +80°C 

• Safety factor 3.5:1 

• Safe working load is reduced by 30% when 

used vertically 

Additional crane eye for ELM 300 / 600 

For transporting steel plates horizontally. 

Item No.: 806 388 0 

Safe working load Model Sheet Ø Length of 


Flat 

material 

Round 

material 

thickness 

min. 

max. load 

max. 

A B C D E F G H 

No. 


100 45 ELM 100 15 150 1000 107 84 120 125 60 71 41 30 2.5 806 373 0 

300 135 ELM 300 25 250 1500 280 155 156 185 90 93 51 41 8.6 806 374 0 

600 270 ELM 600 30 350 2000 255 224 212 260 115 120 77 52 21.0 806 375 0 

1,000 450 ELM 1000 40 450 2500 280 245 286 371 165 169 97 87 46.0 806 384 0 

2,000 900 ELM 2000 55 550 3000 422 380 348 512 216 215 105 121 118.0 806 385 0 

3,000 1,350 ELM 3000 60 650 3500 560 530 400 770 216 222 147 80 181.0 806 386 0 

5,000 2,250 SK-I 5000 70 650 4500 610 550 610 750 370 310 260 95 350.0 806 387 0 

SP 16 permanent lifting magnet 

With the SP 16 lifting magnet, ferrous materials 

can be lifted efficiently regardless of their 

shape. 

The powerful magnet is applied by turning the 

lever through 90°. 


• Neodymium magnet 


• Operating temperature range from -10°C 

to +80°C 

• 3:1 safety factor 

Safe working load Model Sheet Ø Length of 


Flat 

material 

Round 

material 

thickness 

min. 

min. load 

max. 

A B C D E 

No. 


150 65 SP16.00150 10 40/100 2000 155 75 83 62 35 6 806 050 0 

250 100 SP16.00250 15 40/160 2000 195 95 105 62 35 12 806 051 0 

500 210 SP16.00500 20 40/220 2500 250 105 118 87 52 21 806 052 0 

1,000 540 SP16.01000 25 80/300 3000 310 150 168 88 52 55 806 053 0 

1,500 810 SP16.01500 30 80/350 3000 370 178 201 123 64 95 806 054 0 

2,000 1,080 SP16.02000 35 80/400 3500 400 216 236 124 64 145 806 055 0 

SKI 

117

118 


Safe working loads for ELM / SK-I lifting magnets 

relating to material thickness 

Model Material thickness 

20 mm 15 mm 10 mm 5 mm 

Test Work Test Work Test Work Test Work 

load load load load 

[kg] 


ELM 100 350 100 350 100 245 70 140 40 

ELM 300 945 270 735 210 525 150 315 90 

ELM 600 1,575 450 1,260 360 945 270 525 150 

ELM 1000 2,100 600 1,750 500 1,225 350 700 200 

ELM 2000 3,150 900 2,450 700 1,750 500 1,050 300 

ELM 3000 4,200 1,200 3,150 900 2,100 600 - * - * 

SK-I 5000 4,500 1,500 3,000 1,000 - * - * - * - * 

* Not possible 

Ultralift-TP permanent lifting magnet 

Safe working loads for SP16 lifting magnets 

dependent upon material thickness 

The TP permanent lifting magnet will take up flat ferrous materials. 

It is magnetised by turning the lever by 90°. 



• Particularly suitable for lifting thin iron plates 

• Can be used from -10°C to +80°C 

• Safety factor 3:1 

Model Material thickness 

20 mm 15 mm 10 mm 5 mm 

Test Work Test Work Test Work Test Work 


[kg] 


SP16.00150 450 150 450 150 450 150 220 70 

SP16.00250 750 250 750 250 490 160 270 90 

SP16.00500 1,500 500 1,500 500 650 215 410 135 

SP16.01000 3,000 1,000 2,100 700 870 290 - * - * 

SP16.01500 4,500 1,500 - * - * - * - * - * - * 

SP16.02000 6,000 2,000 - * - * - * - * - * - * 

* Not possible 

Safe work- Model Sheet thickn. Length 



min. max. A B C D E F 

No. 


150 TP 150 8 1500 202 150 181 100 126 74 8 806 364 0 

300 TP 300 8 2000 352 300 181 100 126 74 15 806 365 0 

SH 35K 

HL 10 HL 20 

SH 60 

SH 12/4 

SH / HL magnetic carrier 

Infinitely adjustable magnet beam with infrared remote control for a flame-cutting machine, 

safe working load 3,200 kg, working width from 400 - 2000 mm. 

With the SH / HL magnetic carrier, steel plate and sheet steel products can easily be lifted and transported 

either by hand or by attaching them to a crane. The most effective grip is achieved on smooth surfaces. 

A release latch device allows the load to be detached easily from the magnet. 

Safe work- Tractive Model Base area Plate Weight Item 

ing load force 

thickn. 

No. 


30 15 HL 10 150x100 from 1 1.5 806 371 0 

50 25 HL 20 190x140 from 1 2.0 806 372 0 

170 100 SH 12/4 133x106 from 1 1.4 806 366 0 

350 175 SH 25 160x120 from 2 2.5 806 368 0 

250 170 SH 35K 190x110 from 3 4.0 806 369 0 

500 300 SH 60 310x190 from 6 12.0 806 370 0 


If you are unable 

to solve your 

transport tasks 

with the magnets 

shown here, we can still help you! 

Just ask us! 

Magnetic beams (rigid or adjustable) for transporting individual long, thin plates (standard 

from 5 mm in thickness up to 16 m in length and 25 t in weight). With infinitely adjustable 

electrohydraulic telescopic arms and radio remote control. Slewing drive also available as 

an option. 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Load suspension equipment from crane manufacturer STAHL CraneSystems 

On the following pages we 

show you examples of our 

range of spreader beams. If 

you are unable to handle your 

transport task with our standard 

range, we would be 

please to quote you a suitable 

solution. Please enquire! 

Safety Advice_ 

The high safety standards 

comply with currently applicable 

accident prevention 

regulations and requirements 

of the Employers’ Liability 

Insurance Association. 

EN 13155 and FEM 1.001 are 

taken into account when 

calculating load suspension 

equipment. All approvals and 

qualifications necessary for 

production are available. 

Stahlplus Info _ 

Load suspension equipment in 

explosion-protected design up 

to 1,000 kg S.W.L. available on 

request. 

STAHLplus Info _ On page 134 and 135 you will find a detailed 

questionnaire which may be of help for you to make initial 

contact! 

119

120 


General instructions for the use of load suspension equipment 

Definitions 


Components not permanently attached to the hoisting equipment, 

mounted between crane or hoist hook and load, for the safe 

attachment of the load. For example: spreader beams, lifting clamps, 

C hooks, grabs, loading forks, etc. 

Specialist 

A person having specialist knowledge, practical experience and 

training able to perform the required tests after having been suitably 

instructed. 

Determining weight of load 

The load on the suspension equipment and the sling must not be 

greater than that stated on the S.W.L. tag for the type of suspension 

and inclination angle. Delivery papers, information on the load itself, 

weight tables e.g. for steel sections etc., calculation or weighing with a 

load cell can be used to determine the weight. 

Handling load 

Before hoisting starts it must be ensured that the load moves freely and 

is not jammed or still lashed or screwed down. Slings must not be 

overloaded. Slings must not be twisted or knotted. If hooks are used, 

the load must be at the base of the jaw and never at the tip. The hook 

must move freely at the sling point to prevent bending stress. The 

suspension link or loops must move freely in the hoist’s load hook. If 

two loops or eyes are placed on the hoist’s load hook, it must be 

ensured that there is sufficient room and they do not hinder each other. 

There must be no danger of the loops being 

pulled out of the hoist or crane hook by the 

angle between the two legs. 

Inclination angles above 45° in the hoist or 

crane hook may already be hazardous, 

depending on the hook design! 

Wrong! 

If the sling comes into contact with sharp 

edges of the load, it must be protected by intermediate layers such as 

wood, edge protectors, PU sleeves or other means. 

Force must not be used to pull slings out from under the load. Loads 

must be set down on wood blocks so that there is sufficient space to 

remove the slings. The sling must only be grasped from the outside 

when being position to prevent hands being endangered when the 

sling tautens. When the load is ready for lifting it should be lifted slowly 

at first and checked that it is attached safely and remains horizontal. If 

the load tips it should be set down and the sling repositioned above the 

centre of gravity. The loader must leave the dangerous spot before the 

load is lifted. Persons must not stand unnecessarily in dangerous 

spots, in particular underneath suspended loads, in travel and slewing 

areas or in blind travel and transport areas. 

If load suspension equipment is used which holds the load e.g. with 

magnetic, suction or friction forces without any other positive locking 

safety device, the load must on no account be moved over persons. 

Commissioning load suspension equipment and slings 

Before using a sling for the first time, it must be ensured that: 

• the sling corresponds to the order; 

• the declaration of conformity or test certificate is available; 

• the marking and S.W.L. ratings on the sling correspond to the 

declaration of conformity or test certificate; 

• the operating instructions have been read carefully. 

The slings must be checked for obvious defects before each use! 

Obvious defects 

are for example bent hooks, cracked or bent chain links, displaced 

connecting bolts in chain connecting links, broken strands of fibre or 

wire ropes, cuts in web slings, damage to web sling sleeves. 

Prescribed maintenance and inspections 

Slings and load suspension equipment must be maintained in a state of 

safety in use by means of regular maintenance (as per regulations and 

manufacturer’s instructions). 

The user must ensure that load suspension equipment and thus also 

slings are inspected by a specialist at intervals of not more than one 

year. 

Depending on the conditions of use, inspections may be necessary at 

shorter intervals than one year. This applies e.g. if they are frequently 

used with the maximum permissible load, in the case of increased 

wear, corrosion or heat, the effect of chemicals, or if increased risk of 

damage is to be expected on the basis of the company’s experiences. 

Inspection records must be filed. If the user has any doubts as to the 

safe condition of the load suspension equipment and slings, he must 

decommission them and have them checked. 

Extraordinary inspections 

The user must ensure that slings are subjected to an extraordinary 

inspection by a specialist after any damage or incidents which might 

affect the lifting capacity, and after repairs. 

Cleaning before inspections 

The slings must be thoroughly cleaned before being inspected. Chains 

and ropes must be cleaned so that they are free of oil, dirt and 

corrosion. Any method of cleaning is permissible that does not corrode 

the base material. Any procedures which might cause hydrogen 

embrittlement (e.g. stripping), overheating, material erosion or material 

deformation , or disguise cracks or surface damage, must be avoided 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

General instructions on the use of load suspension equipment 

(continued) 

Notes and inspection records 

Records must be kept of all inspections and repairs, and filed for the 

service life of the sling. The law on protecting employees also 

prescribes drawing up an inspection plan for all load suspension 

equipment. 

STS spreader beam, rigid 

Lifting beam with suspended safety swivel hooks (not adjustable). The 

suspension eye is suitable for load hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 


• STS, STV and TV feature swivel hooks (mounted in plain bearings), 

they cannot be turned under load. 

• Standard paint finish: yellow (RAL 1021), alkyd resin based 

Obligatory information - residual risks 

When loads are lifted with slings, the person below or near the load is 

endangered. As manufacturer, we must advise you as the user that 

residual risks remain when using slings, in particular that the 

connection of sling to load may be insufficiently safe or the load swing 

after lifting and endanger the loader. Falling loads may endanger 

persons and goods. As user, you should ensure thorough training of 

your loaders and crane operators. 

Safe working 



No. 

L H h b 


1,000 1000 

2000 

3000 

4000 

2,000 2000 

3000 

4000 

3,000 2000 

3000 

4000 

5,000 2000 

3000 

4000 

8,000 2000 

3000 

4000 

10,000 2000 

3000 

4000 

15,000 3000 

4000 

5000 

400 

400 

400 

420 

420 

440 

440 

470 

490 

490 

420 

470 

490 

530 

560 

580 

550 

600 

620 

960 

1000 

1080 

90 60 45 

55 

75 

130 

90 60 65 

120 

200 

120 80 80 

150 

230 

120 80 120 

200 

230 

150 100 155 

285 

400 

150 100 175 

300 

500 

320 155 350 

540 

720 

808 162 0 

808 163 0 

808 164 0 

808 165 0 

808 166 0 

808 167 0 

808 168 0 

808 169 0 

808 170 0 

808 171 0 

808 172 0 

808 173 0 

808 174 0 

808 175 0 

808 176 0 

808 177 0 

808 178 0 

808 179 0 

808 180 0 

808 181 0 

808 182 0 

808 183 0 

20,000 3000 1100 360 120 420 808 184 0 

4000 1150 

610 808 185 0 

5000 1200 

875 808 186 0 

Subject to technical modifications. Transport packaging available against surcharge. 

121

122 


STV spreader beam, adjustable 

Safe 


working 

No. 

Lifting beam with suspended safety swivel hooks (cannot be turned 

under load). The working width L can be adjusted by shifting pins. The 

suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 


[kg] 

1,000 

L 

max. 

1000 

L 

min. 

400 

H h 

[mm] 

450 90 

b 

60 

R 

100 

[kg] 

25 808 198 0 

2000 800 450 

200 55 808 199 0 

3000 1000 450 

200 75 808 211 0 

4000 1500 470 

250 130 808 212 0 

2,000 2000 800 470 90 60 200 65 808 213 0 

3000 1000 490 

200 120 808 214 0 

4000 1500 490 

250 200 808 226 0 

3,000 2000 800 520 120 80 200 80 808 227 0 

b 

3000 

4000 

1000 

1500 

540 

540 

200 

250 

150 

230 

808 228 0 

808 229 0 

5,000 2000 800 600 120 80 200 120 808 235 0 

3000 1000 620 

200 200 808 236 0 

4000 1500 640 

250 330 808 237 0 

8,000 2000 800 700 150 100 200 155 808 238 0 

3000 1000 740 

200 285 808 239 0 

4000 1500 760 

250 400 808 243 0 

R 

L min. 

10,000 2000 800 720 150 100 200 175 808 244 0 

3000 1000 760 

200 300 808 249 0 

4000 1500 780 

250 500 808 250 0 

L max. 

15,000 3000 1000 1010 320 155 200 350 808 251 0 

ha384v 

4000 

5000 

1500 

2000 

1030 

1070 

250 

300 

540 

720 

808 252 0 

808 253 0 

20,000 3000 1000 1170 360 180 200 420 808 254 0 

4000 1500 1210 

250 610 808 255 0 

5000 2000 1250 

300 875 808 256 0 


h 

STAHLplus Info _ Easily adjustable safety hooks 

permit flexible and cost-effective transport of loads. 

Please state the size of the crane load hook when 

ordering. A table detailing load hooks conforming 

to DIN 15400 is to be found on page 140. 

TV spreader beam, adjustable 

H 

Lifting beam with suspended, easy-to-adjust safety swivel hooks 

(cannot be turned under load). The suspension eye is suitable for 

hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 

Safe 


working 

No. 

load L 

max. 

L min. H h b R 


1,000 1000 500 464 115 55 125 40 808 106 0 

2000 1000 504 

125 60 808 107 0 

3000 1000 504 

250 85 808 108 0 

5000 1000 544 

500 150 808 109 0 

2,500 2000 1000 634 150 75 125 80 808 114 0 

3000 1000 654 

250 140 808 115 0 

5000 1000 694 

500 230 808 116 0 

5,000 2000 1000 753 190 90 125 110 808 117 0 

3000 1000 803 

250 180 808 118 0 

5000 1000 753 

500 420 808 119 0 

7,500 2000 1000 861 240 110 125 180 808 124 0 

3000 1000 921 

250 280 808 125 0 

5000 1000 831 

500 550 808 126 0 

10,000 2000 1000 931 270 130 125 200 808 127 0 

3000 1000 991 

250 280 808 128 0 

5000 1000 911 

500 750 808 129 0 

15,000 2000 1000 1130 330 155 125 350 808 134 0 

3000 1000 1170 

250 850 808 135 0 

5000 1000 1090 

500 950 808 136 0 

20,000 2000 1000 800 370 170 125 350 808 137 0 

3000 1000 820 

250 1100 808 138 0 

5000 1000 900 

500 1550 808 139 0 


04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

STHS spreader beam, rigid 

H-shaped lifting beam with 4 safety swivel hooks. 

The suspension eye is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 

Safe 


working 


B 

max. 

L 

max. 

H h b 

No. 


1,000 1000 2000 480 90 60 90 808 200 0 

3,000 1000 2000 530 120 80 150 808 201 0 

2000 

3000 

550 

280 

808 202 0 

5,000 2000 3000 650 120 80 350 808 203 0 

4000 690 

500 808 204 0 

5000 720 

650 808 205 0 

8,000 2000 5000 750 150 100 720 808 206 0 

3000 6000 780 

1000 808 207 0 

10,000 2000 4000 850 150 100 800 808 208 0 

3000 6000 900 

1300 808 209 0 

15,000 3000 6000 1200 200 120 1600 808 210 0 



• STHV/STHS lifting beams feature swivel hooks (mounted in plain bearings), they 

cannot be turned under load. 

• Standard paint finish: yellow (RAL 1021), alkyd resin based 

STHV spreader beam, adjustable 

The H-shaped lifting beam is adjustable in length and width. 

The 4 safety swivel hooks are connected to the beam in such a way that they can be 

moved. 


Safe 


working B 

load max. 

B 

min. 

L 

max. 

L 

min. 

H h b RB RL 

No. 


1,000 1000 400 2000 800 560 90 60 100 200 90 808 215 0 

3,000 1000 400 2000 800 630 120 80 100 200 150 808 216 0 

2000 

800 

3000 

1000 

675 

200 

280 

808 217 0 

5,000 2000 800 3000 1000 750 120 80 200 200 350 808 218 0 

4000 1000 770 

250 500 808 219 0 

5000 1500 790 

250 650 808 220 0 

8,000 2000 800 5000 1500 920 150 100 200 250 720 808 221 0 

3000 1000 6000 2000 970 

1000 808 222 0 

10,000 2000 800 4000 1000 1020 150 100 200 250 800 808 223 0 

3000 1000 6000 2000 1105 

1300 808 224 0 

15,000 3000 1000 6000 2000 1265 200 120 200 250 1600 808 225 0 


123

124 


SBBT Big Bag beam 

The SBBT Big Bag beam features 4 flame-cut hooks for accepting 

60 mm wide Big Bag loops. 


Safe 


working 


B L h b s s1 

No. 


1,000 900 900 90 60 80 60 30 808 187 0 

2,000 90 60 35 808 188 0 

3,000 120 80 40 808 189 0 


SKT cross beam 

The SKT cross beam features 4 swivel hooks (cannot be turned under 

load). 


Safe 


working 


B L H h b 

No. 


1,000 1000 1000 400 90 60 50 808 193 0 

2,000 1500 1500 450 90 60 70 808 194 0 

3,000 1500 1500 480 120 80 80 808 195 0 

5,000 2000 2000 550 120 80 160 808 196 0 

8,000 2000 2000 600 150 100 200 808 197 0 


Rotating cross beam 

The rotating cross beam has round ends for accepting web slings 

(e.g. when transporting boats). It can be slewed together when not in 

use to save space. 

The suspension bolt is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 150401. 

Safe working 



No. 

L H 


10,000 3500 175 550 806 149 0 


SBBT-R Big Bag beam, tubular design 

The tubular-design Big Bag beam can accept 60 mm wide Big Bag 

loops. 


Safe 


working 


B L h b 

No. 


1,000 1000 1000 90 60 35 808 190 0 

1,500 90 60 45 808 191 0 

2,000 90 60 50 808 192 0 


04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

TRB spreader beam with ramshorn hooks, rigid 

Lifting beam with welded-on ramshorn hooks at both ends. 


Safe 

working 



No. 

L H h b c 


1,000 1000 

2000 

3000 

5000 

2,500 2000 

3000 

5000 

5,000 2000 

3000 

5000 

7,500 2000 

3000 

5000 

10,000 2000 

3000 

5000 

15,000 2000 

3000 

5000 

190 

230 

230 

270 

300 

320 

360 

375 

425 

375 

470 

530 

440 

540 

600 

520 

640 

680 

600 

115 55 33 15 

38 

53 

123 

150 75 39 57 

90 

203 

190 90 49 86 

160 

469 

240 110 62 131 

231 

564 

270 130 62 165 

282 

721 

330 155 69 247 

359 

922 

806 271 0 

806 272 0 

806 273 0 

806 274 0 

806 275 0 

806 276 0 

806 277 0 

806 278 0 

806 279 0 

806 280 0 

806 281 0 

806 282 0 

806 283 0 

806 284 0 

806 285 0 

806 286 0 

806 287 0 

806 288 0 

806 289 0 

20,000 2000 600 370 170 78 440 806 290 0 

3000 620 

620 806 291 0 

5000 700 

1132 806 292 0 


STAHLplus Info _ Please state the size of the crane 

load hook when ordering. A table detailing load hooks 

conforming to DIN 15400 is to be found on page 140. 

On page 134 and 135 you will also find a detailed 

questionnaire for your individual enquiry. 

TRB spreader beam with ramshorn hooks, rigid 

Lifting beam with welded-on ramshorn hooks at both ends. 


Safe 


working 

No. 

load L L H h b c R 

max. min. 


1,000 1000 500 190 115 55 33 125 17 806 293 0 

2000 1000 230 

125 42 806 294 0 

3000 1000 230 

250 58 806 295 0 

5000 1000 270 

500 129 806 296 0 

2,500 2000 1000 300 150 75 39 125 63 806 297 0 

3000 1000 320 

250 97 806 298 0 

5000 1000 360 

500 211 806 299 0 

5,000 2000 1000 375 190 90 49 125 100 806 316 0 

3000 1000 425 

250 178 806 317 0 

5000 1000 375 

500 491 806 318 0 

7,500 2000 1000 470 240 110 62 125 158 806 319 0 

3000 1000 530 

250 267 806 320 0 

5000 1000 440 

500 600 806 321 0 

10,000 2000 1000 540 270 130 62 125 209 806 322 0 

3000 1000 600 

250 338 806 323 0 

5000 1000 520 

500 784 806 324 0 

15,000 2000 1000 640 330 155 69 125 321 806 325 0 

3000 1000 680 

250 442 806 326 0 

5000 1000 600 

500 1021 806 327 0 

20,000 2000 1000 600 370 170 78 125 530 806 328 0 

3000 1000 620 

250 715 806 329 0 

5000 1000 700 

500 1246 806 330 0 


125

126 

Safe 

working 



H 

L 


No. 

L B H h b 


1,000 1250 600 405 90 60 40 806 153 0 

2,000 

435 90 60 45 806 154 0 

3,000 

455 120 80 70 806 155 0 


b 

h 

B 

ha023va 

Spreader beam for box pallets 

Sturdy design in high-grade steel 

with suspension eye suitable for 

hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 

With two yokes for lifting individual 

box pallets. 

One yoke can be swivelled for 

attachment. 

The low headroom permits maximum 

utilisation of crane capacity. 

Spreader beam with chain suspension 

2 designs (both including chain sling) 

Rigid: constant length 

STAHLplus Info _ Please state the size of the 

crane load hook when ordering. A table detailing 

load hooks conforming to DIN 15400 is to be 

found on page 140. 

On page 134 and 135 you will also find a detailed 

questionnaire for your individual enquiry. 

Telescopic: effective width easy to adjust by means of pins 

Both versions feature a 2-leg chain sling for hooks to DIN 15401. Fixed 

hooks mounted on each beam end. 

Option: design with swivel hooks on request. 

Safe 

Dimensions Rigid Telescopic 

working 

load L h b 45° 

H 

60° 

Weight Item 

No. 

L 

min. 

H Weight Item 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] [mm] [kg] 

1,000 2000 110 60 1400 1060 10 806 160 0 

1500 1000-1300 15 806 175 0 

3000 

1900 1300 18 806 161 0 

2000 1300-1830 23 806 176 0 

4000 

2400 1600 35 806 162 0 

2500 1650-2370 40 806 177 0 

2,000 2000 135 75 1450 1050 26 806 163 0 

1500 1050-1350 30 806 178 0 

3000 

75 1950 1350 30 806 164 0 

2000 1350-1880 38 806 179 0 

4000 

70 2450 1650 50 806 165 0 

2500 1680-2410 55 806 180 0 

3,200 2000 160 90 1480 1080 30 806 166 0 

1500 1080-1380 34 806 181 0 

3000 

1980 1380 48 806 167 0 

2000 1380-1910 53 806 182 0 

4000 

2480 1680 70 806 168 0 

2500 1680-2440 75 806 183 0 

5,000 2000 180 100 1580 1180 45 806 169 0 

1500 1180-1480 50 806 184 0 

3000 

2080 1480 60 806 170 0 

2000 1480-2000 64 806 185 0 

4000 

2580 1780 80 806 171 0 

2500 1780-2540 87 806 186 0 

10,000 2000 260 140 1800 1400 70 806 172 0 

1500 1400-1700 78 806 187 0 

3000 

2300 1700 120 806 173 0 

2000 1700-2220 134 806 188 0 

4000 

2800 2000 130 806 174 0 

2500 2000-2760 142 806 189 0 


04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Transport packing available against surcharge 

Examples of more off-standard solutions - please enquire! 

Rigidly reeved C-hook for sensitive materials, boom and inside of hook protected by 

PE. Replaceable boom. Safe working load 6 or 10 t. 

Long hook beam 

Long loads can be transported and turned 

safely with long hook beams. 

Various designs are available: 

• Two-crane rotary beam 

• Rotary beam with fixed hook 

• Rotary beam with adjustable hook 

• Rotary beam with fixed long hook 

• Rotary beam with adjustable long hook 

Combinations of these designs are also possible. It must always be 

ensured that the centre of gravity of the load is vertically below the 

point of rotation as otherwise there is a danger of the load tilting during 

rotation. 

If this cannot be guaranteed, a universal joint should be used between 

upper and lower beam. 


STAHLplus Info _ Just copy this sketch and fill in the dimensions 

required. A detailed questionnaire can also be found on pages 134 

and 135. 

Automatic 6-arm lifting beam for transporting rings with 10,000 mm diameter. 

The arms move into a preset position when lifting. Safe working load 27 t. 

Two-crane or two-crab lifting beam with rotating central hook. Safe working load 40 t. Off-standard lifting beam, 12 chain connections on the load side. Safe working laod 50 t. 

127

128 




Manual turnover spreader beam 

With suspension for single hook to DIN 15401. 

With two turning units suitable for web slings. 

For transporting and turning goods over manually. 

The sheave suspensions can be adjusted to the desired working width. 

The sheaves can be equipped with endless webbing slings. With chain 

sheaves on request. 

When using this beam please ensure that the centre of gravity is in the 

centre. 

Safe 


working 

No. 

load L L h b m t 

max. min. 


500 1000 500 80 40 70 260 18 806 259 0 

2000 1000 

300 43 806 260 0 

3000 1500 

320 65 806 261 0 

1,000 1000 500 90 60 70 280 20 806 262 0 

2000 1000 

320 45 806 263 0 

3000 1500 

340 67 806 264 0 

2,000 1000 500 90 60 70 350 35 806 265 0 

2000 1000 

350 55 806 266 0 

3000 1500 

370 80 806 267 0 

3,000 1000 500 120 80 70 390 50 806 268 0 

2000 1000 

410 70 806 269 0 

3000 1500 

430 90 806 270 0 

Price without webbing slings - web slings on request. Subject to technical modifications. 

Electromechanically powered turnover spreader beam 

For transporting and turning over loads with inherent stability and 

symmetrical weight. 

Fixed working width. The load is turned by means of endless webbing 

slings. 

On request we can also supply turnover spreader beams with 

adjustable working width for transporting loads with different lengths. 

In applications in which the endless sling cannot be looped around the 

workpiece, turning is performed by divided slings with an end fixing. 

Please send us your enquiry. We will be pleased to send you a specialised 

non-binding quotation. 

Safety Advice _ The high safety standards 

comply with currently applicable safety 

specifications. 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 


Examples of other off-standard solutions - please enquire! 

Telescopic spreader beam 

Hydraulically powered, with weld-on hooks. 

Safe working loads from 1,000 to 10,000 kg. 

Length from 1000 to 4000 mm. 

Please send us your enquiry. 

We will be pleased to send you a specifically prepared non-binding 

quotation. 

STAHLplus Info _ Please state the size of the crane load hook when 

ordering. A table detailing load hooks conforming to DIN 15400 is to be 

found on page 140. 

On page 134 and 135 you will also find a detailed questionnaire for your 

individual enquiry. 

Stainless steel manual turnover spreader beam. Off-standard suspension for lifting magnet. Replaceable chain anchorage, wear protection 

for crane hook. Safe working load 30 t. 

129

130 



Spreader beam with weld-on hooks 

With suspension for single load hooks to DIN 15401. The weld-on hooks 

are welded onto the beam ends. This provides for an extremely low 

headroom and optimum utilisation of the whole working width. 

Two-crane spreader beam 

Box construction spreader beam 

C-hook spreader beam 

ha025v 

ha026v 

STAHLplus Info _ If you are not able to ensure 

the stable storage of your load suspension 

equipment to comply with DIN EN 13155 on 

your own responsibility, we will send you our 

suggestions on enquiry. 

ha027v 

ha028v 

Alignment beam with chain 

With 2-leg chain suspension for single hook to DIN 15401. 

Five/seven hooks with chain sheaves are suspended from a continuous 

chain to DIN 5687-8, providing for automatic height alignment 

and equal load on all hooks. The chain shortener permits the chain to 

be adjusted if not all the hooks are attached to the load. 

ha030v 

Adjustable spreader beam 

Safety Advice _ High standard of safety complying 

with currently applicable safety regulations. 

Spreader beam with adjustable crane suspension 

ha029v 

ha024v 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 


Stainless steel Big Bag beam 

Extremely low headroom telescopic spreader beam 

(electrohydraulically adjustable) for transporting pressing tools 

(S.W.L. of 40 t and above possible). 

Frame spreader beam 

ST10 (short headroom) electric chain hoist with a Big Bag beam 

with extremely short dimensions (risk of tipping when travelling 

without load). 

Available in various designs: galvanised, stainless steel, painted 

Rail spreader beam 

131

132 



Aluminium spreader beam H-shaped aluminium spreader beam 

Aluminium lifting beam with up to 3,000 kg safe 

working load. Load hook can swivel under load. 

Spreader beam for two-crane application Big Bag beam with weld-on hooks and low 

headroom 

Big Bag beam with slots for fork-lift truck forks 

Spreader beam for transporting engine blocks Adjustable spreader beam for lifting radiators, with adjustable turning facility 

Double H beam 

Double H beam with alignment facility for transporting a machine with 8 suspension points 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 


Spreader beam for transporting steel plates (adjustable) Spreader beam for loading pipes (avoiding damage to edges of pipes) 

X beam with loading beam and transport frame 

Load suspension equipment for transporting steel coils horizontally 

Load suspension equipment for transporting drums 

H beam with belt loops, with several suspension points 

Load suspension equipment for transporting shafts 

Load suspension equipment for transporting differing drums 

133

134 


Fax enquiry for spreader beams Simply copy - fill in - fax 

If you are still unable to find a solution to your specific transport problems using the beams detailed on pages 119-133, just ask us! 

Please photocopy this page and fill in the required data and dimensions, and fax it to us. 

We’ll be pleased to advise you and send you a quotation immediately! 

Information on load 

1. Type of load ....................................................................................................................................................... 

2. Load data Weight min. ............................ kg max................................. kg 

Length min. ..........................mm max...............................mm 

Width min. ..........................mm max...............................mm 

Height min. ..........................mm max...............................mm 

Outside diameter min. ..........................mm max...............................mm 

Inside diameter min. ..........................mm max...............................mm 

3. Position of load Length/main axis � horizontal � vertical � angled 

Type of load attachment � clamping � gripping from below 

4. Movement of load � lifting turning horizontally � 90 ° � 180 ° � 320 ° � unlimited 

� setting upright, touching ground � 90 ° � 180 ° 

� turning while suspended � 90 ° � 180 ° � 270 ° 

5. Stability of load � inherently stable � non-rigid/sagging 

� bundled � loosely stacked 

6. Surface of load � dry � damp � soiled by lubricant 

� pressure-sensitive � pressure-insensitive 

7. Temperature of load Room temperature � -20 °C to + 50 °C 

Low temperature � min. - ..............°C 

High temperature � max. + .............°C 

8. Possibility of taking up 

load � looping round � gripping from below 

� pressing in at sides � clamping 

9. Load suspension points.............................................................................................................................................................. 

Information on existing hoisting equipment 

1. Type of crane � overhead travelling crane � portal crane � tower slewing crane 

� mobile crane � wharf crane � ...........................crane 

2. Crane hook � Single hook No. ........................... DIN 15401, safe working load ....................t. 

� Ramshorn hook No. .....................DIN 15402, safe working load ....................t. 

3. Height of lift ....................................m 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Fax enquiry for spreader beams Simply copy - fill in - fax 

(continued from page 134) 

Information on load suspension equipment 

1. Required dimensions Length...............................mm Jaw width...........................................mm 

Width.................................mm Inside height......................................mm 

Height................................mm 

2. Required suspension � Suspension eye � Fixed pin � Cotter pin 

3. Desired operating � Lever for holding open � Automatic opener 

devices � Attachment aid (for opening and closing) 

4. Other � Warning stripes conforing to DIN 15026 

� Off-standard paint finish RAL ................................... 

5. Please enclose sketch showing direction of force and centre of gravity 

Other information ....................................................................................................................................................... 

....................................................................................................................................................... 

....................................................................................................................................................... 

....................................................................................................................................................... 

Information on application 

1. Place of use � Under cover � Outdoors 

2. Movement of load � Lifting horizontally � Turning by 90 ° 

� Turning by 180 ° � Turning by 360 ° 

� Setting upright touching ground 

3. Available space � Lateral space restricted...............................mm 

� Load stacked with...........................mm interstices 

� Load stacked without interstices 

� Load lying on ground 

Max. possible height of load suspension equipment......................mm 

4. Number of cycles � per hour......................... � per day..................... � per month......................... 

Date/signature:.................................................................................................................................................................. 


................................................................................................................................ 

Company 

................................................................................................................................................................................................ 


................................................................................................................................................................................................ 


................................................................................................................................................................................................ 

Who is responsible if we have any questions? 

................................................................................................................................................................................................ 


................................................................................................................................................................................................ 

Telephone Fax 

................................................................................................................................................................................................ 

135

136 


A 

H 

SCH C-hook 

SCH C-hooks effectively lift and transport cylindrical loads such as 

rolled sheet metal coils, pipe sections, wire and cable coils. Practical 

handles allow for safe and easy use. 

The suspension is suitable for hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 

Standard paint finish: yellow (RAL 1021), alkyd resin based. 

Version with 3/4 tine also available. 

Safe 

working 



No. 

A C D h b 


1,000 300 400 80 100 50 25 806 120 0 

800 

100 

65 806 121 0 

2,500 300 500 100 130 65 45 806 122 0 

800 

150 

130 806 123 0 

5,000 300 500 130 190 95 90 806124 0 

800 

160 

235 806 125 0 

7,500 500 550 160 230 115 210 806 126 0 

800 

200 

310 806 127 0 

10,000 800 600 200 230 135 405 806 128 0 

1000 

230 

525 806 129 0 

15,000 800 650 250 320 155 545 806 130 0 

1250 

280 

935 806 131 0 

20,000 800 700 290 360 180 885 806 132 0 

1500 

360 

1410 806 133 0 

25,000 1000 750 330 400 200 1065 806 134 0 

1500 

350 

1890 806 135 0 

30,000 1250 800 350 450 220 1720 806 136 0 

35,000 1500 850 370 450 220 2630 806 137 0 

STAHLplus Info _ Please state the size of the crane load hook when 

ordering. A table detailing load hooks conforming to DIN 15400 is to be 

found on page 140. You will also find a detailed questionnaire for your 

individual enquiry on pages 134 and 135. 

G 

D 

E 

ha420v 

Coil turning hook 

The coil turning hook is an all-purpose C-hook. Thanks to its swivelmounted 

tilting nose it can take up or set down coils both vertically and 

horizontally. 

The tilting nose on the hook allows the coil to be swivelled by 90° in 

complete safety. 

The gentle rolling action of the tilting nose permits the coil to be lifted 

or set down without any jolts and also acts as a safety latch to prevent 

the coil sliding off inadvertently during transport. 

The suspension is suitable for load hooks conforming to DIN 15401. 

Other sizes and versions available on request. 

Safe 

working 



No. 

A D E G H 


500 120 330 470 110 60 6.9 

200 

9.6 

1,000 200 460 600 110 60 15.4 

300 

20.0 

2,000 200 420 600 135 75 24.8 

300 

33.4 

3,000 200 610 820 160 90 45.0 

300 

51.0 

806 376 0 

806 377 0 

806 378 0 

806 379 0 

806 380 0 

806 381 0 

806 382 0 

806 383 0 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Coil hook with counterweight, 3/4 design, safe working load 25 t. 

Examples of other load suspension equipment - please enquire! 

Additional equipment for C-hooks (coil hooks) 

Placement frame suitable for C-hooks made of sturdy, welded 

sectional structure, with guide plates and mounting facilities on 

bay floor. Just ask us! 


Coil hook with chain suspension (thus without counterweight). Safe working load 30 t. Roller dismantling hook with counterweight and PU protection. Safe working load 2 t. 

137

138 


LT crane pallet loading fork with manual centre of gravity alignment 

There are two versions available: 

• without height adjustment: LT vm 

• with height adjustment: LT vhm 

With the LT loading fork, material stored on pallets can be moved above floor level with a crane. 

The height adjustment facility ensures that the loading fork can be adapted optimally to suit the 

load. The centre of gravity alignment can be altered with the manually adjustable suspension. 

The tines are laterally adjustable so that they can be adapted to suit different sized pallets, box 

pallets, etc. 

Painted to RAL 1004. 

Centre of gravity of load: 600 mm. 

Version 

w/o height 

adjustment 

with height 

adjustment 

Safe 

working 



B L a b H h 

No. 

max. min. max. min. 


1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

2,500 

3,000 

1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

2,500 

3,000 

LT 1,0 vm 

LT 1,5 vm 

LT 2,0 vm 

LT 2,5 vm 

LT 3,0 vm 

LT 1,0 vhm 

LT 1,5 vhm 

LT 2,0 vhm 

LT 2,5 vhm 

LT 3,0 vhm 

900 350 

350 

400 

400 

450 

900 350 

350 

400 

400 

450 

1100 60 

40 

40 

45 

45 

1100 60 

40 

40 

45 

45 

80 

80 

100 

100 

120 

80 

80 

100 

100 

120 

2400 

2380 

2420 

2440 

2460 

1660 

1680 

1750 

1750 

1760 

1700 

1680 

1720 

1740 

1760 

1300 75 

115 

160 

190 

1300 

to 

2000 

LT crane pallet loading fork with automatic centre of gravity alignment 

There are two versions available: 

• without height adjustment: LT va 

• with height adjustment: LT vha 

200 

75 

150 

200 

230 

245 

808 019 0 

808 020 0 

808 021 0 

808 022 0 

808 023 0 

808 024 0 

808 044 0 

808 045 0 

808 046 0 

808 047 0 

With the LT loading fork, material stored on pallets can be moved above floor level with a crane. 

The height adjustment facility ensures that the loading fork can be adapted optimally to suit the 

load. 

The centre of gravity is adjusted automatically, but requires a minimum load of 25% of the rated 

load. The tines are laterally adjustable so that they can be adapted to suit different sized pallets, 

box pallets, etc. 

Painted to RAL 1004. 

Centre of gravity of load: 600 mm. 

Version 

w/o height 

adjustment 

with height 

adjustment 

Safe 

working 



B L a b H h 

No. 

max. min. max. min. 


1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

2,500 

3,000 

1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

2,500 

3,000 

Safety Advice _ The loading forks are not suitable for transporting liquid 

goods. Take particular care when lifting loads to ensure that the centre of 

gravity of the load is under the suspension point of the loading fork 

(note the centre of gravity marking.) 

The load must not extend beyond the tips of the fork tines. 

LT 1,0 va 

LT 1,5 va 

LT 2,0 va 

LT 2,5 va 

LT 3,0 va 

LT 1,0 vha 

LT 1,5 vha 

LT 2,0 vha 

LT 2,5 vha 

LT 3,0 vha 

900 350 

350 

400 

400 

450 

900 350 

350 

400 

400 

450 

1100 60 

40 

40 

45 

45 

1100 60 

40 

40 

45 

45 

80 

80 

100 

100 

120 

80 

80 

100 

100 

120 

2550 

2550 

2600 

2600 

2600 

1850 

1800 

1850 

1850 

1850 

1850 

1850 

1900 

1900 

1900 

1300 75 

115 

150 

190 

1300 

to 

2000 

230 

100 

135 

180 

225 

245 

808 048 0 

808 049 0 

808 069 0 

808 070 0 

808 071 0 

808 072 0 

808 073 0 

808 074 0 

808 094 0 

808 095 0 

04_08EN.FM

04_08EN.FM 

Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

Fig. 3 

Loading fork for EURO pallets and box pallets 

Fig. 1 

• Centre of gravity spacing 400 mm 

• Centre of gravity adjustment by hand 

Safe 

working 


Model Usable 

height 

Tine 

length 

Tine 

height 

Tine spacing Total 

inside outside height 

Weight Item 

No. 


700 L 9 1000 800 60 550 670 1350 45 808 096 0 

900 L 10 1000 800 60 540 700 1360 52 808 097 0 

1,200 L 11 1200 800 60 540 700 1580 65 808 098 0 


Fig. 2 

• Centre of gravity spacing 400 mm, 500 mm, 600 mm 

• Centre of gravity adjustment by hand 


with 

centre of gravity 

spacing 

Model Usable 

height 

Tine 

length 

Tine 

height 


height 

Weight Item 

No. 

400 500 600 inside outside 


1,500 1,500 1,300 L 14 1200 1100 40 390 550 1580 100 808 099 0 


Fig. 3 

• Centre of gravity spacing 400 mm, 500 mm, 600 mm 

• Automatic balancing facility with evenly distributed load 

• Automatic balancing effective from approx. 20-25% of rated load 


with 

centre of gravity 

spacing 

Model Usable 

height 

Tine 

length 

Tine 

height 


height 

Weight Item 

No. 

400 500 600 inside outside 


1,000 1,000 800 L 16 1350 1100 35 390 550 1870 100 808 104 0 

1,500 1,500 1,300 L 18 1100 1100 40 390 550 1620 115 808 105 0 

Off-standard loading forks on request 

Loading fork for 5 PVC boxes; each box is secured with 

2 take-up tines 

Loading fork for 3 PVC boxes stacked on top of each 

other 

139

140 

Load hooks 


Mechanism groups and safe working loads of load hooks conf. to DIN 15400 

Property 

class 

Mechanism group *1 

Property 

class 

M *1 *1 *1 *1 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m 5m M 

P *1 *1 *1 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m 5m - P 

S *1 *1 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m 5m - - S 

T *1 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m - - - - T 

V 1Bm 1Am 2m 3m 4m - - - - - V 

Load hook 

No. 

Safe working load in [kg] 

Load hook 

No. 

020 1000 800 630 500 400 320 250 200 160 125 020 

025 1250 1000 800 630 500 400 320 250 200 160 025 

04 2000 1600 1250 1000 800 630 500 400 320 250 04 

05 2500 2000 1600 1250 1000 800 630 500 400 320 05 

08 4000 3200 2500 2000 1600 1250 1000 800 630 500 08 

1 5000 4000 3200 2500 2000 1600 1250 1000 800 630 1 

1,6 8000 6300 5000 4000 3200 2500 2000 1600 1250 1000 1,6 

2,5 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 4000 3200 2500 2000 1600 2,5 

4 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 4000 3200 2500 4 

5 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 4000 3200 5 

6 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 4000 6 

8 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 5000 8 

10 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 6300 10 

12 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 8000 12 

16 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 10000 16 

20 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 12500 20 

25 125000 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 16000 25 

32 160000 125000 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 20000 32 

40 200000 160000 125000 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 25000 40 

50 250000 200000 160000 125000 100000 80000 63000 50000 40000 32000 50 

*1 Lighter duty than mechanism group 1 Bm may not be taken into consideration 

= selection for production cranes, e.g. steelwork or rolling mill cranes 

Load hooks 

Dimensions 

RSN 

RS 

RF 

020 

025 

04 

05 

08 

1 

1,6 

2,5 

4 

5 

6 

8 

10 

12 

16 

20 

25 

32 

40 

50 

DIN 15401 DIN 15402 

[mm] [mm] 

a 1 a 2 a 3 b 2 h 2 a 1 a 2 a 3 b 1 f h 

34 

36 

40 

43 

48 

50 

56 

63 

71 

80 

90 

100 

112 

125 

140 

160 

180 

200 

224 

- 

27 

26 

32 

34 

38 

40 

45 

50 

58 

63 

71 

80 

90 

100 

112 

125 

140 

160 

180 

- 

39 

41 

45 

49 

54 

57 

64 

72 

80 

90 

101 

113 

127 

143 

160 

180 

202 

225 

252 

- 

18 

19 

22 

24 

29 

32 

38 

45 

53 

60 

67 

75 

85 

95 

106 

118 

132 

160 

170 

- 

22 

24 

29 

31 

37 

40 

48 

58 

67 

75 

85 

95 

106 

118 

132 

150 

170 

190 

212 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

50 

56 

63 

71 

80 

90 

100 

112 

125 

140 

160 

180 

200 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

40 

45 

50 

56 

63 

71 

80 

90 

100 

112 

125 

140 

160 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

65 

73 

82 

92 

103 

116 

130 

146 

163 

182 

205 

230 

260 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

40 

48 

53 

60 

67 

75 

85 

95 

106 

118 

132 

150 

170 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

208 

238 

266 

301 

337 

377 

421 

471 

531 

598 

672 

754 

842 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

50 

60 

67 

75 

85 

95 

106 

118 

132 

150 

170 

190 

212 

04_08EN.FM

STAHLplus slings make lifting 

and transporting easier whenever 

more than a hook is required. 

They always provide a practical 

solution and a secure link between 

the hook and the load. 

Slings 

141

142 

Slings 

General information on the use of slings 

Definitions 

Slings 

Load suspension equipment also suitable for use with a choke hitch 

(forming a loop), e.g. rope slings, chain slings or webbing slings. 

Examples: 

Specialist (definition from EN 818-1) 

A person having specialist knowledge, practical experience and 

training able to perform the required tests after having been suitably 

instructed. 

1. Determining weight of load 

The load on the suspension equipment and the sling must not be 

greater than that stated on the S.W.L. tag for the type of suspension 

and inclination angle. Delivery papers, information on the load itself, 

weight tables e.g. for steel sections etc., calculation or weighing with 

a load cell can be used to determine the weight. 

2. Determining type of loading 

The load must be suspended in such a way that neither the load nor the 

sling are damaged. Slings can be attached to the load in various ways: 

Direct loading at slinging points 

The slinging point(s) selected must have sufficient strength to carry the 

load safely! If an inclination angle is generated at the legs, the diagonal 

pull and resulting transverse forces - which are also exerted on the 

slinging points - must be taken into consideration. 

The hook and the slinging point match if the suspension 

point is in the centre of the bottom of the 

hook jaw and loading the tip of the hook is avoided. 

In the case of multi-leg slings, the load hooks 

(unless they are especially designed) must point 

outwards to prevent impermissible loading of the 

hook tip or even accidental unloading. Suitable 

precautions must always be taken to prevent accidental 

unloading (e.g. safety catch on load hook, 

special precautions taken by loader...). 

Looped loading (choke hitch) 

If a sling is looped, an angle of approx. 60° must be 

ensured (see illustration) and must not be altered 

by any subsequent tautening as otherwise impermissible 

strain could occur in the leg. If looping is 

used, the S.W.L. must be limited to 80% of the 

marked S.W.L. or the symbol giving the reduced 

S.W.L. for looping may be shown on the tag or label 

(e.g. S.W.L. label on textile slings). 

If long goods are transported, the load will be 

stable if two looped slings are used in parallel. If 

two or more single leg looped slings are used in 

parallel, the slings must be looped in the same 

direction to prevent further detrimental bending at 

the load (torque), and in opposite directions to 

ensure that the load does not roll when first being lifted and is stable 

enough to subsume the torques arising. 

Long narrow goods must not be attached with single loops as there is a 

danger of them swinging and slipping. If the inclination angle is wide 

and/or the surface of the load is slippery, there is a danger of the slings 

sliding towards one another due to the high transverse forces. In such 

cases, spreader beams must be used to maintain a small angle! 

Caution! Never put your hand in loops! 

Laying around 

In this case, ideally the sling is run through an 

opening in the load and both eyes or loops 

suspended directly from the crane hook. 

Using two slings under the load with four or more 

eyes or loops on the crane hook is to be avoided as 

the crane hook is too small for the loops as a rule 

or they lie on top of one another (danger of 

crushing). 

With this type of loading, there is a particularly 

high risk of the slings sliding towards one another 

and the load shifting and/or slipping! 

In the case of long, rod-shaped loads, with chok 

hitch loading, the risk of the load or parts of the 

load shooting out e.g. at an accidental impact or 

sudden braking, can hardly be avoided! 

Wrong! 

N.B.: 

Use spreader beams to prevent too 

large an inclination angle and associated 

transverse forces. 

Looped slings offer greater safety 

against the load slipping or shooting 

out. 

Caution: Never put your hand between sling and load! 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

3. Centre of gravity S 

In order to lift the load without it being twisted or turning over, the 

crane hook must be situated above the centre of gravity of the load and 

the following conditions must be met: 

a) For single-leg slings and endless chain slings, 

grommets, round slings, web slings, the slinging 

point should be vertically above the centre of 

gravity of the load; 

b) For two-leg slings, both slinging points should 

be above the centre of gravity of the load; 

c) For three- and four-leg slings, the slinging 

points should be distributed evenly on one level 

around the load and be above the centre of 

gravity of the load. 

4. Symmetrical loading = distribution of slinging points with 

regard to the centre of gravity 

In the case of multi-leg slings, if the different legs have different 

inclination angles, the greatest load is in the leg with the smallest 

inclination angle. In extreme cases, a vertically suspended single leg 

will carry the whole load. 

If the slinging points of multi-leg slings are not distributed 

symmetrically, the full S.W.L. cannot be assumed as the load is 

distributed unevenly over the different legs. 

The loading can be regarded as still symmetrical (borderline case) if 

all the following conditions are met: 

• The load is less than 80% of the S.W.L. of the load suspension 

equipment or sling (increased safety because of borderline case) 

and 

• the smallest inclination angle of all legs 

(ß min) is not less than 15° and 

• the largest (ß max) and smallest (ß min) 

inclination angles of all legs in use do not 

differ by more than 15°. 

Example: Borderline case of symmetrical distribution 

of inclination angles with 15° difference. 

In the case of asymmetrical loading in doubtful 

cases, the S.W.L. values given on the tags (for the maximum 

inclination angle occurring) must be reduced by half by the user 

(EN 818 part 6). 

Specialists may however determine the permissible S.W.L. on the basis 

of the actual conditions. 

If both cases apply, i.e. eccentric centre of gravity and unevenly 

distributed slinging points, the load types may overlap or cancel each 

other out. 

A leg of multi-leg tackle suspended nearly vertical takes up nearly all 

the load. Thus in the case of two-leg tackle with one leg suspended 

nearly vertical (inclination angles up to 7° can be neglected), the S.W.L. 

of a single leg can be taken. (For a size 10 chain sling this would mean 

e.g. 3.15 t instead of halving the S.W.L. of 4.25 t given for the whole 

tackle up to 45° inclination angle = 2.12 t). 

In the case of three- and four-leg tackles, for example, the S.W.L. of 

two legs can be selected taking into consideration the largest 

inclination angle, if the load is evenly distributed between them. 

Caution: 

Also in the case of three- and four leg tackles, only one leg can be 

regarded as load-bearing if it is hanging nearly vertical. 

Fig. Overlapping 

In the above example of overlapping, only 

one slinging point is on the side with the 

heavier loading. The detrimental factors 

of eccentric centre of gravity and 

unfavourable distribution of slinging points 

overlap. 

N.B.: 

Take the instability of the load into account in the case of 

asymmetrical load distribution! 

5. Inclination angle 

Fig. Cancelling out 

In the above example of cancelling out, two 

of the three slinging points are in the region 

of the heavier loading and carry the main 

load with a small inclination angle. The 

eccentric centre of gravity is partially or 

even completely cancelled out by the 

favourable distribution of the slinging points 

for this particular case. 

When using multi-leg slings, the slinging points and the sling lengths 

must be selected to provide inclination angles in the range of the 

specified S.W.L. marking. By preference, all inclination angles should 

be equal and be at least 15° as the load is then more stable and can be 

better distributed to the two legs. 

On no account must the inclination angle exceed 60°. 

The load hook from which the sling is suspended should be positioned 

directly above the centre of gravity of the load. 

In the case of larger inclination angles, the load to be lifted must 

subsume high transverse forces. Both the slinging points and the load 

must therefore be stable enough to subsume these forces safely 

without damage! 

Inclination angles greater than 60° are not permissible! 

An inclination angle of 75° for example would already result in 20 t load 

per leg. This is not economical and is extremely dangerous. Every 

estimated or wrongly estimated degree of the inclination angle used 

would lead to extreme overloading of the sling! 

N.B.: Spreader beams can be used to avoid large inclination angles. 

143

144 

Slings 

6. Multi-leg slings where not all legs are used 

If not all legs of tackle are used, the unused legs must be hung in the 

master link to prevent them catching accidentally during lifting. 

The S.W.L. is then reduced to that of the legs used. 

You must either reduce the S.W.L. ratings given on the label by the 

following factors, or determine the permissible S.W.L. for this lifting 

procedure on the basis of the effective number of legs using an S.W.L. 

table. 

(On this subject, see the S.W.L. tables for the individual products). 

Total number of legs of Number of effective legs Factor for calculating 

tackle 

S.W.L. 

Two legs 1 1/2 

Three and four legs 2 2/3 

Three and four legs 1 1/3 

Four legs 3 Full S.W.L. 

7. Commissioning load suspension equipment and slings 

Before commissioning a sling, it must be ensured that 

a) the sling corresponds to the order; 

b) the declaration of conformity or test certificate is available; 

c) the marking and S.W.L. ratings on the sling correspond to the 

declaration of conformity or test certificate; 

d) the operating instructions have been read carefully. 

The slings must be checked for obvious defects before each use! 

Obvious defects 

are for example bent hooks, cracked or bent chain links, displaced 

connecting bolts in chain connecting links, broken strands of fibre or 

wire ropes, cuts in web slings, damage to web sling sleeves. 

8. Prescribed maintenance and inspections 

Slings and load suspension equipment must be maintained in a state of 

safety in use by means of regular maintenance (as per regulations and 

manufacturer’s instructions). 

The user must ensure that load suspension equipment and thus also 

slings are inspected by a specialist at intervals of not more than one 

year. 

Depending on the conditions of use, inspections may be necessary at 

shorter intervals than one year. This applies e.g. if they are frequently 

used with the maximum permissible load, in the case of increased 

wear, corrosion or heat, the effect of chemicals, or if increased risk of 

damage is to be expected on the basis of the company’s experiences. 

Inspection records must be filed. If the user has any doubts as to the 

safe condition of the load suspension equipment and slings, he must 

decommission them and have them checked. 

Extraordinary inspections 

The user must ensure that slings are subjected to an extraordinary 

inspection by a specialist after any damage or incidents which might 

affect the lifting capacity, and after repairs. 

Cleaning before inspections 

The slings must be thoroughly cleaned before being inspected. Chains 

and ropes must be cleaned so that they are free of oil, dirt and corrosion. 

Any method of cleaning is permissible that does not corrode the 

base material. Any procedures which might cause hydrogen 

embrittlement (e.g. stripping), overheating, material erosion or 

material deformation , or disguise cracks or surface damage, must be 

avoided 

Notes and inspection records 

Records must be kept of all inspections and repairs, and filed for the 

service life of the sling. The law on protecting employees also 

prescribes drawing up an inspection plan for all load suspension 

equipment. 

Our inspection service will perform the statutory inspections on your 

behalf. 

9. Storage of slings 

If slings remain on the crane hook without load, the sling hooks or the 

eyes and links must be hung in the master link to reduce the risk of 

them accidentally hooking onto objects. 

Slings should be stored on a special frame. They must not be left lying 

on the ground after use where they might be damaged. 

If chain slings and steel wire ropes are likely to be out of use for some 

time, they should be protected against corrosion; textile slings should 

be cleaned or rinsed with clear water before long storage if they were 

exposed to chemicals beforehand. 

10. Obligatory information - residual risks 

When loads are lifted with slings, the person below or near the load is 

endangered. As manufacturer, we must advise you as the user that 

residual risks remain when using slings, in particular that the 

connection of sling to load may be insufficiently safe or the load swing 

after lifting and endanger the loader. Falling loads may endanger 

persons and goods. As user, you should ensure thorough training of 

your loaders and crane operators. 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

FlexiLeg highly hardened and tempered chain slings with safety load hooks 

The new multifunctional Grade 10 chain sling system for nearly every application. 


FlexiLeg 

The basic package comprises: 

- 1x MF suspension ring 

- 1x CG single-leg chain 

- 2x CGD double-leg chain 

Free choice of combinations 

Version 

1 

Nominal 

chain 

Ø 

MF 

CGD CG 

Advantages of FlexiLeg 

New 

• 25% more safe working load than Grade 8 

• Max. 3 components per chain sling 

• Considerable reduction in weight 

• Purchasing costs minimised 

• Fast assembly on site 

• Chain leg safety catch can be 

unlocked with QuickPin 

1-leg 


2-leg 3- and 4-leg 

[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60° 

6-10 

8-10 

10-10 

13-10 

16-10 

or 

Version 

2 

1,500 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

or 

Version 

3 

2,120 

3,500 

5,600 

9,500 

14,000 

or 

1,500 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

Version 

4 

+ + + + 

1 x CG 1 x CGD 1 x CG + 1 x CGD 2 x CGD 

3,150 

5,200 

8,400 

14,000 

21,000 

open QuickPin locked 

Other accessories 

MFS suspension ring 

Longer lifetime for 

suspension ring and 

crane hook thanks to 

optimised contact 

surface. 

MFX / MTX suspension 

head 

for oversized crane 

hooks. 

MIG universal double 

shortening clutch 

The universal 

shortening clutch for 

lifting and lashing. 

2,240 

3,700 

6,000 

10,000 

15,000 

145

146 

Slings 

Winner Pro highly hardened and tempered chain slings with safety load hooks 

New 

The innovation - the first Grade 12 chain sling system. Can be used from -40°C to 300°C. Full rated S.W.L. up to 200°C ambient temperature. Above 

200°C to 300°C, reduction to 60%. 


winner PRO 

Nominal 

chain 

Ø 


• Tensile load: 

300 N/mm² 

• Proof loaded: 

750 N/mm² 

• Load at fracture: 

1200 N/mm² 

• Ductile yield: 

min 20% 

• Deflection: 

0.8 x nominal diameter 

• Grade stamp: 

12 

• Surface finish: 

Chain and components 

powder-coated 

RAL 5012 

Advantages of Winner Pro 

• 50% more safe working load 

compared with G8, 20% more S.W.L. compared with G10 

• Optimised bending rigidity 

The resisting torque to bending is 16% higher 

than with a round link chain of the same crosssection. 

This has been achieved by the particular 

profile and material of the chain which also 

guarantees a longer service life 

• Considerable weight reduction 

means greater ease of operation 

• Cost-effective 

Lower costs and weight from the use of smaller chain dimensions 

in comparison with grades G8 and G10 

1-leg 



[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60° 

7 

8 

10 

13 

2,360 

3,000 

5,000 

8,000 

3,350 

4,250 

7,100 

11,200 

2,360 

3,000 

5,000 

8,000 

5,000 

6,300 

10,600 

17,00 

3,550 

4,500 

7,500 

11,800 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

Hardened and tempered chain slings with sling hooks and safety latches 

(EN 818) 

Hardened and tempered BluePower chain slings are robust, safe and lightweight lifting tackled designed to suit a wide range of applications, 

particularly when lifting angular loads. For nominal safe working loads up to 200°C ambient temperature with a reduction to 90° from 200°C to 

300°C and 75% for 300°C to 400°C. 

L = effective length 

Advantages of BluePower 

• 25% more safe working load 

enables use of smaller chain diameter, e.g. 3550 kg, 2-leg, previously: 

10 mm, BluePower: 8 mm 

• Weight saving 

and greater ease of operation, e.g. 3550 kg, 2-leg, length 3 m, 

previously: 16.2 kg, BluePower: 11 kg 

• Low price 

Cost savings compared with the traditional Grade 8 range through 

the use of smaller chain sizes with the same safe working load 

ratings. 

Nominal Effective 

1-leg 2-leg 4-leg 

chain Ø length 

Safe working load Item 



d L No. 

β 0-45° β 45-60° No. 

β 0-45° β 45-60° No. 

[mm] [m] [kg] [kg] [kg] 

6 1.0 1,400 814 038 0 2,000 1,400 814 055 0 3,000 2,120 814 066 0 

Surcharge per m Surcharge per m Surcharge per m 

8 1.0 2,500 814 045 0 3,550 2,500 814 056 0 5,300 3,750 814 067 0 


10 1.0 4,000 814 046 0 5,600 4,000 814 057 0 8,000 6,000 814 068 0 


13 1.0 6,700 814 047 0 9,500 6,700 814 058 0 14,000 10,000 814 075 0 


16 1.0 10,000 814 048 0 14,000 10,000 814 065 0 21,200 15,000 814 076 0 


Hardened and tempered chain slings (BluePower) are available with a nominal chain diameter of up to 26 mm on request. 

β 

STAHLplus Info _ You will find the dimensions of 

individual chain components on page 151 ff. 

β 

147

148 

Slings 

Hardened and tempered chain slings with sling hooks, safety latches and shortening clutches 

(EN 818) 

Chain lengths can be effectively adjusted by using shortening clutches. This is particularly useful for loads with abnormal centres of gravity. 

The shortening clutches are integrated into a patented suspension system and cannot be mislaid. 


Safety Advice _ Chain slings are subject to various 

regulations such as the accident prevention 

regulations BGR 500. 


• Tensile load: 250 N/mm² 

• Proof-loaded: 625 N/mm² 

• Stress at fracture: 1000 N/mm² 

• Ductile yield: min. 20% 

• Deflection to EN 818-2: 

0.8 x nominal diameter 

• Grade stamp: 8W 

• Surface finish: Chain spray 

painted and components 

powder-coated RAL 5015 







d L No. 

β 0-45° β 45-60° No. 

β 0-45° β 45-60° No. 

[mm] [m] [kg] [kg] [kg] 

6 1.0 1,400 814 005 0 2,000 1,400 814 016 0 3,000 2,120 814 027 0 


8 1.0 2,500 814 006 0 3,550 2,500 814 017 0 5,300 3,750 814 028 0 


10 1.0 4,000 814 007 0 5,600 4,000 814 018 0 8,000 6,000 814 035 0 


13 1.0 6,700 814 008 0 9,500 6,700 814 025 0 14,000 10,000 814 036 0 


16 1.0 10,000 814 015 0 14,000 10,000 814 026 0 21,200 15,000 814 037 0 


Hardened and tempered chain slings (BluePower) are available with a nominal chain diameter of up to 5 mm on request. 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

Load tables for chain slings 

Hardened and tempered chain slings to EN 818 Part 1, 2, 4 

Maximum safe working loads employing different slinging methods 

Nominal 

chain 

Ø 

1-leg 



[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60° 

5 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

19 

22 

26 

1,000 

1,400 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

14,000 

19,000 

26,500 

1,400 

2,000 

3,550 

5,600 

9,500 

14,000 

20,000 

26,500 

37,500 

1,000 

1,400 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

14,000 

19,000 

26,500 

2,000 

3,000 

5,300 

8,000 

14,000 

21,200 

30,000 

40,000 

56,000 

Application examples for chain slings Legend on page 150 

Chain elements from page 151 

l A8W-HSW l A8W-LHW l A8W-PW l A8W-E l -PW l HSW-HSW l VXKW-KLHW 

ll A8W-HSW ll A8W-LHW ll A8W-PW ll A8W-E 

1,500 

2,120 

3,750 

6,000 

10,000 

15,000 

21,200 

28,000 

40,000 

149

150 

Slings 

Application examples for chain slings 

ll VXKW-HSW ll VXKW-KLHW ll A8W-HSW-PW ll A8W-S-PW 

lll A8W-HSW lll A8W-LHW lll A8W-PW lll A8W-E 

lV VXKW-HSW lV VXKW-KLHW lV A8W-HSW lV A8W-E 

ll A8W-S lV A8W-S S 

Legend 

ll A8W - HSW 

a b c 

a Number of legs 

b Suspension head 

A8W Master link 

HSW Eye hook 

VXKW Coupling master link set with 

shortening clutch 

c End hook 

E Master link 

HSW Eye hook 

KLHW Coupling load hook 

LHW Safety load hook with eye 

PW Parallel hook 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

These BluePower accessories (EN 818) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings. 

BluePower round steel chain 

Spray painted blue (RAL 5015). 

Safe working Chain size Dimensions Breaking Weight Item 


d t b1 min load 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [mm] [kN] [kg/m] 

1,400 

6 6 18 8.7 56.5 0.89 817 502 0 

2,500 

8 8 24 10.9 100 1.57 817 503 0 

4,000 

10 10 30 13.5 157 2.46 817 504 0 

6,700 

13 13 39 17.5 266 4.18 817 505 0 

10,000 16 16 48 21.5 402 6.28 817 506 0 

14,000 19 19 57 25.6 567 8.90 817 905 0 

19,000 22 22 66 29.5 760 11.88 817 906 0 

26,500 26 26 78 35.0 1062 16.18 817 548 0 

BluePower A8W master link 

Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015). 

Safe working load Model 

Master link Dimensions Weight Item 

up to 45 ° for chain size 

[mm] 

d t w s 

No. 

1-leg 2-leg 

[kg] 

[mm] [kg] 

2,300 A8W 13 2.5 6 6 13 110 60 10 0.34 817 889 0 

3,500 A8W 16 2.5 8 - 16 110 60 14 0.53 817 890 0 

5,000 A8W 18 5 10 8 18 135 75 14 0.86 817 891 0 

7,600 A8W 22 6 13 10 23 160 90 17 1.6 817 892 0 

10,000 A8W 26 8 16 13 27 180 100 20 2.46 817 893 0 

14,000 A8W 32 10 19 16 33 200 110 26 4.14 817 894 0 

25,100 A8W 36 16 22 19 36 260 140 - 6.22 817 895 0 

30,800 A8W 45 25 26 22 45 340 180 - 12.82 817 907 0 

40,000 A8W 50 32 32 26 50 350 190 - 16.55 817 908 0 

60,000 A8W 56 32 - 32 60 400 200 - 27.01 817 549 0 

For single 

hooks to 

DIN 15401 

BluePower M8W outsize master link 



Master link Dimensions Weight Item 

up to 45 ° for chain size 

[mm] 

d t w s 

No. 

1-leg 2-leg 

[kg] 

[mm] [kg] 

2,300 M8W 13 4 6 6 14 120 70 10 0.44 817 909 0 

3,200 M8W 16 5 8 - 16 140 80 13 0.67 817 910 0 

4,200 M8W 18 6 10 8 19 160 95 14 1.09 817 911 0 

6,700 M8W 22 10 13 10 23 160 110 17 1.69 817 912 0 

10,100 M8W 26 10 16 13 27 190 110 20 2.65 817 913 0 

16,000 M8W 32 12 19 16 33 230 130 26 4.78 817 914 0 

21,200 M8W 36 20 22 19 38 275 150 29 7.48 817 915 0 

40,000 M8W 56 50 32 26 56 350 250 - 21.98 817 577 0 

BluePower VW four-leg master link 



Chain Dimensions Weight Item 

up to 45 ° size e t w 

No. 

For single 


DIN 15401 


4,200 

7,600 

9,600 

14,000 

21,200 

34,100 

40,000 

56,000 

VW 6 

VW 8 

VW 10 

VW 13 

VW 16 

VW 19 

VW 22 

VW 26 

For single 


DIN 15401 

5 

6 

8 

10 

16 

32 

32 

32 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

19 

22 

32 

189 

230 

265 

315 

400 

500 

520 

570 

135 

160 

180 

200 

260 

350 

350 

400 

75 

90 

100 

110 

140 

190 

190 

200 

1.26 

2.32 

3.68 

6.46 

10.06 

22.87 

24.79 

37.75 

817 896 0 

817 897 0 

817 898 0 

817 899 0 

817 900 0 

817 916 0 

817 917 0 

817 550 0 

151

152 

Slings 


VLW 1 VLW 2 

KAGW 1 KAGW 2 

KAGW 4 

BluePower VMW outsize four-leg master link 



Chain Dimensions Weight Item 

up to 45 ° size e t w 

No. 

For single 


DIN 15401 


4,200 

6,600 

10,100 

15,700 

21,200 

34,100 

40,000 

VMW 6 

VMW 8 

VMW 10 

VMW 13 

VMW 16 

VMW 20 

VMW 22 

6 

10 

10 

12 

25 

50 

50 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

19 

22 

BluePower VLW outsize coupling master link sets 

For building single- and multi-leg tackle. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015). 

Suitable for use up to crane hook size No. 25 conforming to DIN 15401 (see table on page 140). 

Safe working load Chain size Model Dimensions Weight Item 

up to 45 ° 1-leg 

2-leg 

4-leg d t w e 

No. 


2,500 

8 - VLW 1 22 340 180 394 3.4 817 558 0 

4,000 

10 - 

27 340 180 410 4.8 817 830 0 

6,700 

13 - 

27 340 180 340 4.4 817 831 0 

10,000 

16 - 

33 340 180 340 6.7 817 832 0 

19,000 

22 - 

40 340 190 340 10.0 817 559 0 

3,550 

8 6 VLW 2 22 340 180 394 3.5 817 560 0 

5,600 

10 8 

27 340 180 410 5.1 817 833 0 

9,500 

13 10 

33 340 180 425 8 817 834 0 

14,000 

16 13 

40 340 180 455 12.3 817 835 0 

21,200 

19 16 

40 340 180 480 13.8 817 836 0 

214 

230 

275 

345 

415 

500 

520 

BluePower KAGW coupling master link set 

160 

160 

190 

230 

275 

350 

350 

95 

110 

110 

130 

150 

250 

250 

1.43 

2.41 

4.01 

6.90 

11.12 

28.08 

30.62 

817 918 0 

817 919 0 

817 920 0 

817 921 0 

817 922 0 

817 551 0 

817 557 0 

KAGW1 for 1-leg tackle, KAGW2 for 2-leg tackle, KAGW4 for 4-leg tackle, all with welded master 

links. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015). 

Safe working load Chain Model 


up to 45 ° size 

d t w e 

No. 

For single 

hook to 

DIN 15401 


1,400 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

14,000 

19,000 

2,000 

3,550 

5,600 

9,500 

14,000 

20,000 

26,500 

3,000 

5,300 

8,000 

14,000 

21,200 

30,000 

40,000 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

19 

22 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

19 

22 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

19 

22 

STAHLplus Info _ Subject to technical and dimensional 

modifications to the chain components (pages 151 - 158). 

KAGW 1 2.5 

2.5 

5 

6 

8 

10 

16 

KAGW 2 2.6 

5 

6 

8 

10 

16 

25 

KAGW 4 5 

6 

8 

10 

16 

32 

32 

13 

16 

18 

23 

27 

33 

36 

13 

18 

23 

27 

33 

36 

45 

18 

23 

27 

33 

36 

50 

50 

110 

110 

135 

160 

180 

200 

260 

110 

135 

160 

180 

200 

260 

340 

135 

160 

180 

200 

260 

350 

350 

60 

60 

75 

90 

100 

110 

140 

60 

75 

90 

100 

110 

140 

180 

75 

90 

100 

110 

140 

190 

190 

141 

152.5 

186 

223 

254 

290 

356.5 

141 

177.5 

211 

243 

274 

350 

436.5 

220 

272.5 

316 

378 

474 

590 

617 

0.42 

0.73 

1.44 

2.3 

3.63 

6.2 

8.9 

0.5 

1.26 

2.66 

3.86 

6.48 

10.1 

17.88 

1.52 

3.12 

6.14 

9.26 

14.74 

30.47 

34.91 

817 512 0 

817 513 0 

817 514 0 

817 515 0 

817 516 0 

817 923 0 

817 924 0 

817 522 0 

817 523 0 

817 524 0 

817 525 0 

817 526 0 

817 925 0 

817 926 0 

817 532 0 

817 533 0 

817 534 0 

817 535 0 

817 536 0 

817 927 0 

817 928 0 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 


VXKW 1 VXKW 2 

VXKW 4 

LXKW 1 LXKW 2 

LXKW4 

BluePower VXKW coupling master link set with shortening clutch 

VXKW 1 for 1-leg tackle, VXKW 2 for 2-leg tackle, VXKW 4 for 4-leg tackle, all with patented 

shortener. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015). 



up to 45 ° 45° - 60° size 

d t w e 

No. 

1,400 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

2,000 

3,550 

5,600 

9,500 

14,000 

3,000 

5,300 

8,000 

14,000 

21,200 

For single 


DIN 15401 


- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,400 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

2,120 

3,750 

6,000 

10,000 

15,000 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

VXKW 1 2.5 

2.5 

5 

6 

8 

VXKW 2 2.5 

5 

6 

8 

10 

VXKW 4 5 

6 

8 

10 

16 

13 

16 

18 

23 

27 

13 

18 

23 

27 

33 

18 

23 

27 

33 

36 

110 

110 

135 

160 

180 

110 

135 

160 

180 

200 

135 

160 

180 

200 

260 

60 

60 

75 

90 

100 

60 

75 

90 

100 

110 

75 

90 

100 

110 

140 

194 

232 

294 

363 

413 

194 

257 

319 

383 

433 

273 

352 

424 

518 

633 

0.64 

1.16 

2.11 

4.30 

7.26 

0.94 

2.12 

4.1 

7.86 

13.74 

2.4 

4.84 

8.82 

17.26 

29.26 

817 542 0 

817 543 0 

817 544 0 

817 545 0 

817 546 0 

817 552 0 

817 553 0 

817 554 0 

817 555 0 

817 556 0 

817 562 0 

817 563 0 

817 564 0 

817 565 0 

817 566 0 

BluePower LXKW outsize coupling master link set with shortening clutch 

LXKW1 for 1-leg tackle, LXKW2 for 2-leg tackle, LXKW4 for 4-leg tackle, 

all with shortening hook. 




up to 45 ° 45° - 60° size 

d t w e 

No. 

1,400 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

2,000 

3,550 

5,600 

9,500 

14,000 

3,000 

5,300 

8,000 

14,000 

21,200 

For single 


DIN 15401 


- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,400 

2,500 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

2,120 

3,750 

6,000 

10,000 

15,000 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

LXKW 1 25 23 

23 

27 

27 

33 

LXKW 2 25 23 

23 

27 

33 

40 

LXKW 4 25 23 

27 

33 

40 

40 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

340 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

180 

478 

516 

569 

629 

688 

478 

516 

569 

629 

688 

478 

532 

584 

659 

713 

BluePower CW Connex coupling link 

(EN 1677) 

For connecting suspension eye to chain, chain to chain, hook to chain. 


Non-removable CLW Connex coupling links available on request. 

3.7 

4 

6 

7.8 

12.7 

4.14 

4.8 

7.6 

13.5 

21.9 

4.7 

7.6 

13.1 

23.1 

33.1 

817 252 0 

817 253 0 

817 254 0 

817 255 0 

817 256 0 

817 257 0 

817 258 0 

817 259 0 

817 260 0 

817 261 0 

817 262 0 

817 263 0 

817 264 0 

817 265 0 

817 266 0 

Safe working Chain 



size e c s d b g 

No. 


1,400 

6 44.4 7.8 11 7.6 39 14.1 0.06 817 267 0 

2,500 

8 61.4 11.5 15 10 63 18.35 0.18 817 268 0 

4,000 

10 72 12.6 17.8 12.6 63 23 0.33 817 269 0 

6,700 

13 88 19 22 16.7 79 27.6 0.7 817 270 0 

10,000 

16 103 21 29 21 106 33 1.14 817 271 0 

16,000 

19 115 29.5 34.8 24.5 118 41.7 2.14 817 929 0 

19,000 

22 135 29 38 27 146.5 48 3.21 817 930 0 

26,500 

26 170 35 45 31 159 59 6.2 817 547 0 

153

154 

Slings 


BluePower LHW safety load hook with eye 

(EN 1677) 

Closes automatically. Large eye, thus also suitable for ropes and web slings. 




load size e h a b d1 d2 g 

No. 


1,400 6 110 20 16 71 21 11 28 0.5 817 277 0 

2,500 8 136 26 20 88 27 12 34 0.9 817 278 0 

4,000 10 169 30 25 107 34.5 15 45 1.5 817 279 0 

6,700 13 205 40 34 138 40 20 52 2.7 817 280 0 

10,000 16 251 50 35 168 50 27 60 5.7 817 281 0 

16,000 19 290 62 50 194 60 30 70 7.9 817 931 0 

19,000 22 322 65 52 211 70 32 81 11.2 817 932 0 

BluePower HSW eye hook 

(EN 1677) 

For general lifting purposes. All hooks with forged safety latch. 




load size e h a b d1 d2 g1 

No. 


1,400 6 84.5 21 16.5 68 20 10 19 0.2 817 935 0 

2,500 8 106 27 19 88 25 11 26 0.5 817 936 0 

4,000 10 131 33 26 108.5 34 16 31 1.1 817 937 0 

6,700 13 164 43.5 33 133.7 43 19 39 2.0 817 938 0 

10,000 16 182.5 50 40 154.6 50 24.5 45 3.5 817 939 0 

16,000 19 205 55 48 177.5 55 27 53 4.7 817 940 0 

19,000 22 225 62 50 196 60 29 62 7.3 817 941 0 

26,500 26 257 75 60 236 70 35 73 12.0 817 561 0 

BluePower KHSW coupling hook 

(EN 1677) 

Suitable for use without transition link or coupling link. Forged safety latch mounted with 

high-tensile spiral pin. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015). 

GKHSW larger coupling hooks (considerably wider jaw than KHSW) available on request. 



load size e h a d g1 b 

No. 


1,400 6 69 20 15 7.4 19 66 0.2 817 572 0 

2,500 8 94.5 28 19 10.0 26 90 0.6 817 573 0 

4,000 10 109 33 25 12.5 31 108 1.1 817 574 0 

6,700 13 136 40 34 16 39 131 2.0 817 575 0 

10,000 16 155 49 37 20.0 45 153 3.48 817 576 0 

16,000 19 183.5 53 46 24 53 177 5.00 817 933 0 

19,000 22 213.5 62 50 27 62 196 12.1 817 934 0 

BluePower KLHW safety coupling load hook 

(EN 1677) 

Closes and locks automatically. Suitable for use without transition link or coupling link. 


Safe working Chain size Dimensions Weight Item 


e h a b d g 

No. 


1,400 

6 94 20 16 71 7.5 28 0.5 817 272 0 

2,500 

8 123 26 20 88 10 34 0.9 817 273 0 

4,000 

10 144 30 25 107 13 45 1.6 817 274 0 

6,700 

13 180 40 34 138 16 52 2.9 817 275 0 

10,000 

16 217 50 35 168 21 60 5.8 817 276 0 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 


BluePower CARW web sling connector 

(EN 1677) 

Endless sling connector mounted in one Connex half. The wide contact surface prevents wear 

on the sling. 




load size a e c d b g s 

No. 


2,500 8 29 66 11.5 10 65 18.35 18 0.3 817 942 0 

4,000 10 40 81 12.6 12.6 82 23 21 0.5 817 943 0 

6,700 13 50 104 19 16.7 100 27.6 27.5 1.1 817 944 0 

10,000 16 46.5 112.5 21 21 110 33 40 2.0 817 945 0 

19,000 22 109 177.5 29 27 215 48 59 6.5 817 946 0 

BluePower WLHW swivel hook 

(EN 1677-1) 

Standard design, not suitable for rotating under load. 

Swivel hook cannot be used for welded systems. 


Swivel load hook with ball-bearing load hook (can rotate under load) available on request. 



load size a b e d2 h g w 

No. 


1,400 6 16 71 160 13 20 28 35 0.6 817 999 0 

2,500 8 20 88 181 13 26 34 35 1.1 817 947 0 

4,000 10 25 107 218 16 30 45 42 2.0 817 948 0 

6,700 13 34 138 269 20 40 52 49 4.0 817 949 0 

10,000 16 35 168 319 24 50 60 60 6.8 817 950 0 

BluePower KFW wide jaw coupling hook 

(EN 1677) 




load size a b d e g h 

No. 


2,500 8 25 118 10 120 64 29 1.00 817 951 0 

4,000 10 32 143 12.5 140 76 35 1.78 817 952 0 

6,700 13 40 170 16 169.5 89 42 2.96 817 953 0 

BluePower FW wide-jaw hook 

For applications where the "g" jaw width of HSW is not sufficient, particularly in foundries. 

Before using, clarify whether the use of hooks without safety latch is permissible for the 

intended application. 



load size a b d1 d2 e g h 

No. 


2,500 

8 25 118 24 11 131 64 29 0.92 817 954 0 

4,000 

10 32 143 31 14 158 76 35 1.77 817 955 0 

6,700 

13 40 170 39 17 190 89 42 2.82 817 956 0 

10,000 16 46 200 47 22 224 102 50 5.03 817 957 0 

16,000 19 54 231 56 28 260 114 61 7.60 817 958 0 

155

156 

Slings 


BluePower PW parallel hook 

(EN 1677) 

For shortening chains and for loops which must not pull tight. 





size b d1 d2 e g 

No. 


1,400 

6 47.4 12 8.5 51 8 0.18 817 959 0 

2,500 

8 58 20 11.5 70.5 10.5 0.4 817 960 0 

4,000 

10 76.98 22 15 88 13 0.9 817 961 0 

6,700 

13 101 26 18 113 17 1.8 817 962 0 

10,000 

16 118 32 23.26 129 19 3.6 817 963 0 

16,000 

19 150 36 27 151 23.6 6.15 817 964 0 

19,000 

22 165 42 29 170 26 8.27 817 965 0 

26,500 

26 195 50 36.6 201 30.7 13.6 817 567 0 

BluePower PSW parallel hook with safety pin 

(EN 1677) 

Shortening hook with safety pin to prevent chain slipping out unintentionally. 




load size b d1 d2 e g 

No. 


2,500 8 58 20 11.5 70.5 10.5 0.4 817 966 0 

4,000 10 76 22 15 88 13 0.9 817 967 0 

6,700 13 101 26 18 113 17 1.8 817 968 0 

10,000 16 118 32 23 129 19 3.6 817 568 0 

BluePower KRW coupling hook 

(EN 1677) 

Connection piece for coupling master link sets and as chain connector for off-standard 

versions. Powder-coated blue (RAL 5015). 



load size a b d e f s 

No. 


1,400 6 17.5 38 7.4 31 8 7.2 0.08 817 969 0 

2,500 8 23.5 54 10 42.5 11 9.5 0.2 817 970 0 

4,000 10 28 63 12.5 51 14 12 0.58 817 971 0 

6,700 13 33 76 16 63 17 15 0.7 817 972 0 

10,000 16 40 88 20 74 20 18 1.17 817 973 0 

16,000 19 50 114 24 94 24 23 2.0 817 974 0 

19,000 22 50 122 27 101.5 27 24.5 2.6 817 975 0 

BluePower XKW fixed hook with coupling connection 

Coupling connection permits it to be mounted in the chain legs. 



load size a b d1 d2 e g 

No. 


1,400 

6 28.5 36.5 18 9 84 7 0.3 817 976 0 

2,500 

8 39 53 24 12 122 9 0.63 817 977 0 

4,000 

10 50 69.5 31 14 159 13 1.25 817 978 0 

6,700 

13 64 92 37 18 203 15 2.7 817 979 0 

10,000 16 80 102 48 24 233 18 4.8 817 980 0 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 


BluePower KPW parallel coupling hook 

(EN 1677) 






size b d e g 

No. 


1,400 

6 47.4 7.4 45 8 0.19 817 981 0 

2,500 

8 58 10 60.5 10.5 0.38 817 982 0 

4,000 

10 76 12.5 76 13 0.85 817 983 0 

6,700 

13 101 16 104 17 1.9 817 984 0 

10,000 

16 122 20 107 19 3.6 817 985 0 

16,000 

19 150 24 141 23.6 6.15 817 986 0 

19,000 

22 165 27.5 158 26 9 817 987 0 

RH web sling hook grade 10 

(EN 1677) 

Simple and fast use for textile slings such as web slings in combination with the high-tensile 

sling system. 

Colour marking corresponding to the S.W.L.s of the textile slings. 

Safe working Model Dimensions Weight Item 


b d g h l m 

No. 


1,000 RH-1-8+ 24 35 84 73 116 8 0.4 817 988 0 

2,000 RH-2-8+ 28.3 40 96 86 136 10 0.6 817 989 0 

3,000 RH-3-8+ 33.6 47 117 108 167 12 1.4 817 997 0 

5,000 RH-5-8+ 43.4 73 155 131 222 16.5 3.2 817 998 0 

BluePower KSCHW coupling shackle 


You will find suitable round slings on pages 174 - 176. 

For connecting directly to the chain. The nut is secured by a cotter. 



load size e e1 b a d c d1 

No. 


2,500 

8 75.5 54 28 11.5 10 30.5 16 0.49 817 249 0 

4,000 

10 104.5 76 34 16 12.5 38.5 20 0.95 817 250 0 

6,700 

13 113 77 44 20.5 16 50 24 1.89 817 251 0 

157

158 

Slings 

Spare parts for BluePower 

Front Back 

Coupling bolts for BluePower and grade 8 components 

Specific coupling bolts must be used for different parts. See table. 

Can be used for all hooks 

with coupling connection 

(except KLHW and HKSB 

safety coupling safety hooks 

For KLHW and HKSB 

safety coupling 

load hooks 


L d L1 d1 

No. 

[mm] [kg] 

KBSW 6 16.5 7.4 16 2.5 0.006 817 352 0 

KBSW 8 23 10 22 3 0.01 817 353 0 

KBSW 10 29.5 12.5 28 3.5 0.03 817 354 0 

KBSW 13 37 16 36 4 0.06 817 355 0 

KBSW 16 52 20 40 4.5 0.1 817 356 0 

KBSW 19-20 73 24 50 5 0.2 817 357 0 

KBSW 22 71 27 55 5 0.32 817 358 0 

Model d for accessory Item 

No. 

KBS-KLH PWH 6* 7.5 

KLHW 6 

817 359 0 

KBS-KLH PWH 8* 9 

KLHW 8 

817 360 0 


KLHW 10 

817 361 0 


KLHW 13 

817 362 0 

KBS-KLH PWH 16* 19.5 

KLHW 16 

817 363 0 

* Please indicate the correct hook model when ordering. 

Safety latch sets 

For BluePower and Grade 8 hooks. 

Model For hook model Item 

No. 

Forged latch SFG PWH 6 

HSW 6, KHSW 6, HKS 6, HS 6 817 122 0 

SFG PWH 8 HSW 8, KHSW 8, WS 8, HKS 8, HS 8 817 124 0 



SFG PWH 16 HSW 16, KHSW 16, HKS 16, HS 16 817 127 0 

SFG PWH 19-20 HSW 19, KHSW 19, HKS 20, HS 20 817 902 0 

SFG PWH 22 HSW 22, KHSW 22, HKS 22, HS 22 817 903 0 

SFG PWH 26-32 HSW 26, PWH HSW 32, HS 26, HS 32 817 904 0 

Trigger sets 

For BluePower and Grade 8 hooks. 


No. 

VLH PWH 6* 

LHW 6, KLHW 6, WLHW 5-6 827 066 0 

VLH PWH 7-8* 

LHW 7-8, KLHW 7, KLHW 8, WLHW 7-8 827 067 0 

VLH PWH 10* 

LHW 10, KLHW 10, WLHW 10 827 068 0 

VLH PWH 13* 

LHW 13, KLHW 13, WLHW 13 827 069 0 

VLH PWH 16* 

LHW 16, KLHW 16, WLHW 16 827 070 0 

* Please indicate the correct hook model when ordering. 

Load tag 

Galvanised. 

Required for marking multi-leg chain slings grade 10 (BluePower) in compliance with the current 

standard, but also for single-leg chain slings if the safe working load cannot be clearly 

determined at the place of use. As it is not inscribed, existing chains can be marked with the 

necessary information. 

The oval load tag is included in the price of a new chain, however it can also be ordered 

separately. 

Item No.: 817 995 0 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

SAK chain slings with safety load hooks 

(EN 818) 

SAK chain slings are proven, robust and safe making them suitable for a great number of applications, particularly where angular loads are 

involved. For nominal safe working loads up to 200°C ambient temperature with a reduction to 90% from 200°C to 300°C and 75% from 300°C 

to 400°C. 


• High tensile load chain 

• Grade 8 

• Sling hook - spray painted red, chain black 

• Stainless steel chain slings on request 


STAHLplus Info _ The dimensions of the individual 

chain components can be found on page 161 ff. 

We are also able to offer you special chains, such 

as stainless steel chains or logging chains. 

Just ask us! 

If the sling runs over sharp edges, select the next 

higher nominal diameter for the chain. 

This will ensure optimum edge protection. 







d L No. 

β 0-45° β 45-60° No. 

β 0-45° β 45-60° No. 

[mm] [m] [kg] [kg] [kg] 

6 1.0 1,120 814 077 0 1,600 1,120 814 088 0 2,360 1,700 814 098 0 


8 1.0 2,000 814 078 0 2,800 2,000 814 095 0 4,250 3,000 814 105 0 


10 1.0 3,150 814 085 0 4,250 3,150 814 096 0 6,700 4,750 814 106 0 


13 1.0 5,300 814 086 0 7,500 5,300 814 097 0 11,200 8,000 814 107 0 


16 1.0 8,000 814 087 0 11,200 8,000 814 197 0 17,000 11,800 814 208 0 


20 * 1.0 12,500 814 187 0 17,000 12,500 814 198 0 26,500 19,000 814 215 0 


22 * 2.0 15,000 814 188 0 21,200 15,000 814 205 0 31,500 22,400 814 216 0 


26 * 2.0 21,200 814 195 0 30,000 21,200 814 206 0 45,000 31,500 814 217 0 


32 * 2.0 31,500 814 196 0 45,000 31,500 814 207 0 67,000 47,500 814 218 0 


* Chain sling version with coupling link eye hook and parallel hook. 

β 

Safety Advice _ Chain slings are subject to various 

regulations such as the accident prevention 


β 

159

160 

Slings 

Load tables for chain slings 

Chain slings grade 8 to EN 818 Part 1, 2, 4 

Maximum safe working loads employing different slinging methods 

Nominal 

chain 

Ø 


1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg Endless chain slings 

[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60° 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

20 

22 

26 

32 

1,120 

2,000 

3,150 

5,300 

8,000 

12,500 

15,000 

21,200 

31,500 

1,600 

2,800 

4,250 

7,500 

11,200 

17,000 

21,200 

30,000 

45,000 

Special sling chains for hot galvanizing plants 

• Suitable for salt or sulphuric acid baths up to a concentration of 15% 

and temperatures of up to 30°C 

• Safe working loads from 280 kg to 12,500 kg 

• Safe working load values based on EN 818-5 T 

• Heat-treated for increased resistance to stress corrosion 

• 25% higher minimum breaking force than those demanded in 

EN 818-5 or-6, which means 25% more sefatey for the user 

• Marking "for hot galvanizing plants" 


1,120 

2,000 

3,150 

5,300 

8,000 

12,500 

15,000 

21,200 

31,500 

New 

STAHLplus Info _ Lashing chains with tensioning 

ratchet (various designs) for securing loads 


2,360 

4,250 

6,700 

11,200 

17,000 

26,500 

31,500 

45,000 

67,000 

1,700 

3,000 

4,750 

8,000 

11,800 

19,000 

22,400 

31,500 

47,500 

1,800 

3,150 

5,000 

8,500 

12,500 

20,000 

23,600 

33,500 

50,000 

Chain systems and accessories for forestry applications 

• Grade 10, weight reduction 25% in comparison with Grade 8 and with 

higher tensile strength 

• Higher resistance to wear and mechanical abrasion when pulled 

along the ground 

• Ductile yield is at least 20% thanks to special alloy special steels 

• Handy, convenient design forms, danger of injury is thus reduced 

• Chain grips particularly firmly thanks to profile cross-sections, 

important for hardwood, on steep ground, ice 

• Flexibility thanks to extensive accessories 


05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

The following accessories (Grade 8) enable you to build up your own individual chain slings. 

Oval master links type A 

Off-standard oval master links type T 

N.B.: On request we can supply tested sling 

attachment points (VIP) in screw-on or 

weld-on design. 

Please ask for detailed dimensions and prices 

for the tested sling attachment points. 

Chain sling 

(EN 818-2) 

Grade 8, black 

Safe working Chain Breaking 


load size load d t a b 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [kN] [mm] [kg/m] 

1,120 6 x 18 45.2 6 18 7.8 22.2 0.8 817 002 0 

2,000 8 x 24 80.4 8 24 10.4 29.6 1.4 817 004 0 

3,150 10 x 30 126.0 10 30 13.0 37.0 2.2 817 005 0 

5,300 13 x 39 212.0 13 39 16.9 48.1 3.8 817 006 0 

8,000 16 x 48 322.0 16 48 20.8 59.2 5.7 817 007 0 

11,200 20 x 60 503.0 20 60 26.0 74.0 9.0 827 000 0 

15,000 22 x 66 608.0 22 66 28.6 81.4 10.9 817 321 0 

21,200 26 x 78 849.0 26 78 33.8 96.2 15.2 817 322 0 

31,500 32 x 96 1290.0 32 96 41.6 118.0 23.0 817 326 0 

Oval master links type A 

(EN 1677) 

For 1-2-leg chain suspension tackle. Grade 8, spray painted red. 

STAHLplus Info _ Subject to technical and dimensional 

modifications to the chain components (pages 161 - 167). 

Off-standard oval master links type T 

Suitable for the next size of crane hook and off-standard hooks thanks to their larger internal 

dimensions. 

Grade 8, spray painted red. 

Size Master link 

for chain size 

[mm] 

1-leg 2-leg 

A13 

A16 

A18 

A22 

A26 

A32 

A36 

A45 

A50 

A56 

T13 

T16 

T20 

T26 

T32 

T38 

T45 

T50 

T56 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

20 

22 

26 

32 

36 

8 

10 

13 

16 

20 

22 

26 

32 

36 

6 

- 

8 

10 

13 

16 

20 

22 

26 

32 

- 

8 

10 

13 

16 

20 

22 

26 

32 


No. 

d t w s 

13 

16 

19 

23 

27 

33 

36 

45 

50 

60 

14 

16.5 

20 

27 

33 

38 

45 

50 

60 

110 

110 

135 

160 

180 

200 

260 

340 

350 

400 

120 

140 

160 

190 

230 

275 

340 

350 

400 

[mm] [kg] 

Designation screw-on weld-on thread / weld safe working load 

VLBG load ring x M8 - M48 up to 20 t 

WBG / WBG-V load ring x M8 - M30 / M36 - M100 up to 35 t 

VRS Starpoint eyebolts x M8 - M48 up to 32 t 

VRM Starpoint eyenuts x M10 - M24 up to 12 t 

RS/RM high-tensile eyebolts/nuts x M6 - M48 up to 32 t 

VRBG load ring x M16 - M36 up to 120 t 

VLBS load ring x HV5 +3 - HV25 +6 up to 16 t 

VRBS / VRBSB / VRBSS load ring x HV4 +3 - HV25 +8 up to 50 t 

VRBK corner load ring x HV4 + 3 - HV8 +3 up to 10 t 

60 

60 

75 

90 

100 

110 

140 

180 

190 

200 

70 

80 

95 

110 

130 

150 

180 

190 

200 

10 

14 

14 

17 

20 

26 

- 

- 

- 

- 

8 

8 

11.5 

14 

18 

29 

- 

- 

- 

0.34 

0.53 

0.86 

1.60 

2.46 

4.14 

6.22 

12.82 

16.55 

27.01 

0.44 

0.67 

1.21 

2.65 

4.78 

7.48 

12.82 

16.55 

27.01 

817 021 0 

817 022 0 

817 023 0 

817 024 0 

817 025 0 

817 026 0 

817 328 0 

817 329 0 

817 330 0 

817 331 0 

817 411 0 

817 412 0 

817 415 0 

817 416 0 

817 417 0 

817 418 0 

827 004 0 

827 005 0 

827 006 0 

161

162 

Slings 


Master links type G 

(EN 1677) 

For building 3- and 4-leg chain suspension tackle for larger crane hooks. Grade 8, spray painted red. 

Off-standard master links type TG 

For building 3- and 4-leg chain suspension tackle for larger crane hooks. 


Model Chain 

size 

G 6-8 

G 8-8 

G 10-8 

G 13-8 

G 16-8 

G 20-8 

G 22-8 

G 26-8 

G 32-8 

TG 8-8 

TG 10-8 

TG 13-8 

TG 16-8 

TG 20-8 

TG 22-8 

TG 26-8 

V coupling link 


No. 

e t w 

[mm] [mm] [kg] 

6 

195 135 75 1.32 

8 

230 160 90 2.32 

10 265 180 100 3.52 

13 315 200 110 6.26 

16 400 260 140 9.86 

20 500 350 190 22.65 

22 520 350 190 25.19 

26 570 400 200 38.01 

32 660 460 250 66.60 

8 

300 160 110 3.11 

10 350 190 110 5.08 

13 420 230 130 10.09 

16 505 275 150 17.05 

20 615 340 180 27.79 

22 690 350 190 42.19 

26 750 400 200 60.12 

For connecting suspension eye to chain, chain to chain, hook to chain. 


817 041 0 

817 042 0 

817 043 0 

817 044 0 

817 045 0 

817 332 0 

817 333 0 

817 334 0 

817 571 0 

817 399 0 

817 400 0 

817 405 0 

817 406 0 

827 001 0 

827 002 0 

827 003 0 




size a1 b c d e f 

No. 


1,120 

6 14.1 7.8 18 7.6 44.4 18 0.06 817 062 0 

2,000 

8 18.35 11.5 25 10 61.5 23 0.18 817 064 0 

3,150 

10 23 12.6 30 12.6 72 27 0.33 817 065 0 

5,300 

13 27.6 19 36 16.7 88 34 0.70 817 066 0 

8,000 

16 33 21 40 21 103 39 1.14 817 067 0 

12,500 

20 44 23 48 23 116 47 1.70 817 336 0 

15,000 

22 49 26.5 51 26.5 133 55 2.20 817 337 0 

21,200 

26 61 32 68 30 164 67 5.10 817 338 0 

31,500 

32 80 40 80 32 194 85 8.50 817 339 0 

HKS coupling hook 

With safety latch. Suitable for use without transition link or coupling link. 




load size a b c d1 e g g1 h 

No. 


1,120 

6 15 7.2 8 7.4 69 26 19 20 0.24 817 102 0 

2,000 

8 19 9.5 10 9 95 34 26 28 0.53 817 104 0 

3,150 10 25 12 13.5 12.5 109 40 31 33 0.95 817 105 0 

5,300 13 34 15 17 16 136 48 39 40 1.67 817 106 0 

8,000 16 37 18 22 20 155 56 45 49 3.20 817 107 0 

12,500 20 51 23 26 24 184 62 53 52 4.90 817 342 0 

15,000 22 50 24.5 30 27 214 72 62 62 11.44 817 343 0 

Sets of safety latches, pins and springs also available separately. 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 


HS eye hook 

With safety latch. Grade 8, spray painted red. 




size a d1 d2 e g g1 h 

No. 


1,120 

6 16.5 20 10 84.5 25 19 21 0.20 817 202 0 

2,000 

8 19 25 11 95.5 29.5 24.5 27 0.50 817 204 0 

3,150 

10 23.5 34 14 120.5 35.7 29 33 1.10 817 205 0 

5,300 

13 33 43 19 164 48 39 43.5 2.00 817 206 0 

8,000 

16 40 50 24.5 183 52.5 45 50 3.50 817 207 0 

11,200 

20 48 65.5 27 205 62.5 53 55 4.70 817 347 0 

15,000 

22 50 68 29 225 72 62 67 7.30 817 348 0 

21,200 

26 60 70 35 257 80 73 75 12.00 817 349 0 

31,500 

32 78 66 39 299 92 87 89 22.40 817 350 0 

Sets of safety latch, pin and spring also available separately 

HKSB safety coupling load hook 

Coupling preventing confusion of tackle. Only the right-sized chain can be fitted. Spray painted red. 




size a d e g g1 h 

No. 


1,120 

6 16 7.5 94 28 28 20 0.50 817 495 0 

2,000 

8 20 9 123 34 34 26 0.90 817 496 0 

3,150 

10 25 13 144 45 45 30 1.60 817 497 0 

5,300 

13 34 16 180 52 52 40 2.90 817 498 0 

8,000 

16 35 21 217 60 60 50 5.80 817 499 0 

HSB sling hook with eye 

Spray painted red. 




size a d1 d2 e g g1 h 

No. 


1,120 

6 16 21 11 110 28 28 20 0.50 817 490 0 

2,000 

8 20 27 12 136 34 34 26 0.90 817 491 0 

3,150 

10 25 34.5 15 169 45 45 30 1.50 817 492 0 

5,300 

13 34 40 20 205 52 52 40 2.70 817 493 0 

8,000 

16 35 50 27 251 60 60 50 5.70 817 494 0 

12,500 

20 50 60 30 290 70 70 62 7.90 817 569 0 

15,000 

22 52 70 32 322 81 81 65 11.20 817 570 0 

Swivel hook with eye 

Friction bearing. Not suitable for rotating under load. Ball-bearing mounted swivel hook also 

available on request. Grade 8, spray painted red. Safety swivel hook available on request. 




size a d1 d2 e g1 h 

No. 


2,000 

8 19 33 12 149.5 26 28 0.8 0 817 401 0 

3,150 

10 25 38 15 185.5 30 33 1.5 0 817 402 0 

5,300 

13 30 40 16 223 38 40 2.46 817 403 0 

8,000 

16 41 43 24 253 44 50 5.29 817 404 0 

SIKA swivel hook with WHS eye 

With ball-bearing hook - can rotate under load. 

Load hook with straight pull only. 

Grade 8, spray painted red. Safety swivel hook available on request. 




size a b d1 d2 e g1 h 

No. 


1,120 

6-8 21 28 21 10 128 19 27 0.60 827 061 0 

2,000 

8-8 30 36 32 17 180 28 32 1.40 827 062 0 

3,150 10-8 31 38 30 18 201 33 42 2.50 827 063 0 

5,300 13-8 42 61 58 28 288 44 48 5.50 827 064 0 

163

164 

Slings 


P parallel hook with eye 

(EN 1677-1) 

Can be used as chain shortening hook. Grade 8, spray painted red. 




size a d1 d2 e g h 

No. 


1,120 

6 24 12 7 51 8 15 0.12 827 071 0 

2,000 

8 30 16 10 60 10 24 0.23 827 007 0 

3,150 

10 44 21 11 80 13 31 0.59 827 008 0 

5,300 

13 53 26 16 104 17 38 1.24 827 009 0 

8,000 

16 64 30 19 116 20 44 2.01 827 010 0 

12,500 

20 85 36 22 135 23.5 53 3.75 817 822 0 

15,000 

22 97 38 25 157 27 62 5.35 817 823 0 

21,200 

26 85 55 30 210 30 80 9.62 817 824 0 

31,500 

32 93 60 40 240 39 90 18.60 817 825 0 

PK parallel coupling hook 

(EN 1677) 






size a b c d e g h 

No. 


2,000 

8 30 9 10 9 50 10 24 0.27 827 011 0 

3,150 

10 44 13 14 13 72 13 31 0.75 827 012 0 

5,300 

13 53 17 17 16 88 17 38 1.35 827 013 0 

8,000 

16 64 21 20 21 102 20 44 2.30 827 014 0 

12,500 

20 85 23.5 24 24 117 23.5 53 4.10 827 015 0 

15,000 

22 97 27 26 26 139 27 62 5.65 827 016 0 

RSK web sling coupling 

(EN 1677) 

For connecting web slings. 

The broad contact surface prevents wear 

on the sling. 




load size a b1 c d e g h m1 m2 

No. 


2,000 8 18 40 11.5 10 66 18.35 12.5 25 29 0.30 827 073 0 

3,150 10 21 50 12.6 12.6 81 23 16 30 39 0.50 827 017 0 

5,300 13 27.5 60 19 16.7 104 27.6 20 36 52 1.10 827 018 0 

8,000 16 40 66.5 21 21 112.5 33 30 40 50 2.00 827 074 0 

Wide-jaw hook with clevis 

(DIN 5691) 



You will find suitable 

round slings on pages 

174 - 176. 




size b c d h l m s t 

No. 


1,000 

6 6.5 32 8 24 122 47 16 85 0.4 817 130 0 

2,000 

8 9 40 10 29 156 63 21 109 1.0 817 132 0 

3,200 

10 12 50 12 38 194 76 31 134 2.7 817 133 0 

5,000 

13 16 60 16 43 233 88 37 161 4.0 817 134 0 

8,000 

16 18 75 20 53 285 8 42 197 6.4 817 135 0 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 


Back 

Front 

1-leg 2-4-leg 

Bolt sets for coupling load hooks 

For grade 8 hooks 

Chain 

size 

[mm] 

6 

8 

10 

13 

16 

22 

Load tag 

Galvanised. 


No. 

KBG 6 

KBG 8 

KBG 10 

KBG 13 

KBG 16 

KBG 22 

CLH 6-8; HKS 6-8 

CLH 8-8; PK 8-8; SK 8-8; HKS 8-8; SC 8-8; CH 8-8 

CLH 10-8; PK 10-8; SK 10-8; HKS 10-8; SC 10-8; CH 10 

CLH 13-8; PK 13-8; SK 13-8; HKS 13-8; SC 13-8; CH 13 

CLH 16-8; PK 16-8; HKS 16-8; SC 16-8 

PK 22-8 

827 049 0 

827 050 0 

827 051 0 

827 052 0 

827 053 0 

827 055 0 

Required for marking multi-leg chain slings grade 8 in compliance with the current standard, 

but also for single-leg chain slings if the safe working load cannot be clearly determined at the 

place of use. As it is not inscribed, existing chains can be marked with the necessary 

information. 

The octagonal load tag is included in the price of a new chain, however it can also be ordered 

separately. 

1-leg Item No.: 817 990 0 

2-4-leg Item No.: 817 991 0 

Test data tag 

For grade 8 / 10 

We mark our chain slings (on delivery and during the BGR 500 inspection) with a tag giving the 

next inspection date so that you do not miss any of these statutory dates. 

This test data tag can also be ordered separately. 

Item No.: 817 992 0 

Safe working load tag 

For rope slings and web slings 

To prevent accidents caused by overloading, the safe working load of our rope slings and web 

slings is marked on the safe working load tag. This gives safety-relevant data. 

This safe working load tag can also be ordered separately. 

Item No.: 817 993 0 

Fix-de-Fix suspension system for 

single leg operation 

The suspension system is remote controlled 

and is suitable for removing loads easily 

from the suspension rope. The clevis is automatically 

opened by the remote control and 

releases the sling. Suitable for various slings 

(chain, rope, webbing) and loads up to 2 t. 

Scope of supply: suspension system, radio 

receiver, radio transmitter, 2x rechargeable 

batteries for receiver, 2x rechargeable 

batteries for transmitter and charger for 

transmitter. 


165

166 

Slings 


Wide jaw hook with eye 





size b d h l m s t 

No. 


1,600 

6 18 10 26 132 49 20 96 0.5 817 150 0 

2,000 

8 25 11.5 26 160 63 21 122 0.8 817 151 0 

3,200 

10 32 14 37 204 76 31 153 2.0 817 152 0 

5,000 

13 40 18 42 241 86 37 181 3.5 817 153 0 

8,000 

16 35 24 50 281 100 45 207 5.5 817 154 0 

15,000 

22 47 30 72 367 127 65 265 13.8 817 344 0 

21,200 

26 54 34 80 419 136 72 305 19.2 817 345 0 

31,500 

32 60 37 93 437 152 83 327 23.0 817 346 0 

GHS SIKA sling hook with clevis 

With particularly sturdy and safe latch. Advantage: wide jaw. 

Spray painted red. Safety latch galvanised. 





No. 


1,500 

6-8 7.5 8 31 143 23 21 100 0.6 817 500 0 

2,000 

8-8 9 10 36 165 29 30 116 1.0 817 800 0 

3,150 10-8 11 12 44 188 34 31 126 1.5 817 801 0 

5,300 13-8 15 16 51 248 45 42 175 3.5 817 802 0 

8,000 16-8 17 20 58 275 60 38 185 5.2 817 803 0 

12,500 19-8 21 24 71 312 56 45 205 7.4 817 804 0 

OHS SIKA hook 

With particularly sturdy and safe latch. Advantage: wide jaw. 

Spray painted red. Safety latch galvanised. 





No. 


1,500 

6-8 24 12 30 143 26 23 103 0.6 817 805 0 

2,000 

8-8 32 16 34 168 27 31 119 1.1 817 806 0 

3,150 10-8 30 18 42 193 33 30 133 1.7 817 807 0 

5,300 13-8 39 21 47 258 44 43 192 3.4 817 808 0 

8,000 16-8 56 27 55 297 55 40 215 5.5 817 809 0 

12,500 19-8 61 33 63 330 60 43 234 8.0 817 810 0 

21,200 22/26-8 55 35 75 345 70 62 235 10.5 817 811 0 

SIKA spare parts 

Latch set 

Original latch for GHS/OHS 

Chain size Item 

No. 

6 

817 812 0 

8 

817 813 0 

10 

817 814 0 

Latch set 

Original latch for GHS/OHS 

Chain size Item 

No. 

13 

817 815 0 

16 

817 816 0 

22 

817 817 0 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 


H 

H 

ha036v 

SA / A 

C 

H 

ha037v 

SA 

A 

C 

H 

KVS shortening clutch with clevis 

(EN 1677) 

For securing chains, shortening chains, tying back loops. 





size 

a b c 

No. 


1,120 

6 

45 

36 

7.4 0.27 817 082 0 

2,000 

8 

58 

44 

10 0.5 817 084 0 

3,150 

10 

70 

55 

12.5 0.8 817 085 0 

5,300 

13 

90 

70 

16 1.53 817 086 0 

Transition tackle for load hooks to DIN 15401 

Safe 

working 


* 

Model Load 


DIN 

15401 

H Outsize 

master link 

M or SA 

Code 

d 

t bi Wt. 

Connex 

link 

C 

Hook with 

eye 

H 

[kg] [mm] [kg] [kg] 

4,000 

6,700 

10,000 

16,000 

19,000 

26,500 

Ü 32/4 IA8W-HSW Connex 

Ü 32/6,7 IA8W-HSW Connex 




Ü 32/26,5 IA8W-HSW Connex 

up to 

No. 32 

769 

798 

818 

714 

744 

764 

SA32 540 250 9.25 CW 16 HSW 10 

HSW 13 

AW50 300 220 12.3 CW 26 

CW 26 

CW 26 

HSW 16 

HSW 19-20 

HSW 22 

HS 26 

Weight Item 

No. 

11.5 

12.4 

13.9 

26.4 

29 

33.7 

817 866 0 

817 867 0 

817 868 0 

817 869 0 

817 870 0 

817 871 0 

6,700 Ü 50/6,7 IA8W-HSW Connex up to 830 SA45 540 250 18.7 CW 22 HSW 13 23.9 817 872 0 

10,000 Ü 50/10 IA8W-HSW Connex No. 50 850 

CW 22 HSW 16 25.4 817 873 0 

16,000 Ü 50/16 IA8W-HSW Connex 

875 

CW 22 HSW 19-20 26.6 817 874 0 

19,000 Ü 50/19 IA8W-HSW Connex 

905 

CW 22 HSW 22 29.2 817 875 0 

21,200 Ü 50/21,2 IA8W-HSW Connex 

954 

CW 26 HSW 26 35.8 817 876 0 

31,500 Ü 50/31,5 IA-HS Connex 969 A72 350 250 26.0 C 32 HS 32 75.8 817 877 0 

26,500 Ü 100/26,5 IA8W-HSW Connex up to 1214 SA60 800 320 48.0 CW 26 HSW 26 65.1 817 878 0 

31,500 Ü 100/31,5 IA8W-HS Connex No.100 1309 

C 32 HS 32 78.8 817 879 0 

* Safe working load = max. permissible load with jolt-free tensile stress. 

Transition tackle for ramshorn hooks to DIN 15402 

Safe 

working 


* 

Model Ramshorn 

hook- 

DIN 

15402 

H Outsize 

master link 

SA 

Code 

d 

t bi Wt. 

Master Connex 

link link 

AW 

C 

Hook with 

eye 

[kg] [mm] [kg] [kg] 


Information on the safe 

working load of load 

hooks can be found on 

page 140. 

H 

Weight Item 

No. 

4,000 Ü 50/4 IIA8W-HSW Connex up to 1029 SA 540 250 9.2 AW36 CW 16 HSW 10 27 817 880 0 

6,700 Ü 50/6,7 IIA8W-HSW Connex No. 50 1058 32 

CW 16 HSW 13 27.9 817 881 0 

10,000 Ü 50/10 IIA8W-HSW Connex 

1078 

CW 16 HSW 16 29.4 817 882 0 


1115 

CW 19 HSW 19-10 31.6 817 883 0 


1165 

CW 26 HSW 22 66.4 817 884 0 

26,500 Ü 50/26,5 IIA8W-HSW Connex 1304 SA 540 250 18.7 AW50 CW 26 HSW 26 71.1 817 885 0 

31,500 Ü 50/31,5 IIA8W-HS Connex 

1399 45 

C 32 HS 32 84.8 817 886 0 

26,500 Ü 100/26,5 IIA8W-HSW Connex up to 1564 SA 800 320 48 AW50 CW 26 HSW 26 129.7 817 887 0 

31,500 Ü 100/31,5 IIA8W-HS Connex No. 100 1659 60 

C 32 HS 32 143.4 817 888 0 

* Safe working load = max. permissible load with jolt-free tensile stress. 

167

168 

L 

Slings 

d1 

d 

ha208v 

SAK/K endless chain slings 

(EN 818) 

Loads can be secured safely and easily with an endless chain sling. 

Once the sling is tightened, bundled loads are securely held together. 

• Welded endless chains 

• Grade 8, black 

Safe working Chain size Effective length Item 


d 

L 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

1,800 6 1.0 814 225 9 

Surcharge per metre effective length 

3,150 8 1.0 814 226 9 


5,000 10 1.0 814 227 9 


8,500 13 1.0 814 228 9 


12,500 16 1.0 814 235 9 


20,000 20 1.0 814 236 9 


23,600 22 1.0 814 237 9 


33,500 26 1.0 814 238 9 


50,000 32 1.0 814 240 9 


SAS/K combination rope slings 

with high tensile chains 

Particularly hard-wearing and suitable for everyday use. High tensile chain at the part of the 

sling that is subject to the most wear with wire rope slings at either end. The wire rope slings 

can easily be fed underneath the load making these slings particularly easy to use. 

Rope length = 2 x 1.5 m, chain length = 1.0 m 

Safe working load Rope Ø 

0 - 45° 45 - 60° 

Safety Advice _ Chain slings are subject to various regulations such as the 

accident prevention regulations BGR 500. 

d1 

Chain 

size 

d 

Effective 

length 

L 

Item 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

1,100 800 10 6 4.0 813 995 0 

Surcharge per m extra chain 813 995 9 

2,200 1,600 14 8 4.0 813 996 0 


3,600 2,600 18 10 4.0 813 997 0 


05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

Safe working 


1-leg 

STAHLplus Info _ The clear width of the 

master link should be at least 20% wider than 

the profile of the crane hook from which the 

master link is suspended. 

Rope Ø * 

d 

Effective 

length 

L 

SAS rope slings 

(pr EN 13414/MRL) 

SAS rope slings with loop(s) are characterised by their high safe working load and low 

deadweight. Manufactured from galvanised wire rope and therefore effectively protected 

against corrosion. SAS rope slings can be used in the temperature range from -60°C to +100°C. 

A 1 SAS rope slings with pressed loops at both ends 

B 1 SAS rope slings with loop and sling hook with eye 

C 1 SAS rope slings with loop and BK automatically closing safety hook 

SAS rope slings with master link 

(pr EN 13414/MRL) 

SAS rope slings with master link have a high safe working load. Manufactured from galvanised 

wire rope, they are effectively protected against corrosion and can operate in temperatures 

ranging from -60°C to +100°C. The master link and the load hook are spray painted. 

D 1 SAS rope slings with master link and 

sling hook 

E 1 SAS rope slings with master link and 

BK automatically closing safety hook 

Safety Advice _ Rope slings 

are subject to the accident 

prevention regulations 

BGR 500. 

A1 B1 C1 D1 

E1 

Rope slings with loop Rope slings with master link 

A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 

[kg] [mm] [m] Item No. Item No. Item No. Item No. Item No. 

700 8 1.0 813 006 9 813 018 9 813 037 9 813 050 9 813 055 9 

Surcharge per m 

1,000 10 1.0 813 007 9 813 026 9 813 038 9 813 051 9 813 056 9 


1,500 12 1.0 813 008 9 813 027 9 813 046 9 813 052 9 813 057 9 


2,000 14 1.0 813 016 9 813 028 9 813 047 9 813 053 9 813 058 9 


2,700 16 1.0 813 017 9 813 036 9 813 048 9 813 054 9 813 059 9 

* 


Rope slings are available up to a rope diameter of 36 mm. Price on request. 

169

170 

β 

Slings 

2-leg 


On multi-leg slings, the 

inclination angle must not 

exceed 60°. 

SAS rope slings 

(pr EN 13414/MRL) 

2- and 4-leg SAS rope slings are used for transporting goods with symmetrical load distribution 

and with varying sling connection points. High quality paint finish and galvanised surfaces for 

extra protection against corrosion. 

SAS rope slings can be used in temperatures ranging from -60°C to +100°C without incurring any 

loss in safe working load. 

A 2 SAS rope slings with master link and shackle 

B 2 SAS rope slings with master link and sling hook 

C 2 SAS rope slings with master link and BK automatically closing safety 


A2 B2 C2 A4 

B4 

β 

β 

4-leg Safety Advice _ The person 

attaching the sling must 

A 4 SAS rope slings with master link and 

sling hook 

B 4 SAS rope slings with master link and 

BK automatically closing safety hook 

Rope Ø * Effective 

2-leg 4-leg 

length Safe working 

A2 B2 C2 Safe working 

A4 B4 



d L 

b 

0 - 45° 45 - 60° 

Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 

b 

0 - 45° 45 - 60° 

Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 

[mm] [m] [kg] [kg] [kg] [kg] 

8 1.0 950 700 813 065 9 813 060 9 813 070 9 1,450 1,050 813 075 9 813 080 9 


10 1.0 1,400 1,000 813 066 9 813 061 9 813 071 9 2,100 1,500 813 076 9 813 081 9 


12 1.0 2,100 1,500 813 067 9 813 062 9 813 072 9 3,200 2,300 813 077 9 813 082 9 


14 1.0 2,800 2,000 813 068 9 813 063 9 813 073 9 4,200 3,000 813 078 9 813 083 9 


16 1.0 3,800 2,700 813 069 9 813 064 9 813 074 9 5,700 4,000 813 079 9 813 084 9 

* 


Rope slings are available up to a rope diameter of 36 mm. Price on request. 

β 

never standard underneath 

the suspended load, in the 

area where the load may 

swing, between loads which 

are to be lifted together or 

next to loads which may tip 

over. 

β 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

STAHLplus Info _ Information on 

the safe working load of load 

hooks to DIN 15401 and 15402 can 

be found on page 140. 

Wire rope reducing tackle (safety hook eyes) 

(DIN 3088) 

From a large crane hook to a small eye. 

Safety hook eyes are for use wherever a crane hook is too large for the eye bolt, lifting eye or shackle. 

Safety hook eyes are the ideal aid for such applications. 

Four versions are available: 

Eye with hook with eye 

Length of loop approx. 15 times rope diameter 

Safe 

working 


Rope Ø Length 

[kg] [mm] 

1,000 

2,000 

3,000 

5,000 

7,000 

11,000 

10 

12 

16 

20 

24 

28 

L 

400 

450 

500 

650 

850 

1000 

Suitable for eyebolt, nut 

DIN 580/582 

M10 - M20 

M12 - M24 

M16 - M24 

M24 - M36 

M30 - M48 

M36 - M56 

Eye with BK safety hook 

Length of loop approx. 15 times rope diameter. 

Safe 

working 


Eye with swivel hook 


Safe 

working 



[kg] [mm] 

1,000 

2,000 

3,000 

5,000 

7,000 

11,000 

10 

12 

16 

20 

24 

28 

L 

430 

500 

540 

690 

910 

1050 


DIN 580/582 

M10 - M20 

M12 - M24 

M16 - M24 

M24 - M36 

M30 - M48 

M36 - M56 

Eye with BK safety hook and swivel 


Safe 

working 



[kg] [mm] 

1,000 

2,000 

3,000 

5,000 

8,000 


[kg] [mm] 

1,000 

2,000 

3,000 

5,000 

8,000 

10 

12 

16 

20 

26 

10 

12 

16 

20 

26 

L 

430 

490 

550 

710 

950 

L 

470 

530 

600 

780 

1030 


DIN 580/582 

M10 - M36 

M12 - M42 

M16 - M56 

M24 - M64 

M30 - M72 


DIN 580/582 

M10 - M36 

M12 - M42 

M16 - M56 

M24 - M64 

M30 - M72 

Item 

No. 

817 286 0 

817 287 0 

817 288 0 

817 289 0 

817 290 0 

- 

Item 

No. 

817 292 0 

817 293 0 

817 294 0 

817 295 0 

817 296 0 

Item 

No. 

817 297 0 

817 298 0 

817 299 0 

817 300 0 

817 301 0 

- 

Item 

No. 

817 303 0 

817 304 0 

817 305 0 

817 306 0 

817 307 0 

171

172 

Slings 

Rope slings with fibre core conforming to DIN EN 13414-1 

Maximum safe working load with different slinging methods 

Nominal 

rope 

Ø 


1-leg 2-leg 3- and 4-leg Endless 

[mm] up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60° 

8 

10 

12 

14 

16 

18 

20 

22 

24 

26 

28 

32 

36 

40 

700 

1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

2,700 

3,150 

4,000 

5,000 

6,300 

7,000 

8,000 

11,000 

14,000 

17,000 

950 

1,400 

2,100 

2,800 

3,800 

4,400 

5,600 

7,000 

8,800 

9,800 

11,200 

15,400 

19,000 

23,500 

Safety Advice _ Rope slings are 

subject to the accident prevention 


STAHLplus Online _ 



700 

1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

2,700 

3,150 

4,000 

5,000 

6,300 

7,000 

8,000 

11,000 

14,000 

17,000 

1,450 

2,100 

3,200 

4,200 

5,700 

6,600 

8,400 

10,500 

13,200 

14,700 

16,800 

23,000 

29,000 

36,000 

Grommet rope available on request. 

1,050 

1,500 

2,300 

3,000 

4,000 

4,700 

6,000 

7,500 

9,400 

10,500 

12,000 

16,500 

21,000 

26,000 

1,400 

2,000 

3,000 

4,000 

5,400 

6,300 

8,000 

10,000 

12,600 

14,000 

16,000 

22,000 

28,000 

34,000 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

SRG webbing slings with sling hooks 

(EN 1492-2) 

SRG webbing slings are made of single-layer polyester round slings (PES) with high-strength fittings. They feature a high safe 

working load and low deadweight. They are particularly suitable for handling loads with sensitive surfaces. 

The non-conductive polyester material serves as an excellent insulator. (N.B. polyester is only non-conductive when dry.) 

L = "Sheer" length of webbing sling 


• Effective combination of load-protecting 

round slings and high-strength fittings 

• Will not damage the load surface 

• Webbing slings with PVC protective sleeve 

(blue) 

• Lighter than chain or rope slings 

Safety Advice _ Only one leg should be assumed 

as load-bearing in the case of loads with centre 

of gravity greatly offset. 

β 

STAHLplus Info _ When dimensioning the sling take note of the 

loss of safe working load caused by the inclincation angle. The 

inclination angle β must never exceed 60°. 

Length 





L 

No. 

β 0 - 45° β 45 - 60° 

No. 

β 0 - 45° β 45 - 60° 

No. 

[m] [kg] [kg] [kg] 

1.0 1,000 805 000 9 1,400 1,000 805 004 9 2,100 1,500 805 008 9 

Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m * Surcharge per m * 

1.0 2,000 805 001 9 2,800 2,000 805 005 9 4,200 3,000 805 009 9 


1.0 3,000 805 002 9 4,200 3,000 805 006 9 6,300 4,500 805 010 9 


1.0 4,000 805 003 9 5,600 4,000 805 007 9 8,400 6,000 805 015 9 


1.0 5,000 805 011 9 7,000 5,000 805 012 9 10,500 7,500 805 013 9 


* Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request. 

β 

173

174 

Slings 

SRS round slings with single protective layer 

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-2, equipped with a single 

abrasion-resistant protective layer. 

The safe working load data are imprinted consecutively in figures and 

code strips. 

Polyester round slings are suitable for use in acids. 

Round slings in other materials such as polyamide and polypropylene 

on request. 

You will find round sling hooks on page 157 and 164. 


• Load-bearing elements of a PES round sling are continuously-laid 

high-quality polyester fibre strands. 

• Protective layer made of special impregnated polyester webbing for 

the continuously-laid fibre strands. 

• Pemanent identification on the outer layer: A woven ID strip for each 

1000 kg safe working load (up to a safe working load of 12 t) and on 

the opposite side the printed or woven safe working load values. 

• Specially made design for above 100 t on request. 

• Heavy duty round slings with velcro attachment on request. 

L = Effective length 

Abrasion protection sleeves 

• PVC or FPU abrasion protection sleeves protect the round slings 

from undue wear. If the protective sleeves are in more than one 

section, the individual sections are always of the same length. 

ARS continuous - Fig. 3 ARS two-piece - Fig. 4 ARS one-piece double - Fig. 5 ARS two-piece double - Fig. 6 

With single protective layer Abrasion protection sleeve (ARS) 

Safe working load Effective length Item 

PVC (blue) FPU (red) 

L 

No. 

Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 

[kg] [m] 

1,000 1.0 803 546 9 

Surcharge per m * 

2,000 1.0 803 547 9 


3,000 1.0 803 548 9 


4,000 1.0 803 549 9 


5,000 1.0 803 550 9 


6,000 1.0 803 551 9 


8,000 1.0 803 552 9 


10,000 1.0 803 560 9 


12,000 1.0 803 561 9 


15,000 2.0 803 562 9 


20,000 2.0 803 563 9 


25,000 2.0 803 564 9 


30,000 2.0 803 000 9 


40,000 2.0 803 001 9 


50,000 3.0 803 002 9 


60,000 4.0 803 003 9 


80,000 5.0 803 004 9 


100,000 6.0 803 005 9 

* 


Surcharge per metre of effective length ; off-standard lengths on request. 

05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

SRS round slings with double protective layer 

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-2, equipped with a double abrasion-resistant protective layer. 

The safe working load data are imprinted consecutively in figures and code strips. 

Polyester round slings are suitable for use in acids. 

Round slings in other materials such as polyamide and polypropylene (resistant to acids and lyes) on request. 



• Load-bearing elements of a PES 

round sling are continuouslylaid 

high-quality polyester fibre 

strands. 

• Protective layer made of 

special impregnated polyester 

webbing for the continuouslylaid 

fibre strands. 

• Pemanent identification on the 

outer layer: A woven ID strip for 

each 1000 kg safe working load 

and on the opposite side the 

printed or woven safe working 

load values. 

• PVC or FPU abrasion protection 

sleeves protect the round slings 

from undue wear. If the protective 

sleeves are in more than 

one section, the individual sections 

are always of the same 

length. 




With double protective layerl Abrasion protection sleeves 

Safe working load Effective length Item 

PVC (blue) FPU (red) 

No. 

Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 

[kg] [m] 

1,000 1.0 803 553 9 


2,000 1.0 803 554 9 


3,000 1.0 803 555 9 


4,000 1.0 803 556 9 


5,000 1.0 803 557 9 


6,000 1.0 803 558 9 


8,000 1.0 803 559 9 


L 


Textile mats up to 40 t safe working load 


* Surcharge per metre of effective length L; off-standard lengths on request. 

175

176 

Slings 

SRS plus round slings 

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-2, equipped with an abrasion-resistant protective layer. The round sling for extra heavy duty. 

SRS plus is a round sling that features optimised abrasion resistance, available widths, tear strength, folding resistance, service life and safety 

coding. 

In addition to the ID strip (one strip per 1000 kg safe working load,) this sling features permanently woven safe working load values in legible 

figures that slide smoothly over even sharp-edged loads. The figures cannot catch or wear. 

The particularly thick outer webbing is a considerable improvement for rugged use. 


• The protective layer of the round sling is heavily impregnated with polyurethane, 

is thus extremely abrasion-resistant and prevents damage to the outer layer. 

• The sling is stiffer and firmer than conventional slings, however it is light and 

extremely flexible in use. 

• Abrasion protection sleeves of PVC or FPU protect the round slings from undue 

wear. If the protective sleeves are in more than one section, the individual sections 

are always of the same length. 

Exposure to chemicals! 

Textile products made of polyester, polyamide and polypropylene may also be 

severely affected depending on concentration, temperature and time of exposure! 

If there is any doubt, specify your conditions of use to enable us to recommend the 

correct material or calculate the S.W.L. dimension required. 

SRS Premium round sling 


New 

SRS Premium is the new top-class round sling, a further development on the basis 

of the tried and tested SRS plus. 

The improvements at a glance: 

• Improved structure of webbing, thus even greater abrasion protection 

• Increased thickness of tube, ensuring considerably longer life 

• Optimised contact width 

• Compact construction and top design 


New 


Polyester round slings Abrasion protection sleeves 

Safe working Effective length SRS plus SRS Premium PVC (blue) FPU (red) 


L 

Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 

Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 Fig. 3+4 Fig. 5+6 

[kg] [m] 

1,000 1.0 803 565 9 803 006 9 


2,000 1.0 803 566 9 803 007 9 


3,000 1.0 803 567 9 803 008 9 


4,000 1.0 803 568 9 803 010 9 


5,000 1.0 803 569 9 803 011 9 


6,000 1.0 803 570 9 803 012 9 


8,000 1.0 803 571 9 803 013 9 



SRS Premium - the "super sling" 

A new technology - for even greater safety! 


05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

Load tables for webbing slings and endless round slings 

Endless round slings conforming to EN 1492-2 

Maximum safe working load employing different slinging methods 

straight 

single 

attachment 

Safe working load with one endless round sling 

Safe working load with two endless round slings 

in [kg] 

in [kg] 

laid around - inclination angle inclinations angle 

looped up to 0° * over 7° over 45° up to 45° * over 45° straight looped straight looped 

up to 45° * up to 60° * 

up to 60° * up to 45° * up to 45° * over 45° over 45° 

up to 60° * up to 60° * 

1,000 800 2,000 1,400 1,000 700 500 1,400 1,120 1,000 800 

2,000 1,600 4,000 2,800 2,000 1,400 1,000 2,800 2,240 2,000 1,600 

3,000 2,400 6,000 4,200 3,000 2,100 1,500 4,200 3,360 3,000 2,400 

4,000 3,200 8,000 5,600 4,000 2,800 2,000 5,600 4,480 4,000 3,200 

5,000 4,000 10,000 7,000 5,000 3,500 2,500 7,000 5,600 5,000 4,000 

6,000 4,800 12,000 8,400 6,000 4,200 3,000 8,400 6,720 6,000 4,800 

8,000 6,400 16,000 11,200 8,000 5,600 4,000 11,200 8,960 8,000 6,400 

10,000 8,000 20,000 14,000 10,000 7,000 5,000 14,000 11,200 10,000 8,000 

12,000 9,600 24,000 16,800 12,000 8,400 6,000 16,800 13,440 12,000 9,600 

15,000 12,000 30,000 21,000 15,000 10,500 7,500 21,000 16,800 15,000 12,000 

20,000 16,000 40,000 28,000 20,000 14,000 10,000 28,000 22,400 20,000 16,000 

25,000 20,000 50,000 35,000 25,000 17,500 12,500 35,000 28,000 25,000 20,000 

30,000 24,000 60,000 42,000 30,000 21,000 15,000 42,000 33,600 30,000 24,000 

40,000 32,000 80,000 56,000 40,000 28,000 20,000 56,000 44,800 40,000 32,000 

50,000 40,000 100,000 70,000 50,000 35,000 25,000 70,000 56,000 50,000 40,000 

60,000 48,000 120,000 84,000 60,000 42,000 30,000 84,000 67,200 60,000 48,000 

80,000 64,000 160,000 112,000 80,000 56,000 40,000 112,000 89,600 80,000 64,000 

100,000 80,000 200,000 140,000 100,000 70,000 50,000 140,000 112,000 100,000 80,000 

* Handling tolerances for β = 7% 

Webbing slings conforming to EN 1492-2 


1-leg 



1,000 

2,000 

3,000 

4,000 

5,000 

up to 45° 45° - 60° up to 45° 45° - 60° 

1,400 

2,800 

4,200 

5,600 

7,000 

1,000 

2,000 

3,000 

4,000 

5,000 

2,100 

4,200 

6,300 

8,400 

10,500 

1,500 

3,000 

4,500 

6,000 

7,500 

STAHLplus Info _ Black round 

slings for stage and events are also 

available. 


STAHLplus Info _ Round slings 

are available up to 100 t safe 

working load, special versions 

also available for higher safe 

working loads. Just ask us! 

177

178 

Slings 

Double-layer web slings 

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-1 

Stabilised, drawn, finished and featuring optimised elongation. 

These web slings are light and easy to manage. The loops are reinforced 

with coloured, particularly abrasion-resistant webbing and are 

thus easy to lay on the hook. The woven loop reinforcement does not 

swell when damp. 

The loops on layers A and B of the web have proven themselves to be 

extremely effective in day-to-day use. 


• The load-bearing elements of a PES web sling are continuously-laid 

high quality polyester fibre strands. 

• Permanent identification on the web sling: a woven ID strip for each 

1000 kg safe working load. 

• Abrasion protection sleeves in PVC or FPU protect the web slings 

from undue wear. If the protective sleeves are in more than one section, 

the individual sections are always of the same length. 

Formed sleeves 

Only sliding formed sleeves make it possible to turn sharp-edged loads 

safely: At the moment the load (e.g. coil) is raised, the sleeve grips 

firmly at the edge while the web sling can stretch and move freely in 

the formed sleeve under the increasing load. 

Web slings with permanent coatings are to be found on page 182. 

One-sided formed sleeve - on request 

Two-sided formed sleeve - see table 

Type A 

Loop on web 

with full reinforcement 


Type B 

Loop on web with 

standard reinforcement 

ARS continuous - Fig. 1 ARS two-piece - Fig. 2 

Safe working load Web width Length of Width of Effective length 

Type A Type B Abrasion protection sleeves 

x thickness loop loop 

Item 

Item 

2-sided PVC FPU 

Single Double 

L 

No. 

No. 

formed 

sleeve 

(blue) 

Fig. 1+2 

(red) 

Fig. 1+2 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

1,000 2,000 30x7 200 15 2.0 803 643 9 803 655 9 

Surcharge per m * - - 

2,000 4,000 60x7 300 30 2.0 803 646 9 803 658 9 


3,000 6,000 90x7 350 30 2.0 803 648 9 803 660 9 


4,000 8,000 120x7 425 40 2.0 803 650 9 803 662 9 


5,000 10,000 150x7 500 50 2.0 803 651 9 803 663 9 


6,000 12,000 180x7 550 60 3.0 803 652 9 803 664 9 


8,000 16,000 240x7 600 80 3.0 803 653 9 803 665 9 


10,000 20,000 300x10 625 100 3.0 803 654 9 803 666 9 



05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

Premium double-layer web slings 

These web slings have an even longer service life as regards abrasion, 

pressure and edge stresses thanks to the optimised design of web and 

edge. 

Advantages 

• Even longer service life thanks to increased safety factor 

• Higher temperature resistance up to 150° C 

• Optimum web design ensures improved resistance to abrasion 


• Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-1 

• Stabilised, drawn, finished and featuring optimised elongation. 

• Fully reinforced loop 

• Optimum web design ensures improved resistance to abasion 

• Higher temperature resistance: The strength does not fall below the 

7:1 or 8:1 safety factor at 150°C for continuous use 

• Safety factor approx. 10:1 

Safety Advice _ The aperture angle of the end loops 

must not exceed 20°. 

Safe working load Web width x thickness Length of loop Width of loop min. length of loop Price for 1 metre Surcharge 

per m * 

Single Double Item 

[kg] [mm] 

No. 

1,000 2,000 50 x 6 200 25 850 803 184 9 

2,000 4,000 75 x 8 300 25 1300 803 185 9 

3,000 6,000 100 x 8 350 35 1500 803 186 9 

4,000 8,000 125 x 8 425 45 1600 803 187 9 

5,000 10,000 150 x 10 500 50 1900 803 188 9 


Heavy duty pipeline web sling mats 

made of polyester (PES) analog to DIN V 61360 prEN 1492-1. 

The strongman for pipeline construction: 

• up to 900 mm contact surface 

• contact side fully coated with an anti-slip plastic coating 

• up to 48 t S.W.L. per mat 

• the eye beam automatically drops from the hook beam after 

unloading - no expenditure of energy and time required 

Prices and technical data on request. 

179

180 

Slings 

Endless web slings 

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-1 

Stabilised, drawn, finished and featuring optimised elongation. 

Both single- and double-layer versions available. 


• Whether single- or double-layer, the load is always carried by 2 legs, 

and thus 

• higher safe working loads are possible compared with web slings of 

equal width with loops or terminal fittings 

STAHLplus Info _ Disposable web 

slings manufactured in compliance 

with the future DIN 60005 

are available. Price on request. 


Safe working load Web width Effective length Single-layer 

Single Double 

x thickness 

L 

Item 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

500 1,000 25x4 1.0 803 675 9 


1,000 2,000 30x3,5 1.0 803 676 9 


1,500 3,000 65x3 1.0 803 677 9 


2,000 4,000 60x3,5 1.0 803 678 9 


3,000 6,000 90x3,5 1.0 803 679 9 

* 


Surcharge per metre of effective length L.; off-standard lengths on request. 

Safe working load Web width 

x thick- 

Single Double ness 

Effective length 


L 

Double-layer 

Item 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

1,000 2,000 25x8 1.0 803 606 9 


1,500 3,000 35x6 1.0 803 607 9 


2,000 4,000 30x7 1.0 803 608 9 


3,000 6,000 65x6 1.0 803 609 9 


4,000 8,000 60x7 1.0 803 610 9 


5,000 10,000 100x6 1.0 803 612 9 


6,000 12,000 90x7 1.0 803 613 9 


05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

Web slings with terminal fittings - double-layer 

Made of polyester (PES) EN 1492-1, stabilised, drawn, finished and 

featuring optimised elongation. 

The terminal fittings are easy to hook onto small crane hooks. The 

stainless steel terminal fittings are indestructible. The practical 

combination sling Type A should be selected for varying applications. 


• Can also be used with smaller crane hooks 

• Particularly suitable for use together with beams as steel terminal 

fittings are used at the beam hook in the area most susceptible to 

wear. 

• With non-rusting terminal fittings also suitable for pickling baths. 

Just ask us! 

• For safe handling: The safe working load ID coding is indestructible. 

• See below for dimensions of terminal fittings 

• Web slings with terminal fittings with protective sleeves on request. 

Type A Type B 

Type A Type B 

Safe working load Web width Effective length 

Type A Type B 

Single Double 

x thickness 

L 

Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 

r1 h1 b1 

r2 h2 b2 

[kg] [mm] [m] [mm] [mm] 

1,000 2,000 30x7 2.0 13 80 60 803 633 9 13 145 100 803 573 9 


2,000 4,000 60x7 2.0 16 90 80 803 635 9 16 165 120 803 575 9 


3,000 6,000 90x7 2.0 20 110 100 803 637 9 20 195 150 803 577 9 


4,000 8,000 120x7 2.0 22 130 130 803 639 9 22 230 185 803 579 9 


5,000 10,000 150x7 2.0 26 160 160 803 640 9 26 295 225 803 580 9 


6,000 12,000 180x7 2.0 30 210 220 803 641 9 30 325 295 803 581 9 


8,000 16,000 240x7 2.0 32 210 270 803 642 9 32 330 345 803 582 9 


10,000 20,000 300x10 2.0 36 278 300 803 572 9 36 428 430 803 583 9 



181

182 

Slings 

Web slings with permanent coating 

Extremely resistant to abrasion and cutting - ideal for use with sharp-edged loads. 

Permanent coatings are of advantage if small, narrow, U-shaped loads must be lifted and the 

effective length of the web sling is very short. 

The permanent coating provides more flexibility than a short and thus relatively stiff protective 

sleeve. 

Web slings with movable formed sleeves are to be found on page 178. 


• The permanent coatings are poured onto the web sling and, as specified by the accident 

prevention regulations, transparent. 

• Permanent coating of 5 mm thick polyurethane (PU) - smooth on one or both sides 

• With loops at both ends 

Safe working Web dimensions Effective length Coating on 

Coating on 

load width x thickness 

one side 

two sides 

Single Double 

L 

Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

1,000 2,000 30x7 1.0 803 584 9 803 592 9 


2,000 4,000 60x7 1.0 803 585 9 803 593 9 


3,000 6,000 90x7 2.0 803 586 9 803 594 9 


4,000 8,000 120x7 2.0 803 587 9 803 595 9 


5,000 10,000 150x7 2.0 803 588 9 803 596 9 


6,000 12,000 180x7 3.0 803 589 9 803 597 9 


8,000 16,000 240x7 3.0 803 590 9 803 598 9 


10,000 20,000 300x10 3.0 803 591 9 803 599 9 



AntiCut slings with loops 

With increased work capacity, double-layer, made of polyester 

(PES) EN 1492-1. 

Drawn and finished, featuring optimised elongation. 

Advantages in use 

• The woven AntiCut edge protects the edges of the sling from 

damage 

• The V-shape of the woven edge absorbs transverse stresses 

• The loops are reinforced with particularly abrasion-resistant 

wear protection right up to the seam overlaps 

Safe working load Web width Length of Width of Effective length Item 

x thickness loops loops 

No. 

Single Double 

L 

[kg] [mm] [m] 

2,000 4,000 60x7 200 15 2.0 803 601 9 


3,000 6,000 90x7 350 30 2.0 803 602 9 


4,000 8,000 120x7 425 40 2.0 803 603 9 



05_08EN.FM

05_08EN.FM 

Load tables for web slings to EN 1492-2 


straight, 

single 

attachment 

* Handling tolerances for β = 7% 

Safety Advice _Textile slings are subject to the 

accident prevention regulations BGR 500. 

Endless slings and web slings without a manufacturer’s 

label must not be used! 

Safe working load with one web sling 

Safe working load with two web slings 

in [kg] 

in [kg] 

laid around - inclination angle inclination angle 

looped up to 0° * up to 45° * over 45° straight looped straight looped 

up to 60° * up to 45° * up to 45° * over 45° over 45° 

up to 60° * up to 60° * 

1,000 800 2,000 1,400 1,000 1,400 1,120 1,000 800 

2,000 1,600 4,000 2,800 2,000 2,800 2,240 2,000 1,600 

3,000 2,400 6,000 4,200 3,000 4,200 3,360 3,000 2,400 

4,000 3,200 8,000 5,600 4,000 5,600 4,480 4,000 3,200 

5,000 4,000 10,000 7,000 5,000 7,000 5,600 5,000 4,000 

6,000 4,800 12,000 8,400 6,000 8,400 6,720 6,000 4,800 

8,000 6,400 16,000 11,200 8,000 11,200 8,960 8,000 6,400 

10,000 8,000 20,000 14,000 10,000 14,000 11,200 10,000 8,000 

Sling rack 

Free-standing rack for central storage of slings. 

New 

The stored slings are clearly visible, and cannot become knotted. The sling required is always 

ready to hand. 



• Sturdy free-standing steel construction, 

steel shot derusted 

• No floor mounting necessary 

• Spray-painted RAL 5015 (sky blue), 

D.F.T. min. 70 μm 

• Suspension hooks welded on 

• Suitable for ropes, chains, webbing slings, 

round slings and cargo gear 

• Safe working load max. 1000 kg 

• Deadweight 

AG 1500: approx. 80 kg 

AG 2000: approx. 90 kg 

STAHLplus Online _ 



1520 mm / 2020 mm 

AG 1500 / AG 2000 

183

184 

Slings 

Abrasion protection sleeve with PuR coating 

Abrasion protection sleeves of suitable dimensions for web slings, round slings and lashing 

straps increase their service life and provide protection against mechanical abrasion, sharp 

edges and ultraviolet light. 

Edge protector bracket for web slings and lashing straps 

With their wide contact area, edge protector brackets made of sturdy plastic ensure even and 

thus protective distribution of pressure. Suitable for web widths up to 100 mm. 

Edge protectors in polyurethane (PU) 

Edge protector brackets in polyurethane are 

available in 5 sizes up to a sling width of 

300 mm, with or without magnet. 

Edge protector plates for web slings and lashing straps 

For sling width For safe Item 

working load No. 

[mm] [kg] 

25 

500 805 510 0 

30 

1,000 805 511 0 

60 

2,000 805 512 0 

90 

3,000 805 513 0 

120 

4,000 805 514 0 

150 

5,000 805 515 0 

180 

6,000 805 516 0 

For sling 

width 

Web width Item 

No. 

[mm] 

up to 50 

50 - 100 

805 507 0 

805 508 0 

We recommend the use of edge protector plates to avoid possible damage to your web 

slings caused by sharp edges or mechanical abrasion. 

Optimally shaped entry slots enable easy fitting and prevent slipping on web slings when 

under load. 

[mm] 

65 

100 

125 

200 

300 

Without magnet With magnet 

Item 

No. 

817 314 0 

817 315 0 

817 316 0 

817 317 0 

817 318 0 

For use with Web width Item 

No. 

[mm] 

Web slings up to 35 

Item 

No. 

817 309 0 

817 310 0 

817 311 0 

817 312 0 

817 313 0 

up to 60 

805 500 0 

805 501 0 

Lashing straps up to 50 805 505 0 

05_08EN.FM

The accessories for our slings 

provide a secure link to the load. 

Differences in level in multi-leg lifting 

configurations or twisted chains 

and wire ropes are things of the past. 


185

186 

Lifting accessories 




suspension equipment and slings on pages 120-121 and 142 to 144. 


of lifting accessories and do not take the place of the operating 


equipment! 


The form and construction of lifting accessories must not be modified 

by e.g. bending, grinding, removing parts, drilling holes, etc. 

Welding is only permissible on products intended for this purpose and 

in accordance with instructions. 

Surface coatings such as hot-dip galvanising or electrogalvanising 

may not be applied to high-tensile lifting accessories. Stripping is also 

a dangerous process and may only be performed after consulting the 

manufacturer. 


Temperature 

> -40°C ≤ 200°C = 100% S.W.L. 

> 200°C ≤ 300°C = 90% S.W.L. 

> 300°C ≤ 400°C = 75% S.W.L. * 

* Applies only to swivel transport rings: before using, please consult 

manufacturer stating application! The S.W.L. reduction for high 

temperatures applies only until the lifting accessory has cooled 

down to ambient temperature again. 

If the maximum permissible temperature of 400° is exceeded, 

permanent damage will occur and the lifting accessory must be 

decommissioned. 

Impact loading 

The safe working loads stated apply for loading the lifting accessories 

without any impact. 



High impacts such as the load falling onto the suspension equipment 

are not permissible! 

Edge loading 

Damage to the lifting accessories caused by sharp-edged loads must 

be prevented. 

Dangerous conditions 

The safe working loads given assume that no particularly dangerous 

conditions are prevalent. Applications such as lifting persons, 

particularly dangerous loads such as e.g. molten metals, corrosive 

materials, nuclear material etc. must be assessed by an expert and the 

safe working loads reduced accordingly, or particular precautions be 

taken for these lifting procedures. 

Chemicals 

Lifting accessories which have been exposed to acids, lyes or their 

vapours must be decommissioned and returned to us for assessment. 


Only undamaged lifting accessories with legible S.W.L. markings may 

be used. 

Inspection for obvious defects must be performed before each use, 

e.g. serious corrosion, wear, cracks in welds, deformation, firm seating 

of screws, etc. Lifting accessories which have been known to have 

been overloaded or otherwise exposed to damaging influences must 

no longer be used until they have been inspected and repaired if 

necessary. 

• The link must have sufficient room in the load hook and move freely. 

• The lifting accessories must be attached in such a way that they are 

easily accessible for attaching and removing slings. They must not 

be hindered by other elements. They must not be reversed or run 

over sharp edges. 

• Lifting accessories must be attached in such a way that no sources 

of danger for the loader arise (crushing, cutting ...). They must not 

project and hinder transportation. 

• The number and distribution of the slinging points must be selected 

so that the load’s position does not change inadvertently during 

transportation. 

• Through holes must be provided with nuts in acc. with EN ISO 4032 

(minimum grade 12). 

• The position of the slinging point must permit contact of the whole 

support surface of the swivel. 

• Put the link in the correct position before attaching the load. 

correct use incorrect use 

06_08EN.FM

06_08EN.FM 

D 

H 

L 

G 

B 

M 

ha002v 

AWH weld-on hook 

(DIN 5691) 

Safety hook for welding onto dredging shovels. Complies with safety regulations. 

Observe welding specifications. 

The shape of the safety latch facilitates handling. 

Further weld-on hooks up to 15 t safe working load available on request. 

Weld-on hook Safety latch 

set 

Safe work- Model Dimensions Weight Item 

Item 


L H G B C approx. No. 

No. 


1,300 AWH 1,3 95 71 25 25 34 0.6 801 150 0 

817 600 0 

3,800 AWH 3,8 132 105 29 35 40 1.3 801 151 0 

817 601 0 

6,300 AWH 6,3 167 130 34 45 49 2.8 801 152 0 

817 602 0 

10,000 AWH 10 175 133 34 50 49 3.7 801 153 0 

817 602 0 

NG transport ring 

Weld-on transport ring (DIN 5691). Complies with safety regulations. 

Observe welding specifications. 

Transport ring up to nominal chain size 40 and version with spring available on request. 

Safe working 


[kg] 

Nominal 

size 

Chain 

size E* F* 

Dimensions 

C L H 

[mm] 

D B 

Identification 

to 

DSK-N 

Weight 

approx. 

[kg] 

1,120 6-8 6 59 31 32 32 28 12 36 1 0.30 

2,000 8-8 8 69 37 38 38 33 14 42 2 0.50 

3,150 10-8 10 84 46 45 44 38 18 48 3 0.70 

5,300 13-8 13 120 69 60 60 51 24 66 5 1.90 

8,000 16-8 16 127 66 68 65 61 28 72 8 2.70 

15,500 22-8 22 178 98 96 109 80 39 120 15 8.10 

* Dimensions E and F vertical with respect to welding plane 

Swivel transport ring 

Swivel screw-on transport ring (DIN 5691). 

Complies with safety regulations. 

Safe working 


Nom. Chain 

Dimensions Identifi- Weight 

size size E F cation to 

max. A C H Bmax. D NG 

approx. 

DSK-N 


1,120 

2,000 

3,150 

5,300 

6-8 

8-8 

10-8 

13-8 

6 

8 

10 

13 

65 

85 

98 

120 

30 

40 

45 

53 

61 

79 

92 

113 

65 

82 

101 

125 

Transport ring 

Screw-on transport ring (DIN 5691). Complies with safety regulations. 

Transport ring up to nominal chain size 34 available on request. 

Safe working 


[kg] 

Nom. 

size 

Chain 

size E F A 

Dimensions 

C L 

[mm] 

D B NG 

Identification 

to 

DSK-N 

Weight 

approx. 

[kg] 

3,150 10-8 10 112 57 90 38 130 18 40 M16 3 1.50 

5,300 13-8 13 149 79 115 48 165 22 50 M20 5 3.10 

8,000 16-8 16 183 93 150 62 212 26 65 M30 8 6.40 

15,000 22-8 22 226 114 175 72 255 36 75 M36 15 12.20 

38 

49 

59 

72 

22 

28 

33 

45 

12 

15 

19 

25 

M16 

M20 

M24 

M30 

High-tensile threaded sling attachment points with RLP thread 

with 25% higher S.W.L. provide versatile solutions for the safe movement of loads. 

Can be rotated by 360° and swivelled by 180°. The clevis can easily be dismantled. 

Sling attachment points with longer threads and inch threads on request. 

1 

2 

3 

5 

0.70 

1.50 

2.60 

4.60 

Safe working load *1 Model Dimensions Weight 

B D G H L M approx. 

Item 

No. 

801 160 0 

801 161 0 

801 162 0 

801 163 0 

801 164 0 

801 165 0 

Item 

No. 

801 166 0 

801 167 0 

801 168 0 

801 169 0 

Item 

No. 

801 170 0 

801 171 0 

801 172 0 

801 173 0 


600 300 RLP M8 42 12 35 60 15 M8 0.3 801 037 0 

1,000 500 RLP M10 42 12 34 60 20 M10 0.3 801 038 0 

1,500 750 RLP M12 57 19 46.5 85 19 M12 0.9 801 039 0 

3,000 1,500 RLP M16 57 19 44 85 24 M16 0.9 801 040 0 

5,000 2,500 RLP M20 83 28 56 111 32 M20 2.8 801 041 0 

7,000 3,500 RLP M24 83 28 53 111 37 M24 2.8 801 042 0 

12,000 6,000 RLP M30 114 34 69.5 144 49.5 M30 7.0 801 180 0 

14,000 8,000 RLP M36 114 34 65.5 144 61 M36 7.3 801 181 0 

16,000 14,000 RLP M42 149 40 90 185 65 M42 14.0 801 182 0 

20,000 16,000 RLP M48 149 40 86 185 75 M48 14.9 801 183 0 

*1 Safe working load for one attachment point and inclination angle of 0 and 90°- Safe working load for 0-45° and 45-60° on request. 

Item 

No. 

187

188 


TP screw-on rotating sling attachment collar 

Compact and light construction. Safety factor 4:1 against breakage in all load directions. 

With ball bearings, can be rotated by 360°. Max. permissible swivelling range of the take-up link 180°. 

Painted aqua-blue. Grade 10. Rotating sling attachment points up to 40 t on request. 

Safe working load *1 Model Thread 

Dimensions Master link Weight Item 

d x e b g SW 

* 

t f x t1 x bi No. 


1,000 500 TP 0,7 M10x18 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.42 801 255 0 

1,400 700 

M12x18 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.43 801 247 0 

1,400 700 

M12x25 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.43 801 250 0 

2,000 1,000 

M14x20 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.43 801 249 0 

2,800 1,400 TP 1,4 M16x20 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.44 801 252 0 

2,800 1,400 

M16x30 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.45 801 248 0 

3,400 1,700 

M20x30 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.48 801 251 0 

3,400 1,700 

M24x30 36.5 48 34 41 13x55x32 0.50 801 254 0 

5,000 2,500 TP 2,5 M20x30 52 68 46 57 16x70x34 0.95 801 256 0 

5,000 2,500 

M20x40 52 68 46 57 16x70x34 0.97 801 257 0 

5,000 2,500 

M20x50 52 68 46 57 16x70x34 0.99 801 253 0 

5,000 2,500 

M20x70 52 68 46 57 16x70x34 1.05 801 258 0 

8,000 4,000 TP 4,0 M24x30 57 75 50 63 18x85x45 1.36 801 259 0 

8,000 4,000 

M24x45 57 75 50 63 18x85x45 1.41 801 260 0 

8,000 4,000 

M24x50 57 75 50 63 18x85x45 1.42 801 261 0 

8,000 4,000 

M30x35 57 75 50 63 18x85x45 1.45 801 262 0 

12,000 6,700 TP 6,7 M30x35 70 95 65 78 20x85x45 2.33 801 246 0 

12,000 6,700 

M30x45 70 95 65 78 20x85x45 2.37 801 263 0 

12,000 6,700 

M30x50 70 95 65 78 20x85x45 2.40 801 264 0 

12,000 6,700 

M30x60 70 95 65 78 20x85x45 2.45 801 265 0 

12,000 8,000 TP 8,0 M30x35 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.59 801 273 0 

12,000 8,000 

M30x45 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.64 801 266 0 

15,000 10,000 TP 10,0 M36x50 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.76 801 267 0 

15,000 10,000 

M36x54 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.79 801 269 0 

15,000 12,500 TP 12,5 M42x50 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.56 801 270 0 

15,000 12,500 

M42x60 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.63 801 271 0 

15,000 12,500 

M42x63 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 3.68 801 268 0 

15,000 12,500 

M48x72 81 106 75 86 23x115x60 4.23 801 272 0 

22,400 15,000 TP 15,0 M42x60 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 7.19 801 282 0 

22,400 15,000 

M45x60 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 7.31 801 283 0 

22,400 15,000 

M48x60 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 7.37 801 284 0 

22,400 15,000 

M56x78 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 7.98 801 285 0 

22,400 15,000 

M64x96 104 127 95 106 30x140x70 8.86 801 286 0 

* Width across flats 

*1 Safe working load for one rotating sling attachment collar and inclination angle of 0 and 90°- Safe working load for 0-45° and 45-60° on request. 

TP-S weld-on rotating sling attachment collar 

Safety factor against breakage 4:1 in all load directions; with ball bearings, can be rotated 

by 360°. Max. permissible swivelling range of the take-up link 180°. Painted aqua-blue. Grade 10. 

Material of the element to be welded 1.6758. 

Safe working load *1 Model Dimensions Master link 

a b g t f x t1 x bi Weight 

approx. 


5,000 2,500 TP-S 2,5 5.5x45° 52 68 57 16x70x34 0.95 801 274 0 

8,000 4,000 TP-S 4,0 7.0x45° 57 74 62 18x85x45 1.30 801 275 0 

12,000 6,700 TP-S 6,7 8.5x45° 70 95 78 20x85x45 2.20 801 276 0 

15,000 10,000 TP-S 10,0 10x45° 80 106 86 23x115x60 3.80 801 277 0 

22,400 15,000 TP-S 15,0 12x45° 100 128 106 28x140x70 7.40 801 278 0 

*1 Safe working load for one rotating sling attachment collar and inclination angle of 0 and 90°- Safe working load for 0-45° and 45-60° on request. 

FP screw-on sling attachment point 

The take-up link can be rotated by 360° and swivelled by 180°. Can be locked in position; flat construction, 

variable thread design, simple assembly. Painted aqua-blue. Grade 10. 

Safe working load *1 Model Thread Dimensions Weight Item 

No. 

a b c d e f g l S 

500 

800 

1,500 

2,500 


700 

1,250 

2,120 

3,550 

FP 0,5 

FP 0,8 

FP 1,5 

FP 2,5 

M10x40 

M12x45 

M16x55 

M20x70 

69 50 48 13 28 100 12 

17 

27 

42 

52 

51 

49 

46 

34 0.70 

0.71 

0.72 

0.73 

Item 

No. 

801 159 0 

801 174 0 

801 175 0 

801 176 0 

4,000 5,600 FP 4,0 M24x80 104 76 72 18 39 147 41 74 58 2.60 801 279 0 

5,300 7,100 FP 5,0 M27x90 

51 72 2.70 801 280 0 

6,000 8,000 FP 6,0 M30x90 

51 70 2.75 801 281 0 

*1 Safe working load for one attachment point and inclination angle of 0 and 90°- Safe working load for 0-45° and 45-60° on request. 

06_08EN.FM

06_08EN.FM 


Eye bolts and nuts in 

stainless steel in acc. with 

DIN 580/582 - ed. 2003-08 are 

available. 


Eye bolts 

(DIN 580 - ed. 2003-08). 

Galvanised, die forged. Material and thread: C15 E / DIN 13 / DIN 267 

Eye bolts in acc. with DIN 580 - ed. 1972-03 available on request. 

Safe working load Dimensions Weight Item 

d1 d2 d3 d4 h k l 

No. 

90° 45° 

[kg] [mm] [kg/%] 

140 100 M6 20 36 20 36 8 13 5.0 801 184 0 

140 100 M8 20 36 20 36 8 13 6.0 801 185 0 

230 170 M10 25 45 25 45 10 17 11.0 801 186 0 

360 240 M12 30 54 30 53 12 20.5 18.0 801 187 0 

700 500 M16 35 63 35 62 14 27 28.0 801 188 0 

1,200 860 M20 40 72 40 71 16 30 45.0 801 189 0 

1,800 1,290 M24 50 90 50 90 20 36 87.0 801 190 0 

3,200 2,300 M30 65 108 60 109 24 45 166.0 801 191 0 

4,600 3,300 M36 75 126 70 128 28 54 265.0 801 192 0 

6,300 4,500 M42 85 144 80 147 32 63 403.0 801 193 0 

8,600 6,100 M48 100 166 90 168 38 68 638.0 801 194 0 

11,500 8,200 M56 110 184 100 187 42 78 880.0 801 195 0 

16,000 11,000 M64 120 206 110 208 48 90 1240.0 801 196 0 

Lifting eye nuts 

(DIN 582 - ed. 2003-08) 

Galvanised, die forged. Material and thread: C15 E / DIN 13 / DIN 267. 

Diagonal pull permissible only at angles from 0 - 45°. Caution: reduced safe working load. 

Lifting eye nuts in acc. with DIN 582 - ed. 1972-03 available on request. 


d1 d2 d3 d4 h k 

No. 

90° 45° 

[kg] [mm] [kg/%] 

140 100 M6 20 36 20 36 8 4.8 801 197 0 

140 100 M8 20 36 20 36 8 5.0 801 198 0 

230 170 M10 25 45 25 45 10 9.0 801 199 0 

340 240 M12 30 54 30 53 12 16.0 801 200 0 

700 500 M16 35 63 35 62 14 24.0 801 201 0 

1,200 860 M20 40 72 40 71 16 36.0 801 202 0 

1,800 1,290 M24 50 90 50 90 20 72.0 801 203 0 

3,200 2,300 M30 65 108 60 109 24 132.0 801 204 0 

4,600 3,300 M36 75 126 70 128 28 208.0 801 205 0 

6,300 4,500 M42 85 144 80 147 32 311.0 801 206 0 

8,600 6,100 M48 100 166 90 168 38 502.0 801 207 0 

11,500 8,200 M56 110 184 100 187 42 669.0 801 208 0 

16,000 11,000 M64 120 206 110 208 48 930.0 801 209 0 

ELP eye bolts, grade 8 

• Compact construction with flat area 

• Simple to fit and to handle 

• Flat area permits combination with other high-tensile 

components 


• Tested on the basis of up-to-date standards and the test 

principles of the Employers’ Liability Insurance Association 


No. 

d1 d3 d4 h k l 

4,000 

6,000 

8,000 

12,000 

16,000 


1,000 

1,500 

2,000 

3,000 

4,000 

M16 

M20 

M24 

M30 

M36 

72 

72 

88 

106 

127 

42 

42 

48 

60 

72 

56 

58 

69 

84 

100 

16 

16 

19 

22 

26 

24 

30 

36 

45 

54 

0.38 

0.43 

0.85 

1.4 

2.3 

801 118 0 

801 119 0 

801 124 0 

801 128 0 

801 131 0 

189

190 


Dee shackle, galvanised 

equivalent to DIN 82101. Type A, with eye bolt. 

Safe working load Dimensions Item 

d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 b1 h1 No. 

[kg] [mm] 

100 

4 5 10 M5 5 7 15.5 800 000 0 

160 

5 6 12 M6 6 8 18 800 001 0 

250 

7 8 16 M8 8 11 24 800 002 0 

400 

8 10 20 M10 10 14 30 800 003 0 

630 

10 12 24 M12 12 17 36 800 004 0 

1,000 13 15 32 M16 15 21 49 800 005 0 

1,600 17 19 40 M20 19 27 61 800 006 0 

2,000 19 21 44 M22 21 30 67 800 007 0 

2,500 21 23 48 M24 23 33 73 800 008 0 

3,150 24 26 54 M27 26 38 83.5 800 009 0 


4,000 

5,000 

27 

30 

29 

33 

60 

72 

M30 

M36 

29 

33 

42 

47 

91 

111 

800 010 0 

800 011 0 

High tensile shackles 

feature smaller dimensions 

and lighter weight 

compared to those of 

6,300 

8,000 

10,000 

12,500 

16,000 

34 

38 

42 

47 

52 

37 

41 

45 

50 

55 

78 

90 

96 

104 

120 

M39 

M45 

M48 

M52 

M60 

37 

41 

45 

50 

55 

53 

60 

66 

73 

81 

119.5 

139.5 

147 

158 

185 

800 012 0 

800 013 0 

800 014 0 

800 015 0 

800 016 0 

DIN 82101. This makes them 20,000 58 61 136 M68 61 90 211 800 017 0 

easier to use. 

25,000 63 67 144 M72 67 

The safe working load indicated on the shackles must not be exceeded. 

100 221 800 018 0 

Straight Dee shackle, high-tensile 

US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 with eyebolt. With certificate EN 10204-3.1 B if desired. 

Clevis galvanised, pin spray-painted blue. Stamped with safe working load and nominal size. 

Safety factor 6:1. 


d1 d2 d3 b1 h1 No. 

[kg] [mm] 

750 

8 

10 

21 

13 

26 800 100 0 

1,000 

10 

12 

26 

16 

31 800 101 0 

1,500 

11 

14 

28 

18 

36 800 102 0 

2,000 

13 

16 

30 

21 

41 800 103 0 

3,250 

16 

20 

42 

27 

51 800 104 0 

4,750 

19 

22 

48 

32 

60 800 105 0 

6,500 

22 

27 

57 

36 

71 800 106 0 

8,500 

25 

28 

62 

43 

81 800 107 0 

9,500 

29 

33 

69 

46 

90 800 108 0 

12,000 

32 

36 

78 

52 100 800 109 0 

13,500 

35 

39 

86 

57 113 800 110 0 

17,000 

38 

42 

94 

60 124 800 111 0 

25,000 

44 

52 112 73 146 800 019 0 

35,000 

51 

60 135 83 171 800 020 0 

55,000 

63 

72 158 106 203 800 021 0 


Bow shackle, high-tensile 

US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 with eyebolt. With certificate EN 10204-3.1 B if desired. 

Clevis galvanised, pin spray-painted blue. Stamped with safe working load and nominal size. 


d1 d2 d3 b1 b2 h2 No. 

[kg] [mm] 

500 

6 8 17 12 19 28 800 200 0 

750 

8 10 21 13 21 31 800 201 0 

1,000 

10 12 26 16 26 36 800 202 0 

1,500 

11 14 28 18 29 42 800 203 0 

2,000 

13 16 30 21 33 48 800 204 0 

3,250 

16 20 42 27 43 60 800 205 0 

4,750 

19 22 48 32 51 71 800 206 0 

6,500 

22 27 57 36 58 84 800 207 0 


8,500 

9,500 

25 

29 

28 

33 

62 

69 

43 

46 

68 

74 

95 

103 

800 208 0 

800 209 0 

We recommend the use of 

12,000 32 36 78 52 82 119 800 210 0 

bow shackles to extend web 

slings and round slings. 

13,500 

17,000 

25,000 

35 

38 

44 

39 

42 

52 

86 

94 

112 

57 

60 

73 

92 

98 

127 

133 

146 

178 

800 211 0 

800 212 0 

800 213 0 

35,000 51 60 135 83 146 197 800 214 0 

55,000 63 72 158 106 184 267 800 022 0 


06_08EN.FM

06_08EN.FM 

High tensile Dee shackle E type pin, with cotter 

US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 with extended pin, nut and cotter. With certificate EN 10204-3.1 B 

if desired. High tensile forged steel, galvanised clevis, pin spray-painted blue. 

Stamped with safe working load and nominal size. Safety factor 6:1. 


b1 b2 d1 d3 d4 h1 No. 

[kg] [mm] 

500 

12 26 6 17 8 22 800 041 0 

750 

13 29 8 21 10 26 800 042 0 

1,000 

16 36 10 26 12 31 800 043 0 

1,500 

18 40 11 28 14 36 800 044 0 

2,000 

21 47 13 30 16 41 800 120 0 

3,200 

27 59 16 42 19 51 800 121 0 

4,750 

32 70 19 48 22 60 800 122 0 

6,500 

36 80 22 57 25 71 800 123 0 

8,500 

43 93 25 62 28 81 800 124 0 

9,500 

46 104 29 69 32 90 800 125 0 

12,000 52 116 32 78 35 100 800 126 0 

13,500 57 127 35 86 38 113 800 127 0 

17,000 60 136 38 94 42 124 800 128 0 


25,000 

35,000 

73 

83 

161 

185 

44 

51 

112 

127 

50 

55 

146 

171 

800 033 0 

800 034 0 

Shackles with cotters can 

55,000 105 232 64 152 70 203 800 035 0 

be used wherever a 

permanent connection 

is required. 

85,000 127 279 76 200 

120,000 133 317 89 203 

150,000 140 348 102 226 


High tensile bow shackle E type pin, with cotter 

82 

95 

107 

216 

253 

250 

800 045 0 

800 046 0 

800 047 0 

US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 with extended pin, nut and cotter. With certificate EN 10204-3.1 B 

if desired. High tensile forged steel, galvanised clevis, pin spray-painted blue. 

Stamped with safe working load and nominal size. Safety factor 6:1. 


b1 b2 b3 d1 d3 d4 h1 No. 

[kg] [mm] 

500 

12 26 19 6 17 8 28 800 048 0 

750 

13 29 21 8 21 10 31 800 049 0 

1,000 16 36 26 10 26 12 36 800 050 0 

1,500 18 40 29 11 28 14 42 800 051 0 

2,000 21 47 33 13 30 16 48 800 220 0 

3,250 27 59 43 16 42 20 60 800 221 0 

4,750 32 70 51 19 48 22 71 800 222 0 

6,500 36 80 58 22 57 27 84 800 223 0 

8,500 43 93 68 25 62 28 95 800 224 0 

9,500 46 104 74 29 69 33 109 800 225 0 

12,000 52 116 82 32 78 36 119 800 226 0 

13,500 57 127 92 35 86 39 133 800 227 0 

17,000 60 136 98 38 94 42 146 800 228 0 

25,000 73 161 127 44 112 52 178 800 036 0 

35,000 83 185 146 51 127 55 197 800 037 0 

55,000 105 232 184 64 152 70 267 800 038 0 

85,000 127 279 200 76 200 82 330 800 052 0 

120,000 137 321 232 92 220 95 374 800 053 0 


Shackle, stainless steel 

Stainless steel, material A4, rust-free, forged 

Version Safe working load Dimensions Item 

b1 b2 d4 h1 No. 

[kg] [mm] 

Straight D shape 160 

8 

- M4 16 800 039 0 

250 

10 - M5 18 800 300 0 

375 

12 - M6 24 800 301 0 

625 

16 - M8 32 800 302 0 

1,000 

20 - M10 40 800 303 0 

1,500 

25 - M12 48 800 304 0 

2,750 

32 - M16 64 800 305 0 

3,750 

38 - M20 76 800 306 0 

4,750 

44 - M22 88 800 307 0 

5,750 

50 - M24 100 800 308 0 

Bow shape 160 

8 12 M4 16 800 023 0 

250 

10 15 M5 20 800 024 0 

375 

12 18 M6 24 800 025 0 

625 

16 24 M8 32 800 026 0 

1,000 

20 30 M10 40 800 027 0 

1,500 

25 36 M12 48 800 028 0 

2,750 

32 48 M16 64 800 029 0 

3,750 

38 60 M20 80 800 030 0 

4,750 

44 66 M22 88 800 031 0 

5,750 

50 75 M24 100 800 032 0 

191

192 


Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 Fig. 3 

H 

a 

ha003v 

Fig. 4 Fig. 5 


Special tools are required in 

some cases for the accident 

prevention regulation test of 

insulated anti-twist guards. 

For this reason, these tests 

and repairs may only be performed by 

authorised personnel and the manufacturer. 

b 

Insulated anti-twist guard 

For insulating hoists when welding on suspended hook. Insulation up to max. 1000 V. 

Connection with high-tensile chains and wire ropes ensures twist-free operation and prevents 

damage to sling equipment. 

With axial roller bearing, dust-protected and watertight; can be used in all areas without 

restrictions. Please consult the supplier for off-standard operating conditions. 

Spray-painted yellow. 

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 

Version Safe working load Dimensions Weight Item 

H a b g 

No. 


With 2 SKT 2,000 131 22 - - 0.9 801 084 0 

link sections 3,150 164 26 - - 1.8 801 085 0 

Fig. 1 

5,300 208 33 - - 2.9 801 086 0 

8,000 241 40 - - 5.2 801 087 0 

12,500 285 48 - - 8.6 801 088 0 

With SKT link 2,000 193 22 - 27 1.1 801 089 0 

section and 3,150 245 26 - 34 2.3 801 090 0 

SKN hook 

5,300 305 33 - 42 4.3 801 091 0 

Fig. 2 

8,000 354 40 - 49 7.7 801 092 0 

12,500 411 48 - 59 12.6 801 093 0 

With SKT link 2,000 202 22 50 - 1.0 801 094 0 

section and 3,150 257 26 66 - 2.0 801 095 0 

SKG master link 5,300 309 33 72 - 3.6 801 096 0 

Fig. 3 

8,000 364 40 82 - 6.2 801 097 0 

12,500 426 48 105 - 10.3 801 098 0 

With 2 SKG 2,000 273 - 50 - 1.2 801 099 0 

master links 3,150 350 - 66 - 2.4 801 104 0 

Fig. 4 

5,300 410 - 72 - 4.3 801 108 0 

8,000 487 - 82 - 7.2 801 111 0 

12,500 567 - 105 - 12.0 801 112 0 

With SKG master 2,000 264 - 50 27 1.3 801 113 0 

link and 

3,150 338 - 66 34 2.7 801 114 0 

SKN load hook 5,300 406 - 72 42 5.0 801 115 0 

Fig. 5 

8,000 477 - 82 49 8.7 801 116 0 

12,500 552 - 105 59 14.3 801 117 0 

The particular benefits of the insulated anti-twist guard 

• Welding on the suspended load - safe and economical with the insulated anti-twist guard. 

• The current flow between sling equipment and hoist is interrupted by the insulated anti-twist 

guard. Thus the crane rope and the crane electrics are protected from the high currents 

occurring during welding. 

• Personnel and material have optimum protection. 

GH / GHW clevis hook 

For lifting large stacks of sheet metal and large slabs. Use only in pairs. 

Recommended angle of inclination of sling: 30-45°. 


s b g d e B- 

No. 

[kg] [mm] link [kg] 

1,400 100 190 65 23 203 B8W 13 2.08 801 031 0 

2,500 150 254 100 30 300 B8W 16 5.4 801 032 0 

4,000 200 380 130 40 402 B8W 22 16.1 801 033 0 

5,300 300 500 195 50 592 B8W 26 31.5 801 034 0 

8,000 400 600 250 60 781 B8W 26 63.4 801 035 0 

06_08EN.FM

When working with different types 

of goods you need to keep an eye on 

the loads. Our robust load cells 

with integrated electronics will make 

your material handling still safer and 

more efficient. 

Weighing and 

measuring 

193

194 

CH 

Weighing and measuring 

HCB 

HUM 

HUS 

Load cells 

The practical small CH load cell offering a 

scale range up to 50 kg is always at hand. The 

built-in 100 cm tape measure is extremely 

useful. 

The compact HCB load cell offering a a scale 

range up to 200 kg is attached by means of the 

stainless steel snap hook included in the delivery, 

aperture: 15 mm. 

Technical features: 

• Data hold function: the weight display can 

be "frozen" by pressing the hold button for 

5 seconds. 

• Automatic switch-off function to save wear 

on the battery: the load cell switches off 

after 3 minutes without use 

• Stainless steel load hook, HCB model aperture: 

25 mm 

• LCD display, digit height 11 m (CH model), 

12 mm (HCB model) 

• Suspension eye made of nickel-coated 

forged steel (non-rotating) 

• Stainless steel version available on request 

Scale Model Display Dimensions Height Batteries Weight Item 

range 

graduation (W x D x H) incl. hook 

No. 

[kg] [g] [mm] [g] 

0 - 15 CH 15 K 20 20 90x30x175 270 9 V approx. 811 044 0 

0 - 50 CH 50 K 50 50 

block- 250 811 046 0 

0 - 50 CH 50 K 100 100 

battery 

811 047 0 

0 - 20 HCB 20 K 10 10 80x45x150 290 3x 1.5 V approx. 811 159 0 

0 - 20 HCB 20 K 50 50 

AA 400 811 048 0 

0 - 50 HCB 50 K 20 20 

811 160 0 

0 - 50 HCB 50 K 100 100 

811 049 0 

0 - 100 HCB 100 K 200 200 

811 050 0 

0 - 200 HCB 200 K 100 100 

811 161 0 

0 - 200 HCB 200 K 500 500 

811 051 0 

HCB load cell also available with fine display. Price on request. 

HUS load cells 

With infrared remote control. 

Lightweight load cell with illuminated LCD 

display. Digit height 23 mm. 

The range of the infrared remote control is 

approx. 2.5 m. All functions can be selected 

with the remote control. 

HUM load cells 

With radio remote control. 

Load cell with luminous LED digits, 25 mm high. 

The range of the radio remote control is 

approx. 25 m. All functions can be selected 

with the remote control. 


• Data hold function: the weight display is 

frozen by means of the HOLD button until 

another button is pressed 

• CAL calibrating programme to adjust the 

accuracy (on surcharge) 

• Built-in accumulator, approx. 120 hours 

operating time, LED charge display, charging 

time approx. 8 hours via mains adapter 

(9 V). Mains adapter for all countries available 

without surcharge 

• Hook with safety latch, nickel-plated forged 

steel, rotatable 



frozen by means of the HOLD button until 

another button is pressed 

• Tare clearance possible under load 

• Built-in accumulator, approx. 80 hours 

operating time. Charging time approx. 

8 hours via mains adapter (15 V). Mains 

adapter for all countries available without 

surcharge 

• Load hook made of nickel-coated forged 

steel on HUM 1000 and HUM 3000 (rotating) 

Scale Model Display Dimensions Height incl. Weight Item 

range 

graduation (W x D x H) hook and eye 

No. 

[kg] [g] [mm] [kg] 

0 - 60 HUS 60 K 20 20 150x140x150 350 

4 811 036 0 

0 - 150 HUS 150 K 50 50 

350 

4 811 037 0 

0 - 300 HUS 300 K 100 100 

350 

4 811 038 0 

0 - 600 HUS 600 K 200 200 

380 

4 811 039 0 

0 - 1,000 HUM 1000 K 500 500 210x228x180 620 17 811 040 0 

0 - 3,000 HUM 3000 K 1000 1000 210x228x180 650 18 811 041 0 

07_08EN.FM

07_08EN.FM 

N.B.: 

Calibratable version type MCW/MCWL up to 

6 t available on request 

STAHLplus Info _ In order to make our 

loads cells easier to use, the DIN 1502 TSG 

and SKW 02 loads cells come with infrared 

remote control as standard. 

Battery charger, rechargeable batteries 

and infrared remote control included in the 

scope of delivery! 

Electronic load cells conf. to DIN 102 TSG 

Compact, easy-to-use load cell with electronic 

dynamometer based on DIN 1502 TSL, 

however with integrated load hook mounted in 

ball bearing. Permissible overload: 20%. Safety 

factor: 5:1. 


These load cells cannot be calibrated. 

SKW 02 load cells, 2,000 - 20,000 kg 

This electronic load cell quickly and 

accurately determines weight during crane 

operation. 

The large-format display ensures the weight is 

easy to read off. 

The suspension eye is suitable for load hooks 

conforming to DIN 15401. The safety hook 

features a universal joint suspension. 

These load cells cannot be calibrated. 


Hydraulic bent-lever balance 

type HZKW up to 85 t available 

on request. 


• Accurate to ± 0.1% safe working load 

• Electronic strain gauge made of high-alloy 

steel 

• Functions: tare clearance, peak value and 

selection of measuring unit (kg, daN, Lb, ton) 

• 5-digit LED display with 2 brightness 

settings, height 25 mm 

• Rechargeable battery for approx. 36 hours 

continuous operation, charger 

• Automatic stand-by and switch-off facility 


• Operating temperature range -10° to +55°C 

• Housing made of fibreglass reinforced 

nylon, suitable for aggressive ambiences 

• The radio version is equipped with a 

read-out, the weighing data are transmitted 

without cables 

Scale range Display graduation Height A Weight Standard Radio 

Item 

Item 

[kg] [kg] [mm] [kg] No. 

No. 

0 - 500 

0.2 

330 

2.0 811 096 0 

811 156 0 

0 - 1,000 0.5 

330 

2.5 811 097 0 

811 157 0 

0 - 2,000 1.0 

360 

3.0 811 098 0 

811 158 0 

Read-out for radio version 

Remote control Charger 


• Accurate to ± 0.1% safe working load 

• Tare range = scale measuring range 

• Operating temperature range -10 to +55°C 

• Operating time per charge approx. 36 hours 

(standard operation) 

• LED display, digit height 25 mm, red 



• The radio version is equipped with a 

read-out, the weighing data are transmitted 

without cables 

Scale Display 

Dimensions Weight* Standard Radio 

range graduation A B C D E F 

Item 

Item 

[kg] [kg] [mm] [kg] 

No. 

No. 

0 - 2,000 1 206 68 166 306 25 459 4.2 811 010 0 

811 152 0 

0 - 5,000 2 224 78 166 360 34 548 9.9 811 012 0 

811 153 0 

0 - 10,000 5 272 98 188 462 49 744 21.5 811 014 0 

811 154 0 

0 - 20,000 10 370 98 257 665 70 1085 52.0 811 016 0 

811 155 0 

* Weight including shackle and load hook 

195

196 


HTS load cells 

Crane load cell for inudstrial use with integrated 

ball-bearing load hook. 


The range of the infrared remote control is 

approx. 15 m. All functions can be selected. 

B 

ha031v 

A 

C D 

TKZ and TZF load indicators 

Mechanical load indicator with electronic LCD 

display, 20.5 mm high. 

Can be set to "0" and switched from net to 

gross load via a keypad. 

The scope of delivery includes the load 

indicator, the mains charger (3 V, 700 mA) and 

a storage box. 

Suitable shackles or load hooks for attaching 

the load directly can be seen from the table. 

Scale Display 

Dimensions Weight Load inidcator 

range gradua- 

* 

TKZ 

tion A ØC D J K L N Q Item 

[kg] [kg] [mm] [kg] No. 

0 - 2,500 1 247 22 179 610 34 38 15 315 2.8 811 104 0 

0 - 5,000 1 250 27 180 610 50 44 32 350 3.4 811 105 0 

0 - 10,000 10 325 48 213 690 105 95 50 535 4.4 811 106 0 

0 - 20,000 10 378 55 233 780 92 95 70 562 7.6 811 107 0 

0 - 35,000 10 405 64 245 1000 130 114 110 665 10 811 108 0 

0 - 50,000 10 450 76 264 1170 140 132 115 730 25 811 109 0 

0 - 100,000 50 640 100 380 - 300 238 - 1240 41 811 110 0 

* Without shackle and hook 

Load indicator 

TZF 

Item 

No. 

811 125 0 

811 126 0 

811 127 0 

811 128 0 

811 129 0 

811 130 0 

- 



"frozen" by a pressing the button twice until 

the "C" button is pressed 

• Integrated rechargeable battery with 

charge display. Operating time approx. 

150 hours, charging time approx. 15 hours 

(mains adapter or charger) 

• LED display with 2 illumination levels, height 

of digits 25 mm (< 1500 kg), 30 mm (> 3000 kg) 

• Standby function after 5 minutes 

• Display: gross, tare, net 

• Functions: tare, cumulative memory, 

highest value, 10 free memory locations 

N.B.: The standard version cannot be 

calibrated. Version which can be calibrated 

available on request (e.g.: HTS 3T1 IPM). 

Scale Model Display Minimum Case 

Dimensions Weight Standard version Calibrated version 

range 

graduation load (W x D x H) A B C D Item 

Item 

[kg] [kg] [kg] [mm] [mm] [kg] No. 

No. 

0 - 150 HTS 150K50 IP 0.05 1 200x204x160 45 30 435 480 14 811 138 0 

811 145 0 

0 - 300 HTS 300K100 IP 0.1 2 

45 30 435 480 14 811 139 0 

811 146 0 

0 - 600 HTS 600K200 IP 0.2 4 

45 30 435 480 14 811 140 0 

811 147 0 

0 - 1,500 HTS 1.5T0.5 IP 0.5 10 

60 28 443 505 14 811 141 0 

811 148 0 

0 - 3,000 HTS 3T1 IP 1 20 279x254x381 90 45 735 815 40 * 811 142 0 

811 149 0 

0 - 6,000 HTS 6T2 IP 2 40 

100 67 900 1040 65 * 811 143 0 

811 150 0 

0 - 10,000 HTS 10T5 IP 5 100 

100 67 900 1040 65 * 811 144 0 

811 151 0 

Please note dimensions of balance when ordering! HTS 3 - 10 t are delivered by haulier. 


• Accurate to ±0.2% of rated load 

• Operating time at 20°C: approx. 200 working 

hours 

• Display: LCD, 20.5 mm high, 4 1/2 figure 

• Operating temperature range -10° to +50° C, 

100% rated load value 

• Overload warning: value displayed flashes 

• Integrated accumulator with charge warning 


• TZF with radio transmission and RS 232 

interface. Weighing data can be read from 

the remote control 

Item 

No. 

811 111 0 

811 112 0 

811 113 0 

811 114 0 

811 115 0 

811 116 0 

811 117 0 

Shackle Hook 

Item 

No. 

811 118 0 

811 119 0 

811 120 0 

811 121 0 

811 122 0 

811 123 0 

- 

07_08EN.FM

07_08EN.FM 

LK digital load cells 

The LK digital load cells are designed to cope 

with tough industrial operating conditions. 

Accuracy class II, EC design approval to 

PTB-OIML R 76, up to 2500 calibration values. 

Model LKe is calibrated, model LK cannot be 

calibrated. 


• Extreme accuracy to 0.03% of end reading 

• Incremental strain gauge load cell, 

stainless steel design 

• Digital display: LED 7-segment, 1 display 

cycle per second, digit height 50 mm, red 

• Switches off automatically 

• Ram guard fitted as standed 

• Voltage supply: 12 V maintenance-free 

rechargeable batteries 

• Operating temperature range -20°C to 

+90°C 

• Optional / retrofittable: radio transfer of 

weighing data 

• Compound load cell for 2 hoists on request 

Calibration 

not possible 

Scale 

range 

Display 

graduation 

LKe/LK 1-5 LKe/LK 10 

Model Deadweight Item 

No. 


0 - 1,000 

0 - 2,000 

0 - 5,000 

0 - 10,000 

0.5 

1.0 

2.0 

5.0 

LK 1 

LK 2 

LK 5 

LK 10 

50 

50 

50 

64 

811 099 0 

811 100 0 

811 101 0 

811 102 0 

Calibrated 0 - 1,000 

0.5 

LKe 1 

50 811 020 0 

0 - 2,000 

1.0 

LKe 2 

50 811 021 0 

0 - 5,000 

2.0 

LKe 5 

50 811 022 0 

0 - 10,000 

5.0 

LKe 10 

64 811 023 0 

LKe 1-2: calibrated for 2 years from delivery date / LKE 5-10: calibrated for 3 years from delivery date 

197

198 


STAHLplus Info _ Other 

types of load cell on 

request. 

Off-standard designs on request 

LDN calibrated digital load cell 

This calibrated digital load cell is specially 

designed for industrial use. 

Accuracy class III with EC design approval in 

acc. with PTB-OIML R76 up to 2500 calibration 

values. 

Optional/retrofittable: radio transmission of 

weighing data to additional equipment. 

3 year warranty on accuracy and function of 

the load cell. 

LDN 0,5 - 2 LDN 5 LDN 10 

(LDN 20) 


• Large 40 mm 7-segment LED display, easily 

legible from a distance of at least 35 m. 

• Extreme accuracy to 0.04% of end reading 

(note display steps) 

• Measuring principle: incremental strain 

gauge load cell 

• Fast readings 

• Switches off automatically 

• Including ram guard for 10 t / 20 t 

(0.5 t to 5 t without ram guard) 

• Voltage supply: 6 V maintenance-free 

rechargeable batteries, for at least 80 hours’ 

operation 


Scale range Model Display graduation Weight Item 


No. 

0 - 500 

LDN 0,5 

0.2 

12 811 131 0 

0 - 1,000 

LDN 1 

0.5 

12 811 132 0 

0 - 2,000 

LDN 2 

1.0 

12 811 133 0 

0 - 5,000 

LDN 5 

2.0 

18 811 134 0 

0 - 10,000 

LDN 10 

5.0 

35 811 135 0 

0 - 20,000 

LDN 20 

10.0 

48.5 811 136 0 

LDN 0,5 - LDN 2 calibrated for 2 years from delivery date, LDN 5 - LDN 20 for 3 years. 

STAHLplus Info _ Please 

state size of crane load hook 

when ordering. You will find 

a summary of load hooks in 

acc. with DIN 15400 on 

page 140. 

07_08EN.FM

STAHLplus material conveying 

equipment is ideal whenever loads 

need to be transported between 

locations. Whether the goods are 

small or large, it goes without saying 

that we will provide an economical 

and convenient solution. 

Material conveying 

equipment 

199

200 

MKS 1500 P DW 

MKS 500 DW-S 

Material conveying equipment 

Lb 

La 

L 

S1 

S 

MKS 500 PDW 

MKS 1000 PDW 

MKS 1500 PDW 

MKS 2000 PDW 

folded 

MKS...P DW workshop crane, collapsible 

Collapsible and thus suitable for occasional use. 


• Parallel chassis for fitting round Euro pallets 

• Telescopic jib adjustable to 4 positions 

• Fast lifting thanks to double-action hydraulic pump 

• Robust hydraulics, lowering can be precisely adjusted 

• Ball bearing steered wheels and large wheels for easy manoeuvring. 

All wheels with foot protection 

• Models 1500 and 2000 with pushbar and tandem wheels 

Model MKS 500 MKS 1000 MKS 1500 MKS 2000 

PDW PDW PDW PDW 

Safe working load [kg] / 

500 / 1030 1,000 / 1085 1,500 / 1130 2,000 / 1310 

at jib length [mm] 

420 / 1130 830 / 1210 1,250 / 1330 1,650 / 1520 

360 / 1220 670 / 1335 1,000 / 1530 1,400 / 1720 

300 / 1320 500 / 1460 750 / 1730 1,200 / 1920 

La / Lb jib length 

[mm] 1030-1320 1085-1460 1130-1730 1310-1920 

S max. lifting height [mm] 2400 2450 3100 3150 

S1 lowest lifting height [mm] 570 210 300 300 

L chassis length 

[mm] 1250 1742 2200 2200 

B1 / B chassis width [mm] 830 / 970 1000 / 1140 1000 / 1190 1000 / 1190 

Weight [kg] 73 121 230 250 

Item No. 

Unit price 

810 841 0 810 842 0 810 843 0 810 844 0 

B1 

B 

MKS...DW-S workshop crane, folding 

Can be folded up in no time, thus space-saving and particularly 

suitable for occasional use. 


• Spread chassis 

• Telescopic jib adjustable to 4 positions 

• Fast lifting thanks to double-action hydraulic pump 

• Robust hydraulics, lowering can be precisely adjusted 

• Ball bearing steered wheels and large wheels for easy manoeuvring. 

All wheels with foot protection 

Model MKS 500 DW-S MKS 1000 DW-S 

Safe working load [kg] / 

at jib length [mm] 

La / Lb jib length 

S max. lifting height 

S1 lowest lifting height 

L chassis length 

B1 / B chassis width 

MKS 500 DW-S 

MKS 1000 DW-S 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

500 / 950 

420 / 1070 

360 / 1190 

300 / 1310 

950-1310 

2100 

310 

1420 

940 / 1095 

1,000 / 1090 

830 / 1210 

670 / 1330 

500 / 1450 

1090-1450 

2500 

300 

1720 

790 / 950 

Weight [kg] 73 108 

Item No. 810 845 0 810 846 0 

Unit price 

ha007v 

B1 

B 

08_08EN.FM

08_08EN.FM 

SHB industrial crane 

STAHLplus Info _ We would be pleased to quote you 

battery-powered devices and off-standard solutions 

outside our standard range. Just copy page 203 and 

answer the questions. We will work out a crane just 

for you. 

New! with mechanical travel positionerer! 

Extremely robust and long-lasting. Able to withstand constant use in a 

production plant. 

SHB 2000FaPo 

SHB 1000FaPo 

New 

SITI small counterbalanced crane 

The SITI small counterbalanced crane is impressive with the wide free 

working range in front of the wheels. Ideal for working in inaccessible 

places or with loads it cannot travel under or around. 


• All models with 1500 mm wheelbase and counterbalance filling 

• Easy lifting with double hydraulic pump with extra long pump handle 

• Precise lowering to the millimetre by means of drain valve 

• Travel by pulling or pushing on the steering handle, can also be 

moved under load. Steering radius approx. 180° 

• Automatic braking by raising the steering handle 

• Collapsible: pillar, hydraulics and jib are folded down onto the 

chassis by removing the pins 

• Modern design 

• Foot protection 

• Tested with 125% overload 

Model SITI 250 N SITI 350 N SITI 500 N 

Max. safe working load 

for jib length 925 mm 





Max. lifting height 

Overall width 

Chassis length (wheelbase) 

Overall length 

Working range in front of hydraulics 

Height when folded, without steering handle 

4 plastic wheels 

[kg] 250 

165 

120 

95 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

80 

2800 

800 

1500 

1775 

465-1625 

1020 

Ø150 

350 

230 

170 

135 

110 

2800 

800 

1500 

1775 

465-1625 

1020 

Ø150 

500 

360 

265 

210 

175 

2800 

800 

1500 

1775 

465-1625 

1020 

Ø150 

Weight incl. counterbalance [kg] 400 435 470 

Item No. 810 496 0 810 497 0 810 498 0 

Unit price 


• Parallel chassis for moving around Europallets and box pallets 

• Fast-acting 4-speed precision pump: fast lifting without load, easy 

lifting with load 

• The load can be held for days in any position 

• Jib adjustable to 13 positions 

• Precise lowering to the millimetre by means of drain valve 

• Travel by pulling or pushing on the steering handle, can also be moved 

under load. Steering radius approx. 180°. The mechanical travel drive 

helps when being moved by a single person even under full load. 

Forwards and backwards with millimetre accuracy. 

• Good running characteristics 

Model SHB .... 1000FaPo 2000FaPo 3000FaPo 

S.W.L. max. kg / with pins set in front of 

hydraulics mm) 

Lifting height max./min. 

Chassis width outside/inside 

Overall height 

Chassis length with wheels and handle 

Working range in front of wheels 

Plastic wheels, 4 pcs 

I 

II 

III 

IV 

V 

VI 

VII 

VIII 

IX 

X 

XI 

XII 

XIII 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

[mm] 

1,000/700 

820/850 

660/1000 

460/1150 

355/1300 

280/1450 

240/1600 

180/1750 

150/1930 

130/2030 

150/1900 

100/2350 

90/2500 

3750/800 

970/830 

1625 

2000 

0-1488 

Ø125/200 

2,000/1100 

1,600/1275 

1,200/1450 

800/1625 

600/1800 

450/1975 

400/2150 

300/2325 

250/2500 

220/2675 

200/2850 

170/3025 

155/3200 

4900/500 

1250/1050 

2000 

2450 

0-1730 

Ø200 

3,000/1100 

2,700/1275 

1,900/1450 

1,350/1625 

1,000/1800 

830/1975 

700/2150 

500/2325 

400/2500 

330/2675 

270/2850 

230/3025 

200/3200 

4900/500 

1600/1400 

2000 

2500 

0-1635 

Ø250 

Weight [kg] 310 550 810 

Item No. 810 802 0 810 803 0 810 804 0 

Unit price 

201

202 



Off-standard solutions with workshop cranes 

Workshop cranes for off-standard tasks and requirements 

Tell us what your task is - we will advise you and together we will work 

out the optimum solution! 

Please note also our enquiry sheet on page 203. 

Counterbalanced crane (500 kg S.W.L.) with winch for vertical lift. 

Special characteristic: extreme retraction to permit transportation in a lift 

Absolutely off-standard solution for removing and adjusting car engines in an 

R&D department. Pillar height can be adjusted electrically, telescopic jib, slewing, folding, 

tray can be rotated, extremely narrow 

Industrial crane (500 kg S.W.L.) with winch and 270° slewing range for replacing tools in 

narrow aisles 

Industrial crane with 1,500 kg S.W.L. and 360° slewing range 

08_08EN.FM

08_08EN.FM 

Fax enquiry for workshop cranes 

If you are unable to solve your particular transport task 

with the workshop cranes illustrated here we can still 

help you find the right solution. 

Photocopy this page and fill in the details and 

dimensions you require. 

Then simply fax it back to us and we’ll immediately prepare 

a quote! 

Sketch A 

Sketch B 

Please answer the following questions: 

Simply copy - fill in - fax back 

The most important question: 

Is it possible to move (drive) under or around the load? � Yes � No 

(if "yes" please enter the required dimensions in sketch A, 

if "no" enter the dimensions in sketch B). 

� What safe working load is required? ...........................................kg 

� To what height do you need to lift this load 

(= safe working load)? .........................................mm 

� At what working range? .........................................mm 

What is the inner chassis width? .........................................mm 

What is the outer chassis width? .........................................mm 

What passage width do you have available? ........................................... m 

What is the nature of the floor? � rough � smooth 

� indoors � assembly bay 

Should the crane also be able to swivel? � Yes � 90° 

� 180° 

� 270° 

� 360° 

Description of application: 

............................................................................................................................. 

............................................................................................................................. 

............................................................................................................................. 

............................................................................................................................. 

............................................................................................................................. 

............................................................................................................................. 

............................................................................................................................. 

............................................................................................................................. 

............................................................................................................................. 


................................................................................................................................ 

Company 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 


................................................................................................................................................................................................. 


................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Who is to be contacted if there are questions? 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 


................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

Telephone Fax 

................................................................................................................................................................................................. 

203

204 


An excerpt from our supply programme 

This excerpt illustrates a selection of material conveying and handling 

equipment and lifting systems. 

Are you interested! 

Then just ask us! 

08_08EN.FM

Our hydraulic products are indispensable 

aids wherever heavy loads 

need to be lifted, levelled off, 

equalised, inserted or balanced. 

Hydraulics 

205

206 

Hydraulics 


This excerpt illustrates a selection of hydraulic products. 



09_08EN.FM

Our fork-lift truck attachments turn 

every fork-lift truck into a multifunctional 

appliance – everything is 

possible from dump container to 

working platform. And transporting 

production waste or hazardous 

materials is no problem. 

Fork-lift truck 

attachments 

207

208 

Fork-lift truck attachments 

Model MB-D, in compliance with accident prevention regulations 

Model MB-F: folding design 

Model MB-K IV 

MB-K working platforms 

MB/MB-F working platforms 

The tried and tested crane working platform 


• 2 persons permissible 

• Work load limit 300 kg 

• Fork sleeves with anti-slip device 

• Sling supplied as standard 

• Surface spray painted, 

blue RAL 5012 

orange RAL 2000 

Accessories 

• 2 steered + 2 fixed polyamide wheels 

Ø180 mm, one steered wheel with parking 

brake, height 220 mm. 

Item No.: 818 174 0 

• Tool rest 745 x 150 x 100 mm 

Item No.: 818 342 0 

MB working platforms are tested and approved in compliance with 

accident prevention regulations in various countries (MB-D, MB-CH, 

MB-A, MB-NL). They provide maximum safety for repair and 

maintenance work. 

The MB-F folding working platform is ready for use in next to no time. 

It takes up very little space when it is not in use. 


• 2 persons permissible 

• Work load limit 300 kg 

• Fork sleeves with anti-slip device 

• Model MB-F: folding design, headroom when folded: 300 m 

• Surface spray painted blue, RAL 5012 (orange, RAL 2000) 

• Protective grating on truck side 

Accessories 

• 2 steered + 2 fixed polyamide wheels Ø180 mm, one steered wheel 

with parking brake, height 220 mm. Item No.: 818 174 0 

• For MB-F: tool rest 745 x 150 x 100 mm (standard on MB). 

Item No.: 818 342 0 

Model Outside dimensions Floor Weight Item 

L x W x H area 

No. 

[mm] [kg] 

MB-D 1115x1200x1890 800x1200 120 818 027 0 

MB-D/L 1290x 800x1890 1200x800 120 818 340 0 

MB-CH 1115x1200x2090 800x1200 125 818 028 0 

MB-CH/L 1290x1000x2090 1200x800 125 818 341 0 

MB-A 1115x1200x2090 800x1200 132 818 029 0 

MB-NL 1115x1200x1890 800x1200 130 818 037 0 

MB-F 1090x1200x1890 1000x1200 120 818 039 0 

Please indicate colour when ordering! 

Inside dimensions of fork sleeves 

Model A B 

[mm] 

C 

MB-D, MB-CH, MB-A, MB-NL, MB-F 600 200 80 

MB-D/L 160 200 80 

MB-CH/L 160 220 85 

Aufnahme mit Vierstrangkette 

4-leg sling attachment 

Inside dimensions of fork sleeves 

Model Outside dimensions Floor Attachments for Weight Item 

L x W x H 

area 

No. 

[mm] [kg] 

MB-K IV 800x1200x2250 800x1200 Fork-lift truck + crane 200 818 038 0 


MB-K 

A B C 

[mm] 

600 200 80 

10_08EN.FM

10_08EN.FM 

Model FLEX-HK with crank handle 

Liftomat model L 

Flex drum tipper 

Controlled drum emptying with a range of rotation of up to 270°. 

Transporting, controlled emptying, turning and setting down steel and plastic drums 

of 60-220 l capacity, canisters and refuse containers of 120/240 l capacity 


• Sturdy frame with fork sleeves 

• Prism with tenter-belt and double worm gear 

• With crank handle or endless chain 

• Can be secured to prevent slipping 

• Safe working load 300 kg 

• 360° range of rotation 

• Pick-up attachments for fork-lift truck, wheel loader and crane 

• Spray painted blue, RAL 5012 (orange, 

RAL 2000) or hot-dip galvanised to EN ISO 1461 

• Explosion-protected version on request 


• For 200 l steel and plastic drums such as rolling hoop and tension ring drums, plastic drums 

with lids, L-ring drums etc. 

• Model L/E: electrohydraulic design complete with maintenance-free 12 V/88 Ah battery and 

charger for 230 V connection 

• Model L/M: hydraulic design with hand pump 

• 2 steered + 2 fixed wheels made of solid rubber, both steered wheels with parking brake 

• Safe pick-up ensured by clamp at front and spindle holder at top 

• With crank handle or endless chain on a self-braking worm gear 

• Spray painted orange, RAL 2000 

• Explosion-protected design on request 

Model Version Safe work- per Lifting Empty. Range of Steer.- Fixed- Wt. Item 

ing load stroke height height rotation wheel-Ø 

No. 

[kg] [mm] [degree] [mm] [kg] 

L/M 1300 Hydraulic 350 18 1100 1300 270 Ø175 Ø200 192 818 203 0 

L/E 1300 Electrohydraulic 

350 - 1100 1300 270 Ø175 Ø200 220 818 204 0 

FHR drum jack roller 

For lifting and transporting drums safely. 

Model FLEX-K with endless chain on crane 

Model Safe Tipping Outside Fork Fork Weight Spray painted Galvanised 

working 

FLEX-.. load 

with dimensions 

L x W x H 

spacing crosssection 

Item 

No. 

Item 

No. 


HK 300 Crank handle 1000x1000x430 650 150x60 70 818 199 0 818 200 0 

K 300 Chain 1000x1000x430 650 150x60 75 818 201 0 818 202 0 



• Regardless of drum diameter and height, the gripper picks up nearly all steel and plastic 

drums, including open drums, safely at the rim 

• Suitable for charging collection troughs, hazardous materials depots, drum stacking pallets, 

etc. 

• Rubber guard to avoid damage to drums 

• Steered wheels Ø180, fixed wheels Ø80 mm 

• Spray painted orange, RAL 2000 

• Explosion-protected version on request 

Model Safe work- Length Width Height Lifting Weight Item 


Outside Inside 

height 

No. 


FHR 600 G 300 950 1125 850 1310 600 94 818 206 0 

Model L/E electro-hydraul. operated lift, tipping by crank handle 

Model FHR 600 G 

209

210 

Fork-lift truck attachments 


This excerpt illustrates a selection of fork-lift 

truck attachments and storage systems 



10_08EN.FM

Information 

Slings 

Chain slings, chain sling components, 

endless chain slings, chain sling accessories, 

rope slings, round and web slings, wear protectors, chain slings 

forestry application, chain slings for hot dip galvanising plants, 

nsion systems, sling rack Sling accessories Weld-on hooks, 

ansport slingeye bolts, lifting eye nuts, transport ring, carbine hooks, 

anti-twist guard, clevis hook, sling attachment points Weighing and 

oad cells, calibrated load cells, load indicators, digital load cells Material 

ipment KranTrolleys, scissor-type lifting tables, flat lifting tables, pallet lifting 

-type pallet liftingtrucks, machinery lifters, shifting skates, workshop cranes 

raulic cylinders, hydraulic pumps, toe jacks, hydraulic lifters, spreaders, 

ruck attachments Dump and stacking dump containers, working platforms, hinged 

escopic crane jibs, Big Bag transport equipment, gas cylinder cabinets, collection 

ransport equipment Crane technology Crane systems, jib cranes, gantry and 

small crane technology, radio remote controls, runway endstops,suspension, 

ndling equipment, wheel blocks Hoists Chain hoists, wire rope hoists, winch, 

push trolleys, reel-type trolleys,adjustable beam clamps, cable winches, 

ope sheaves, balancers, cable reeling drums, cable pullers Explosion protec- 

lectric chain hoists, Ex wire rope hoists, Ex crane technology, Ex crane 

nents, Ex manual chain hoists, Ex pneumatic chain hoists, Ex crane load 

s, Ex manual cranes, Ex manual winches, Ex pneumatic winches, 

Ex balancers, Ex mini-manipulator, Ex small crane systems Load 

suspensionequipment Grabs, clamps, barrel tongs, suc- 

211

212 

Information 

Glossary 

A 

Accident prevention regulations: 

Collection of accident prevention regulations 

of the main employers’ liability 

insurance association. 

Air gap: 

Non-magnetic gap between the pole surface 

of a lifting magnet and the workpiece. 

This gap forms a resistance in the magnetic 

circuit and reduces the number of 

force lines. 

Ambient influences: 

Ambient influences, such as e.g. temperature 

variations, high humidity and substances 

promoting corrosion (e.g. acidic 

vapours) may have a detrimental effect 

on the service life and safe working load 

of a sling. 

Anti-derail device: 

Safety device on trolleys to prevent the 

trolley and thus the load falling if a wheel 

should break. 

Attachment method: 

Different techniques (direct, looped, laid 

around) for using slings to lift loads. 

B 

Bottom hook block: 

Multi-fall suspension of a suspension element 

(rope, chain…), usually via sheaves 

or chain sprockets with a load hook for 

suspending the load. 

Breaking load: 

The theoretical breaking load comprises 

the nominal strength of the selected 

material and the individual load-bearing 

cross-sections. 

C 

Cable lay rope: 

Cable lay ropes are highly flexible rope 

slings consisting of several stranded ropes. 

Cable sling: 

Cable slings are made up of several highly 

flexible stranded cable cores. 

CE: 

Symbol indicating the conformity of a product 

to EC Machinery Directives. 

CEN: 

Communauté Européenne Normative, 

European Standards Institute. 

Coating (textile): 

Surface sealing of webbing to improve 

resistance to abrasion or cutting; mainly 

with polyurethane. 

Coil: 

Sheet metal wound in the form of a hollow 

cylinder. 

Collecting capacity: 

A collection device (collection trough) 

must be able to hold 10% of the total quantity 

stored, however at least the contents 

of the largest container stored in it. National 

regulations may specify differently. 

Colour coding: 

Web slings and round slings conforming to 

DIN 61360 (EN 1492) are identified with a 

Europe-wide standardised colour code for 

faster recognition of the safe working load 

(e.g. violet = 1000 kg). 

Corrosion protection: 

Corrosion protection measures contribute 

to improving the actual service life of 

a piece of material handling equipment. 

The base material is protected by a 

high grade coating (galvanised, powdercoated…).

Crack testing: 

Chain slings conforming to EN 818 must be 

examined as part of every third 

operational safety test to ensure they are 

free of cracks. This crack test must 

be documented. 

Cross lay: 

A stranded rope in which the wires in the 

outer strands run in the opposite direction 

to the direction of lay of the strands in 

the rope. 

D 

daN: 

Designation of an occurring force 

(decanewton). 1 daN = 10 N corresponds 

approximately to the force generated by 

a suspended load of 1 kg. The precise 

conversion factor between mass and force 

is 9.80665. 

Danger zone: 

Danger zones are working areas that must 

be identified as such, in which a source of 

danger poses a risk to life and limb as well 

as property. In compliance with accident 

prevention regulations, the boundaries of 

the zones must be delimited with safety, 

warning and direction signs. Once a year 

companies must correspondingly instruct 

the personnel employed in such zones. 

Declaration of conformity: 

The manufacturer or his agent established 

in the Community must issue en EC declaration 

of conformity for each machine or 

safety component manufactured, to certify 

that the machines and safety components 

are in accordance with the stipulations of 

the EC Machinery Directive. 

DIN: 

Deutsches Institut für Normung, 

German Standards Institute. 


Direct lashing: 

Lashing method in which the lashing equipment 

is attached directly to rigid parts of 

the load or attachment points provided for 

this purpose. 

Dynamic friction coefficient: 

Coefficient for the friction between the 

load and the contact surface of the vehicle 

during movement of the load (previously 

sliding friction coefficient). 

E 

Elasticity: 

Ability of a material to expand to its apparent 

yielding point under load and spring 

back without loss in strength. 

Expansion: 

Ability of a material to behave elastically 

under load without loss in strength. On 

exceeding the elastic expansion range, 

the material can no longer assume its 

original condition and remains plastically 

deformed. 

Explosion protection: 

Electrical systems in atmospheres with 

easily ignitable gas-air mixtures must be 

manufactured and tested in accordance 

with a special explosion protection principle. 

The basis principle of explosion protection 

is based on flameproof encapsulation 

of the electrical switchgear from the 

outer, easily ignitable atmosphere such 

that a switching spark or an explosion 

pressure wave cannot emerge from the 

encapsulated explosion-protected switchgear. 

F 

from A--F 

Fibre core: 

Fibre cores are stranded natural or synthetic 

fibre yarns and form the basis for manufacturing 

wire ropes. 

Finishing: 

Chemical surface treatment of textiles to 

protect them from abrasion and damp. 

Fitting: 

High-tensile terminal connection which 

can be laid on the hoist hook (web slings 

with terminal fittings). 

Fixed end: 

The fixed end of a lashing strap consists 

of belt, tensioning and connecting element 

(ratchet and hook). 

Flemish eye: 

The Flemish eye conforming to DIN 3095 

is a positive rope end link consisting 

of wire ropes with steel core and conical 

steel pressed clamp. 

Freewheeling: 

Permits the unloaded hoist chain to be 

pulled through the applicance in both 

directions (lifting and lowering) to position 

the hook. 

Fzul: 

Permissible lashing force (LC). 

213

214 

Information 

Glossary 

G 

Grade: 

Materials for round steel chains are 

classed according to grade indicating the 

actual rated tensile stress in abbreviated 

form (e.g. Grade 8 corresponds to a material 

with a tensile strength of 800 N/mm). 

Grommet: 

A cable lay grommet is an endlessly laid 

rope sling consisting of one or two continuous 

ropes forming a bond of six ropes 

around a rope core. The rope ends are 

pushed into the core so that the insertion 

point and the splice point are on opposite 

sides. The splice point marked in red must 

not be loaded over hooks or edges as the 

rope ends might push out of the rope bond. 

GS: 

Geprüfte Sicherheit. Tested safety. Safety 

tested by a neutral testing institute (TÜV- 

CERT, technical committees of employers’ 

liability insurance associations). 

H 

Hardening and tempering: 

Hardening and tempering is a heat treatment 

process serving the purpose of 

improving material properties with regard 

to tensile stress. 

Hoist: 

A machine serving to lift and lower freely 

suspended (not guided) loads. This 

machine can be manually, electrically or 

pneumatically driven. 

Hoisting speed: 

The speed with which the hoist hook with 

the load moves upwards. 

I 

Identification tag (label): 

Marking conforming to standards showing 

permissible safe working load(s) and other 

product-specific information for slings 

and lashing equipment... Must be present 

and easily legible. 

Inclination angle: 

Inclination angles occur between the loadbearing 

legs of sling tackle and an imaginary 

vertical line through the attachment 

points on the load to be transported. They 

serve as the basis for calculating the permissible 

safe working load of slings. 

Initial stressing force: 

To prevent a load slipping on the cargo 

area of a vehicle lashing straps must 

fix the load to the cargo area with defined 

forces. 

Initial stressing force of lashing 

equipment: 

Stressing force generated in lashing equipment 

by means of a tensioning device. 

Initial stressing force (normed) STF: 

Residual force after the handle of 

the tensioning device has been released. 

This value is specified on the lashing 

equipment. 

Inox: 

Brand name for stainless steel; also a 

colloquial designation for stainless steel 

(generic name). 

Insulation: 

An example of electrical insulation is 

the separating layer between the currentcarrying 

electric motor winding and a 

machine housing. 

IP rating: 

This rating describes the protection class 

and group for machine housings and is 

made up of code digits corresponding to 

requirements with regard to contact protection, 

the penetration of dust, moisture 

and water (e.g. IP 54: 1st digit “5” stands 

for dust-protected, 2nd digit “4” stands for 

splash-water protected). 

ISO: 

International Security Organisation. 

L 

Lashing down: 

Lashing method in which the friction force 

is increased by initial stressing forces 

in the lashing equipment in addition to the 

weight of the load. This method of securing 

loads is non-positive. Due to the number 

of parameters involved (initial stressing 

force, sliding friction coefficient, inclination 

angle), it is difficult to calculate. 

Lashing force LC: 

Maximum force in direct pull which lashing 

equipment must withstand in use. 

Lashing point: 

Device on a road vehicle to which lashing 

equipment can be directly attached. 

A lashing point may be in the form of e.g. 

an oval link, hook, eye, lashing rail. 

LC: 

See lashing force.

Loader: 

The man at the load responsible for attaching 

it correctly. Is one of a team together 

with the crane operator and directs him if 

necessary using standardised hand signals. 

In the case of floor-controlled cranes, 

the two jobs are usually performed by a 

single person. 

Loading: 

Attaching the load to the crane or hoist 

hook. 

Load suspension equipment: 

Devices for suspending loads, e.g. lifting 

clamps, tongs, grabs and lifting beams. 

Long lay: 

A stranded rope in which the wires in the 

outer strands run in the same direction 

as the strand in the rope. 

Loose end: 

The loose end of a lashing strap consists 

of the strap and a connecting element. 

Low-tension (low-torsion): 

A wire rope is low-tension if its strands 

and wires project from the rope body 

only slightly or not at all. The individual 

wires are pre-shaped and thus lie in 

the rope body practically without tension. 

Low-torsion: 

See low-tension. 

Low-twisting: 

Wire ropes are considered to be low-twisting 

when they rotate only slightly about 

their own longitudinal axis on application 

of an arbitrary tensile force acting on the 

rope axis. 

Accessories direct from the hoist and crane manufacturer 

M 

Magnetic field: 

Occurs at the pole surfaces when the 

lifting magnet is switched on. 

Magnetic force lines: 

Imaginary lines between the north and 

south poles of a magnet. Together 

they form the magnetic field and flow 

through the workpiece. The greater 

the number of force lines, the greater the 

clamping force. 

Mechanism group: 

The classification of a hoist in a mechanism 

group in accordance with FEM 

is calculated from the average operating 

time, the load and the hoisting path per 

day and specifies the maximum operating 

time under full load. 

N 

Niro: 

Stainless steel. 

Non-twisting: 

Wire ropes are considered to be nontwisting 

when they do not rotate about 

their own longitudinal axis on application 

of an arbitrary tensile force acting on 

the rope axis. 

O 

Operating coefficient: 

Arithmetical ratio between the maximum 

load supported and the lifting capacity 

(safety factor). 

P 

from G--P 

Polyamide (PA): 

Polyamide synthetic fibres (nylon, perlon) 

are characterised by a high degree 

of expansion under load and offer good 

resistance to alkalinen solutions. 

The high moisture absorption rate results 

in a reduction of the safe working load. 

Polyester (PES): 

Fibres made of polyester (Hostalen, Diolen) 

have a linear force-expansion ratio and 

offer good resistance to acids. 

Powder-coating: 

High-quality surface treatment. Colour 

pigments are transferred to the surface in 

powder form by means of electrostatics. 

Pretension: 

To prevent a load slipping on the cargo 

area of a vehicle lashing straps must 

fix the load to the cargo area with defined 

forces. 

PuR coatings: 

Polyurethane coatings on round woven 

fabric hoses. They serve as abrasion 

protection facilities for web slings and 

round slings. 

215

216 

Information 

Glossary 

R S 

RAL: 

Designation for standardised colour 

shades (e.g. RAL 3020 traffic signal red, 

RAL 6018 yellow/green). 

Ratchet: 

A tensioning element serving to generate 

initial stressing force in lashing straps. 

Manual force is applied by means of a 

lever and transmitted to the winding shaft 

or the strap by a gearwheel. 

Rated strength: 

The rated strength is the tensile strength 

of a material determined by way of calculation. 

Replacement state of wear: 

The replacement state of wear describes 

the technical condition of a sing such 

that operational safety in accordance with 

applicable strength (DIN, EN) and regulations 

(BGR 500) can no longer be guaranteed. 

Rope wire: 

Rope wires for slings conforming to 

EN 13414 must have a minimum strength 

of 1770 N/mm and are twisted to form 

strands. 

Round strand rope: 

Round strand ropes are helical structures 

consiting of several wire strands about a 

fibre or steel core. 

Safe working load: 

The safe working load specifies the rated 

load bearing capacity of a load suspension 

device or sling, taking into consideration 

the attachment method and the corresponding 

inclination angle. 

Safe working load label: 

A safe working load label must be affixed 

to every item of standardised sling equipment. 

It serve the purpose of quickly 

identifying and recognising the maximum 

permissible safe working load. 

Sharp edge: 

An edge is deemed to be sharp for a sling 

when the edge radius of a load to be 

lifted is smaller than the rope diameter of 

a rope sling, the chain diameter of a 

chain sling or the thickness of a web sling. 

The sling must be equipped with edge 

protectors when lifting loads with sharp 

edges. 

Single-leg loading: 

Single-leg loading is the result of asymmetrically 

slung loads as each leg must 

take up the entire load. 

Sliding friction coefficient: 

See dynamic friction coefficient. 

Sling expert: 

A sling expert is a person who, based on 

his specialist training and experience, 

has sufficient knowledge of slings and is 

familiar with applicable standards, 

technical codes and regulations. 

Slings: 

Ropes, chains, webs and endless slings 

by means of which the load is directly 

connected to the lifting equipment (crane 

or hoist). 

Spiral rope: 

Structure consisting of two or more layers 

of shaped or round wires laid spirally over 

a core wire (see also strand). 

Spiral round strand rope: 

Is a multi-layer round strand rope, in some 

cases with changing directions of lay in 

the individual layers. Used e.g. as a lifting 

rope on cranes. 

Splice: 

Splices complying with DIN 3089 are 

frictionally engaged rope terminal 

connections made by resplicing the loose 

rope strands into the composite rope 

system. 

Spread angle: 

The spread angle occurs between the 

load-bearing legs of sling tackle and must 

not be used as the basis for calculating 

the permissible safe working load ratings 

as there is no corresponding reference 

element. 

Steel core: 

(CW) core of a steel wire rope – consiting 

of steel wires (strand). 

STF: 

See initial stressing force (normed). 

Stranded rope: 

Structure consisting of several strands laid 

helically in one or more layers over a core.

Strands: 

Cable strands consist of multi-layer, 

helically twisted rope wires. 

Suspended load: 

Raised goods to be transported are referred 

to as suspended loads in compliance 

with the Accident Prevention Regulation 

BGR 500 (VBG 9a). No persons are permitted 

under suspended loads. 

Suspension elements: 

Devices permanently connected to the 

hoist (e.g. hoist chain, crane rope, 

bottom hook block, crane hook...) for 

taking up load suspension equipment, 

slings or loads. 

T 

Tare range: 

Electronic and mechanical measuring 

systems can be reset to zero in the tare 

range in order to be able to indicate 

an absolute change in the measured value 

based on this point. 

Test: 

Accident Prevention Regulation BGR 500 

(VBG 9a §39 ff.) stipulates that the operator 

of load suspension equipment and slings 

is obliged to conduct regular tests and 

inspections and that the operator is solely 

responsible for conducting these tests and 

inspections at least once a year. 

Test force: 

Test forces refer to the forces specified 

by the relevant standard and must be 

absorbed by a test object without problems 

during production testing. 


Test logbook: 

In acc. with BGV D6, the operator of material 

handling equipment must ensure that 

the results of the prescribed annual tests 

are recorded in a test logbook. 

Thimbles: 

Sheet metal or solid steel thimbles are 

integrated into wire rope terminal links 

to protect the cable structure at the point 

of load application. 

TÜV: 

Technical Inspectorate (German institute). 

U 

Use for intended purpose: 

The use for which the equipment (machine) 

is suitable according to the manufacturer’s 

specifications (operating instructions), or 

which is regarded as usual on the basis of 

its design, construction and function. 

Use value: 

The use value indicates the calculated 

safety factor of a load suspension device 

or sling (e.g. specified safe working load 

1000 kg, actual safe working laod without 

reserve 4000 kg with use value 4). 

V 

from R--V 

Vacuum: 

Acc. to DIN 28400, vacuum is the state of 

a gas whose pressure is lower than the 

state of the atmosphere. For a vacuum of 

760 to 100 torr, the measure of underpressure 

achieved is usually given in %. 

Example: vacuum lifter with 250 kg S.W.L. 

at 60 % vacuum, i.e. when underpressure 

of 60 % is reached, the equipment has an 

S.W.L. of 250 kg. 

VbF classes: 

VbF – Decree on Combustible Liquids. 

The VbF class of the medium to be stored 

can be found on the manufacturer’s safety 

information card. A means non-watersoluble, 

B water-soluble 

VbF A I (flashpoint < 21°C) 

VbF A II (flashpoint 21–55°C) 

VbF A III (flashpoint > 55°C) 

VbF B (flashpoint < 21°C, water-soluble). 

VBG: 

Verband der Berufsgenossenschaften. 

Association of Employers’ Liability 

Insurers. Designation for an individual 

accident prevention regulation (e.g. 

VBG 14 lifting platforms). 

Visual inspection: 

Essentially, visual inspections are function 

and condition checks with regard to the 

operational safety of slings conducted in 

accordance with standardised procedures 

BGR 500 (VBG 9a). 

217

218 

Information 

Glossary W 

W 

Water hazard classes: 

A substance is a water hazard if it causes 

lasting detrimental changes to the ground 

water. The water hazard class is to 

be found on the manufacturer’s safety 

information card: 

WGK0 (generally not water-hazardous) 

WGK1 (slightly water-hazardous) 

WGK2 (water-hazardous) 

WGK3 (extremely water-hazardous). 

Wear zone: 

Sections of a sling subject to high mechanical 

material abriasion due to friction, 

bending or load dynamics are defined as 

wear zones. 

See also “sharp edge”. 

Wheel arresters: 

Safety feature on trolleys/crabs, preventing 

it and thus the load from falling if a wheel 

should break. 

Wedge socket fitting: 

Wedge socket fittings are positively locked 

wire rope links made up of the rope socket 

and rope wedge. The wedge effect of 

the rope wedge initiates selflocking power 

flow between the rope and rope socket. 

The unloaded end of the wire rope is fitted 

with a grip to serve as a slip-through 

safeguard. 

Wire rope clamp: 

Wire rope clamps conforming to DIN 3093 

are positively locked rope terminal links 

made up of aluminium press sleeves subject 

to stringent safety directives. 

Wire rope diameter: 

The wire rope diameter is the basis for 

determining the safe working load 

and calculating the breaking load of a 

wire rope. 

Wire ropes: 

Wire ropes consist of strands and a 

core and are manufactured in compliance 

with standardised design principles. 

WLL: 

Work load limit, maximum safe working 

load of load suspension equipment and/or 

slings.

Alphabetical index 

Accessories direct from the hoist and crane manufacturer 

A 

Abrasion protection sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . 184 

Adjustable beam clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 

Alignment beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 

Aluminium 

_ derrick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

_ gantry cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28--29 

_ gantry cranes with power supply . . . . . 29 

_ gantry cranes with trolley . . . . . . . . . . . 28 

_ lever hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 

_ light crane system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20--21 

_ manual chain hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 

_ manual chain hoists with trolley . . . . . . 56 

Anti-cut slings with loops . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 

Anti-twist guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 

Application examples for 

chain slings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149--150 

Articulated trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 

ATEX (explanations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 

Automatic brake cable winches . . . . 68--69 

B 

Balancers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77--78 

Balancers (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 

Barrel grab with tipping device . . . . . . . 101 

Barrel rim clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 

Battery-operated vacuum lifters. . . . . . . 114 

Beam clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 

Big Bag spreader beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 

Big Bag transport device (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . 96 

Big Bag transport device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

Block grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 

BluePower chain slings . . . . . . . . . . 147--148 

Bolt sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Bottom hook blocks (rotating) . . . . . . . . . . 34 

Buffer endstop, clamp-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 

Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 

C 

C hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136--137 

Cable drum end clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 

Cable pullers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 

Cable reeling drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 

Cable winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68--69, 71--72 

Cabling for aluminium gantry cranes . . . . 29 

from A--C 

Calibrated load cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . 196--198 

Cast metal lever hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 

Centre-hole cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Chain hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42--45 

Chain hoists (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 

Chain hoists with radio control . . . . . . . . 32 

Chain sling accessories . . 151--157, 161--167 

Chain slings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 145--150, 159--160 

Chain spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 

CLAD Boy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 

Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104--107 

Clevis hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 

Coil turning hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

Concrete pipe clamp lifting tackle . . . . . 103 

Conductor lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 

Connex coupling links. . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 162 

Control pendants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Coupling 

_ bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 

_ hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151--153, 161--162 

_ hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 162 

_ links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 162 

_ load hooks with safety latch . . . . 154,163 

_ master link sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152--153 

_ rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 

_ shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 

Crane catwalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 

Crane components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

Crane components (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Crane control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

Crane electrics (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Crane endcarriages (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Crane equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 

Crane eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 

Crane kit for manual crane (Ex) . . . . . . . . 94 

Crane technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--34 

Crane technology (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 

Crane travel drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

Crane weighers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194--198 

Cranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--26 

Crate grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 

Crate grab with tipping device . . . . . . . . 101 

Cross beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 

Cutaway picture of SH wire rope hoist . . 37 

Cutaway picture of ST chain hoist . . . . . . 43 

219

220 

Information 

Alphabetical index 

D 

Derrick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Digital load cell (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 

Digital load cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197--198 

Double end board trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Double girder overhead travelling crane . . 8 

Double girder suspension crane. . . . . 21, 23 

Double scissor-type lifting table . . . . . . . 204 

Drum grippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 210 

Drum jack roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 

Dump containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

E 

Edge protector brackets (magnetic) . . . 184 

Edge protector plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 

Electric chain hoists . . . . . . . . . 32, 42--45, 85 

Electric cable winch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 

Electric scissor-type pallet lifting truck 204 

Electro-hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Electronic load cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 

Endcarriages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

Endless chain slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 

Endless web slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 

Enquiry form for 

_ jib cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 

_ light cranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 

_ load suspension equipment . . . . . 134--135 

_ suction lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 

Explosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79--96 

Eye bolts -- grade 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 

Eye bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 

Eye hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 163 

F 

Festoon cable systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 

Fix-de-Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Fixed hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 

Flat cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Flat scissor lifting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Flex drum tipper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 

Flexi-Leg chain slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 

Forestry chain slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Fork-lift truck attachments. . . . . . . . 207--210 

Four-leg master links. . . . . . . . . . . . . 151--152 

Frequency inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 

Fundamentals of explosion protection . . 80 

G 

Galvanised chain slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Galvanised manual hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 

Galvanised manual hoists with trolleys . . 55 

Galvanised pallet lifting truck . . . . . . . . . 204 

Galvanised push/reel-type 

trolleys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60--62 

Galvanised shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 

Gantry cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 

General terms of delivery . . . . . . . . 218--219 

Girder profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212--217 

Grabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100--109 

Grabs (off-standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108--109 

Grip-O-Matic hydraulic puller . . . . . . . . 206 

Grommets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 

H 

H spreader beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 

Handling equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 

Heavy duty pipeline web sling mats . . . 179 

High-tensile shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . 190--191 

Hinged bottom skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

Hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35--78 

Hook dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154--157, 162--164, 166 

Hydraulic cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulic hand pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulic jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulic lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulic machine lifter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulic mini-lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulic pump sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulic spreaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulic toe jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205--206 

I 

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220--223 

Industrial cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 

Information for use 

_ explosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80--81 

_ of hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47--48 

_ of lifting clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98--99 

_ of lifting magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 

_ of load suspension equipment . . 120--121 

_ of sling accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 

_ of slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142--144 

Information plates for cranes . . . . . . . . . . 33 

Innovative crane technology. . . . . . . . . . . . 5 

INOX manual winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 

INOX push trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 

INOX reel-type trolleys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 

Inside grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 

Insulated anti-twist guard . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 

J 

Jib cranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--19 

K 

KT2000 small crane technology. . . . . . 22--24 

KTlight small crane technology. . . . . . 20--21 

L 

Lever hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64--66 

Lifting clamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104--107 

Lifting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Lifting trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Liftomat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 

Light crane systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20--24 

Lightweight cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 

Load display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 

Load handling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 

Load hook selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Load hook table (DIN 15400) . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Load hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

Load indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 

Load suspension equipment . . . . . . . 97--140 

Load suspension equipment (Ex). . . . 95, 119 

Load tables. . . . . . . . . . 149, 160, 172, 177, 183

Load tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 165 

Loading forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138--139 

Loading tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 

M 

Machinery shifting skates . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Magnetic carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 

Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117--118 

Maintenance-free suspension . . . . . . . . . 34 

Manual chain hoist with trolley. . . 49, 54--59 

Manual chain hoist with trolley (Ex) . . 91--93 

Manual chain hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50--59 

Manual chain hoists (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . 89--90 

Manual chain hoists (off-standard) . . . . . 49 

Manual chain hoists 

(short headroom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 58--59 

Manual crane (Ex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 

Manual pallet lifting truck . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Manual stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Manual winches . . . . . . . . . . . . 68--69, 71--72 

Manual winches (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 

Master link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 

Material handling and conveying 

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199--204 

Monorail conveyors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 22 

Mounting kit for chain hoists (radio) . . . . 32 

MOVEit handling device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 

Multi-purpose grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 

N 

Non-marring grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

O 

Off-standard chain hoists . . . . . . . . . . 44--45 

Off-standard cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 

Off-standard jib cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 

Off-standard master links . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 

Off-standard small crane 

technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20--21 

Off-standard solutions . 29, 41--45, 49, 69--70, 

75, 108--109, 113, 118, 129--133, 137, 139,198 


Off-standard solutions, 

small crane technology . . . . . . . . . . 20--21 

Off-standard solutions, 

workshop cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202--203 

Off-standard spreader beams . 127, 129--133 

Off-standard wire rope hoists . . . . . . . . . . 41 

Order form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 

Outsize master link sets . . . . . . . . . . 151--153 

Oval master link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 

Overhead travelling and 

suspension cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 

P 

Pallet lifting truck with weighing scales 204 

Pallet lifting trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Pancake gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 

Parallel coupling hook . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 164 

Parallel hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 164 

Permanent lifting magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 

Pillar jib cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--14 

Pipe clamp tackle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

Pipe hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

Placement frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

Plate clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 

Plate lifting clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 

Plate pliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104, 106 

Pneumatic chain hoist (Ex) . . . . . . 86--88, 96 

Pneumatic winches (Ex). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 

Pocket transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 

Power supply system for aluminium 

gantry crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

Power supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 

Profile steel grab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 

Profile specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 

Protector plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 

PU abrasion protection sleeves . . . 174--178 

Puller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Push trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 62--63 

PVC abrasion protection sleeves . . 174--178 

R 

Radio control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 32 

Radio receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 32 

Radio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 32 

Radio transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 32 

Ratchet hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64--66 

Reel-type trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61--63 

Ring nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 

Rolling clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 

Rope slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168--171 

Rotary trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Rotating bottom hook block. . . . . . . . . . . . 34 

Rotating cross beam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 

Rotating suction lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 

Round slings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174--176 

Round steel chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 161 

Round stock grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 

Runway endstops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 

S 

from D--S 

S.W.L. diagrams (magnets) . . . . . . . . . . . 118 

S.W.L. tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Safety latch sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 

Safety load hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 163 

Scissor-type lifting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Scissor-type lifting trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Screw clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 

Screw-on sling attachment collar 

(GK10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 

Self-acting vacuum lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 

SH/AS wire rope hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . 36--41 

SH/AS wire rope hoists (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . 84 

Shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190--191 

Sheaves with supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . 73--74 

Short stroke cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Shortening clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 

SHW 8 winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

SIKA hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

SIKA spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

Single girder suspension crane . . . 6, 21, 23 

Single girder overhead travelling crane . . 7 

Single-acting cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 

Sling accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185--192 

221

222 

Information 

Sling equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141--184 

Sling hook with clevis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

Sling rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 

Slings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174--176 

Small counterweight cranes . . . . . . . . . . 201 

Small crane technology . . . . . . . . . . . . 20--24 

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 165 

Spreader beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121--135 

Spreader beam for box pallets . . . . . . . . 126 

Spreader beam with chain suspension . 126 

Spreader beam with ramshorn hooks . . 125 

Spreader beams (off-standard) . . . . 130--133 

Spreader beams with long/short hooks . 127 

Spreader beams with weld-on hooks . . 130 

Spring balancers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76--77 

Spur drive manual winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 

Stacking dump container . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

Stainless steel pallet lifting truck . . . . . . 204 

Stainless steel shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 

Steel winches (DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 

Storage container system . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

Supply programme of fork-lift truck 

attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

Supply programme of hydraulics . . . . . . 206 

Supply programme of material handling 

and conveying equipment. . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Suspension cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21--23 

Swarf container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

Swivel load hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 163 

Swivel load hooks with eye . . . . . . . . . . . 163 

T 

Table trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Telescopic loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 

Telescopic spreader beam . . . . . . . . . . . 129 

Terms of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218--219 

Test data tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Thin wall magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 

Transition tackle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 

Transport rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187--188 

Travel drives (Ex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Trigger sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 

Trolley for aluminium gantry crane . . . . . 28 

Turnover spreader beams . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

TwinDriveConcept TDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 

V 

VacuBoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110--113 

Vacuum lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110--115 

Vario chain hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

W 

Walking crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--17 

Wall-mounted jib cranes . . . . . . . . . . . 15--16 

Web sling coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 164 

Web sling hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 

Web slings with loops . . . . . . . . 178--179,182 

Web slings with terminal fittings . . . . . . 181 

Webbing slings with sling hooks . . . . . . 173 

Weighing and measuring . . . . . . . . . 193--198 

Weld-on hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 

Weld-on sling attachment collar (GK10) 188 

Wheel block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 

Wide-jaw coupling hooks . . . . . . . . 155, 164 

Wide-jaw hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,164, 166 

WinnerPro chain sling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 

Wire rope blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 

Wire rope guide sheaves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 

Wire rope hoist/winch tables . . . . . . . . . . 40 

Wire rope reducing tackle. . . . . . . . . . . . 171 

Working platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 

Workshop cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200--203 

Workshop trolleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 

Worm drive manual winch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 

from S--W


Fax order form 

Copy _ fill in _ fax 

Customer No. 

Company 

Name 




Telephone 

Place/date 

Fax 

Signature 

The STAHLplus delivery service: Fast and inexpensive. We deliver virtually all items from stock within 48 hours. 

We hereby order the following in accordance with the terms of delivery and payment given on the cover page. 

Item No. Length/m Qty. Item 

Price per item Total price 

STAHLplus catalogue 

All prices net not including VAT. For orders totalling less than 50.– EUR, we reserve the right to add a handling charge of 25.– EUR. 

Internet 



free of charge


Fax order form 

Copy _ fill in _ fax 

Customer No. 

Company 

Name 




Telephone 

Place/date 

Fax 

Signature 

The STAHLplus delivery service: Fast and inexpensive. We deliver virtually all items from stock within 48 hours. 

We hereby order the following in accordance with the terms of delivery and payment given on the cover page. 

Item No. Length/m Qty. Item 

Price per item Total price 

STAHLplus catalogue 

All prices net not including VAT. For orders totalling less than 50.– EUR, we reserve the right to add a handling charge of 25.– EUR. 

Internet 



free of charge

General Terms of Sale and Delivery 

1.0. Scope of application, offers, confirmation of orders, scope 

of deliveries 

1.1. Any offer, sale or delivery effected by Supplier shall be 

governed by these General Terms and Conditions of Sale and 

Delivery. Any diverging terms and conditions of Purchaser 

shall be deemed accepted only and only insofar as expressly 

accepted and confirmed in writing by Supplier. 

1.2. Contents and scope of any offer shall be construed solely 

in accordance with the model description. In particular, 

any documentation, illustration, drawing, specifications of 

weights or measurements and of similar data forming part of 

an offer shall constitute mere guidelines, except where 

expressly declared binding. Supplier retains all titles, copyright, 

other industrial property rights and know-how regarding 

any documentation provided in conjunction with an offer; such 

documentation shall not be made available to third parties, 

unless Supplier consents, and may only be used by offeree as 

permitted. 

1.3. The scope of a delivery shall be construed in accordance 

with Supplier’s written confirmation of the order, in the 

absence of such with Supplier’s order. This provision shall not 

affect Supplier’s right to carry out technical modifications to 

the delivery item, provided that its technical function is not 

impaired as a result. 

1.4. In case of an ongoing business relationship, the current 

version of Supplier’s General Terms and Conditions forms part 

of the agreement even if express reference has not been 

made any more. 

2.0. Delivery period, delay, impossibility 

2.1. Compliance with delivery periods is conditional upon 

Purchaser’s performance of its own contractual obligations. 

Delivery periods commence upon dispatch of the confirmation 

of the order, but not before all of the details concerning 

the execution of the order have been clarified, not before 

Purchaser has supplied all documents, permissions and 

releases, not before Supplier has received any down payments 

agreed upon and not before any other requirements 

agreed upon by the parties in the individual contract for the 

seamless execution of the order have been complied with. 

Otherwise the time for delivery shall be reasonably extended 

except where Supplier is responsible for the delay. 

2.2. The agreed delivery dates shall be considered as fulfilled, 

should the goods for delivery have left Supplier’s plant prior to 

its expiry or should Purchaser have been given notice that the 

goods are ready for shipment. Correct and punctual supply 

to Supplier by its own auxiliary Suppliers is reserved. Should 

delivery be delayed due to the occurrence of unforeseeable 

and/or unusual circumstances on the part of Supplier, which 

could not be avoided with due care, the delivery deadlines 

shall be extended accordingly. The aforesaid applies irrespective 

of whether such delay occurs in the plant of Supplier 

or in one of its auxiliary supplier’s plants. Such delaying 

circumstances are, for example, sanctions and intervention by 

governmental authorities, delayed delivery of parts from 

auxiliary Suppliers, difficulties in power supply or other kinds 

of operational disturbances. These provisions shall apply 

mutatis mutandis in cases of strike and/or lockout. Should 

such delay continue for more than two months, Purchaser 

shall be entitled to cancel the contract with respect to the part 

of the contract not yet performed. Any claims for damages 

on the grounds of an extension of the delivery period or due to 

a release and discharge from the obligation to deliver shall be 

determined solely in accordance with Section 5. Supplier may 

only invoke the aforementioned circumstances, if Supplier has 

notified Purchaser thereof without delay. 

2.3. Should Supplier be responsible for delayed delivery 

and should Purchaser suffer a loss as a result, Purchaser 

may claim a compensation for each full week of delay in the 

amount of 0.5%, not exceeding, however, a total of 5% of 

the value of that part of the total delivery which, due to the 

delay, could not be used on time or not in conformity with 

the contract. Any claims for compensation apart from this 

shall be governed solely by Section 5. The right to terminate 

the contract after ineffective expiry of a reasonable period 

of grace granted by Purchaser, or where the law does 

not require such period of grace, shall remain unaffected. 

2.4. Should the entire delivery or performance of the contract 

become finally impossible for Supplier prior to the passing 

of risk, Purchaser may rescind the contract. Should delivery 

only become partly impossible and should Purchaser have 

a justified interest in refusing a partial delivery, or should 

Supplier become incapable of the contractual delivery, such 

circumstances shall be deemed equivalent to an impossibility. 

Should Purchaser claim compensation for loss arising from 

such impossibility, liability shall be governed by Section 5. 

2.5. If shipment is delayed for reasons which are the responsibility 

of Purchaser, Purchaser will be charged for any cost 

and expenses arising from storage beginning 10 days after 

notification of readiness for dispatch; in case of storage at 

Supplier’s plant a minimum amount of 0,5% of the invoice 

value shall be charged for each month. Following the ineffective 

expiry of a reasonable deadline set by Supplier, Supplier 

is, however, entitled to otherwise dispose of the goods 

for delivery and to supply Purchaser within an appropriately 

extended delivery period with the ordered goods or with 

goods of the same generic product group. 

3.0. Dispatch, passing of risk, acceptance of delivery 

3.1. Delivery shall be effected ex works (EXW Incoterms 2000) 

unless otherwise expressly agreed. If Supplier has to dispatch 

the goods, Supplier is entitled to choose the means and route 

of transportation. Supplier is a SLVS/no-client. This means 

that in such a case the risk of transport always is insured by 

Supplier. 

3.2. Risk shall – even in cases of partial delivery – pass to 

Purchaser no later than upon dispatch or collection of the 

goods, even if Supplier agreed on additional services such as 

payment of the costs of transport, delivery or assembly. 

3.3. Should dispatch be delayed due to circumstances, 

Supplier is not responsible for, risk shall pass to Purchaser 

10 days after notification of readiness for dispatch; Supplier, 

however, has to take out the insurance cover as requested 

by Purchaser at Purchaser’s expense. 

3.4. Without prejudice to any claims to warranty, Purchaser 

has to accept the goods delivered, even if they evidence 

insignificant defects. 

3.5. Supplier may carry out partial deliveries. 

3.6. Unless otherwise agreed, packaging is arranged for 

by Supplier and not requested from Purchaser. Therefore, 

it is transport packaging. Place of performance for the return 

of transport packaging is at Supplier’s registered office. 

Purchaser shall bear the costs of the returning of the transport 

packaging as well as the costs of collection incurred by 

Supplier. Furthermore, Purchaser has to keep the transport 

packaging clean and to return it during Supplier’s regular 

business hours without it being intermingled with other components. 

4.0. Warranty 

4.1. For defects of goods delivered or of services rendered, 

including the absence of warranted qualities, Supplier shall be 

liable as follows: 

Only reasonably substantial impairments of the work and 

deliveries regarding their quality or contractual use shall 

constitute a defect. All parts that prove to be defective, due to 

a cause set prior to the passing of risk – in particular on 

account of defective engineering, poor construction material 

or faulty workmanship –, within twelve months of the passing 

of risk shall be, at Supplier’s discretion, either repaired 

or replaced free of charge. Notice of the discovery of such 

defects after delivery shall be given without delay and in 

writing. Any parts replaced become the property of Supplier. 

Minor impairments within the meaning hereof do not form an 

obstacle for performance of the contract. 

4.2. In particular, the warranty does not cover damages arising 

from the following: 

incorrect or negligent use, faulty assembly and/or faulty installation 

respectively putting into operation, either by Purchaser or 

by third parties, natural wear, defective or negligent handling, 

inappropriate production equipment and facilities or inappropriate 

operating supply items, faulty construction work, inappropriate 

foundation soil, chemical, electrochemical or electrical 

influences, as long as Supplier is not liable for such reason. 

4.3. Purchaser shall, after consulting with Supplier, provide 

Supplier with the necessary time and opportunity to carry out 

any repair work or replacement delivery, that seems necessary 

to Supplier in its own discretion. Otherwise, Supplier shall 

be released from liability. Should industrial safety or the prevention 

of disproportionately high damages require to urgently 

remedy such defect, Purchaser shall advise so immediately 

indicating the relevant circumstances, whereupon Supplier

shall grant Purchaser permission in good time according to 

the circumstances, but at any event after three working 

days, to remedy the defect itself or have it remedied by 

third parties and to demand from Supplier compensation 

for the necessary costs. If Supplier should be in default in 

remedying the defect, Purchaser shall have the same 

right irrespective of such separate permission. In case of 

unjustified denial of such permission, Supplier undertakes 

to compensate for any damage ensuing as a result. 

4.4. In so far as the notification of defects proves justified, 

Supplier shall pay the following direct costs arising in 

conjunction with the repair work or replacement delivery: 

The costs of the replacement part including its shipping 

and the adequate costs of removal and installation, furthermore 

the costs of providing mechanics and auxiliary 

personnel, as may be necessary. All other costs are to be 

borne by Purchaser. In particular, the latter includes any 

costs arising from the fact that the goods delivered have 

been moved to a different location. 

4.5. This warranty shall not cover defects resulting from a 

faulty modification or repair work effected by Purchaser or 

third parties without the prior written consent of Supplier. 

4.6. Should the repair work proof unsuccessful despite 

a reasonable period of grace having been granted, 

or should Supplier refuse to remedy the defect although 

Purchaser is entitled to such and/or should a replacement 

not be delivered, Purchaser may reduce the purchase 

price or cancel the contract using its own discretion. 

4.7. The warranty period concerning repair work carried 

out and replacements delivered is six months and begins 

after the finishing of the repair work or the delivery of 

the replacement. The warranty period shall, however, end 

no later than upon expiry of the initial warranty period 

applicable in relation to the original goods delivered. 

5.0. Liability 

5.1. Purchaser shall not be entitled to assert any claims for 

damages or for compensation of expenses (hereinafter: 

claims for damages) arising from a breach of contractual 

duties or tort, save as otherwise provided herein below. 

5.2. Purchaser shall be entitled to claims for damages on 

the grounds of mandatory liability (in particular under 

the German Product Liability Act), in cases of death, injury 

or detriment of health, in cases of wilful damage or gross 

negligence, in conjunction with breaches of cardinal obligations 

also in cases of ordinary negligence, in cases of 

malicious non-disclosure of defects and on the grounds of 

a guarantee. In such cases Supplier is liable for its legal 

representatives and executive employees and in conjunction 

with breaches of cardinal obligations also for other 

persons employed in performing its obligation. Apart from 

liability on grounds of intent/gross negligence or cases of 

death, injury or detriment of health, liability in conjunction 

with breaches of cardinal obligations is limited to the foreseeable 

damage typical of the type of contract. 

5.3. Supplier has taken out sufficient worldwide insurance 

for third party product liability to cover for personal injury 

and property damage. Claims for compensation of property 

damage based on product liability are therefore limited 

to the amounts owned by the insurance. As far as legally 

possible, Supplier assigns these insurance claims to 

Purchaser. 

5.4. These provisions shall not affect the distribution of the 

burden of proof in legal action. 

5.5. Purchaser’s claims for damages shall elapse after 

12 months. Liability under the Product Liability Act or on 

grounds of intent or fraudulent misrepresentation shall be 

time-barred in accordance with the statutory period of 

limitation. 

6.0. Prices and payment 

6.1. Unless otherwise agreed, prices shall be ex works 

(EXW Incoterms 2000) plus the statutory value added tax 

payable at the time. Additional costs such as packaging, 

freight, insurance, customs duties and the installation 

costs shall be charged separately. 

6.2. Unless otherwise agreed, payments shall be made 

in cash within ten days of the date of invoice without any 

deductions, free at Supplier’s payment office. 

6.3. Should Purchaser fall into arrears with payments, 

interest at a rate 8 percentage points above the respective 

base interest rate shall be charged. Interest on arrears 

is to be charged at a higher rate should Supplier prove 

further legal entitlement for higher interest rates. 

6.4. Purchaser may not exercise a right of retention and/or 

set off counterclaims, unless such counterclaim is undisputed 

or has been adjudicated by non-appealable 

judgement. Furthermore, the said shall not apply to claims 

based on defective delivery. If the delivery is divisible, the 

latter exception only relates to the part of the partial 

performance affected. In the case of a minor impairment, 

this exception does not apply, however, to that part of the 

payment exceeding the amount representing the loss of 

value of the goods delivered. 

6.5. Supplier may suspend performance of delivery and 

service, should after formation of the contract it transpires 

that Purchaser will not fulfil a considerable part of its 

obligation due to its considerably impaired creditworthiness. 

Should Supplier suspend the performance of 

the contract, Supplier shall communicate so to Purchaser 

immediately and continue the performance, should 

Purchaser provide adequate security for the performance 

of its own obligations. 

6.6. With regard to business transacted overseas, Supplier 

may also suspend performance of delivery, should foreign 

exchange turbulences result in currency disadvantages for 

Supplier of more than 10%. Such currency disadvantage 

shall only have occurred after formation of the contract 

and before the first contractual delivery. 

7.0. Retention of Ownership 

7.1. Ownership of the goods delivered, that is title to and 

right of disposal of, does not pass onto Purchaser until 

each and every claim of Supplier against Purchaser on the 

basis of the delivery contract have been duly fulfilled. 

Supplier also claims the extended reservation of title under 

German law. Should the parties have agreed on the drafts 

and cheques payment procedure and should Supplier be 

liable to third parties, in particular to a bank, due to such 

bill of exchange, Purchaser’s obligations shall not be considered 

fulfilled until such liability of Supplier out of said 

bill of exchange has finally ceased. 

7.2. Pending final and due fulfilment of each and every 

claim of Supplier against Purchaser on the basis of the 

delivery contract, Purchaser shall not give the goods 

delivered in pledge or as security, resell these goods or 

assign rights to third parties that relate to these goods. 

7.3. Should Purchaser resell the goods delivered in violation 

of this agreement or with the consent of Supplier, Purchaser 

now already assigns to Supplier each and every claim 

arising from such sale. Supplier accepts this assignment. 

Supplier may collect such claim against such third party 

directly. Supplier may also invoke its extended reservation 

of title to the goods delivered. In such a case, Purchaser 

shall inform Supplier of the claim assigned to Supplier and 

of the debtor, provide all information necessary for the 

collection of such claim, deliver to Supplier all of the 

respective documentation and inform the debtor of such 

assignment. 

7.4. Any mixture, combination or adjunction of the goods 

delivered with other goods, shall always only be effected 

in the name of Supplier. Should the goods delivered 

be connected in such way with goods not belonging 

to Purchaser, Supplier shall be entitled to joint ownership 

in the new product in the ratio of the value of the goods 

delivered and the other goods’ value. Should, due 

to such processing, mixing or combination, Supplier’s 

ownership cease and Purchaser’s new product be the 

principal product, it shall be deemed agreed that 

Purchaser assigns to Supplier proportionate joint ownership 

in this product. Should the goods delivered be 

permanently connected with land and/or buildings, 

Purchaser also assigns to Supplier the claim(s) arising 

from or in connection with such connection as a further 

security for Supplier’s claims against Purchaser. 

7.5. If the behaviour of Purchaser is in breach of contract, 

in particular in case of not inconsiderably delayed 

payment, pledging or assigning the goods delivered as 

security or other assignment to third parties, Supplier 

has the right to recover the goods delivered; Purchaser 

is obliged to surrender possession. The recovery by 

Supplier of the goods delivered does not constitute rescission 

of the contract. 

7.6. In cases of seizure or other interventions by third parties, 

Purchaser shall inform Supplier in writing immediately 

in order to enable Supplier to file legal action in accordance 

with Section 771 of the German Code of Civil 

Procedure (ZPO). Should such third party be unable to 

reimburse Supplier including its in and out of court costs 

of such action pursuant to Section 771 ZPO, Purchaser is 

liable to Supplier for the respective costs and expenses. 

7.7. Supplier undertakes to release, at the request of 

Purchaser, its securities insofar as their value in terms of 

collection of such exceeds the secured claim by more 

than 10%. 

7.8. During the duration of the retention of title, Supplier 

may insure the goods delivered at Purchaser’s expense 

against theft, breakage, fire, water and other damage, 

unless Purchaser proves to have taken out sufficient 

insurance cover to such effect itself. At Supplier’s request, 

Purchaser shall provide such prove by producing the 

actual insurance policy to Supplier. 

7.9. In case of a delivery to a foreign Purchaser, the foreign 

Purchaser shall secure Supplier’s ownership of the goods 

to be delivered in accordance with the statutory provisions 

of the delivery country and shall also assist where and 

to what extend may be necessary to secure Supplier’s 

retention of ownership. In addition, such foreign purchaser 

shall also comply with German Law. 

8.0. Place of performance, applicable law, venue, data 

protection, confidentiality, written form and partial 

invalidity 

8.1. Place of performance both regarding payment and 

delivery is at the registered office of Supplier. 

8.2. These General Terms of Sale and Delivery and the 

entire legal relationships between Supplier and Purchaser 

shall be governed solely by German law with the application 

of the UN Convention on the International Sale of 

Goods (CISG) excluded. 

8.3. In the event of any dispute arising from the contractual 

relationships between the parties, venue shall be Stuttgart. 

However, Supplier may choose to bring an action against 

Purchaser at the statutory venue of Purchaser. 

8.4. The following provisions shall apply to the contractual 

relationships in the following priority: 

a) Individual contractual Agreements entered into 

between the parties. 

b) These General Terms of Sale and Delivery. 

c) Statutory law, in particular the German Commercial 

Code (HGB) and the German Civil Code (BGB). 

8.5. Purchaser is advised, in accordance with Section 33 

of the German Federal Data Protection Act (BDSG), that 

Supplier saves the contractual data in machine-readable 

form and processes these data as required according 

to the purpose of the contractual relationship. All data 

shall be kept in confidence. Both Purchaser and Supplier 

shall keep in confidence any information, of which it 

becomes aware of in the course of carrying out this 

contract, that is not known to the public and emanates 

from the other party’s sphere. 

8.6. Additional agreements, provisos, amendments and 

supplements require written confirmation by Supplier in 

order to be effective. 

8.7. Should any of the provisions of these General Terms 

of Sale and Delivery or any other provision in connection 

with other stipulations be invalid or become invalid, the 

validity of all other provisions or stipulations shall remain 

unaffected.

Tradition and innovation _ Over 130 years of tradition, over 130 years of practical approach, com- 

petence and experience, always fl exible and market-orientated. Profi t from our expertise as one of 

the world’s leading manufacturers of crane components for overhead transport. STAHL CraneSystems 

offers you the most comprehensive product spectrum of wire rope and chain hoists covering all 

load ranges and heights of lift. Drive technology to meet the highest requirements and technically 

mature electronics complete our portfolio. We look forward to answering your questions. STAHL 

CraneSystems GmbH, 74653 Künzelsau, Germany, +49 7940 128-0 or marketing@stahlcranes.com 

Lifting technology | Drive technology | Control technology

STAHL CraneSystems GmbH 

Daimlerstr. 6, 74653 Künzelsau 

Internet 



F-KA-10-EN-02.09-vis ID-Nr. 990 037 0

All around the load hook

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?